53d  Congress,  ) 
igion.      ) 


SENATE. 


2d 


(Repot 
V  No.  22 


IN  THE  SENATE  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


REPORT 


FROM  THE 


NOV   3 


COMMITTEE  ON  FOREIGN  RELATION 


AND 


FPE^DIX 


^AlION  10 


THE  iiAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 


UC-NRLF 


SB    3DM    T7M 


February  26,  1894.— Submitted  by  Mr.  Morgan. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT    PRINTING    OFFICE. 

1894. 


■  11 


\>.\ 


53d  Congress,  >                      SENATE.  (  Report 

2d  Session,      f pfo.  227, 

Of  THE  SENATE  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

I 


February  26,  1894.— Ordered  to  be  printed. 


Mr.  Morgan  .submitted  the  following  report  irom  the  Committee  on 

Foreign  Relations : 

The  following  resolution  of  the  Senate  defines  the  limits  of  the 
authority  of  the  committee  in  the  investigation  and  report  it  is  required 
to  make: 

"Resolved,  That  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations  shall  inquire  and 
report  whether  any,  and,  if  so,  what  irregularities  have  occurred  in  the 
diplomatic  or  other  intercourse  between  the  United  States  and  Hawaii 
in  relation  to  the  recent  political  revolution  in  Hawaii,  and  to  this  end 
said  committee  is  authorized  to  send  for  persons  and  papers  and  to 
administer  oaths  to  witnesses." 

The  witnesses  were  examined  under  oath  when  it  was  possible  to 
secure  their  appearance  before  the  committee,  though  in  some  instances 
affidavits  were  taken  in  HaAvaii  and  other  places,  and  papers  of  a  scien- 
tific and  historic  character  will  be  appended  to  this  report  and  pre- 
sented to  the  Senate  for  its  consideration. 

The  committee  did  not  call  the  Secretary  of  State,  or  any  person  con- 
nected with  the  Hawaiian  Legation,  to  give  testimony.  It  was  not 
thought  to  be  proper  to  question  the  diplomatic  authorities  of  either 
government  on  matters  that  are,  or  have  been,  the  subject  of  negotia- 
tion between  them,  and  no  power  exists  to  authorize  the  examination 
of  the  minister  of  a  foreign  government  in  any  proceeding  without  his 
consent. 

The  resolutions  include  an  inquiry  only  into  the  intercourse  between 
the  two  governments,  and  regard  the  conduct  of  the  officers  of  the 
United  States  as  a  matter  for  domestic  consideration  in  which  Hawaii 
is  not  concerned,  unless  it  be  that  their  conduct  had  some  unjust  and 
improper  influence  upon  the  action  of  the  people  or  Government  of  that 
country  in  relation  to  the  revolution. 

The  future  policy  of  the  two  governments  as  to  annexation,  or  in 
respect  of  any  other  matter,  is  excluded  by  the  resolutions  from  the 
consideration  of  the  committee,  and  such  matters  are  alluded  to  only  as 
being  incidental  to  the  investigation  which  was  ordered  by  the  Senate. 

The  inquiry  as  to  irregularities  that  may  have  occurred  in  our  diplo- 
matic or  other  intercourse  with  Hawaii  must  relate,  first,  to  the  con- 
duct of  the  Government  as  shown  in  its  official  acts  and  correspondence,* 
and,  second,  the  conduct  of  its  civil  and  military  officers  while  they 
were  engaged  in  the  discharge  of  their  public  duties  and  functions. 

As  a  Government  dealing  with  Hawaii  and  with  any  form  of  govern- 
ment in  that  country,  whether  de  facto  ov  de  jure^  the  United  States 
can  have  no  separation  or  break  in  its  line  of  policy  corresponding  to 

M32820 


Uubl 

II  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

any  change  in  the  incumbency  of  the  office  of  President.  It  is  in 
all  respects  as  much  the  same  Government  "in  every  right  and  lespon- 
sibility  as  if  it  had  been  under  the  same  President  during  the  entire 
period  covered  by  the  recent  revolution  in  Hawaii  and  the  succeeding 
events. 

This  view  of  the  situation  will  enable  us  to  examine  more  dispas- 
sionately the  conduct  of  our  Government,  and  to  ascertain  whether  it 
lia$-*bfcen  sucluttiat^itjcan  be  safely  drawn  into  precedent  in  any  future 
quesf ions- that?  m'ay-arise  in  our  intercourse  with  this  or  other  Ameri- 
cuxi/ge^enimentS;.    •"■"**• 

-. ;  Jftie^glifc  off  &Je/VPreki  dent  of  the  United  States  to  change  his  opin- 
ions and  conduct  respecting  a  course  of  diplomatic  correspondence 
with  a  foreign  government  is  no  more  to  be  questioned  than  his  right 
to  institute  such  correspondence;  and  it  can  hot  be  assumed  that  the 
opinions  of  one  President,  differing  from  those  of  his  predecessor,  has 
any  other  effect  upon  the  attitude  of  the  Government  than  would  fol- 
lowT  a  change  of  opinion  in  the  mind  of  the  same  person  if  there  had 
been  no  change  in  the  incumbency  of  the  office.  This  is  a  view  of 
the  situation  in  which  all  foreign  nations  may  have  an  interest,  under 
the  usages  of  independent  powers  and  the  international  laws.  But 
the  question  now  under  consideration  is  regarded  as  being  peculiar  to 
what  we  may  term  the  American  system.  It  may  be  true  that  Hawaii 
can  not  be  considered  as  a  separate  and  independent  power  in  respect 
of  all  its  relations  with  the  United  States,  yet  the  acts  of  successive 
Presidents  of  the  United  States  which  affect  it  must  be  regarded  as  the 
acts  of  one  President.  But  there  are  many  good  reasons  and  a  long 
and  consistent  course  of  dealing  between  the  United  States  and  Hawaii 
that  materially  affect,  if  they  do  not  entirely  change,  the  actual  rela- 
tions between  Hawaii  and  the  United  States  and  make  them  excep- 
tional. When  we  claim  the  right  to  interfere  in  the  domestic  affairs  of 
Hawaii,  as  we  would  not  interfere  with  those  of  a  European  nation,  we 
must  also  admit  her  right  to  whatever  advantages  there  may  be  in  the 
closeness  and  interdependence  of  our  relations,  and  her  right  to  ques- 
tion us  as  to  any  conflicts  of  policy  between  Mr.  Harrison  and.  Mr. 
Cleveland  that  may  be  justly  said  to  work  a  disadvantage  to  the  inter- 
ests of  Hawaii,  if  there  are  any. 

And  another  principle  which  does  not  apply  in  our  dealings  with 
European  powers  comes  into  application  in  this  case  to  influence  the 
rights  of  Hawaii  in  her  intercourse  with  the  United  States. 

Hawaii  is  an  American  state,  and  is  embraced  in  the  American  com- 
mercial and  military  system.  This  fact  has  been  frequently  and  firmly 
stated  by  our  Government,  and  is  the  ground  on  which  is  rested  that 
peculiar  and  far-reaching  declaration  so  often  and  so  earnestly  made, 
that  the  United  States  will  not  admit  the  right  of  any  foreign  govern- 
ment to  acquire  any  interest  or  control  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands  that  is 
in  any  way  prejudicial  or  even  threatening  toward  the  interests  of  the 
United  States  or  her  peopler  This  is  at  least  a  moral  suzerainty  over 
Hawaii.  In  this  attitude  of  the  two  Governments,  Hawaii  must  be 
entitled  to  demand  of  the  United  States  an  indulgent  consideration, 
if  not  an  active  sympathy,  when  she  is  endeavoring  to  accomplish  what 
every  other  American  state  has  achieved — the  release  of  her  people 
from  the  odious  antirepublican  regime  which  denies  to  the  people  the 
right  to  govern  themselves,  and  subordinates  them  to  the  supposed 
divine  right  of  a  monarch,  whose  title  to  such  divinity  originated  in 
the  most  slavish  conditions  of  pagan  barbarity. 

The  point  at  whicli  it  is  alleged  that  there  was  a  questionable  inter- 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  Ill 

ference  by  our  minister  and  our  ^Tavy  with  the  affairs  of  Hawaii  was 
the  landing  of  troops  from  the  ship  Boston  in  Honolulu  on  the  16th 
day  of  January,  1893,  at  5  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  That  ship,  on 
which  the  minister  was  a  passenger,  had  been  off  on  a  practice  cruise 
at  llilo,  a  distance  of  nearly  100  miles,  since  the  4th  day  of  January. 
On  her  return  to  the  harbor  a  condition  of  affairs  existed  in  Honolulu 
which  led  naturally  to  the  apprehension  that  violence  or  civil  com- 
motion would  ensue,  in  which  the  peace  and  security  of  American 
citizens  residing  in  that  city  would  be  put  in  peril,  as  had  been  done 
on  three  or  more  separate  occasions  previously  when  changes  occurred 
or  were  about  to  occur  in  the  government  of  Hawaii.  Whatever  we 
may  conclude  were  the  real  causes  of  the  situation  then  present  in 
Honolulu,  the  fact  is  that  there  was  a  complete  paralysis  of  executive 
government  in  Hawaii.  The  action  of  the  Queen  in  an  effort  to  over- 
turn the  constitution  of  1887,  to  which  she  had  sworn  obedience  and 
support,  had  been  accepted  and  treated  by  a  large  and  powerful  body 
of  the  people  as  a  violation  of  her  constitutional  obligations,  revolu- 
tionary in  its  character  and  purposes  and  that  it  amounted  to  an  act 
of  abdication  on  her  part,  so  far  as  her  powers  and  the  rights  of  the 
people  under  the  constitution  of  1887  were  concerned.  This  state  of 
opinion  and  this  condition  of  the  executive  head  of  the  Hawaiian 
Government  neutralized  its  power  to  protect  American  citizens  and 
other  foreigners  in  their  treaty  rights,  and  also  their  rights  under  the 
laws  of  Hawaii.  There  was  not  in  Honolulu  at  that  time  any  efficient 
executive  power  through  which  the  rights  of  American  citizens 
residing  there  could  be  protected  in  accordance  with  the  local  laws. 
It  is  evident  that  the  Queen's  Government  at  that  time  had  no  power 
to  prevent  the  landing  of  troops  from  any  quarter,  no  power  to  protect 
itself  against  invasion,  no  power  to  conduct  civil  government,  so  far 
as  the  executive  wras  concerned,  if  the  effort  to  exert  such  power  was 
antagonized  by  any  opposing  body  of  people  in  considerable  numbers. 
Indeed,  no  effort  seems  to  have  been  made  to  exert  the  civil  authority 
except  through  the  presence  of  a  small  and  inefficient  body  of  police- 
men. The  authority  of  the  Queen  was  not  respected  by  the  people *  it 
was  opposed,  and  no  force  appeared  to  be  used  for  the  purpose  of 
overcoming  the  opposition.  It  yielded  to  a  silent  but  ominous  opposi- 
tion. Without  reference  to  the  question  whether,  in  strict  law,  the 
action  of -the  Queen  in  her  effort  to  overturn  the  constitution  of  1887, 
and  to  substitute  one  by  a  proclamation  which  she  had  prepared,  was  a 
revolution  in  government,  or  an  effort  at  revolution,  or  amounted  to 
an  actual  abdication,  the  result  was  that  an  interregnum  existed. 

If  we  give  full  effect  to  the  contention  that  this  interregnum  occurred 
because  of  the  apprehensions  of  the  Queen  that  force  would  be  used  by 
the  United  States  to  compel  her  abdication,  those  apprehensions  could 
not  have  occurred  before  the  landing  of  the  troops  from  the  Boston,  or, 
if  they  existed,  they  were  idle,  unfounded,  and  unjust  toward  the 
United  States.  It  was  her  conduct,  opposed  by  her  people,  or  a  large 
portion  of  them,  that  paralyzed  the  executive  authority  and  left  the 
citizens  of  the  United  States  in  Honolulu  without  the  protection  of  any 
law,  uidess  it  was  such  as  should  be  extended  to  them  by  the  American 
minister,  in  conjunction  with  the  arms  of  the  United  States  then  on 
board*  the  Boston. 

It  will  appear  hereafter  in  this  report  that  there  is  wTell-settled  author- 
ity for  the  position  that  at  the  moment  when  the  Queen  made  public 
her  decision  to  absolve  herself  from  her  oath  to  support  the  constitution 
of  1887  her  abdication  was  complete,  if  the  people  chose  so  to  regard 
it.     That  constitution  and  the  Queen's  oath  to  support  it  was  the  only 


IV  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

foundation  for  her  regal  authority  and,  when  she  announced  that  her 
oath  was  annulled  in_its  effect  upon  her  own  conscience,  she  could  no 
longer  rightfully  hold  office  under  that  constitution.  In  such  matters 
the  word  of  the  Queen,  once  sedately  uttered,  fixes  a  condition  that  is 
irrevocable,  uidess  by  the  consent  of  those  whose  condition  or  rights 
would  be  injuriously  affected  by  its  subsequent  withdrawal ;  as  in  the 
case  of  a  voluntary  abdication  in  favor  of  a  named  successor;  or  of  a 
pardon  granted  to  a  person  accused  or  convicted  of  crime;  or  the  sig- 
nature to  a  legislative  act,  or  declaration  of  war.  The  official  act  of 
the  chief  executive  of  a  nation  is  uniformly  regarded  as  creating  a  con- 
dition or  status  which  can  not  be  altered  or  revoked  at  pleasure.  In- 
deed, in  every  case,  the  word  of  the  king  that  works  a  change  in  exist- 
ing conditions  is  the  final  act  of  the  king.  In  the  crime  of  treason  and 
the  misprision  of  treason,  the  word  that  is  spoken  by  the  culprit,  though 
quickly  repented  of  or  recalled,  has  completed  the  crime  and  placed 
the  offender  beyond  the  reach  of  all  mercy  except  that  of  the  sovereign 
power.  In  this  instance  the  sovereign  power  to  pardon  or  condone  the 
Queen's  offense  resided  in  the  people,  and  they  have  so  far  decided  and 
have  adhered  to  the  decision  that  her  abdication  was  complete.  The 
recantation  was  two  days  later  than  the  completed  crime  and  was  tem- 
porary and  conditional,  and,  in  the  meantime,  popular  sovereignty  had 
risen  to  the  assertion  of  its  rights,  an  indignant  resentment  had  aroused 
the  people,  and  a  large  body  of  citizens  claiming  to  represent  them  had 
inaugurated  a  government  of  the  people  and  for  the  people.  Whether 
the  people  opposing  the  Queen  were  strengthened  in  their  purpose  to 
accept  and  act  upon  this  abandonment  by  the  Queen  of  her  obligations 
to  keep  her  oath  to  support  and  obey  the  constitution  by  the  presence 
of  the  troops  of  the  United  States,  or  whether  the  Queen  was  dismayed 
by  their  presence  and  was  deterred  from  supporting  her  criminal  act 
by  the  employment  other  household  soldiery,  did  not  alter  the  fact  that 
she  had  openly  renounced  the  constitution  of  1887  before  the  troops 
were  landed  or  any  preparation  was  made  or  any  order  was  issued  to 
land  them,  and  the  people  were  preparing  to  substitute  the  monarchy, 
which  was  still  existing  in  the  constitution,  by  a  ruler  of  their  own 
choice  before  any  troops  left  the  Boston. 

Whether  the  people  would  permit  the  restoration  of  the  Queen,  or 
whether  they  would  constitute  a  new  executive  head  of  the  Government 
of  Hawaii,  was  a  matter  then  undetermined,  and  as  to  that  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  had  but  one  concern,  and  that  was  that  the 
interregnum  should  be  ended,  the  executive  head  of  the  Government 
should  be  supplied,  and  the  laws  of  Hawaii  and  the  treaty  rights  of 
American  citizens  should  have  full  effect,  peacefully,  in  the  protection 
of  their  rights  and  interests.  When  the  Queen  found  that  her  Govern- 
ment was  opposed  by  a  strong  b6dy  of  the  people  she  did  not  attempt 
to  reassemble  the  Legislature,  but  left  the  public  safety  in  charge  of  a 
committee  of  thirteen  men,  organized  by  those  who  were  endeavoring 
to  preserve  the  peace  and  to  restore  the  Government  .to  its  full  con- 
stitutional powers  by  choosing  an  executive  head.  This  condition  of 
things' continued  from  Saturday  until  the  succeeding  Tuesday,  during 
all  of  which  time  the  citizens  of  the  United  States  residing  in  Honolulu 
had  no  protection  of  law,  except  such  as  was  guarantied  to  them  by  the 
presence  of  the  Boston  in  the  bay  of  Honolulu,  or  the  moral  influence 
of  the  American  legation  and  consulate. 

When  the  Kamehameha  dynasty  ended,  the  monarchy  in  Hawaii  was 
doomed  to  a  necessary  dissolution.     The  five  kings  of  that  family, 
assisted  by  their  premiers,  who  were  Kanaka  women,  and  by  such  mis 
sionaries  as  Judd,  Bingham,  Chamberlain,  Coan,  Goodrich,  and  Dainou 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  V 

maintained  the  progress  on  civilization  and  prosperity,  but  when  Ivala  - 
kaua  was  elected  king,  the  most  surprising  and  disgraceful  corruptions 
infected  the  Government.  Without  detailing  in  this  report  the  con- 
stant decline  from  bad  to  worse,  which  the  evidence  discloses,  without 
contradiction  or  explanation,  when  Liliuokalani  was  enthroned  the 
monarchy  was  a  mere  shell  and  was  in  condition  to  crumble  on  the 
slightest  touch  of  firm  opposition.  Under  her  brief  rule,  it  was  kept 
alive  by  the  care  and  forbearing  tolerance  of  the  conservative  white- 
people,  who  owned  $50,000,000  of  the  property  in  Hawaii,  until  they 
saw  that  the  Queen  and  her  party  had  determined  to  grasp  absolute 
power  and  destroy  the  constitution  and  the  rights  of  the  white  people. 
When  they  were  compelled  to  act  in  self  defense  the  monarchy  disap- 
peared. It  required  nothing  but  the  determined  action  of  what  was 
called  the  missionary  party  to  prostrate  the  monarchy,  and  that  action 
had  been  taken  before  the  troops  from  the  Boston  landed. 

There  was  then  no  executive  head  of  the  Government  of  Hawaii ;  it 
had  perished. 

In  landing  the  troops  from  the  Boston  there  was  no  demonstration  ot 
actual  hostilities,  and  their  conduct  was  as  quiet  and  as  respectful  as 
it  had  been  on  many  previous  occasions  when  they  were  landed  for  the 
purpose  of  drill  and  practice.  In  passing  the  palace  on  their  way  to  the 
point  at  which  they  were  halted,  the  Queen  appeared  upon  the  balcony 
and  the  troops  respectfully  saluted  her  by  presenting  arms  and  dipping 
the  Hag,  and  made  no  demonstration  of  any  hostile  intent.  Her  atti- 
tude at  that  time  was  that  of  helplessness,  because  she  found  no  active 
or  courageous  support  in  her  isolated  position,  which  was  self-imposed 
and  was  regretted  by  few  of  her  former  subjects.  In  this  condition  of 
Hawaii  the  laws  for  the  protection  of  life  and  property  were,  in  fact, 
susx>ended  so  far  as  the  executive  power  was  concerned,  and  the  citi- 
zens of  the  United  States  in  Honolulu  and  all  the  islands,  and  their 
property  rights,  were  virtually  outlawed.  The  citizens  of  Honolulu 
were  not  held  amenable  to  the  civil  authorities,  but  were  treated  by* 
the  Queen,  as  well  as  by  the  people,  as  if  the  country  was  in  a  state  of 
war.  A  policeman  was  shot  down  on  the  streets  by  a  person  who  was 
conducting  a  wagon  loaded  with  arms  to  the  place  of  rendezvous  where 
the  people  had  assembled,  and  no  action  was  taken  for  the  purpose  of 
arresting  or  putting  on  trial  the  man  who  did  the  shooting. 

In  a  country  where  there  is  no  power  of  the  law  to  protect  the 
citizens  of  the  United  States  there  can  be  no  law  of  nations  nor  any 
rule  of  comity  that  can  rightfully  prevent  our  flag  from  giving  shelter 
to  them  under  the  protection  of  our  arms,  and  this  without  reference 
to  any  distress  it  may  give  to  the  Queen  who  generated  the  confusion, 
or  any  advantage  it  might  give  to  the  people  who  are  disputing  her 
right  to  resume  or  to  hold  her  regal  powers.  In  every  country  where 
there  is  no  effective  chief  executive  authority,  whether  it  is  a  newly- 
discovered  island  fthere  only  savage  government  prevails,  or  one 
where  the  government  is  paralyzed  by  internal  feuds,  it  is  the  right, 
claimed  and  exercised  by  all  civilized  nations,  to  enter  such  a  country 
with  sovereign  authority  to  assert  and  protect  the  rights  of  its  citizens 
and  their  property,  and  to  remain  there  without  the  invitation  of  any- 
body until  civil  government  shall  have  been  established  that  is  adequate, 
in  a  satisfactory  sense,  for  their  protection. 

The  committee  agree  that  such  was  the  condition  of  the  Hawaiian 
Government  at  the  time  that  the  troops  were  landed  in  Honolulu  from 
the  steam  warship  Boston',  that  there  was  then  an  interregnum  in 
Hawaii  as  respects  the  executive  office;  that  there  was  no  executive 
power  to  enforce  the  laws  of  Hawaii,  and  that  it  was  the  right  of  the 


VI .  ,      HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

United  States  to  land  troops  upon  those  islands  at  any  place  where  it 
was  necessary  in  the  opinion  of  onr  minister  to  protect  our  citizens. 

In  what  occurred  in  lauding  the  troops  at  Honolulu  there  may  have 
been  an  invasion,  but  it  was  not  an  act  of  war,  nor  did  it  create  that 
condition  of  the  public  law  in  Hawaii. 

In  the  period  of  reconstruction,  as  it  is  called,  which  followed  the  civil 
war  of  1861-'G5  in  the  United  States,  a  very  similar  condition  existed, 
or  was  assumed  to  exist,  which  caused  Congress  to  provide  for  vacat- 
ing the  gubernatorial  offices  in  several  of  the  Southern  States  and 
filling  them  by  appointments  of  the  President. 

In  these  States  strong  military  bodies  were  stationed  and  general 
officers  of  the  Army  took  command  and  enforced  the  laws  found  on  their 
statute  books  and  also  the  laws  of  the  United  States.  All  the  civil 
officers  in  those  sovereign  States  were  required  to  obey  the  commands 
of  those  Army  officers,  and  they  did  so,  often  under  protest,  but  with 
entire  submission  to  the  military  power  and  authority  of  the  President, 
exerted  through  the  instrumentality  of  the  Army.  That  was  not  war. 
Yet  it  was  j:he  presence  of  military  force,  employed  actively  in  the 
enforcement  of  the  civil  laws,  and  in  full  supremacy  over  the  civil 
authority. 

The  only  reason  that  could  justify  this  invasion  of  sovereign  states 
by  the  armies  of  the  United  States  was  the  declaration  by  Congress 
that  the  executive  governments  in  those  states  were  not  in  the  lawful 
possession  of  the  incumbents  5  that  there  was  an  interregnum  in  those 
states  as  to  the  office  of  governor. 

If  the  Queen,  or  the  people,  or  both  acting  in  conjunction,  had  opposed 
the  landing  of  the  troops  from  the  Boston  with  armed  resistance,  their 
invasion  would  have  been  an  act  of  war.  But  wheu  their  landing  was 
not  opposed  by  any  objection,  protest,  or  resistance  the  state  of  war 
did  not  supervene,  and  there  was  no  irregularity  or  want  of  authority 
to  place  the  troops  on  shore. 

In  this  view^  of  the  facts  there  is  no  necessity  for  inquiring  whether 
Minister  Stevens  or  Capt.  Wiltse,  in  arranging  for  the  landing  of  the 
troops,  had  any  purpose  either  to  aid  the  popular  movement  against 
the  Queen  that  was  then  taking  a  definite  and  decisive  shape,  or  to 
promote  the  annexation  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  to  the  United  States. 
But  justice  to  these  gentlemen  requires  that  we  should  say  that  the 
troops  from  the  Boston  were  not  sent  into  Honolulu  for  any  other  pur- 
pose than  that  set  forth  fully  and  fairly  in  the  following  order  from 
Capt.  Wiltse  to  the  officer  in  command  of  the  detachment: 

U.  S.  S.  Boston  (Second  Bate), 
Honolulu,  Hawaiian  Islands,  January  1G,  1893. 
Lieut.  Commander  W.  T.  Swinburne,  U.  S.  Navy, 

Executive  Officer,  U.  8.  8.  Boston: 
Sir  :  You  will  take  command  of  the  battalion  and  land  in  Honolulu 
for  the  purpose  of  protecting  our  legation,  consulate,  and  the  lives  and 
property  of  American  citizens,  and  to  assist  in  preserving  public  order. 
Great  prudence  must  be  exercised  by  both  officers  and  men,  and  no 
action  taken  that  is  not  fully  Warranted  by  the  condition  of  affairs  and 
by  the  conduct  of  those  who  may  be  inimical  to  the  treaty  rights  of 
American  citizens. 

You  will  inform  me  at  the  earliest  practicable  moment  of  any  change 
in  the  situation.  v 

Yery  respectfully, 

G.  C.  Wiltse, 
Captain,  TJ.  8.  Navy,  Commanding  U.  8.  8.  Boston. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  VII 

As  between  the  United  States  and  Hawaii,  as  separate  and  inde- 
pendent governments,  that  order  defines  the  full  liability  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  in  respect  of  landing  the  troops  at 
Honolulu.  As  between  the  Government  of  the  United  States  and  its 
officers,  the  question  may  arise  whether  that  order  was  issued  in  good 
faith  and  tor  the  purposes  declared  upon  its  face,  or  whether  it  was  a 
pretext  used  for  the  purpose  of  assisting  in  the  overthrow  of  the 
Queen's  Government  and  the  ultimate  annexation  of  Hawaii  to  the 
I'nited  States. 

In  reference  to  this  last  suggestion,  the  committee,  upon  the  evidence 
as  it  appears  in  their  report  (which  they  believe  is  a  full,  fair,  and 
impartial  statement  of  the  facts  attending  and  precedent  to  the  landing 
of  the  troops),  agree  that  the  purposes  of  Capt.  Wiltse  and  of  Minister 
Stevens  were  only  those  which  were  legitimate,  viz,  the  preservation 
of  law  and  order  to  the  extent  of  preventing  a  disturbance  of  the 
public  peace  which  might,  in  the  absence  of  the  troops,  injuriously 
affect  the  rights  of  the  American  citizens  resident  in  Honolulu. 

The  troops  from  the  Boston  having  rightfully  and  lawfully  entered 
Honolulu,  and  having  carried  with  them  the  protection  of  the  laws  of  the 
United  States  for  their  citizens  who  otherwise  were  left  without  the  pro- 
tection of  law,  it  was  the  right  of  the  United  States  that  they  should 
remain  there  until  a  competent  chief  executive  of  Hawaii  should  have 
been  installed  in  authority  to  take  upon  himself  the  civil  power  and  to 
execute  the  necessary  authority  to  provide  for  the  protection  of  all  the 
rights  of  citizens  of  the  United  States  then  in  Honolulu,  whether  such 
rights  were  secured  by  treaty  or  were  due  to  them  under  the  laws  of 
Hawaii.  It  was  the  further  right  of  the  officers  representing  the  United 
States  in  Hawaii  to  remain  there  with  the  troops  until  all  the  conditions 
were  present  to  give  full  assurance  of  security  to  the  rights  of  all  the 
citizens  of  the  United  States  then  in  Honolulu. 

Before  the  landing  of  the  troops  a  committee  of  safety  had  been* 
organized  that  sent  a  request  to  the  commander  of  the  Boston  that 
troops  should  be  landed  for  the  purpose  of  preserving  the  public  peace. 
To  this  request  no  response  was  made,  and  later  in  the  day  the  com- 
mander of  the  Boston  was  informed  that  the  committee  of  safety  had 
withdrawn  its  request  and  then  desired  that  no  troops  should  be  landed. 
But,  disregarding  all  the  action  of  the  committee  of  safety  and  acting 
only  upon  his  sense  of  duty  to  the  people  of  the  United  States  who  were 
in  Honolulu,  Capt.  Wiltse  came  to  che  conclusion  that  the  troops  should 
be  landed,  and  he  put  them  in  a  state  of  preparation  for  that  purpose 
by  lowering  the  boats,  filling  the  cartridge  belts  of  the  meu,  and  sup- 
plying them  with  proper  accouterments  for  a  stay  on  shore.  After  these 
preparations  had  been  completed  Minister  Stevens  went  on  board  the 
ship  (on  Monday),  and  had  an  interview  with.  Capt.  Wiltse.  The  evi- 
dence shows  that  this  interview  related  alone  to  the  question  of  the  pre- 
servation of  law  and  order  in  Hawaii  and  the  protection  of  Americans 
in  their  treaty  rights.  It  seems  that  neither  Minister  Stevens  nor  Capt. 
Wiltse  then  fully  comprehended  the  fact  that  the  United  States  had 
the  right,  of  its  own  authority,  to  send  the  troops  on  shore  for  the  pur- 
pose of  supplying  to  American  citizens  resident  there  the  protection  of 
law,  which  had  been  withdrawn  or  annulled,  because  of  the  fact  that 
there  Avas  then  an  interregnum  in  the  executive  department  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Hawaii.  The  rights  of  the  United  States  at  that  moment 
were  greater  than  they  were  supposed  to  be  by  Minister  Stevens  or 
Capt.  Wiltse,  and  they  were  not  the  result  of  treaty  rights  or  obliga- 
tions, but  of  that  unfailing  right  to  give  protection  to  citizens  of  the 


VIII  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

United  States  in  any  country  where  they  may  be  found  when  the 
local  authorities  have,  through  their  own  mismanagement  or  contriv- 
ance, rendered  nugatory  the  power  of  the  government  to  perform  its 
proper  duties  in  the  protection  of  their  lives,  property,  and  peace. 

A  further  statement  of  ascertained  facts  may  be  necessary  in  order 
to  bring  out  more  clearly  the  situation  in  Hawaii  on  Saturday,  the 
14th  day  of  January,  and  to  render  more  conspicuous  the  justification 
of  the  United  States  in  entering  with  its  troops  upon  the  soil  of  Hawaii 
for  the  protection  of  all  the  rights  of  its  citizens. 

On  Saturday  afternoon  and  Sunday  earnest  and  decisive  steps  were 
being  taken  by  the  people  of  Honolulu  who  were  most  prominent  in 
social  influence  and  in  commerce  and  the  professions  to  arm  the  people 
who  resented  the  disloyalty  of  the  Queen  to  the  constitution  and  to 
install  a  new  executive  head  of  the  Government.  This  movement  had 
resulted  in  the  organization  of  a  committee  of  safety  that  proposed  a 
programme  for  the  purpose  of  inaugurating  a  provisional  government. 
This  was  an  open,  public  movement,  which  the  Queen  took  no  steps  to 
suppress.  No  arrests  were  made,  and  even  the  apprehension  of  arrests 
seems  to  have  been  almost  entirely  absent  from  the  minds  of  the  people 
engaged  in  this  movement.  An  eifort  was  made  to  divert  those  people 
from  their  purpose,  on  Monday  morning,  by  the  Queen  and  her  minis- 
ters, who  caused  the  following  notice  to  be  posted  on  the  streets  of  Hon- 
olulu: 

"BY  AUTHORITY. 

"Her  Majesty's  ministers  desire  to  express  their  appreciation  for  the 
quiet  and  order  which  have  prevailed  in  this  community  since  the 
events  of  Saturday,  and  are  authorized  to  say  that  the  position  taken 
by  Her  Majesty  in  regard  to  the  promulgation  of  a  new  constitution 
was  under  the  stress  of  her  native  subjects. 

"  Authority  is  given  for  the  assurance  that  any  changes  desired  in 
the  fundamental  law  of  the  land  will  be  sought  only  by  the  methods 
provided  in  the  constitution  itself. 

"Her  Majesty's  ministers  request  all  citizens  to  accept  the  assurance 
of  Her  Majesty  in  the  same  spirit  in  which  it  is  given. " 

This  paper  purported  to  be  signed  by  the  Queen  and  her  ministers, 
Samuel  Parker,  minister  of  foreign  affairs ;  W.  H.  Com  well,  minister 
of  finance;  John  F.  Oolburn,  minster  of  the  interior;  and  A.  P.  Peter- 
son, attorney- general. 

The  Queen  did  not  sign  it  in  her  official  character  by  affixing  the 
letter  R  to  her  name,  and  the  tenor  of  the  paper  indicates  that  it  was, 
in  fact,  the  act  of  her  ministers,  to  which  she  had  not  given  her  royal 
assent  and  pledge.  This  paper  in  itself  contains  undeniable  evidence 
that  the  Queen  had  instituted  a  coup  Wetat  on  Saturday  by  the  pro- 
mulgation of  "a  new  constitution,"  as  far,  at  least,  as  she  could  bind 
herself  by  such  an  act,  and  that  she  offered  the  excuse  for  this  revolt 
against  the  existing  constitution  which  she  had  sworn  to  support,  that 
she  acted  "under  stress  of  her  native  subjects." 

Passing  by  the  fact  that  the  existence  of  this  "stress"  is  not  estab- 
lished by  any  satisfactory  evidence,  the  reference  to  it  in  this  procla- 
mation discloses  her  willing  connection  with  the  purpose  to  disfranchise 
her  foreign-born  subjects,  that  being  the  effect  of  the  provisions  of  the 
"new  constitution"  that  she  in  fact  promulgated,  so  far  as  she  could, 
but  hesitated  to  swear  to  for  the  want  of  sufficient  support  from  "  her 
native  subjects."    The  assurance  given  that  future  efforts  "to  change" 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  IX 

the  constitution  of  1887  should  be  conducted  only  in  the  method  therein 
prescribed,  was  no  assurance  that  her  foreign-born  subjects  should  be 
protected  in  their  vital  liberties.  To  the  reverse,  it  was  a  continuing 
threat  that  they  should  be  disfranchised  and  placed  at  the  mercy  of 
racial  aggression,  backed  by  the  power  of  the  crown.  The  declarations 
of  the  Queen  made  in  person  to  Minister  Willis,  on  three  occasions, 
and  at  long  intervals  of  time  after  the  lapse  of  nine  months  of  sedate 
reflection,  show  that  this  assurance,  given  in  fact  by  her  ministers,  was 
only  a  thin  disguise  of  her  real  purpose  to  drive  out  the  white  popula- 
tion and  confiscate  their  property,  and,  if  need  be,  to  destroy  their 
lives.  The  people  made  no  mistake  as  to  her  animosity  toward  them, 
and  proceeded  in  the  same  orderly  manner,  for  which  the  ministers 
gave  them  thanks  in  this  proclamation,  to  designate  an  executive 
head  of  the  Government  in  place  of  the  abdicated  Queen,  the  abdica- 
tion being  completed  and  confirmed  by  the  only  authentic  expression 
of  the  popular  will,  and  by  the  recognition  of  the  supreme  court  of 
Hawaii. 

Another  fact  of  importance  connected  with  the  situation  at  that  time 
is  that  a  committee  of  law  and  order,  consisting  of  supporters  of  the 
Queen,  had  on  Monday  morning  posted  in  public  places  in  Honolulu 
the  following  call  for  a  public  meeting  and  explanation  of  the  purposes 
of  the  Queen  in  abrogating  the  constitution  of  1887  and  in  substituting 
one  which  she  desired  and  attempted  to  promulgate  by  their  authority 
as  the  organic  law  of  the  land.  This  proclamation  was  printed  in  the 
Hawaiian  language,  and  a  translation  of  it  is  appended  to  this  report. 
It  was  printed  in  an  extra  edition  of  a  newspaper  called  the  Ka  Leo  O 
Ka  Lahui,  published  in  Honolulu  in  the  Hawaiian  language.  "The 
stress  of  her  native  subjects,"  which  is  mentioned  by  the  Queen  in  the 
proclamation  which  was  posted  in  English  on  the  morning  of  January 
16,  is  evidently  expressed  in  the  terms  of  this  announcement  and  call, 
and  it  shows  that  it  was  based  upon  racial  distinction  and  prejudice 
entirely,  and  indicates  the  feeling  of  resentment  and  controversy  which, 
if  carried  into  effect  as  the  Queen  proposed  to  carry  it  into  effect  under 
the  constitution  which  she  intended  to  proclaim,  would  have  resulted 
in  the  destruction  of  the  rights  of  property  and  lives  of  those  persons 
who  were  styled  "missionaries"  and  their  posterity,  from  whom  Hawaii 
had  derived  her  enlightened  civilization,  Christianity,  constitution, 
laws,  progress,  wealth  and  position  amongst  the  nations  of  the  earth. 
This  was  a  threat  of  dangerous  significance,  and  it  shows  the  spirit 
of  the  controversy  that  was  then  pervading  the  minds  of  the  people  of 
Honolulu,  and  illustrates  how  easy  it  was  to  foment  strife  that  would 
result  in  the  worst  of  evils,  in  a  community  thus  divided  and  thus 
excited.  The  abuse  of  the  missionaries  and  missionary  party  in  this 
call  shows  that  the  Queen  and  her  immediate  followers  had  concentrated 
their  efforts  upon  the  disfranchisement  of  all  white  people  in  Hawaii, 
and  the  return  of  the  Governments  that  condition  of  debasement  from 
which  these  very  people  and  their  fathers  had  relieved  it. 

The  second  paragraph  in  this  call  is  as  follows: 

"THE  YOICE   OF  THE   CHIEF. 

"On  the  afternoon  of  Saturday  last  the  voice  of  the  Sacred  Chief  of 
Hawaii,  Liliuokalani,  the  tabued  one,  speaking  as  follows: 

"  *0,  ye  people  who  love  the  Chief,  I  hereby  say  to  you,  I  am  now 
ready  to  proclaim  the  new  constitution  for  my  Kingdom,  thinking  that 
it  would  be  successful,  but  behold  obstacles  have  arisen !    Therefore 


X  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

J  say  unto  you,  loving  people,  go  with  good  hope  and  do  not  be  dis- 
turbed or  troubled  in  your  minds.  Because,  within  the  next  few  days 
now  coming,  I  will  proclaim  the  new  constitution. 

"'The  executive  officers  of  the  law  (the  cabinet)  knew  the  errors  in 
this  new  constitution,  but  they  said  nothing. 

" l  Therefore,  1  hope  that  the  thing  which  you,  my  people,  so  much 
want  will  be  accomplished ;  it  also  is  my  strong  desire.7" 

Here  is  a  direct  accusation  by  the  Queen  against  her  cabinet,  all  of 
whom,  with  one  exception,  were  white  men,  that  they  had  misled  her 
as  to  the  effect  of  the  constitution,  and  had  failed  to  point  out  errors  in 
it  which,  as  a  pretext,  led  to  its  rejection  by  them,  causing  them  to 
refuse  at- the  last  moment  to  join  with  her  in  its  promulgation.  This 
call  was,  in  fact,  a  new  promise  which  was  made  by  the  Queen,  with  the 
evident  consent  of  her  immediate  native  followers*,  that  within  the 
next  few  days  now  coming  she  would  proclaim  the  new  constitution, 
notwithstanding  her  failure  to  give  it  a  successful  promulgation  on  the 
preceding  Saturday.  The  intensity  of  the  Queen's  opposition  to  the 
missionaries  and  the  white  people  was  caused  by  her  intention  that  the 
Kingdom  should  return  to  its  former  absolute  character,  and  that  the 
best  results  of  civilization  in  Hawaii  should  be  obliterated. 

Civilization  and  constitutional  government  in  Hawaii  are  the  foster 
children  of  the  American  Christian  missionaries.  It  can  not  be  justly 
charged  to  the  men  and  women  who  inaugurated  this  era  of  humanity, 
light,  and  justice  in  those  islands  that  either  they  or  their  posterity 
or  their  followers,  whether  native  or  foreign,  have  faltered  in  their 
devotion  to  their  exalted  purposes.  They  have  not/pursued  any  devious 
course  in  their  conduct,  nor  have  they  done  any  wrong  or  harm  to  the 
Hawaiian  people  or  their  native  rulers.  They  have  not  betrayed  any 
trust  confided  to  them,  nor  have  they  encouraged  any  vice  or  pandered 
to  any  degrading  sentiment  or  practice  among  those  people.  Among  the 
native  Hawaiians,  where  they  found  paganism  in  the  most  abhorrent 
forms  of  idolatry,  debauchery,  disease,  ignorance  and  cruelty  75  years 
ago,  they  planted  and  established,  with  the  free  consent  and  eager 
encouragement  of  those  natives  and  without  the  shedding  of  blood,  the 
Christian  ordinance  of  marriage,  supplanting  polygamy;  a  reverence 
for  the  character  of  women  and  a  respect  for  their  rights;  the  Christian 
Sabbath  and  freedom  of  religious  faith  and  worship,  as  foundations  of 
society  and  of  the  state;  universal  education,  including  the  kings  and 
the  peasantry;  temperance  in  place  of  the  orgies  of  drunkenness  that 
were  all-pervading;  and  the  separate  holdings  of  lands  upon  which  the 
people  built  their  homes.  In  doing  these  benevolent  works  the  Amer- 
ican missionary  did  not  attempt  to  assume  the  powers  and  functions  of 
political  government.  As  education,  enlightenment,  and  the  evident 
benefits  of  civilization  revealed  to  those  in  authority  the  necessity  of 
wise  and  faithful  counsels  in  building  up  and  regulating  the  govern- 
ment to  meet  those  new  conditions,  the  kings  invited  some  of  the  best 
qualified  and  most  trusted  of  these  worthy  men  to  aid  them  in  devel- 
oping and  conducting  the  civil  government.  As  a  predicate  for  this 
work  they  freely  consented  to  and  even  suggested  the  giving  up  of 
some  of  their  absolute  powers  and  to  place  others  under  the  constraint 
of  constitutional  limitations.  They  created  an  advisory  council  and  a 
legislature  and  converted  Hawaii  from  an  absolute  despotism  into  a 
land  of  law.  The  cabinet  ministers  thus  chosen  from  the  missionary 
element  were  retained  in  office  during  very  long  periods,  thus  estab- 
lishing the  confidence  of  the  kings  and  the  people  in  their  integrity, 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XI 

wisdom,  and  loyalty  to  tie  Government.  Xo  charge  of  defection  or  dis- 
honesty was  ever  made  against  any  of  these  public  servants  during  the. 
reign  of  the  Karnehamehas,  nor  indeed  at  any  time.  They  acquired 
property  in  moderate  values  by  honest  means,  and  labored  to  exhibit 
to  the  people  the  advantages  of  industry,  frugality,  economy,  and 
thrift. 

The  progressive  elevation  of  the  country  and  of  the  people  from  the 
very  depravity  of  paganism  into  an  enlightened  and  educated  common- 
wealth and  the  growth  of  their  industries  and  wealth  will  be  seen  at  a 
glance  in  the  statements  of  the  most  important  events  and  in  the  tables 
showing  the  most  important  results  of  their  work  and  influence,  which 
are  set  forth  in  the  evidence  accompanying  this  report.  This  array  of 
undisputed  facts  shows  that,  with  Christianity  and  education  as  the 
basis,  there  has  come  over  Hawaii  the  most  rapid  and  successful  improve- 
ment in  political,  industrial,  and  commercial  conditions  that  has  marked 
the  course  of  any  people  in  Christendom. 

In  the  message  of  President  Tyler  to  Congress  he  says: 

"The  condition  of  those  islands  has  excited  a  good  deal  of  interest, 
which  is  increasing  by  every  successive  proof  that  their  inhabitants  are 
making  progress  in  civilization  and  becoming  more  and  more  competent 
to  maintain  regular  and  orderly  government.  They  lie  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  much  nearer  to  this  continent  than  the  other,  and  have  become 
an  important  place  for  the  refitment  and  provisioning  of  American  and 
European  vessels. 

Ui Owing  to  their  locality  and  to  the  course  of  the  winds  which  pre- 
vail in  this  quarter  of  the  world  the  Sandwich  Islands  are  the  stopping 
place  for  almost  all  vessels  passing  from  continent  to  continent  across 
th e  Paci  fi  c  Ocean .  Th ey  are  especially  resorted  to  by  the  great  numbers 
of  vessels  of  the  United  States  which  are  engaged  in  the  whale  fishery 
in  those  seas.  The  number  of  vessels  of  all  sorts  and  the  amount  of 
property  owned  by  citizens  of  the  United  States  which  are  found  in  those 
islands  in  the  course  of  a  year  are  stated  probably  with  sufficient 
accuracy  in  the  letter  of  the  agents. 

u  i  Just  emerging  from  a  state  of  barbarism,  the  Government  of  the 
islands  is  as  yet  feeble;  but  its  dispositions  appear  to  be  just  and 
pacific,  and  it  seems  anxious  to  improve  the  condition  of  its  people  by 
the  introduction  of  knowledge,  of  religious  and  moral  institutions, 
means  of  education,  and  the  arts  of  civilized  life.' n 

In  the  House  of  Representatives  this  subject  was  referred  to  the 
Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  and  Hon.  John  Q.  Adams,  in  conclud- 
ing his  report  upon  the  subject,  says: 

"It  is  a  subject  of  cheering  contemplation  to  the  friends  of  human 
improvement  and  virtue  that,  by  the  mild  and  gentle  influence  of 
Christian  charity,  dispensed  by  humble  missionaries  of  the  gospel, 
unarmed  with  secular  power,  within  the  last  quarter  of  a  century  the 
people  of  this  group  of  islands  have  been  converted  from  the  lowest 
debasement  of  idolatry  to  the  blessings  of  the  Christian  gospel;  united 
under  one  balanced  government;  rallied  to  the  fold  of  civilization  by  a 
written  language  and  constitution,  providing  security  for  the  rights  of 
persons,  property,  and  mind,  and  invested  with  all  the  elements  of  right 
and  power  which  can  entitle  them  to  be  acknowledged  by  their  brethren 
of  the  human  race  as  a  separate  and  independent  community.  To 
the  consummation  of  their  acknowledgment  the  people  of  the  North 


XII  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

American  Union  are  urged  by  an  interest  of  tlieir  own  deeper  than 
that  of  any  other  portion  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth — by  a  virtual 
right  of  conquest,  not  over  the  freedom  of  their  brother  man  by  the 
brutal  arm  of  physical  power,  but  over  the  mind  and  heart  by  the 
celestial  panoply  of  the  gospel  of  peace  and  love." 

It  can  not  be  other  than  a  proud  reflection  of  the  American  people 
that  the  free  institutions  of  the  United  States  gave  origin  and  impulsive 
zeal,  as  well  as  guidance,  to  the  good  men  who  laid  these  foundations 
of  civil  government  in  Hawaii  upon  written  constitutions  supported 
by  the  oaths  of  those  in  authority  and  loyally  sustained  by  those  of 
the  people  who  are  virtuous  and  intelligent.  Is  or  can  the  American 
people  condemn  the  firm  adhesion  of  those  whose  rights  are  guaranteed 
by  constitutional  law  in  Hawaii  to  the  demand  that  is  nowr  made  for 
the  maintenance  of  its  permanent  integrity.  If  nothing  but  a  decent 
respect  for  our  national  example  was  in  question,  if  there  was  no 
question  in  Hawaii  that  concerned  the  people  of  the  United  States 
except  that  of  a  relapse  of  that  Government  into  absolute  monarchy,  if 
there  was  no  degradation  of  society  involved  in  this  falling  away,  no 
destruction  of  property  and  liberty  in  contemplation,  there  would 
still  be  enough  in  the  conditions  now  presented  there  to  excite  the 
most  anxious  interest  of  our  people.  Citizens  of  the  United  States  with 
wisclom,  charity,  Christian  faith,  and  a  love  of  constitutional  govern- 
ment, have  patiently,  laboriously,  and  honestly  built  up  Hawaii  into  a 
civilized  power  under  a  written  constitution,  and  they  can  justly 
claim  the  sympathy  and  assistance  of  all  civilized  people  in  resisting 
its  destruction,  either  to  gratify  a  wanton  lust  of  absolute  power  on 
the  part  of  the  Queen,  or  the  abuse  of  its  authority  in  fostering  vice 
and  rewarding  crime.  The  facts  of  recent  history  present  broadly  ana 
distinctly  the  question  between  an  absolute  and  corrupt  monarchy  in 
Hawaii,  and  a  government  in  which  the  rights  and  liberties  guaranteed 
by  a  written  constitution  shall  be  respected  and  preserved.  The  facts 
do  not  show  that  the  people  who  built  up  this  constitutional  system 
and  have  based  upon  it  wholesome  laws  and  a  well  balanced  and  well 
guarded  plan  of  administration  have  had  any  desire  to  abrogate  the 
organic  laws,  corrupt  the  statute  laws,  or  to  dethrone  the  Queen.  In 
every  phase  of  their  dealings  with  these  questions  their  course  has 
been  conservative,  and  the  defense  of  their  lives,  liberty,  and  property, 
and  the  honest  administration  of  the  government  has  been  the  real 
motive  of  their  actions.  They  are  not,  therefore,  to  be  justly  classed 
as  conspirators  against  the  Government.  That  they  turn  their  thoughts 
toward  the  United  States  and  desire  annexation  to  this  country  could 
not  be  denied  without  imputing  to  them  the  loss  of  the  sentiment  of 
love  and  reverence  for  this  Eepublic  that  is  utterly  unknown  to  our 
people. 

On  Monday,  the  16th  of  January,  1893,  Hawaii  was  passing  through 
the  severe  ordeal  of  a  trial  which  was  conducted  by  the  people  who 
arrayed  themselves  on  the  side  of  the  Queen  and  those  who  were  organ- 
ized in  opposition  to  her  revolutionary  purposes.  The  Queen  seems  to 
have  abandoned  the  controversy  into  the  hands  of  the  people,  and  made 
no  effort  to  suppress,  the  meeting  of  the  citizens  opposed  to  her  revolu- 
tionary proceedings  by  calling  out  her  troops  to  disperse  the  meeting 
or  to  arrest  its  leaders.  Both  the  meetings  were  quiet  and  orderly,  but 
the  meeting  at  the  arsenal  was  intensely  earnest,  and  men  were  heard  to 
express  their  opinions  freely  and  without  interruption  at  both  meet- 
ings, and  they  came  to  their  resolutions  without  disturbance.    When 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS,  XIII 

these  meetings  dispersed,  the  Queen's  effort  to  reject  the  constitution 
of  1887  had  been  approved  by  the  one  meeting  heJd  on  the  palace 
grounds  and  composed  almost  entirely  of  native  Kanakas;  the  other 
meeting  had  resolved  to  establish  a  provisional  government,  and  formed 
a  committee  to  proceed  with  its  organization.  The  Queen,  though  thus 
strongly  indorsed  by  her  native-born  subjects,  as  she  calls  them,  did 
not  venture  any  arrests  of  the  alleged  revolutionists,  but,  evidently 
conscious  that  the  revolution  which  she  had  endeavored  to  set  on  foot 
had  failed  of  efficient  support,  she  did  not  use  her  troops  or  the  police 
or  any  other  power  in  the  direction  of  asserting  her  royal  authority. 
The  meeting  of  the  people  at  the  arsenal  was  followed  by  organization, 
the  arming  of  the  citizens,  the  strong  array  of  forces,  and  a  determined 
spirit  of  success  which  has  materialized  into  an  established  government 
that  has  continued  to  exist  for  more  than  a  year,  practically  without 
any  opposition  in  Hawaii,  and  with  the  recognition  of  many  great 
powers,  including  the  United  States.  These  events  show,  beyond  rea- 
sonable dispute,  the  acceptance  by  the  people  of  Hawaii  of  the  judg- 
ment and  determination  of  the  meeting  at  the  arsenal  that  the  Queen 
had  abdicated,  that  her  authority  had  departed,  that  she  and  her 
ministers  had  submitted  to  the  inevitable,  and  that  they  retained  no 
longer  any  substantial  ground  of  hope  or  expectation  that  the  Queen 
would  be  restored  to  her  former  office. 

The  question  whether  such  a  state  of  affairs  as  is  shown  by  the 
undisputed  iacts  in  this  case  constitute  an  abdication  and  created  an 
interregnum  was  passed  upon  in  England  with  more  care,  because  of 
the  serious  results  that  followed  the  decision,  than  seems  to  have  been^ 
bestowed  upon  a  like  controversy  in  any  other  country. 

The  people  of  Great  Britain  have  many  liberties  that  are  firmly 
established  in  the  traditions  of  that  country,  and  on  many  occasions 
they  have  asserted  their  rights,  as  the  basis  of  governmental  power,  with 
great  determination  and  success.  In  1688,  when  James  II  was  on  the 
throne,  his  severe  conduct,  exercised  through  the  judiciary  of  the  King- 
dom and  in  other  ways,  and  a  strong  adhesion  to  the  Catholic  religion, 
caused  the  people  of  Great  Britain  to  accuse  him  of  an  intention  to  vio- 
late their  unwritten  constitution.  He  was  a  great  and  powerful  king, 
and  had  accomplished  very  much  for  the  glory  and  honor  of  England. 
But  the  people  of  England  held  him  to  an  observance  of  the  spirit  of 
his  oath  of  loyalty  to  the  constitution  of  that  country,  and,  when  they 
became  satisfied  that  he  had  made  an  effort  to  subvert  it,  they  in  their 
Parliament  passed  upon  the  question  of  his  abdication  and  held  that 
his  intention  and  effort  to  violate  the  constitution  robbed  him  of  his 
title  to  the  crown  and  opened  the  door  to  the  establishment  of  a  new 
dynasty.    Blackstone,  in  speaking  of  these  events,  says: 

"King  James  II  succeeded  to  the  throne  of  his  ancestors,  and 
might  have  enjoyed  it  during  the  remainder  of  his  life  but  for  his  own 
infatuated  conduct  which,  with  other  concurring  circumstances,  brought 
on  the  revolution  in  1688. 

"The  true  ground  and  principle  upon  which  that  memorable  event 
proceeded  was  an  entirely  new  case  in  politics,  which  had  never 
before  happened  in  our  history — the  abdication  of  the  reigning  mon- 
arch and  the  vacancy  of  the  throne  thereupon.  It  was  not  a  defeas- 
ance of  the  right  of  succession  and  a  new  limitation  of  the  crown  by 
the  King  and  both  Houses  of  Parliament ;  it  was  the  act  of  the  nation 
alone  upon  the  conviction  that  there  was  no  king  in  being.  For,  in  a 
full  assembly  of  the  lords  and  commons,  met  in  a  couveution  upon  the 


XIV  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

supposition  of  this  vacancy,  both  houses  came  to  this  resolution:  'That 
King*  James  II,  having'  endeavored  to  subvert  the  constitution  of  the 
Kingdom  by  Breaking  the  original  contract  between  King  and  people; 
and,  by  the  advice  of  Jesuits  and  other  wicked  persons,  having  violated 
the  fundamental  law  and  having  withdrawn  himself  out  of  this  King- 
dom has  abdicated  the  Government,  and  that  the  throne  is  hereby 
vacant.'" 

Proceeding  further,  this  eminent  jurist  says: 

"For  whenever  a  question  arises  between  the  society  at  large  and 
any  magistrate  vested  with  powers  originally  delegated  by  that  soci- 
ety it  must  be  decided  by  the  voice  of  the  society  itself;  there  is  not 
upon  earth  any  other  tribunal  to  resort  to.  And  that  these  conse- 
quences were  fairly  deduced  from  these  facts  our  ancestors  have  sol- 
emnly determined  in  a  full  parliamentary  convention  representing  the 
whole  society." 

Further  quoting  from  Blackstone,  he  says : 

"They  held  that  this  misconduct  of  King  James  amounted  to  an 
endeavor  to  subvert  the  constitution  and  not  to  an  actual  subversion 
or  total  dissolution  of  the  Government,  according  to  the  principles  of 
Mr.  Locke,  which  would  have  reduced  the  society  almost  to  a  state  of 
nature;  would  have  leveled  all  distinctions  of  honor,  rank,  offices,  and 
property;  would  have  annihilated  the  sovereign  power,  and  in  conse- 
quence have  repealed  all  positive  laws,  and  would  have  left  the  people 
at  liberty  to  have  erected  a  new  system  of  State  upon  a  new  foundation 
of  polity.  They  therefore  very  prudently  voted  it  to  amount  to  no 
more  than  an  abdication  of  the  Government  and  a  consequent  vacancy 
of  the  throne,  whereby  the  Government  was  allowed  to  subsist  though 
the  executive  magistrate  w7as  gone,  and  the  kingly  office  to  remain 
though  King  James  was  no  longer  King.  And  thus  the  constitution 
was  kept  entire,  which  upon  every  sound  principle  of  government  must 
otherwise  have  fallen  to  pieces  had  so  principal  and  constituent  a  part 
as  the  royal  authority  been  abolished  or  even  suspended. 

"This  single  postulatum,  the  vacancy  of  the  throne,  being  once  estab- 
lished the  rest  that  was  then  done  followed  almost  of  course.  For,  if 
the  throne  be  at  any  time  vacant  (which  may  happen  by  other  means 
besides  that  of  abdication,  as  if  all  the  blood-royal  should  fail,  with- 
out any  successor  appointed  by  Parliament) — if,  I  say,  a  vacancy,  by 
any  means  whatsoever;  should  happen,  the  right  of  disposing  of  this 
vacancy  seems  naturally  to  result  to  the  Lords  and  Commons,  the  trus- 
tees and  representatives  of  the  nation.  For  there  are  no  other  hands 
in  which  it  can  so  properly  be  intrusted;  and  there  is  a  necessity  of  its 
being  intrusted  somewhere,  else  the  whole  frame  of  government  must 
be  dissolved  and  perish." 

The  principle  on  which  this  decision  in  regard  to  the  abdication  of 
King  James  II  rests  is  still  stronger  when  it  is  applied  to  persons  who 
are  citizens  of  the  United  States  but  who  reside  in  Hawaii,  and  by 
the  constitution  and  laws  of  Hawaii  are  admitted  into  an  active  par- 
ticipation in  the  conduct  of  government,  both  as  officeholders  and  as 
qualified  electors.  If  they,  in  connection  with  the  native  or  natural- 
ized subjects  of  the  Kingdom  of  Hawaii,  unite  in  demanding  the  pres- 
ervation of  their  constitutional  rights,  there  should  be  no  captious  or 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  XV 

technical  objections  taken  to  the  assertion  of  that  right,  or'to  the  man- 
ner of  its  exercise. 

In  reference  to  all  citizens  of  the  United  States  residing  in  Hawaii 
and  not  actual  members  or  officers  of  that  Government,  the  spirit  of 
our  laws,  in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  the  Constitution  and  the 
traditions  of  the  people,  should  be  applied  to  their  protection,  when  it 
is  the  duty  of  the  United  States  to  protect  them,  and  especially  are 
they  entitled  to  the  full  advantage  of  the  protection  that  is  afforded 
under  that  doctrine  of  personal  liberty  and  security  which  upholds  the 
authority  of  governments  de  facto.  When  such  a  government  arises 
out  of  alleged  abuses  and  grievances  and  is  set  up  in  good  faith  by  the 
intelligent  classes  to  succeed  a  monarchy  in  a  state  that  is  the  only 
monarchy  in  a  sisterhood  of  many  republics,  the  rules  governing  its 
recognition  are  not  those  that  seem  to  control  in  cases  where  the  state 
is  a  sole  republic  surrounded  by  an  environment  of  monarchies. 

in  Europe,  where  governmental  successions  have  no  relation  to  the 
will  of  the  people,  every  presumption  that  can  be  made  to  support  the 
regal  system  is  adopted  and  enforced  with  rigid  care.  The  old  condi- 
tions are  presumed  to  exist  in  a  regal  government  until  the  new  gov- 
ernment has  accomplished  a  complete  revolution  and  until  nothing 
remains  to  be  done  to  secure  an  uninterrupted  and  unembarrassed 
installation  of  its  authority.  Those  presumptions  are  all  in  favor  of 
the  crown  and  are  easily  applied  in  practical  use,  as  the  crown  is  a 
political  unit  and  acts  with  certainty  in  the  assertion  of  its  claims. 
When  the  rights  asserted  against  the  crown  are  set  up  by  the  people, 
or  for  the  people,  the  act  is  necessarily  a  representative  act,  and  the 
authority  of  the  alleged  representative  is  severely  questioned.  Indeed, 
it  is  not  considered  as  existing  in  European  countries  until,  through 
bloodshed  or  an  overwhelming  exhibition  of  forces,  its  acknowledgment 
is  literally  compelled.  The  reverse  of  this  rule  should  obtain  in  that 
part  of  the  world  where  it  is  held,  universally,  that  the  right  to  govern 
depends  upon  the  consent  of  the  governed  and  not  upon  a  divine  inher- 
itance of  power.  In  a  controversy  like  that  in  Hawaii  the  presumption 
is  in  favor  of  those  who  unite  to  assert  the  constitutional  rights  of  the 
people,  that  they  are  acting  in  good  faith,  and  that  they  are  not  seek- 
ing personal  aggrandizement,  but  the  good  of  the  people.  When  such 
a  popular  movement  engages  the  evident  support  of  those  whom  the 
people  have  trusted  for  their  integrity  to  an  extent  that  inspires  a  just 
confidence  of  success  a  sufficient  foundation  exists,  at  least,  for  a  gov- 
ernment de  facto  ;  and  it  is  no  more  necessary  to  its  validity  that  every 
possible  obstacle  to  its  final  success  has  been  removed  than  it  would  be 
necessary,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  permanency  of  the  crown  that 
every  rebellious  subject  of  the  Queen  had  been  slain  or  banished  and 
their  estates  had  been  confiscated. 

The  supporters  of  Liliuokalani  seem  to  be  forced  into  the  attitude  of 
claiming  that  it  is  of  no  consequence  that  she  may  have  forfeited  her 
right  to  the  crown  and  had  placed  it  in  the  power  of  the  people  law- 
fully to  claim  that  this  was  an  abdication,  unless  the  people  had  over- 
come and  removed  every  vestige  of  her  power  before  they  proclaimed 
the  Provisional  Government.  Her  known  purpose  to  press  the  abso- 
lute powers  claimed  by  her  in  the  new  constitution  to  the  extent  of 
the  banishment  or  death  of  the  white  population  seems  not  to  be  per- 
mitted to  excuse  the  action  of  the  people  in  displacing  her,  if  they  had 
not  captured  her  small  force  of  policemen  and  soldiers  before  the 
American  minister  had  recognized  the  Provisional  Government. 


XVI  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Liliuokalani  did  not  seem  to  take  this  narrow  view  of  the  revolution 
she  had  inaugurated. 

The  banishment  or  death  of  the  white  people  and  the  confiscation 
of  their  estates  was  the  final  decree  recorded  in  the  Queen's  heart  and 
mind,  as  she  freely  stated  to  Minister  Willis,  and  until  this  cruel  work 
had  been  accomplished  she  held  that  her  policy  of  revolution  would 
be  a  failure.  There  is  some  ground  for  hope  that  these  were  not  her 
sincere  purposes  or  wishes  but  that  in  giving  expression  to  them  she 
was  "  playing  a  part."  As  opposed  to  such  purposes,  or  to  a  Queen 
who  could  imagine  them  in  the  presence  of  the  constitutional  protec- 
tion given  to  the  rights  and  liberties  of  the  people  throughout  this 
hemisphere,  Americans  should  not  hesitate  in  the  support  of  a  govern- 
ment de  facto,  set  up  to  oppose  her,  because  she  had  not  made  a  formal 
surrender  of  a  place  where  a  few  soldiers  and  policemen  had  been 
stationed,  who  were  powerless  to  hold  it  against  the  people  then  under 
arms.  It  was  an  act  of  mercy  to  her  and  her  retainers  that  they  were 
not  forced  into  the  commission  of  acts  of  violence.  An  interregnum 
existed  in  the  executive  Government  of  Hawaii,  which  was  caused  by 
the  effort  of  the  Queen  to  destroy  the  constitution  of  1887,  and  by  the 
act  of  the  people  in  accepting  her  will  for  the  completed  coup  aVetat, 
and,  in  making  that  the  occasion  for  supplying  the  executive  depart- 
ment of  the  Government  with  a  chief. 

A  careful  investigation  has  failed  to  show  that  any  conspiracy  now 
exists  that  is  directed  to  the  virtual  displacement  of  the  Provisional  Gov- 
ernment. The  personal  efforts  of  the  Queen  seem  to  have  been  directed 
toward  a  provision  for  a  safe  and  comfortable  life,  free  from  the  anxie- 
ties of  office  and  "the  stress  of  her  native  subjects."  Her  power  of 
attorney  to  Paul  jSewman  and  his  mission  to  the  United  States  indicate 
a  reliance  on  the  uarts  of  peace"  rather  than  of  war  for  indemnity  for 
the  past  and  security  for  the  future.  The  opinions,  or  sentiments, 
expressed  by  her  in  the  three  interviews  she  had  with  Mr.  Willis,  in 
which  she  uttered  the  severest  denunciations  against  the  Avhite  race  in 
Hawaii,  and  declared  her  willingness,  if  not  her  purpose,  to  confiscate 
their  ewstates  and  to  banish  or  to  destroy  them,  while  they  are  a  seeming 
expression  of  the  lofty  indignation  of  an  offended  ruler,  are  so  un suited 
to  the  character  of  a  queen  crowned  by  a  Christian  and  civilized  people, 
and  so  out  of  keeping  with  her  character  as  a  woman  who  had  received 
kindly  recognition  and  personal  regard  from  other  good  and  refined 
ladies,  that  they  shock  all  right-minded  people  in  Christendom.  The 
Government  of  the  United  States  should  willingly  forbear  to  regard 
these  utterances  as  her  official  expression  of  such  designs  upon  the 
lives  and  liberties  of  those  whom  she  would  find  in  her  power,  upon  her 
restoration  to  the  throne,  and  accept  them  as  a  means  adopted  by  her 
to  convince  Mr.  Willis  that  her  restoration  to  the  throne  was  impossi- 
ble, and  was  not  in  accordance  with  her  wishes. 

The  President,  on  the  first  intimation  of  these  harsh  declarations  of 
the  Queen,  at  once  laid  them  before  Congress,  and  abandoned  the 
further  exercise  of  his  good  offices  to  bring  about  a  reconciliation  between 
her  and  those  who  were  conducting  and  supporting  the  Provisional 
Government. 

Mr.  Willis,  however,  regarding  his  instructions  as  continuing  to 
require  his  intercession  beyond  the  point  where  the  President  consid- 
ered that  it  should  cease,  held  a  second  and  third  interview  with  Lili- 
uokalani. After  these  interviews  had  closed,  the  Queen  being  still 
firm  in  her  course,  Mr.  Carter,  a  trusted  friend,  obtained  her  signa- 
ture to  a  pledge  of  amnesty,  and  made  that  the  basis  of  his  proposition 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XVII 

to  Mr.  Dole  for  the  abandonment  of  the •Provisional  Government,  which 
was  summarily  refused.  This  closed  that  incident.  Mr.  Willis,  in 
what  he  did,  obeyed  what  he  conceived  to  be  his  instructions,  and  being 
so  distant  from  Washington,  it  is  a  matter  of  regret,  bu»t  not  of  surprise, 
that  there  was  an  apparent  want  of  harmony  between  his  action  in  con- 
tinuing his  interviews  with  Liliuokalani  after  the  President  had  deter- 
mined that  the  full  duty  of  the  Government  had  been  performed. 

The  attitude  of  Liliuokalani  at  the  conclusion  of  this  proceeding  is 
that  of  waiting  for  a  pleasant  retirement  from  the  cares  of  public  life, 
rather  than  of  waiting  for  an  opportunity  to  bring  about  a  hostile  col- 
lision with  the  people  who  support  the  new  order  of  government  in 
Hawaii. 

In  dealing  with  a  grave  subject,  now  for  the  first  time  presented  in 
America,  we  must  consider  the  conditions  of  public  sentiment  as  to 
monarchic  government,  and  Ave  shall  derive  also  material  help  from  the 
light  of  English  history.  In  the  Western  Hemisphere,  except  as  to 
the  colonial  relation,  which  has  become  one  of  mere  political  alliance 
chiefly  for  commercial  reasons,  and  does  not  imply  in  any  notable 
case  absolute  subjection  to  imperial  or  royal  authority,  royalty  no 
longer  exists.  When  a  crown  falls,  in  any  kingdom  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere,  it  is  pulverized,  and  when  a  scepter  departs,  it  departs 
forever  j  and  American  opinion  can  not  sustain  any  American  ruler  in 
the  attempt  to  restore  them,  no  matter  how  virtuous  and  sincere  the 
reasons  may  be  that  seem  to  justify  him.  There  have  been  heathen 
temples  in  the  older  States  in  this  hemisphere  where  the  bloody  orgies 
of  pagan  worship  and  sacrifice  have  crimsoned  history  with  shame ;  and 
very  recently  such  temples  have  been  erected  in  the  United  States  to 
abuse  Christianity  by  the  use  of  its  sacred  name  and  ritual.  When 
the  arms  of  invaders,  or  mobs  of  the  people,  have  destroyed  these 
temples,  no  just  indignation  at  the  cruelties  that  may  have  been  perpe- 
trated in  their  destruction  could  possibly  justify  their  restoration. 

It  is  a  great  blessing  to  this  Western  World  that  the  nations  are  to  be 
spared  the  calamities  which  Blackstone  describes  as  "imbruing  the 
kingdom  of  England  in  blood  and  confusion,"  growing  out  of  claims  ot 
succession  to  the  crown.  In  almost  every  reign  prior  to  that  of  the 
present  house  of  Hanover,  the  lives  aud  property  of  the  people  of 
England,  amid  the  greatest  cruelties,  have  been  sacrificed  in  settling 
pretensions  to  the  crown.  It  was  these  conflicts  and  this  distress  ot 
innocent  sufferers  that  caused  the  people  to  claim  through  the  judges 
the  protection  of  the  doctrine,  that  service  rendered  to  the  king  who 
held  the  scepter  was  lawful,  although  he  was  not  rightfully  in  possession 
of  the  crown.  No  greater  liberty  of  the  people  was  ever  devised  or 
granted  than  the  right  of  protection  under  a  king  de  facto  against  a  king 
de  jure. 

Be  facto  governments,  when  they  seek  to  supply  the  gap  created  by 
an  interregnum,  are  favored  in  the  international  law,  and  when  they 
are  also  based  on  the  right  of  popular  government  in  conflict  with  regal 
government,  or  to  prevent  its  reestablishment,  once  it  has  disappeared 
in  a  State  of  the  Western  Hemisphere,  it  is  so  rooted  and  established  in 
the  foundations  of  the  rightful  authority  to  rule  that  it  is  justly  to  be 
ranked  among  the  cardinal  liberties  of  the  people. 

This  doctrine  is  not  new,  and  yet  it  is  modern  in  England,  where  the 

right  to  the  crown  and  its  prerogatives  have  bled  the  people  for  fifteen 

centuries.     The  stringent  doctrine  that  a  de  facto  government  must  be 

established  firmly  and  in  all  respects  before  it  is  entitled  to  recognition 

S.  Rep.  227 n 


XVIII  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

"by  another  sovereign  and  independent  power  had  no  application  to 
the  facts  and  circumstances  that  attended  the  recent  revolution  in 
Hawaii;  moreover,  if  the  revolution  tli ere  had  been  directed  agai  ist 
the  entire  government  and  for  the  overthrow  of  the  constitution  of  1887, 
and  all  monarchic  rule,  if  it  was  a  sincere,  strong,  earnest  and  success- 
nil  movement  of  the  people  for  the  recovery  of  their  natural  right  to 
rule  themselves,  they  should  not  be  narrowly  questioned  and  held  to 
rigid  account  for  a  proper  and  discreet  performance  of  every  act  neces- 
sary to  their  resumption  of  their  natural  rights,  but  all  America  must 
unite  in  the  declaration  that,  under  such  circumstances,  the  presump- 
tions of  law  should  be  favorable  to  such  movements,  rather  than 
unfriendly  to  the  establishment  by  the  people  of  the  foundations  of  their 
liberties,  based  upon  their  right  to  govern  themselves. 

The  parliament  of  Hawaii  had  been  prorogued  by  the  Queen  on  the 
14th  day  of  January,  and  could  not  be  again  assembled  under  the  con- 
stitution, except  by  the  chief  executive  authority.  Until  that  author- 
ity was  supplied  in  some  way,  therefore,  the  Legislature  could  not  be 
reconvened.  It  was  the  establishment  of  that  authority,  the  chief 
executive  head  of  the  nation,  which  was  the  question  at  issue,  and 
when  that  was  decided,  an  appeal  to  the  Legislature  of  Hawaii  for  its 
confirmation  or  ratification  was  not  only  unnecessary,  but  might  have 
resulted  in  a  counter  revolution.  It  was,  therefore,  in  the  interest  of 
peace,  good  order,  and  right  government,  that  the  people  of  Hawaii, 
who  were  unopposed  in  their  process  of  organizing  an  executive  head 
for  the  Government,  should  proceed  to  do  so  as  they  did,  regularly  and 
in  an  orderly,  firm,  and  successful  manner.  Thus  the  abdication  of  Lil- 
iuokalani  was  confirmed  and  has  so  continued  from  that  day  to  this. 
The  Government  of  the  United  States  has  on  various  occasions  recog- 
nized the  succession  to  the  executive  authority  as  residing  in  the  Pro- 
visional Government  initiated  at  that  public  meeting  at  the  arsenal  and 
consummated  on  the  17th  day  of  January  by  public  proclamation. 
Then,  on  the  17th  day  of  January,  according  to  the  recognition  of  the 
United  States,  from  which  there  has  been  no  dissent  or  departure,  the 
interregnum  ceased,  and  the  executive  head  of  the  Government  of 
Hawaii  was  established.  Until  this  was  completed,  on  the  17th  day  of 
January,  by  the  proclamation  of  the  Provisional  Government,  the 
United  States  was  still  charged,  under  every  principle  of  law  and  jus- 
tice and  under  the  highest  obligation  of  duty,  to  keep  her  forces  in 
Honolulu,  and  to  enforce,  in  virtue  of  her  sovereign  authority,  the 
rights  of  her  citizens  under  the  treaty  obligations  and  also  under  the 
laws  of  Hawaii,  relating  to  the  safety  of  person  and  property  and  the 
rights  of  industry,  commerce,  and  hospitality  in  their  free  pursuit  and 
enjoyment.  And  when  the  Provisional  Government  was  thus  estab- 
lished, it  rested  with  the  United  States  to  determine  whether  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Hawaii  was  so  far  rehabilitated  and  so  safely  established 
that  these  rights  of  her  citizens  could  be  intrusted  to  its  keeping.  The 
recognition  of  such  a  state  of  affairs,  within  a  country  whose  executive 
department  has  been  made  vacant  in  consequence  of  domestic  strife,  is 
quite  a  separate  and  different  proceeding,  both  in  form  and  effect,  from 
the  recognition  of  the  political  independence  of  a  government  that  is 
complete  in  its  organization.  In  the  latter  case,  the  recognition  excludes 
all  right  of  interference  in  its  domestic  affairs,  while  in  the  former  it  is 
the  right  and  duty  of  supplying  the  protection  of  law  to  the  citizen 
that  makes  interference  necessary  as  well  as  lawful. 

The  independence  of  Hawaii,  as  a  sovereign  State  had  been  long 
recognized  by  the  United  States,  and  this  unhappy  occasion  did  not 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XIX 

suggest  the  need  of  renewing  that  declaration.  The  question  presented 
in  Honolulu  on  and  after  the  12th  of  January,  1893,  was  whether  the 
Queen  continued  to  be  the  executive  head  of  the  Government  of 
Hawaii.  That  was  a  question  of  fact  which  her  conduct  and  that  of 
her  people  placed  in  perilous  doubt  until  it  was  decided  by  the  proc- 
lamation of  a  new  executive.  Pending  that  question  there  was  no 
responsible  executive  government  in  Hawaii.  On  the  17th  of  January 
that  doubt  was  resolved  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  American  minister, 
and  of  all  other  representatives  of  foreign  governments  in  Hawaii,  in 
favor  of  the  Provisional  Government.  This  recognition  did  not  give 
to  the  Government  of  Hawaii  the  legal  or  moral  right  to  expel  the 
troops  of  any  government,  stationed  in  Honolulu  in  the  period  of  inter- 
regnum, until  it  had  so  firmly  established  its  authority  as  to  give  to 
foreigners  the  security  to  provide  for  which  these  troops  had  been 
landed.  Good  faith  and  an  honest  respect  for  the  rights  of  friendly 
nations  would  certainly  require  the  withdrawal  of  all  further  interfer- 
ence with  the  domestic  affairs  of  Hawaii  as  soon  as  that  government 
had  provided  security  that  was  reasonably  sufficient  for  the  protection 
of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States.  But  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  had  the  right  to  keep  its  troops  in  Honolulu  until  these 
conditions  were  performed,  and  the  Government  of  Hawaii  could  cer- 
tainly acquiesce  in  such  a  policy  without  endangering  its  independence 
or  detracting  from  its  dignity.  This  was  done,  and  the  troops  from 
the  Boston  camped  on  shore  for  several  months.  The  precise  hour 
when  or  the  precise  conditions  under  which  the  American  minister 
recognized  the  Provisional  Government  is  not  a  matter  of  material 
importance.  It  was  his  duty,  at  the  earliest  safe  period,  to  assist  by 
his  recognition  in  the  termination  of  the  interregnum,  so  that  citizens 
of  the  United  States  might  be  safely  remitted  to  the  care  of  that  Gov- 
ernment for  the  security  of  their  rights.  As  soon  as  he  was  convinced 
that  the  Provisional  Government  was  secure  against  overthrow  it  Avas 
his  duty  to  recognize  the  rehabilitated  State.  Whether  this  was  done 
an  hour  or  two  sooner  or  later  could  make  no  substantial  difference 
as  to  his  rights  or  duties,  if  he  was  satisfied  that  the  movement  was 
safe  against  reversal.  If  no  question  of  the  annexation  of  Hawaii  to 
the  United  States  had  existed,  the  conduct  of  the  American  minister 
in  giving  official  recognition  to  the  Provisional  Government  would  not 
have  been  the  subject  of  adverse  criticism.  But  the  presence  of  that 
question  and  his  anxious  advocacy  of  annexation  did  not  relieve  him 
from  the  duty  or  abridge  his  right  to  call  for  the  troops  on  the  Boston 
to  protect  the  citizens  of  the  United  States  during  an  interregnum  in 
the  office  of  chief  executive  of  Hawaii.  They  were  not  to  be  put  into 
a  state  of  outlawry  and  peril  if  the  minister  had  been  opx>osed  to 
annexation,  nor  could  his  desire  on  that  subject  in  anyway  affect  their 
rights  or  his  duty.  He  gave  to  them  the  protection  they  had  the 
right  to  demand,  and,  in  respect  of  his  action  up  to  this  point,  so  far 
as  it  related  to  Hawaii,  his  opinions  as  to  annexation  have  not  affected 
the  attitude  of  the  U.  S.  Government,  and  the  committee  finn*  no  cause 
of  censure  either  against  Minister  Stevens  or  Capt.  Wiltse,  of  the 
Boston. 

Afterward,  on  the  1st  day  of  February,  1893,  the  American  minister 
caused  the  flag  of  the  United  States  to  be  raised  on  the  Government 
building  in  Honolulu,  and  assumed  and  declared  a  protectorate  over 
that  nation  in  the  name  of  the  United  States.  This  act  on  the  part  of 
our  minister  was  without  authority,  and  was  void  for  want  of  power. 
It  was  disavowed  by  Secretary  Foster  and  rebuked  by  Secretary 


XX  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Gresham,  and  the  order  to  abandon  the  protectorate  and  haul  down 
the  flag  was  in  accordance  with  the  duty  and  honor  of  the  United 
States.  To  haul  down  the  flag  of  the  United  States  was  only  an  order 
to  preserve  its  honor. 

The  diplomatic  officers  of  the  United  States  in  Hawaii  have  the  right 
to  much  larger  liberty  of  action  in  respect  to  the  internal  affairs  of  that 
country  than  would  be  the  case  with  any  other  country  with  which 
we  have  no  peculiar  or  special  relations.  In  oar  diplomatic  corre- 
spondence with  Hawaii  and  in  the  various  treaties,  some  of  them  trea- 
ties of  annexation,  which  have  been  signed  and  discussed,  though  not 
ratified,  from  time  to  time,  there  has  been  manifested  a  very  near  rela- 
tionship between  the  two  governments.  The  history  of  Hawaii  in  its 
progress,  education,  development,  and  government,  and  in  Christianity, 
has  been  closely  identified  with  that  of  the  United  States — so  closely, 
indeed,  that  the  United  States  has  not  at  any  time  hesitated  to  declare 
that  it  would  permit  no  intervention  in  the  affairs  of  Hawaii  by  any 
foreign  government  which  might  tend  to  disturb  the  relations  with  the 
United  States,  or  to  gain  any  advantages  there  over  the  Americans 
who  may  have  settled  in  that  country.  The  United  States  has  assumed 
and  deliberately  maintained  toward  Hawaii  a  relation  which  is  entirely 
exceptional,  and  has  no  parallel  in  our  dealings  with  any  other  people. 

The  justification  for  this  attitude  is  not  a  matter  with  which  the  pres- 
ent inquiry  is  necessarily  connected,  but  its  existence  furnishes  a  good 
excuse,  if  excuse  is  needed,  for  a  very  lively  concern  on  the  part  of  our 
diplomatic  representatives  in  everything  that  relates  to  the  progress  of 
that  people. 

The  causes  that  have  led  to  this  peculiar  situation  are  altogether 
apparent.  They  are  in  every  sense  honorable,  just,  and  benevolent. 
One  nation  can  not  assume  such  an  attitude  toward  another,  especially 
if  the  latter  is,  by  contrast,  small,  weak,  and  dependent  upon  the  good 
will  or  forbearance  of  the  world  for  its  existence,  without  giving  to  it 
a  guaranty  of  external  and  internal  security. 

The  attitude  of  the  United  States  toward  Hawaii,  thus  voluntarily 
assumed,  gives  to  Hawaii  the  right  to  regard  it  as  such  a  guaranty. 

In  the  absence  of  a  policy  to  establish  a  colonial  system  and  of  any 
disposition  for  territorial  aggrandizement,  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  looked  with  approbation  and  gave  encouragement  to  the  labors 
and  influence  of  their  citjzens  in  Hawaii,  in  laying  the  groundwork  of 
a  free  and  independent  government  there  which,  in  its  principles  and 
in  the -distribution  of  powers,  should  be  like  our  own,  and  ultimately 
become  republican  in  form.  This  has  been  the  uuconcealed  wish  of  the 
people  of  the  United  States,  in  which  many  of  the  native  Hawaiian s 
have  participated. 

Observing  the  spirit  of  the  Monroe  doctrine,  the  United  States,  in  the 
beginning  of  our  relations  with  Hawaii,  made  a  firm  and  distinct  decla- 
ration of  the  purpose  to  prevent  the  absorption  of  Hawaii  or  the  political 
control  of  that  country  by  any  foreign  power.  Without  stating  the 
reasons  for  this  policy,  which  included  very  important  commercial  and 
military  considerations,  the  attitude  of  the  United  States  toward  Hawaii 
was  in  moral  effect  that  of  a  friendly  protectorate.  It  lias  been  a  settled 
policy  of  the  United  States  that  if  it  should  turn  out  that  Hawaii,  for 
any  cause,  should  not  be  able  to  maintain  an  independent  government, 
that  country  would  be  encouraged  in  its  tendency  to  gravitate  toward 
political  union  with  this  country. 

The  treaty  relations  between  Hawaii  and  the  United  States,  as  fixed 
by  several  conventions  that  have  been  ratified,  and  by  other  negotia- 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  XXI 

turns,  have  been  characterized  by  a  sentiment  of  close  reciprocity.  Tn 
addition  to  trade  relations  of  the  highest  advantage  to  Hawaii,  the 
Tinted  States  has  so  far  interfered  with  the  internal  policy  of  Hawaii 
as  to  secure  an  agreement  from  that  Government  restricting  the  disposal 
of  bays  and  harbors  and  the  crown  lands  to  other  countries,  and  has 
secured  exclusive  privileges  in  Pearl  Harbor  of  great  importance  to 
this  Government. 

This  attitude  of  the  two  governments  and  the  peculiar  friendship  of 
the  two  peoples,  together  with  the  advantages  given  to  Hawaii  in  com- 
merce, induced  a  large  and  very  enterprising  class  of  people  from  the 
United  States  to  migrate  to  those  islands  and  to  invest  large  sums  of 
money  in  the  cultivation  of  sugar  and  rice,  and  in  other  trade  and 
industry.  The  introduction  of  laborers  from  Japan  and  China  in  great 
numbers  gave  to  the  governing  power  in  Hawaii  a  new  and  very  sig- 
nificant importance,  and  made  it  necessary,  for  the  protection  of  the 
interests  of  the  white  or  European  people  and  of  the  natives,  that  the 
safeguards  of  the  organic  law  of  the  Kingdom  should  be  carefully 
preserved.  In  the  efforts  to  secure  these  guarantees  of  safe  govern- 
ment, no  distinction  of  race  was  made  as  to  the  native  or  Kanaka  pop- 
ulation, but  Chinese  and  Japanese  were  excluded  from  participation  in 
the  government  as  voters,  or  as  officeholders. 

Apprehensions  of  civil  disturbance  in  Hawaii  caused  the  United  States 
to  keep  ships  of  war  at  Honolulu  for  many  years  past,  almost  without 
intermission,  and  the  instructions  that  were  given  to  our  diplomatic 
and  consular  officers  and  to  the  naval  commanders  on  that  station  went 
beyond  the  customary  instructions  applicable  to  other  countries.  In 
most  instances,  the  instructions  so  given  included  the  preservation  of 
order  and  of  the  peace  of  the  country,  as  well  as  the  protection  and 
preservation  of  the  property  and  of  the  lives  and  treaty  rights  of  Amer- 
ican citizens. 

The  circumstances  above  mentioned,  which  the  evidence  shows  to 
have  existed,  create  a  new  light  under  which  we  must  examine  into  the 
conduct  of  our  diplomatic  and  naval  officers  in  respect  of  the  revolution 
that  occurred  in  Hawaii  in  January,  1893.  In  no  sense,  and  at  no  time, 
has  the  Government  of  the  United  States  observed  toward  the  domes- 
tic affairs  of  Hawaii  the  strict  impartiality  and  the  indifference  enjoined 
by  the  general  law  of  noninterference,  in  the  absence  of  exceptional 
conditions.  We  have  always  exerted  the  privilege  of  interference  in 
the  domestic  policy  of  Hawaii  to  a  degree  that  would  not  be  justified, 
under  our  view  of  the  international  law,  in  reference  to  the  affairs  of 
Canada,  Cuba,  or  Mexico. 

The  cause  of  this  departure  from  our  general  course  of  diplomatic 
conduct  is  the  recognized  fact  that  Hawaii  has  been  all  the  time  under 
a  virtual  suzerainty  of  the  United  States,  which  is,  by  an  apt  and 
familiar  definition,  a  paramount  authority,  not  in  any  actual  sense  an 
actual  sovereignty,  but  a  de  facto  supremacy  over  the  country.  This 
sense  of  paramount  authority,  of  supremacy,  with  the  right  to  inter- 
vene in  the  affairs  of  1  Tawaii,  has  uever  been  lost  sight  of  by  the  United 
States  to  this  day,  and  it  is  conspicously  manifest  in  the  correspondence 
of  Mr.  Willis  with  Mr.  Dole,  which  is  set  forth  in  the  evidence  which 
accompanies  this  report. 

Another  fact  of  importance  in  considering  the  conduct  of  our  diplo- 
matic and  naval  officers  during  the  revolution  of  January,  1803,  is  that 
the  annexation  of  Hawaii  to  the  United  States  has  been  the  subject  of 
careful  study  and  almost  constant  contemplation  among  Hawaiians  and 
their  kings  >>ince  the  beginning  of  the  reign  of  Kamehameha  I.    This 


XXII  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS, 

has  always  been  regarded  by  the  ruling  xwwer  in  Hawaii  as  a  coveted 
and  secure  retreat — a  sort  of  house  of  refuge — whenever  the  exigencies 
of  fate  might  compel  Hawaii  to  make  her  choice  between  home  rule  and 
foreign  domination,  either  in  the  form  of  a  protectorate,  or  of  submis- 
sion to  some  foreign  sovereign. 

Hawaii  has  always  desired  an  escape  to  a  freer  government,  when 
she  has  to  be  forced  to  the  point  where  the  surrender  of  racial  pride 
and  her  standing  as  a  nation  would  be  the  severe  penalty  of  her 
weakness.  Hawaiians  prefer  citizenship  in  a  great  republic  to  the 
slavery  of  subjection  to  any  foreign  monarchy.  Annexation  to  the 
United  States  has  never  been  regarded  with  aversion,  or  with  a  sense 
of  national  degradation,  by  the  Hawaiian  people.  On  the  contrary,  it 
has  been  adopted  as  a  feature  of  political  action  by  those  who  have 
attempted  to  recommend  themselves  to  the  support  of  the  people  in 
times  of  danger. 

In  the  revolution  of  January,  1893,  those  who  assumed  the  sovereign 
power,  declaring  that  there  was  an  interregnum,  made  it  a  conspicuous 
part  of  their  avowed  purpose  to  remain  in  authority  until  Hawaii 
should  be  annexed  to  the  United  States.  This  was  stated  as  an  argu- 
ment for  the  creation  of  a  provisional  government,  without  which  there 
would  be  less  advantage  in  the  change  of  the  situation.  Annexation 
was  an  avowed  purpose  of  the  Provisional  Government,  because  it 
would  popul arize  the  movement.  No  one  could  project  a  revolution 
in  Hawaii  for  the  overthrow  of  the  monarchy,  that  would  not  raise 
the  question  among  the  people  of  annexation  to  the  United  States. 

In  the  diplomatic  correspondence  of  the  United  States  with  our  min- 
isters to  Hawaii,  frequent  and  favorable  allusion  is  made  to  this  sub- 
ject as  a  matter  of  friendly  consideration  for  the  advantage  of  that 
country  and  people,  and  not  as  a  result  that  would  enhance  the  wealth 
or  power  of  the  United  States.  This  treatment  of  the  subject  began 
very  early  in  the  history  of  Hawaiian  civilization,  and  it  was  taken  up 
and  discussed  by  the  people  of  the  islands  as  a  topic  of  patriotic  inspi- 
ration. It  was  their  habit  to  celebrate  the  anniversary  of  the  independ- 
ence of  the  United  States,  as  a  national  fete  day.  So  that,  there  was 
no  thought  of  conspiracy  against  the  monarchy  in  openly  favoring  the 
project  of  annexation.  Whether  annexation  is  wise  and  beneficial  to 
both  countries  is  a  question  that  must  receive  the  consideration  of  both 
governments  before  it  can  be  safely  settled. 

The  testimony  taken  by  the  committee  discloses  the  well-considered 
opinion  of  several  of  oar  most  eminent  naval  and  military  officers,  that 
the  annexation  of  Hawaii  is  a  fact  indispensable  to  the  proper  defense 
and  protection  of  our  Western  coast  and  cities.  But  this  is  a  matter 
with  which  the  committee  is  not  especially  charged,  and  reference  is 
made  to  these  opinions  as  supporting  the  statement  that  all  intelligent 
men  in  Hawaii  and  in  the  United  States,  who  have  taken  pains  to  con- 
sider the  subject,  are  convinced  that  the  question  is  one  deserving  of 
thorough  investigation  and  a  correct  and  friendly  decision.  The  ques- 
tion of  annexation,  however,  is  distinctly  presented  in  the  proclama- 
tion of  the  Provisional  Government  as  one  to  be  settled  by  the  action 
of  the  Government  of  the  United  States. 

Commissioners  to  treat  with  the  United  States  tor  the  annexation  of 
Hawaii  were  sent  to  Washington  immediately  upon  the  adoption  and 
promulgation  of  the  Provisional  Government,  and  they  negotiated  and 
signed  a  treaty  in  conjunction  with  Mr.  Secretary  Fostor,  which  was 
submitted  to  the  Senate  of  the  United  States  and  was  subsequently 
withdrawn  by  the  present  administration.    Accompanying  that  treaty 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XXIII 

was  a  paper  signed  by  Liliuokalaui,  in  which  she  staled  no  objection 
to  the  project  of  annexation  to  the  United  States,  but  in  which  she  pro- 
tested earnestly  against  her  dethronement,  and  alleged  that  the  United 
States,  through  the  abuse  by  its  diplomatic  and  naval  officers  of  the 
powers  entrusted  to  them,  had  virtually  compelled  her  abdication. 
The  President  of  the  United  States,  after  a  further  examination  of  the 
subject,  concluded  that  it  was  his  duty  to  withdraw  this  annexation 
treaty  from  the  Senate  for  further  consideration,  and  so  notified  the 
Provisional  Government  through  Mr.  Willis,  our  present  minister. 

The  recognition  of  the  Provisional  Government  was  lawful  and 
authoritative,  and  has  continued  without  interruption  or  modification 
up  to  the  present  time,  it  may  be  justly  claimed  for  this  act  of  recog- 
nition that  it  has  contributed  greatly  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  and 
order  in  Hawaii  and  to  the  promotion  of  the  establishment  of  free,  per- 
manent, constitutional  government  in  Hawaii,  based  upon  the  consent 
of  the  people. 

The  complaint  by  Liliuokalani  in  the  protest  that  she  sent  to  the 
President  of  the  United  States  and  dated  the  18th  day  of  January,  is 
not,  in  the  opinion  of  the  committee,  well  founded  in  fact  or  in  justice. 
It  appears  from  the  evidence  submitted  with  this  report  that  she  was  in 
fact  the  author  and  promoter  of  a  revolution  in  Hawaii  which  involved 
the  destruction  of  the  entire  constitution,  and  a  breach  of  her  solemn 
oath  to  observe  and  support  it,  and  it  was  only  after  she  had  ascertained 
that  she  had  made  a  demand  upon  her  native  subjects  for  support  in 
this  movement  which  they  would  not  give  to  her,  that  she,  for  the  time, 
postponed  her  determination  to  carry  this  revolution  into  effect,  and 
made  known  her  determination  to  do  so  as  soon  as  she  could  feel  that 
she  had  the  power  to  sustain  the  movement. 

But  the  President  of  the  United  States,  giving  attention  to  Liliuoka- 
lani's  claim  that  this  Government  had  alarmed  her  by  the  presence  of 
its  troops  into  the  abdication  of  her  crown,  believed  that  it  was  proper 
and  necessary  in  vindication  of  the  honor  of  the  United  States  to 
appoint  a  commissioner  to  Hawaii  who  would  make  a  careful  investiga- 
tion into  the  facts  and  send  the  facts  and  his  conclusions  to  the  Presi- 
dent, for  his  information.  The  commissioner,  Mr.  Blount,  went  to 
Hawaii  under  circumstances  of  extreme  embarrassment  and  executed 
his  instructions  with  impartial  care  to  arrive  at  the  truth,  and  he  pre- 
sented a  sincere  and  instructive  report  to  the  President  of  the  United 
States,  touching  the  facts,  the  knowledge  of  which  he  thus  acquired. 
In  the  agitated  state  of  opinion  and  feeling  in  Hawaii  at  that  time,  it 
was  next  to  impossible  to  obtain  a  full,  fair,  and  free  declaration  in 
respect  of  the  facts  which  attended  -this  revolution,  and  particularly 
was  this  difficult  to  obtain  from  the  persons  who  actively  participated 
in  that  movement. 

The  evidence  submitted  by  the  committee,  in  addition  to  that  which 
was  i> resented  by  Mr.  Blount,  having  been  taken  under  circumstances 
more  favorable  to  the  development  of  the  whole  truth  with  regard  to 
the  situation, has,  in  the  opinion  of  the  committee,  established  the  fact 
that  the  revolutionary  movement  in  Hawaii  originated  with  Liliuoka- 
lani, and  was  promoted,  provided  for,  and,  as  she  believed,  secured  by 
the  passage  of  the  opium  bill  and  the  lottery  bill  through  the  Legisla 
tare,  from  which  she  expected  to  derive  a  revenue  sufficient  to  secure 
the  ultimate  success  of  her  purpose,  which  was  distinctly  and  maturely 
devised  to  aboln.-hthe  constitution  of  1887,  and  to  assume  to  herself  abso- 
lute power,  free  from  constitutional  restraint  of  any  serious  character. 


XXIV  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

The  fact  cannot  be  ignored  that  this  revolutionary  movement  of 
Liliuokalani,  which  had  its  development  in  the  selection  of  a  new 
cabinet  to  supplant  one  which  had  the  support  of  all  the  conservative 
elements  in  the  islands,  was  set  on  foot  and  accomplished  during  the 
abseuce  of  the  American  minister  on  board  the  ship  Boston  during 
the  ten  days  which  preceded  the  prorogation  of  the  Legislature.  The 
astonishment  with  which  this  movement  was  received  by  the  American 
emigrants  and  other  white  people  residing  in  Hawaii,  and  its  inaugura- 
tion in  the  absence  of  the  Boston  and  of  the  American  minister,  show 
that  those  people,  with  great  anxiety,  recognized  the  fact  that  it  was 
directed  against  them  and  their  interests  and  welfare  and  that  when 
it  was  completed  they  would  become  its  victims.  These  convictions 
excited  the  serious  apprehensions  of  all  the  white  people  in  those 
islands  that  a  crisis  was  brought  about  in  which  not  only  their  rights 
in  Hawaii,  and  under  the  constitution,  were  to  be  injuriously  affected, 
but  that  the  ultimate  result  would  be  that  they  would  be  driven^  from 
the  islands  or,  remaining  there,  would  be  put  at  the  mercy  of 'those 
who  chose  to  prey  upon  their  property.  This  class  of  people,  who 
were  intended  to  be  ostracised,  supply  nine-tenths  of  the  entire  tax 
receipts  of  the  Kingdom;  and  they  were  conscious  that  the  purpose 
was  to  inflict  taxation  upon  them  without  representation,  or  else  to 
confiscate  their  estates  and  drive  them  out  of  the  country.  This  pro- 
duced alarm  and  agitation,  which  resulted  in  the  counter  movement 
set  on  foot  by  the  people  to  meet  and  overcome  the  revolution  which 
Lilioukalani  had  projected  and  had  endeavored  to  accomplish.  Her  min- 
isters were  conscious  of  the  fact  that  any  serious  resistance  to  her  revo- 
lutionary movement  (of  which  they  had  full  knowledge  before  they 
were  inducted  into  office)  would  disappoint  the  expectations  of  the 
Queen  and  would  result  in  the  overthrow  of  the  executive  government; 
and,  while  they  had  evidently  promised  the  Queen  that  they  would 
support  here  in  her  effort  to  abolish  the  constitution  of  1887  and  sub- 
stitute one  which  they  had  secretly  assisted  in  preparing,  when  the 
moment  of  the  trial  came  they  abandoned  her— they  broke  faith  with 
her.  The  Queen's  ministers  took  fright  and  gave  information  to  the 
people  of  the  existence  of  the  movements  and  concealed  purposes  ot 
the  Queen  and  of  her  demands  upon  them  to  join  her  in  the  promulga- 
tion of  the  constitution,  and  they  appealed  to  the  committee  of  safety 
for  protection,  and  continued  in  that  attitude  until  they  saw  that  the 
kindled  wrath  of  the  people  would  not  take  the  direction  of  violence 
and  bloodshed  without  the  provocation  of  a  serious  necessity.  Being 
satisfied  that  they  could  trust  to  the  forbearance  of  the  people,  who 
were  looking  to  the  protection  of  their  interests  and  had  no  desire  for 
strife  and  bloodshed,  they  began  to  finesse  in  a  political  way  to  effect 
a  compromise  between  the  people  and  the  Queen,  and  they  induced 
her  to  make  the  proclamation  of  her  intentions  to  postpone  the  com- 
pletion of  her  revolutionary  purposes,  which  was  circulated  in  Honolulu 
on  Monday  morning.  These  men,  whose  conduct  can  not  be  character- 
ized as  anything  less  than  perfidious,  hastened  to  give  to  the  President 
of  the  United  Stotes  false  and  misleading  statements  of  the  facts  lead- 
ing up  to,  attending,  and  succeeding  this  revolution.  To  do  this  they 
made  deceptive  and  misleading  statements  to  Mr.  Blount.  Upon  them 
must  rest  the  odium  of  having  encouraged  the  Queen  in  her  revolu- 
tionary intentions;  of  having  then  abandoued  her  in  a  moment  of  appar- 
ent danger;  of  having  thrown  themselves  upon  the  mercy  of  the  people, 
and  then  of  making  an  attempt,  through  falsehood  and  misrepresenta- 


•  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XXV 

Hon, to  regain  power  in  the  Government  of  Hawaii,  which  the  people 
would, naturally,  forever  deny  to  them. 

A  question  has  been  made  as  to  the  right  of  the  President  of  the 
United  States  to  dispatch  Mr.  Blount  to  Hawaii  as  his  personal  repre- 
sentative for  the  purpose  of  seeking  the  further  information  which  the 
President  believed  was  necessary  in  order  to  arrive  at  a  just  conclusion 
regarding  the  state  of  affairs  in  Hawaii.  Many  precedents  could  be 
quoted  to  show  that  such  power  has  been  exercised  by  the  President 
on  various  occasions  without  dissent  on  the  part  of  Congress  or  the 
people  of  the  United  States.  The  employment  of  such  agencies  is  a 
necessary  part  of  the  proper  exercise  of  the  diplomatic  power  which  is 
intrusted  by  the  Constitution  with  the  President.  Without  such 
authority  our  foreign  relations  would  be  so  embarrassed  with  difficulties 
that  it  would  be  impossible  to  conduct  them  with  safety  or  success. 
These  precedents  also  show  that  the  Senate  of  the  United  States,  though 
in  session,  need  not  be  consulted  as  to  the  appointment  of  such  agents, 
or  as  to  the  instructions  which  the  President  may  give  them. 

An  authority  was  intrusted  to  Mr.  Blount  to  remove  the  American 
flag  from  the  Government  building  in  Hawaii,  and  to  disclaim  openly 
and  practically  the  protectorate  which  had  been  announced  in  that 
country  by  Minister  Stevens,  and  also  to  remove  the  troops  from  Hono- 
lulu to  the  steamer  Boston.  This  particular  delegation  of  authority 
to  Mr.  Blount  was  paramount  over  the  authority  of  Mr.  Stevens,  who 
was  continued  as  minister  resident  of  the  United  States  at  Honolulu, 
and  it  raised  the  question  whether  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  can  have  at  the  same  foreign  capital  two  ministers,  each  of 
whom  shall  exercise  separate  and  special  powers. 

There  seems  to  be  no  reason  why  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  can  not,  in  conducting  its  diplomatic  intercourse  with  other 
countries,  exercise  powers  as  broad  and  general,  or  as  limited  and 
peculiar,  or  special,  as  any  other  government.  Other  governments 
have  been  for  many  years,  and  even  centuries,  in  the  habit  of  intrust- 
ing special  and  particular  missions  to  one  man  representing  them  at  a 
foreign  court,  and  to  several  men  in  combination  when  that  was  found 
to  be  desirable.  In  fact,  there  has  been  no  limit  placed  upon  the  use 
of  a  power  of  this  kind,  except  the  discretion  of  the  sovereign  or  ruler 
of  the  country.  The  committee  fail  to  see  that  there  is  any  irregularity 
in  such  a  course  as  that,  or  that  the  power  given  to  Mr.  Blount  to  with- 
draw the  troops  from  Honolulu  or  to  lower  the  flag  of  the  United  States 
was  to  any  extent  either  dangerous  or  interrupting  to  any  other  lawful 
authority  existing  there  in  any  diplomatic  or  naval  officer.  There  may 
be  a  question  as  to  the  particular  wording  of  the  order  which  Mr.  Blount 
gave  to  Admiral  Skerrett  for  the  lowering  of  the  flag  and  the  with- 
drawal of  the  troops,  but  that  is  a  hyper  criticism,  because  the  substan- 
tial fact  was  that  Mr.  Blount  executed  the  command  of  the  President 
in  communicating  to  Admiral  Skerrett  such  order,  as  the  order  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States.  Mr.  Blount's  authority  had  been  made 
known  to  Admiral  Skerrett;  his  instructions  had  been  exhibited  to 
Admiral  Skerrett;  and  they  both  understood  that  what  Mr.  Blount 
was  then  doing  had  received  the  sanction  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  before  Mr.  Blount  had  entered  upon  the  discharge  of  his  minis- 
terial functions,  and  that  his  actwould  receive  the  unqualified  approval 
of  the  President  of  the  United  States.  That  being  so,  the  mere  form 
in  which  the  order  was  addressed  to  Admiral  "Skerrett  seems  to  be  a 
matter  of  no  serious  consequence. 


XXVI  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  • 

The*control  given  to  Mr.  Trist  over  the  military  operations  in  Mexico, 
when  war  was  flagrant,  was  far  greater  than  that  which  was  confided 
to  Mr.  Blount.  The  secret  orders  given  to  the  commanders  of  the 
Army  and  of  the  Navy  on  that  occasion  are  set  out  in  the  appendix  to 
this  report. 

When  Mr.  Willis  arrived  in  Honolulu  he  was  received  by  the  Pro- 
visional Government,  to  which  he  was  accredited,  and  an  interchange 
of  the  usual  courtesies  was  had  between  them.  He  carried  instruction  s, 
as  minister  of  the  United  States,  which  did  not  concern  the  Govern- 
ment of  Hawaii  until  they  had  been  attended  with  a  certain  result 
which  he  endeavored  to  bring  about.  That  result  was  that  Liliuokalani 
should  agree  that,  in  the  event  of  her  restoration  to  the  throne,  not  by 
the  action  of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  but  in  any  other  event, 
or  by  any  agreement,  she  would  bind  herself  to  grant  full  and  free 
amnesty  to  all  persons  who  had  been  engaged  in  opposition  to  her 
alleged  authority.  When  that  agreement  had  been  obtained  Mr.  Willis 
was  instructed  to  submit  it  to  the  Provisional  Government  and  ascer- 
tain whether  they  would  agree  to  restore  the  Queen  to  the  throne  under 
those  circumstances  and  upon  those  conditions.  If  this  was  inter- 
vention, it  was  in  the  interest  of  Americans  in  Hawaii.  It  was  an 
exaction  upon  Liliuokalani  which  would  forbid,  under  the  penalty  of  war, 
that  should  she  acquire  the  throne  by  whatever  means,  that  she  should 
openly  disavow  any  purpose  to  inflict  any  pains  andL  penalties  upon 
those  who  had  supported  the  Provisional  Government.  Liliuokalani, 
after  several  efforts  on  the  part  of  Mr.  Willis  to  obtain  her  consent 
to  this  proposition,  finally  signed,  it  without  the  assent  of  her  min- 
isters, and  it  was  attested  by  Mr.  Carter,  who  was  m>  personal  and 
political  friend.  Her  declaration  or  agreement  thus  signed  and  deliv- 
ered to  Mr.  Willis  was  by  him  presented  to  the  President  of  the  Pro- 
visional Government  (who  was  also  minister  of  foreign  affairs),  and 
the  question  whether  or  not  it  would  be  accepted  by  the  Government 
of  Hawaii  was  submitted  to  him.  Whereupon  the  President  of  the 
Provisional  Government  declined  to  accept  the  proposition;  declined 
to  yield  the  power  which  had  been  vested  in  him  as  the  chief  execu- 
tive of  Hawaii j  and  nothing  more  was  done  either  to  induce  him,  or  to 
compel  him,  to  consent  to,  or  to  assist  in,  the  restoration  of  Liliuoka- 
lani to  the  throne  or  the  restoration  of  the  Monarchy. 

If,  in  this  course  of  proceeding,  the  President  of  the  United  States 
had  intended  to  compel  obedience  to  what  is  termed  his  " decision"  in 
the  matter  by  using  the  force  of  the  United  States  to  assist  the  Queen 
in  being  enthroned,  that  would  have  been  an  act  of  war,  entirely  beyond 
his  power,  and  would  not  have  received  the  sanction  of  any  consider- 
able part  of  the  American  people,  and  would  have  no  warrant  in  inter- 
national law.  But  such  w^as  not  the  intention  of  the  President,  as  is 
shown  by  contemporaneous  acts,  by  his  declarations,  and  by  his  subse- 
quent treatment  of  the  subject.  Therefore,  the  question  between  the 
United  States  and  Hawaii  touching  the  propriety  of  an  intervention  in 
the  domestic  affairs  of  Hawaii  to  the  extent  of  gaining  the  final  deci- 
sion and  agreement  of  both  parties  upon  these  propositions  is  one  that 
is  strictly  within  the  accepted  right  or  authority  of  a  sovereign  to  ten- 
der his  good  offices  to  reconcile  the  conflicts  of  two  or  more  factions, 
or  parties,  that  may  be  opposed  to  each  other  within  any  country.  The 
tender  of  good  offices  has  often  been  voluntarily  made  in  the  interest 
of  humanity  ?  of  peace,  Of  law,  and  of  order,  or  at  the  suggestion  of  one 
of  two  belligerent  powers  actually  engaged  in  war.    Sometimes  it  has 


HAWAII  AX   ISLANDS.  XXVII 

been  made  at  tlie  suggestion  of  that  party  in  a  government,  engaged 
in  actual  hostilities,  which  had  the  evident  power  to  crush  its  opponent 
by  prosecuting  the  war  to  extremities.  In  such  cases  the  intervention 
has  often  been  accepted  as  a  merciful  interposition,  and  it  has  been  con- 
sidered an  honor  by  other  governments  that  they  should  be  requested, 
under  such  circumstances,  to  exercise  their  good  offices  in  favor  of  pro- 
curing peace  through  a  submission  to  inevitable  results.  When  the 
tender  of  good  offices  is  made  at  the  request  of  both  of  the  contending 
parties  it  is  difficult  to  conceive  how  any  sovereign  of  a  foreign  country 
could  refuse  to  act  in  such  matter. 

In  the  public  act  by  which  the  Provisional  Government  of  Hawaii  was 
established  there  was  a  distinct  declaration  that  that  Government  was 
to  continue  until  Hawaii  was  annexed  to  the  United  States.  That 
declaration,  apart  from  every  other  consideration,  would  have  justified 
the  United  States  in  an  interference  for  the  protection  of  the  Provi- 
sional Government  which  would  not  have  been  tolerated  under  other 
circumstances.  That  declaration  created  an  intimacy  of  relationship 
between  the  United  States  and  the  recognized  Government  of  Hawaii 
which  is  entirely  exceptional,  and  which  placed  within  the  reach  and 
control  of  the  United  States  very  largely,  if  not  entirely,  the  disposal 
of  those  questions  collateral  to  that  of  annexation  which  might  have 
interfered  with  the  peaceful  and  appropriate  solution  of  any  difficulty 
which  might  arise  in  its  execution.  So  that  the  Provisional  Govern- 
ment of  Hawaii,  having  thus  thrown  itself  into  the  arms  of  the  United 
States  in  the  first  declaration  of  its  existence,  can  not  justly  complain 
that  the  United  States  should  scrutinize,  under  the  authority  thus 
given,  all  its  pretensions  of  right  thus  to  dispose  of  an  entire  country 
and  people.  And  Liliuokalani,  having  reference  to  the  same  project  of 
annexation,  of  which  she  was  fully  cognizant,  made  complaint  that  the 
United  States  had  assisted  in  driving  her  from  her  throne  by  bringing 
its  troops  on  shore  in  military  array  at  a  time  when  there  was  no  neces- 
sity for  it,  distinctly  announced  at  the  moment  of  her  final  and  avowed 
abdication  that  she  would  abdicate  provisionally  and  would  await  the 
decision  of  the  United  States  as  to  whether  that  abdication  and  the 
destruction  of  the  Kingdom  and  the  annexation  of  Hawaii  to  the  United 
States  should  become  completed  facts.  Under  such  circumstances  the 
President  of  the  United  States,  believing  that  the  information  then  in 
possession  of  the  Government  was  not  sufficient  to  justify  summary 
annexation,  could  not  have  done  justice  to  himself,  to  his  country,  to 
the  people  of  Hawaii,  to  the  Provisional  Government,  or  to  Liliuokalani, 
without  having  made  an  effort  to  use  his  good  offices  for  the  purpose 
of  ascertaining  Avhether  it  was  practicable  that  the  Queen  should  be 
restored  to  her  authority,  leaving  the  question  to  be  determined  by  the 
people  interested  in  Hawaii  whether  such  restoration  would  be  accept- 
able to  them  or  not.  If  Liliuokalani  had  been  restored  to  her  throne 
by  the  consent  of  the  membership  of  the  Provisional  Government,  upon 
the  terms  and  conditions  of  the  proposition  which  she  signed  and 
delivered  to  Mr.  Willis,  the  President  of  the  United  States  would  not 
have  been  in  any  sense  responsible  for  her  restoration,  would  not  have 
espoused  the  monarchy,  nor  would  he  have  done  anything  that  was 
contradictory  of  American  sentiment,  opinion,  or  policy.  He  would 
only  have  been  the  mutual  friend,  accepted,  really,  by  both  parties, 
whose  intervention  would  have  secured,  with  their  consent,  the  final 
solution  of  that  question.  In  the  absence  of'  such  committal  on  ?>is 
part  to  the  claims  of  Liliuokalani  or  resistance  on  his  part  to  the 


XXVIII  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

recognized  lights  of  the  Provisional  Government,  there  is  no  reason  for 
withholding  approval  of  the  conduct  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  in  thus  accepting  and  executing  a  function  which  he  was  entitled 
to  perfoim,  in  submitting  the  question,  in  due  and  final  form,  to  the 
contending  parties  or  factions  in  Hawaii,  whether  they  preferred  to 
maintain  the  authority  of  the  Provisional  Government,  with  whatever 
results  may  follow  from  that,  or  a  return  to  the  monarchy  under  Liliuo- 
kalani. 

Therefore  your  committee  conclude  to  report  that  the  President  of 
the  United  States  has  not,  in  this  particular,  in  any  wise  been  a  party 
to  any  irregularity  or  any  impropriety  of  conduct  in  his  high  office. 

The  committee  find  nothing  worthy  of  criticism  in  the  negotiation 
of  the  treaty  of  annexation  with  the  Provisional  Government  of 
Hawaii. 

The  revolution  in  Hawaii  had  the  effect  of  displacing  one  chief  of 
the  executive  department)  and  substituting  another.  Except  the 
Queen  and  her  cabinet,  no  officer  of  the  Government  was  removed. 
The  legislative  body,  including  the  house  of  nobles  and  "house  of 
representatives  and  their  presiding  officers,  remained  in  commission. 
The  supreme  court  and  all  other  judicial  magistracies  and  the  officers 
of  the  courts  were  left  undisturbed,  and,  when  the  interregnum  ended, 
they  pursued  their  duties  without  change  or  interruption;  commerce 
with  foreign  countries  and  between  the  islands  was  not  in  any  way 
prevented,  and  the  commercial  and  banking  houses  were  open  for  busi- 
ness, which  resumed  activity  when  the  executive  head  of  the  Govern- 
ment was  again  in  the  exercise  of  lawful  authority. 

The  Government  had  not  been  displaced  and  another  substituted,  but 
only  a  department  which  was  left  vacant  had  been  rehabilitated. 

When  this  was  done  and  the  fact  was  recognized,  the  Government  of 
Hawaii  was  as  competent  to  treat  of  annexation  to  the  United  States 
as  it  had  ever  been,  or  as  it  ever  will  be,  until  the  United  States  shall 
decide  that  it  will  annex  no  more  territory  unless  with  the  consent  of 
the  people  to  be  annexed,  to  be  ascertained  by  a  plebiscite. 

Complaint  is  made  also  that  this  project  of  annexation  was  attempted 
to  be  consummated  in  too  great  haste. 

That  raises  a  question  of  due  consideration;  for,  if  the  people  of  both 
countries  desired  it,  or  if,  according  to  every  precedent  to  be  found  in 
the  various  annexations  of  countries  and  States  to  the  United  States, 
the  respective  governments  desired  it,  speedy  action  in  completing  the 
cession  was  desirable  for  many  obvious  reasons,  among  which  the  inju- 
rious disturbance  of  commerce  and  danger  to  the  public  peace  grow- 
ing out  of  a  protracted  agitation  of  so  grave  a  matter,  are  conspicuous. 

But  this  is  a  question  of  long  standing,  which  has  been  under  favor- 
able consideration  by  the  kings  and  people  of  Hawaii  and  the  Govern- 
ment and  people  of  the  United  States  for  more  than  fifty  years. 

It  is  well  understood,  and  its  importance  increases  with  every  new 
event  of  any  consequence  in  Hawaii,  and  with  the  falling-in  of  every 
island  in  the  Pacific  Ocean  that  is  captured  by  the  great  maritime 
powers  of  Europe.  The  committee  have  copied,  in  the  Appendix  to 
this  report,  portions  of  the  remarks  of  Hon.  William.  P.  Draper  in  the 
House  of  Eepresentatives  on  the  4th  of  February,  1894,  which  refer  in 
a  very  clear  and  concise  way  to  the  progress  of  foreign  intervention  in 
the  Pacific  Ocean  by  European  powers.  The  committee  also  present 
the  following  message  of  President  Grant  to  the  Senate,  with  the 
accompanying  letter  of  Hon.  Henry  A.  Peirce,  then  our  minister  to. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  XXIX 

Hawaii,  which  shows  that  the  subject  of  cession  and  annexation  have 
been  on  several  occasions  carefully  considered  by  the  governments  of 
Hawaii  and  the  United  States. 

[Confidential. — Executive  B. — Forty-second  Congress,  first  session.] 

Message  of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  transmitting  a  copy  of  a 
dispatch  relative  to  the  annexation  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  addressed 
to  the  Department  of  State  by  Henry  A.  Pierce,  minister  resident  of 
the  United  States  at  Honolulu. 

April  7,  1871. — Read  and,  with  the  dispatch  referred  to  the  Committee  on  Foreign 
Relations,  ordered  to  be  printed  in  confidence  for  the  use  of  the  Senate. 

To  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

I  transmit  confidentially,  for  the  information  and  consideration  of 
the  Senate,  a  copy  of  a  dispatch  of  the  25th  of  February  last,  relative 
to  the  annexation  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  addressed  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  by  Henry  A.  Pierce,  minister  resident  of  the  United 
States  at  Honolulu.  Although  I  do  not  deem  it  advisable  to  express 
any  opinion  or  to  make  any  recommendation  in  regard  to  the  subject 
at  this  juncture,  the  views  of  the  Senate,  if  it  should  be  deemed  proper 
to  express  them,  would  be  very  acceptable  with  reference  to  any  future 
course  which  there  might  be  a  disposition  to  adopt. 

U.  S.  Grant. 

Washington,  April  5, 1871. 

Mr.  Pierce  to  Mr.  Fish. 

;No.  101.]      Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America, 

Honolulu,  February  25,  1871. 

Sir:  Impressed  with  the  importance  of  the  subject  now  presented 
lor  consideration,  I  beg  leave  to  suggest  the  inquiry  wmether  the  period 
has  not  arrived  making  it  proper,  wise,  and  sagacious  for  the  IT.  S. 
Government  to  again  consider  the  project  of  annexing  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  to  the  territory  of  the  Kepublic.  That  such  is  to  be  the 
political  destiny  of  this  archipelago  seems  a  foregone  conclusion  in 
the  opinion  of  all  who  have  given  attention  to  the  subject  in  this 
country,  the  United  States,  England,  France,  and  Germany. 

A  majority  of  the  aborigines,  Creoles,  and  naturalized  foreigners  of 
this  country,  as  I  am  credibly  informed,  are  favorable,  even  anxious  for 
the  consummation  of  the  measure  named. 

The  event  of  the  decease  of  the  present  sovereign  of  Hawaii,  leaving 
no  heirs  or  successor  to  the  throne,  and  the  consequent  election  to  be 
made  by  the  legislative  assembly  of  a  king,  and  new  stirps  for  a  royal 
family,  will  produce  a  crisis  in  political  affairs  which,  it  is  thought,  will 
be  availed  of  as  a  propitious  occasion  to  inaugurate  measures  for 
annexation  of  the  islauds  to  the  United  States,  the  same  to  be  effected 
as  the  manifest  will  and  choice  of  the  majority  of  the  Hawaiian 
people,  and  through  means  proper,  peaceful,  and  honorable. 

It  is  evident,  however,  no  steps  will  be  taken  to  accomplish  the 
object  named  without  the  proper  sanction  or  approbation  of  the  U.  S. 
Government  in  approval  thereof. 

The  Hawaiian  people  for  fifty  years  have  been  under  educational 
instruction  of  American  missionaries,  and  the  civilizing  influences  of 


XXX      .  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

New  England  people,  commercial  and  maritime.  Hence  they  are  puri- 
tan and  democratic  in  tlieir  ideas  and  tendencies,  modified  by  a  trop- 
ical climate.  Tlieir  favorite  songs  and  airs  are  American.  Sherman's 
"Marching  Through  Georgia"  and  "  John  Brown's  Soul  is  Marching 
On"  are  daily  heard  in  the  streets  and  in  their  schoolrooms.  The 
fifteenth  amendment  to  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  has 
made  the  project  of  annexation  to  our  Union  more  popular  than  ever 
both  here  and  in  the  United  States. 

The  native  population  is  fast  disappearing •  the  number  existing  is 
now  estimated  at  45,000,  having  decreased  about  15,000  since  the 
census  of  1866.  The  number  of  foreigners  in  addition  is  between 
5,000  and  6,000,  two-thirds  of  whom  are  from  the  United  States,  and 
they  own  more  than  that  proportion  of  foreign  capital,  as  represented 
in  the  agriculture,  commerce,  navigation,  and  whale  fisheries  of  the 
Kingdom. 

This  country  and  sovereignty  will  soon  be  left  to  the  possession  ot 
foreigners,  uto  unlineal  hands,  no  sons  of  theirs  succeeding."  To 
what  foreign  nation  shall  these  islands  belong  if  not  to  the  great  Repub- 
lic? At  the  present  those  of  foreign  nativities  hold  all  the  important 
offices  of  government  and  control  legislation,  tne  judiciary,  etc.  Well 
disposed  as  the  Government  now  is  towards  the  United  States  and  its 
resident  citizens  here,  in  course  of  time  it  may  be  otherwise,  as  was  the 
case  during  our  civil  war. 

I  now  proceed  to  state  some  points  of  a  more  general  character, 
which  should  influence  the  U.  S.  Government  in  their  decision  of 
the  policy  of  acquiring  possession  of  this  archipelago,  their  geo- 
graphical position  occupying,  as  it  does,  an  important  central, 
strategical  point  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean,  valuable,  perhaps  neces- 
sary, to  the  United  States  for  a  naval  depot  and  coaling  station,  and 
to  shelter  and  protect  our  commerce  and  navigation,  which  in  this  hem- 
isphere is  destined  to  increase  enormously  from  our  intercourse  with 
the  500,000,000  population  of  China,  Japan,  and  Australia.  Huinbolt 
predicted  that  the  commerce  on  the  Pacific  would,  in  time,  rival  that 
on  the  Atlantic.  A  future  generation,  no  doubt,  will  see  the  prophecy 
fulfilled. 

The  immense  injury  inflicted  on  American  navigation  and  commerce 
by  Great  Britain  in  the  war  of  1812-1814  through  her  possessions  of 
Bermuda  and  other  West  India  Islands,  as  also  that  suffered  by  the 
English  from  French  privateers  from  the  Isle  of  France  during  the 
wars  between  those  nations,  are  instances  in  proof  of  the  necessity  of 
anticipating  and  preventing,  when  we  can,  similar  evils  that  may  issue 
from  these  islands  if  held  by  other  powers.  Their  proximity  to  the 
Pacific  States  of  the  Union,  fine  climate  and  soil,  and  tropical  produc- 
tions of  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  fruits,  hides,  goatskins,  salt,  cotton,  fine 
wool,  etc.,  required  by  the  West,  in  exchange  for  flour,  grain,  lumber, 
shooks,  and  manufactures  of  cotton,  wool,  iron,  and  other  articles  are 
evidence  of  the  commercial  value  of  one  to  the  other  region. 

Is  it  probable  that  any  European  power  who  may  hereafter  be  at 
war  with  the  United  States  will  refrain  from  taking  possession  of  this 
weak  kingdom,  in  view  of  the  great  injury  that  could  be  done  to  our 
commerce  through  their  acquisition  of  them? 

It  is  said  that  at  a  proper  time  the  United  States  may  have  the 
sovereignty  of  these  islands  without  money  and  without  price,  except, 
perhaps,  for  purchase  of  the  Crown  and  public  lands,  and  moderate 
annuities  to  be  given  to  the  five  or  six  high  chiefs  now  living  with 
uncertain  elainrs  as  successors  to  the  Crown. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  XXXI 

His  Hawaiian  Majesty,  although  only  in  his  forty-first  year,  is  liable 
to  a  sudden  decease,  owing  to  frequent  attacks  of  difficulty  in  breath- 
ing and  danger  of  suffocation  from  congestion  caused  by  obesity.  His 
weight  is  300  pounds.  He  is  sole  survivor  of  the  royal  race  of  Kame- 
hameha; unmarried,  no  heir,  natural  or  adopted;  possesses  the  consti- 
tutional prerogative  of  naming  his  successor,  but  it  is  believed  he  will 
not  exercise  it,  from  a  superstitious  belief  his  own  death  would  follow 
immediately  the  act. 

Prince  Alexander  and  Lott  Kamehameha  (the  former  subsequently 
became  the  fourth  Hawaiian  King  and  the  latter  the  fifth)  and  Dr.  G. 
P.  Judd,  my  informant,  visited  England  in  1850  as  Hawaiian  commis- 
sioners. 

Lord  Palmerston,  at  their  interview  with  him,  said,  in  substance, 
"that  the  British  Government  desired  the  Hawaiian  people  to  maintain 
proper  government  and  preserve  national  independence.  If  they  were 
unable  to  do  so  he  recommended  receiving  a  protectorate  government 
under  the  United  States  or  by  becoming  an  integral  part  of  that  nation. 
Such,"  lie  thought,  "was  the  destiny  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  arising 
from  their  proximity  to  the  States  of  California  and  Oregon  and 
natural  dependence  on  those  markets  for  exports  and  imports,  together 
with  probable  extinction  of  the  Hawaiian  aboriginal  population  and  its 
substitution  by  immigration  from  the  United  States."  That  advice 
seems  sound  and  prophetic. 

The  following  historical  events  in  relation  to  these  islands  are  thought 
worthy  of  revival  in  recollection : 

February  25,  1843. — Lord  George  Paulet,  of  Her  Britannic  Majesty's 
ship  Carysfort,  obtained,  by  forceful  measures,  cession  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  to  the  Government  of  Great  Britain,  July  31, 1843.  They  were 
restored  to  their  original  sovereignty  by  the  British  Admiral  Thomas. 

November  28,  1843. — Joint  convention  of  the  English  and  French 
Governments,  which  acknowledged  the  independence  of  this  archi- 
pelago and  reciprocally  promised  never  to  take  possession  of  any  part 
of  same.  Ttie  United  States  Government  was  invited  to  be  a  party  to 
the  above  but  declined. 

August,  1849. — Admiral  Tromelin,  with  a  French  naval  force,  after 
making  demands  on  the  Hawaiian  Government  impossible  to  be  com- 
plied with,  took  unresisted  possession  of  the  fort  and  Government 
buildings  in  Honolula,  and  blockaded  the  harbor.  After  a  few  weeks' 
occupation  of  the  jdace  the  French  departed,  leaving  political  affairs 
as  they  were  previous  to  their  arrival. 

'January,  1851. — A  French  naval  force  again  appeared  at  Honolula, 
and  threatened  bombardment  and  destruction  of  the  town. 

The  King,  Kamehameha  III,  with  the  Government,  fearing  it  would 
be  carried  into  effect,  and  in  mortal  dread  of  being  brought  under 
French  rule  similar  to  that  placed  by  the  latter  over  Tahiti,  of  the 
Society  Islands,  executed  a  deed  of  cession  of  all  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
and  their  sovereignty  forever  in  favor  of  the  United  States  of  America. 

The  document  in  a  sealed  envelope  was  placed  in  charge  of  Mr.  Sev- 
erance, United  States  commissioner  here,  with  instructions  to  take 
forma]  official  possession  of  the  soil  of  these  islands  on  occasion  of  the 
first  hostile  shot  fired  by  the  French.  On  learning  the  facts  the  latter 
desisted  further  aggressive  acts  and  departed  from  the  country. 

Since  that  period  the  French  authorities  have  pursued  a  conciliatory 
course  in  their  relations  with  the  Hawaiian  Government,  and  fully  of 
opinion,  it  is  said,  that  a  secret  treaty  exists  between  the  United  States 
Government  and  that  of  Hawaii,  by  which  these  islands  pass  into  tha 


XXXII  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

possession  of  the  former  in  case  of  aggressions  made  npon  them  there- 
after by  any  hostile  powers. 

In  1854  the  administration  of  President  Pierce  authorized  the 
United  States  commissioner,  Mr.  Gregg,  to  negotiate  a  treaty  with  the 
Hawaiian  authorities  for  the  cession  of  the  sovereignty  of  these  islands 
to  the  United  States;  but  Mr.  Gregg  succeeded  only  in  obtaining  a 
protocol  for  a  treaty,  by  which  the  United  States  were  to  extend  a' 
protectorate  government  over  them.  The  matter  in  that  form  did  not 
meet  with  the  approval  of  Mr.  Secretary  Marcy,  and"  further  negotia- 
tions ceased. 

I  omitted  to  state  in  proper  sequence  that  the  deed  of  cession  of  1851 
was,  by  order  of  the  Secretary  of  State,  Mr.  Webster,  returned  to  the 
Hawaiian  Government. 

In  conclusion,  I  herewith  inclose  Annual  Review  of  the  Agriculture 
and  Commerce  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  for  the  year  1870,  published  by 
the  Pacific  Commercial  Advertiser,  February  25,  1871.  Additional 
copies  will  accompany  my  dispatch  No.  102.  Permit  me  to  refer  you  to 
a  lithographic  map,  published  in  1867  by  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Statistics,  as 
showing  in  convenient  form  the  relative  position  of  these  islands  to  the 
continents  of  America,  Asia,  etc. ;  also,  steamship  lines  radiating  there- 
from. 

With  great  respect,  your  obedient,  humble  servant, 

Henry  A.  Pierce. 

Hon.  Hamilton  Fish, 

Secretary  of  State,  Washington,  D.  (7. 

A  President  informed  as  to  the  history  of  his  country  could  find  no 
difficulty  in  dealing  with  the  question  of  the  annexation  of  Hawaii  to  the 
United  States  on  the  ground  that  it  is  new;  and  a  minister  to  Hawaii 
who  should  fail  to  inform  his  Government  of  the  political  changes  in 
Hawaii  that  would  affect  that  question  would  neglect  his  duty. 

It  is  not  a  just  criticism  upon  the  correspondence  of  Minister  Stevens 
with  his  Government  that  he  earnestly  advocated  annexation.  In  this 
he  was  in  line  with  Mr.  Marcy  and  nearly  every  one  of  his  successors 
as  Secretary  of  State,  and  with  many  of  Mr.  Stevens's  predecessors  as 
minister  to  Hawaii.  His  letters  to  his  Government  were  written  under 
the  diplomatic  confidence  that  is  requisite  to  secure  freedom  in  such 
communications,  and  were  not  expected  to  come  under  the  scrutiny  of 
all  mankind.  They  show  no  improper  spirit  and  are  not  impeachable  as 
coloring  or  perverting  the  truth,  although  some  matters  stated  by  him 
may  be  classed  as  severe  reflections.  Whatever  motives  may  have 
actuated  or  controlled  any  representative  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  in  his  conduct  of  our  affairs  in  Hawaii,  if  he  acted  within 
the  limits  of  his  powers,  with  hohest  intentions,  and  has  not  placed  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  upon  false  and  untenable  grounds, 
his  conduct  is  not  irregular. 

But,  in  his  dealings  with  the  Hawaiian  Government,  his  conduct  was 
characterized  by  becoming  dignity  and  reserve,  and  was  not  in  any 
way  harsh  or  offensive.  In  the  opinion  of  the  committee,  based  upon 
the  evidence  which  accompanies  this  report,  the  only  substantial  irregu- 
larity that  existed  in  the  conduct  of  any  officer  of  the  United  States, 
or  agent  of  the  President,  during  or  since  the  time  of  the  revolution  of 
1893,  was  that  of  Minister  Stevens  in  declaring  a.  protectorate  of  the 
United  States  over  Hawaii,  and  in  placing  the  flag  of  our  country 
upon  the  Government  building  in  Honolulu.    No  actual  harm  resulted 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  XXXI II 

from  this  unauthorized  act,  but  as  a  precedent  it  is  not  to  be  con- 
sidered as  being  justified.  The  committee  have  not  considered  it 
necessary  to  present  any  resolutions  stating  the  conclusions  that  arc 
indicated  in  this  report,  and  ask  that  they  be  discharged  from  the  further 
consideration  of  the  resolutions  under  which  this  report  is  made. 


We  are  in  entire  accord  with  the  essential  findings  in  the  exceed 
ingly  able  report  submitted  by  the  chairman  of  the  Committee  on  For 
eign  Relations.     But  it  is  our  opinion — 

First.  That  the  appointment  on  the  11th  day  of  March,  1893,  with- 
out the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate,  of  Hon.  James  H.  Blount  as 
"special  commissioner"  to  the  Hawaiian  Government  under  letters 
of  credence  and  those  of  instruction,  which  declared  that  u  in  all  mat- 
ters affecting  relations  with  the  Government  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
his  authority  is  paramount"  was  an  unconstitutional  act,  in  that  such 
appointee,  Mr.  Blount,  was  never  nominated  to  the  Senate,  but  was 
appointed  without  its  advice  and  consent,  although  that  body  was  in 
session  when  such  appointment  was  made  and  continued  to  be  in  ses- 
sion for  a  long  time  immediately  thereafter. 

Second.  The  orders  of  the  Executive  Department  by  which  the  naval 
force  of  the  United  States  in  the  harbor  of  Honolulu  was  in  effect 
placed  under  the  command  of  Mr.  Blount  or  of  Mr.  Willis  were  with 
out  authority  or  warrant  of  law. 

Third.  The  order  given  by  Mr.  Blount  to  Admiral  Skerrett  to  lower 
the  United  States  ensign  from  the  Government  building  in  Honolulu 
and  to  embark  the  troops  on  the  ships  to  which  they  belonged,  was  an 
order  which  Mr.  Blount  had  no  lawful  authority  to  give.  Its  object 
was  not  to  terminate  a  protectorate.  That  relation  had  been  disa- 
vowed by  the  administration  of  President  Harrison  immediately  upon 
receiving  information  of  its  establishment.  The  flag  and  troops,  when 
such  order  was  given  by  Mr.  Blount,  were  in  the  positions  from  which 
he  ordered  them  to  be  removed  for  the  purpose  of  maintaining  order 
and  protecting  American  life  and  property.  Their  presence  had  been 
effectual  to  those  ends,  and  their  removal  tended  to  create,  and  did 
create,  public  excitement  and,  to  a  degree,  distrust  of  the  power  of  the 
Provisional  Government  to  preserve  order  or  to  maintain  itself.  That 
order  of  Mr.  Blount  was  susceptible  of  being  construed  as  indicating 
an  unfriendly  disposition  on  the  part  of  the  United  States  toward  the 
Provisional  Government,  and  it  was  so  construed,  particularly  by  the 
people  of  Hawaii. 

In  the  light  of  subsequent  relations  between  Mr.  Blount  and  Ms  suc- 
cessor, Mr.  Willis,  with  the  Queen,  whose  office  had  become  vacant  by 
her  deposition  and  abdication  under  the  attack  of  a  successful  revolu- 
tion, this  order  and  its  execution  were  most  unfortunate  and  untoward 
in  their  effect.  Such  relations  and  intercourse  by  Messrs.  Blount  and 
Willis  with  the  head  and  with  the  executive  officers  of  an  overthrown 
government,  conducted  for  the  purpose  of  restoring  that  government 
by  displacing  its  successor,  were  in  violation  of  the  constitution  aad  of 
the  principles  of  international  law  and  were  not  warranted  by  the  cir- 
cumstances of  the  case. 

Fourth.  The  question  of  the  rightfulness  of  the  revolution,  of  the 
lawfulness  of  the  means  by  which  the  deposition  and  abdication  of  the 
Queen  were  effected,  and  the  right  of  the  Provisional  Government  to 
S.  Eep.  227 m 


XXXIV  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

exist  and  to  continue  to  exist  was  conclusively  settled,  as  the  report 
so  forcibly  states,  against  the  Queen  and  in  favor  of  the  Provisional 
Government,  by  the  act  of  the  administration  of  President  Harrison 
recognizing  such  Provisional  Government,  by  the  negotiation  by  that 
administration  with  such  Provisional  Government  of  a  treaty  of  annex- 
ation to  the  United  States ;  by  accrediting  diplomatic  representation 
by  such  administration  and  by  the  present  administration  to  such  Pro- 
visional Government;  therefore,  it  incontrovertibly  follows  that  the 
President  of  the  United  States  had  no  authority  to  attempt  to  reopen 
such  determined  questions,  and  to  endeavor  by  any  means  whatever  to 
overthrow  the  Provisional  Government  or  to  restore  the  monarchy 
which  it  had  displaced. 

While  it  is  true  that  a  friendly  power  may  rightfully  tender  its  good 
offices  of  mediation  or  advice  in  cases  such  as  that  under  present  con- 
sideration, it  is  also  true  that  the  performance  of  such  offices  of  media- 
tion or  advice  ought  not  to  be  entered  upon  without  the  consent  previ- 
ously given  by  both  the  parties  whom  the  action  or  decision  of  the 
friendly  power  may  affect.  Such  consent  was  not  given  in  the  present 
instance.  The  Provisional  Government  never  so  consented ;  it  was  never 
requested  to  consent.  It  denied  the  jurisdiction  of  the  present  admin- 
istration on  every  proper  occasion.  Therefore  the  proceedings  by  the 
President,  which  had  for  their  result  his  request  and  monition  to  the 
Provisional  Government  to  surrender  its  powers,  to  give  up  its  exist- 
ence and  to  submit  to  be  displaced  by  the  monarchy  which  it  had  over- 
thrown, had  no  warrant  in  law,  nor  in  any  consent  of  one  of  the  parties 
to  be  affected  by  such  proceedings. 

Fifth.  The  avowed  opinion  of  the  President  of  the  United  States, 
in  substance,  that  it  is  the  duty  of  this  Government  to  make  repara- 
tion to  the  Queen  by  endeavoring  to  reinstate  her  upon  her  throne  by 
all  constitutional  methods,  is  a  clear  definition  of  the  policy  of  the 
present  administration  to  that  end.  The  instructions  to  Messrs.  Blount 
and  Willis  must  be  construed  to  be  other  and  more  ample  forms  of  ex- 
pression of  that  policy.  No  other  presumption  is  permissible  than  that 
their  actions  at  Honolulu  were  with  intent  to  carry  out  that  avowed 
policy.  These  considerations  make  immaterial  any  discussion,  in  this 
connection,  of  the  personal  intentions,  circumspection,  or  good  faith  of 
these  gentlemen  in  the  performance  of  the  task  to  which  they  had  been 
plainly  commanded  by  the  present  administration. 

John  Sherman. 

Wm.  P.  Frye. 

J.  N.  Dolph. 

Cushman  K.  Davis. 


ADDITIONAL  VIEWS   SUBMITTED  BY  MEMBEKS  OF  THE 

COMMITTEE. 


The  undersigned,  members  of  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Bela- 
tions,  submit  herewith  the  following  views  adverse  to  the  report  of  the 
committee,  upon  the  subject  of  the  recent  political  revolution  in  Hawaii. 

Agreeing  as  we  do  with  the  conclusions  submitted  by  the  chairman 
of  the  committee  that  no  irregularities  were  committed  either  in  the 
appointment  of  Special  Commissioner  Blount  or  in  the  instructions 
given  him  by  the  President,  and  without  denying  or  conceding  in  any 
manner  the  correctness  of  the  facts  as  claimed,  or  of  the  statements  as 
made,  in  said  report  concerning  other  matters  therein  mentioned,  we 
especially  dissent  from  that  portion  thereof  which  declares  that  the 
only  substantial  irregularity  in  the  conduct  of  Mr.  Stevens,  the  late 
minister,  was  his  declaration  of  a  protectorate  by  the  United  States 
over  Hawaii.  We  are  of  the  opinion  also  that  there  are  no  valid  rea- 
sons and  no  course  of  dealing  in  our  past  relations  with  those  islands 
which  justifies  interference  by  the  United  States  with  the  political 
internal  affairs  of  Hawaii  any  more  than  with  those  of  any  other  inde- 
pendent state  or  nation  in  this  hemisphere.  We  can  not  concur,  there- 
fore, in  so  much  of  the  foregoing  report  as  exonerates  the  minister  of 
the  United  States,  Mr.  Stevens,  from  active  officious  and  unbecoming 
participation  in  the  events  which  led  to  the  revolution  in  the  Sandwich 
Islands  on  the  14th,  16th,  and  17th  of  January,  1893.  His  own  admis- 
sions in  his  official  correspondence  with  this  Government,  his  conduct 
for  months  preceding  the  revolution,  as  well  as  the  facts  established 
by  the  evidence  before  the  committee,  clearly  justify  such  a  conclusion. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  are  not  inclined  to  censure  Capt.  Wiltse, 
commanding  the  United  States  war-ship  Boston,  or  the  officers  of  that 
vessel.  Their  position  was  one  of  extreme  delicacy  and  difficulty,  and 
we  appreciate  their  anxiety  to  afford  protection  to  the  lives  and  prop- 
erty of  American  citizens.  The  force  of  United  States  marines  of  the 
Boston  with  their  ordinary  arms  stationed  at  the  American  legation, 
and  at  the  consulate  in  Honolulu,  would  have  effectually  represented 
the  authority  and  power  of  the  United  States  Government,  and  would 
have  afforded  whatever  protection  American  interests  might  have 
required;  and  at  the  same  time  would  have  avoided  the  appearance 
of  coercion  or  duress,  either  upon  the  people  of  Honolulu  or  the  Queen 
in  the  controversy  between  them.  This  is  our  opinion,  after  a  careful 
examination  of  all  the  facts  and  circumstances  disclosed  in  the  evi- 
dence. But,  as  we  have  observed,  the  position  was  a  delicate  and 
difficult  one.  Perhaps  if  we  had  been  on  the  ground  in  the  presence 
of  the  minister,  under  the  influence  of  his  advice  and  counsel,  and 
of  the  environments  and  conditions  surrounding  Capt.  Wiltse,  his 
officers  and  men,  we  might  have  landed  the  forces  as  he  did;  but  a  less 
formidable  array  would  have  removed  from  the  Queen  the  excuse  for 
asserting  that  she  and  her  government  were  overawed  by  the  United 
States  forces,  to  which  she  claims  under  protest  to  have  surrendered, 

XXXV 


XXXVI  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

and  at  the  same  time  have  afforded  all  necessary  protection  to  the 
lives  and  property  of  our  citizens  at  that  port,  if  they  were  in  any 
jeopardy. 

The  moral  support  and  good  offices  of  this  Government,  or  of  any 
government,  is  always  permissible  in  promoting  the  moral  tone  and  polit- 
ical improvement  of  the  government  of  foreign  countries  on  terms  of 
amity  with  their  own;  but  there  is  nothing  in  international  law,  in 
sound  public  policy,  or  in  our  past  history  and  traditions  which  justifies 
a  representative  of  this  Government  in  interfering  officiously  or  improp- 
erly in  the  domestic  or  political  affairs  of  a  foreign  country,  whatever 
may  be  the  character  of  its  rulers,  its  form  of  government,  or  its  politi- 
cal condition.    We.  have  enough  to  do  to  attend  to  our  own  business. 

We  cannot,  therefore,  avoid  the  conviction  that  the  inopportune  zeal 
of  Minister  Stevens  in  the  project  of  annexation  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  to  the  United  States  caused  him  to  exceed  the  proper  limits  of 
his  official  duty  and  of  his  diplomatic  relations  to  the  government  and 
people  of  those  islands.  His  conduct  as  the  public  representative  of 
this  Government  was  directly  conducive  to  bringing  about  the  condition 
of  affairs  which  resulted  in  the  overthrow  of  the  Queen,  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  Provisional  Government,  the  landing  of  the  United  States 
troops,  and  the  attempted  scheme  of  annexation;  and  upon  this  con- 
clusion his  conduct  is  seriously  reprehensible  and  deserving  of  public 
censure. 

M.  0.  Butler, 

David  Turpie, 

John  M.  Daniel, 

George  Gray, 

Members  of  Minority, 
February  22, 1894. 


The  question  of  annexation  is  not  submitted  for  the  consideration  of 
the  committee,  except  as  it  incidentally  affects  the  main  question  dis- 
cussed; but  it  may  not  be  improper  for  me  to  say,  in  this  connection, 
that  I  am  heartily  in  favor  of  the  acquisition  of  those  islands  by  the 
Government  of  the  United  States;  and  in  a  proper  case  and  on  an  appro- 
priate occasion  I  should  earnestly  advocate  the  same.  But  I  am  unwil- 
ling to  take  advantage  of  internal  dissentions  in  those  islands,  for 
which  I  believe  we  are  in  some  measure  responsible,  to  consummate  at 
this  time  so  desirable  an  object. 

M.  0.  Butler. 

I  concur  in  the  above. 

David  Turpie. 


APPENDIX  TO  THE  REPORT  OF  THE  COMMITTEE. 


I.  The  following  is  the  translation  of  the  original  poster 

REFERRED  TO  BY  MR.  HOES  IN  HIS  STATEMENT. 

[Translation.] 

THE  VOICE   OF   THE  PEOPLE. 

1.  A  mass  meeting  will  be  held  in  front  of  the  opera  house,  outside 
of  the  Palace  yard,  at  2  o'clock  this  afternoon,  Monday,  January  16,  to 
consider  the  condition  of  the  country. 

By  order 

Committee  of  Law  and  Order. 

the  voice  of  the  chief. 

2.  On  the  afternoon  of  Saturday  last  the  voice  of  the  sacred  chief 
of  Hawaii,  Liliuokalani,  the  tabued  one,  speaking  as  follows: 

aOh,  ye  people  who.  love  the  chief,  I  hereby  say  to  you,  I  am  now 
ready  to  proclaim  the  new  constitution  for  my  Kingdom,  thinking  that 
it  would  be  successful ;  but  behold  obstacles  have  arisen.  Therefore  I 
say  unto  you,  loving  people,  go  with  good  hope,  and  do  not  be  dis- 
turbed or  troubled  in  your  minds,  because  within  the  next  few  days 
now  coming  I  will  proclaim  the  new  constitution. 

"The  executive  officers  of  the  law  (the  cabinet)  knew  the  errors  in 
this  new  constitution,  but  they  said  nothing. 

"  Therefore,  I  hope  that  the  thing  which  you,  my  people,  so  much 
want  will  be  accomplished;  it  also  is  my  strong  desire." 

And  her  last  order  was  that  we  should  pray  to  God  to  bless  this 
Kingdom  and  the  throne  of  Hawaii. 

STUBBORNNESS. 

3.  From  the  day  of  the  passage  of  the  lottery  bill  until  the  proroga- 
tion of  the  Legislature  the  members  of  the  Keform  party  in  the  House 
have  been  refractory.  It  is  seen  that  this  is  the  Missionary  party.  This 
is  a  childish  act,  showing  the  lack  of  principle  of  the  Reform  party  and 
the  unexampled  pride  of  the  missionaries.  The  missionaries  are  the 
parents  of  these  actions,  and  their  reason  for  so  doing  is  because  of 
their  regret  and  vexation  by  reason  of  the  failure  of  their  schemes  in 
the  Legislature.  The  National  party  is  not  this  way.  If  the  Reform 
party  is  successful  the  Hawaiian  party  does  not  show  its  disappoint- 
ment, but,  with  its  customary  patience,  continues  on  working  for  the 
good  of  all  without  feelings  of  strife. 

The  foreign  members  of  this  session  have  shown  their  wicked 
intentions,  their  causeless  jealousy,  when  the  majority  of  the  people, 

1 
S.  Reiv  227 1 


Z  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

the  H  awaiian  party,  voted  as  they  wished.  During  all  the  bribery  there 
has  grown  up  a  united  determination  on  the  part  of  the  National  party 
to  hold  their  prerogatives  and  carry  out  the  desires  of  their  constitu- 
ents who  elected  them.  Great  is  our  contempt  for  this  causeless 
opposition  of  the  missionaries  and  their  friends,  and  for  the  first  time 
we  are  able  to  congratulate  the  Hawaiian  members  on  account  of  their 
unanimity  during  these  few  days. 

DIFFERENT   VIEWS. 

4.  We  hear  that  the  representatives  of  the  foreign  countries  have 
met  and  decided  to  help  the  Queen's  cabinet  and  support  her,  except 
the  American  minister.  The  Annexationists  are  seeking  some  pretext 
to  injure  the  Queen,  and  order  the  American  naval  forces  on  shore  to 
protect  their  property  without  knowing  what  they  are  afraid  of,  for 
the  ghosts  which  they  are  conjuring  up  will  act  as  they  acted  in  1887. 


5.  To-day  a  public  meeting  has  been  called  by  the  missionaries  of 
the  Eeform  party  and  those  who  are  deceived  by  them  at  Manamana, 
with  the  intention  of  injuring  the  Queen  because  of  her  love  for  the 
people  in  consenting  to  promulgate  a  new  constitution,  to  depose  her 
from  being  Queen,  and  to  turn  the  monarchy  into  a  republic.  There- 
fore, those  who  love  the  country,  those  who  are  born  in  the  country, 
stand  fast  in  support  of  the  monarchy  and  do  not  let  one  true  Hawaiian 
go  to  this  meeting  to  which  you  are  invited.  Oh,  all  ye  true  Hawaiian s, 
let  us  support  our  Queen,  and  consecrate  our  lives  for  the  benefit  of 
our  Queen  and  the  peace  of  the  land.  All  of  the  people  who  love  the 
chief  are  invited  to  go  straight  to  the  meeting  in  front  of  the  opera 
house  at  2  o'clock  this  afternoon.  One  loving  heart  in  our  breasts 
throughout  the  land,  oh,  descendants  of  Kamehameha. 

THE  HELPERS  OF   THE   CABINET. 

6.  The  banks  of  Bishop  and  Spreckels  are  ready  to  help  the  Govern- 
ment with  money.  Certain  merchants  are  also  ready  to  support  the 
Government.  It  is  apparent  that  it  is  only  certain  missionaries  who  are 
secretly  meeting  and  seeking  a  riot  as  a  reason  for  landing  the  men  of 
war  when  there  is  no  reason. 

LET  THE  PEOPLE  BE  READY. 

7.  To  give  their  thanks  to  day  at  the  meeting  to  be  held  at  2  this 
afternoon  in  front  of  the  Opera  House,  to  their  Queen,  who  wanted  to 
execute  the  desires  of  her  people,  but  by  reason  of  obstacles  she  could 
not  lawfully  do  so.  On  account  of  this  love  of  our  Queen,  and  what 
she  tried  to  do  under  her  spirit  of  love,  but  she  could  not  accomplish 
it,  and  when  she  saw  that  it  could  not  be  done  she  expressed  her  regret 
with  soTrow,  and  instructed  the  committee  of  the  people  to  go  and  wait, 
and  their  desires  would  be  carried  out  in  accordance  with  the  right, 
and  for  them  to  keep  the  peace. 

mass  meeting! 

8.  The  meeting  which  is  to  be  held  in  front  of  the  opera  house  is  to 
be  held  by  the  party  which  supports  the  Government,  and  the  subjects 
of  the  Queen  are  invited  to  attend  and  listeu  to  the  voices  of  the 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  3 

leaders  of  the  people.  We  are  being  plotted  against  without  re&son. 
The  independence  of  Hawaii  is  being  assaulted  by  the  wicked  and 
refractory  ones  because  the  Queen  listened  to  the  pleadings  of  her  own 
people  to  give  a  new  constitution.  She  has  left  this  thought  to  her 
cabinet,  and  thanks  are  due  for  this  loving  thought  of  the  chief  in 
leaving  to  them  this  desire  of  the  people  of  the  land,  and  they  have 
restrained  the  love  of  the  chief  unlil  such  time  as  it  may  seem  good. 
Because  it  can  not  be  helped,  we  had  better  be  patient  and  listen  to  her 
words:  "I  regret  that  your  desires  are  not  complied  with,  but  you  must 
go  and  keep  the  peace,  and  the  time  will  come  when  your  desires  will 
be  satisfied." 

I  hereby  certify  that  the  foregoing  is  a  correct  translation  of  the 
accompanying  extra  issued  by  the  Ka  Leo  o  Ka  Lahui,  a  Honolulu 
newspaper,  published  in  Honolulu  in  the  Hawaiian  language,  on  Jan- 
uary 16,  1893. 

Lorrin  A.  Thurston. 


II.  By  order  of  the  committee  the  following  instructions 
of  the  secretary  of  the  navy  to  commodore  perry,  dated 
april  15,  1847,  were  made  part  of  the  record. 

[Confidential.] 

Navy  Department, 

Washington,  April  15,  1847. 
Commodore  M.  C.  Perry, 

Commanding  the  Home  Squadron: 

Sir  :  The  successes  which  have  recently  crowned  our  arms  would 
seem  to  justify  the  expectation  that  the  Government  of  Mexico  would 
feel  disposed  to  submit  proposals  for  peace.  That  there  may  be  no 
unnecessary  delay  in  acting  on  such  proposals,  if  they  shall  be  made, 
the  President  has  directed  Nicholas  P.  Trist,  esq.,  of  the  State  Depart- 
ment, to  proceed  to  the  headquarters  of  the  Army  or  to  the  squadron, 
as  he  shall  deem  most  convenient,  and  be  in  readiness  to  receive  any 
proposition  for  a  settlement  of  the  questions  at  issue.  Mr.  Trist  is 
clothed  with  such  diplomatic  power  as  to  authorize  him  to  enter  into 
arrangements  with  the  Mexican  Government  for  the  mutual  suspen- 
sion of  hostilities.  If  he  shall  communicate  to  you  in  writing  that  the 
contingency  has  occurred,  you  will  act  in  accordance  with  his  directions 
and  suspend  actual  hostilities  until  further  orders  from  the  Department, 
unless  the  enemy  shall  continue  or  recommence  them.  In  doing  so 
you  will  not  relinquish  any  position  which  you  may  occupy,  or  abstain 
from  any  change  of  position  which,  in  your  judgment,  may  be  neces- 
sary for  the  security  or  health  of  your  command. 

You  will  afford  to  Mr.  Trist  every  facility  and  accommodation  in  your 
power  and  a  speedy  passage  to  New  Orleans  when  he  may  desire  to 
return.  You  will  not  relax  the  vigor  of  your  operations  while  he  may 
remain  in  Mexico,  unless  he  directs  you  to  suspend  them,  but  during 
that  time  it  is  desirable,  if  it  does  not  conflict  with  your  arrangements, 
that  you  shall  be  in  the  harbor  of  Vera  Gruz,  or  as  accessible  as  may  be. 

You  will  be  pleased  to  make  your  communications  to  the  Depart- 
ment as  frequent  as  you  may  find  opportunity. 

•      I  am,  very  respectfully,  your  obedient  servant, 

John  Y.  Mason 


*  v  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

U.  S.  Flagship  Mississippi, 

Anton  Lizardo,  May  8,  1847. 
Sir:  I  have  received  by  Mr.  Trist  your  confidential  communication 
of  the  15th  instant,  and  in  a  personal  interview  with  that  gentleman 
have  made  the  requisite  arrangements  for  carrying  out  the  wishes  and 
intentions  of  the  Department. 

It  is  highly  necessary  that  I  should  no  longer  delay  a  visit  to  the 
eastern  coast  as  far  as  Laguna  and  Campeche.  This  I  can  do  before  any 
communication  of  interest  can  be  received  from  Mr.  Trist,  and  we  both 
agree  that  it  is  better  for  me  to  make  the  visit  now,  that  I  may  be  at 
Vera  Cruz  about  the  time  he  shall  have  been  informed  of  the  result  of 
his  mission ;  but  to  prevent  any  inconvenience  I  shall  leave  a  steamer 
at  Vera  Cruz  to  bring  me  any  communication  that  Mr.  Trist  might 
transmit  during  my  absence. 
The  Potomac  will  also  be  left  at  Vera  Cruz. 

With  great  respect,  I  am,  sir,  your  most  obedient  servant, 

M.  C.  Perry, 
Commanding  Home  Squadron, 
Hon.  John  Y.  Mason, 

Secretary  of  the  Navy,  Washington,  I).  G. 


III.  Also  the  following  treaty  of  annexation  made  in  the 

TIME  OF  KAMEHAMEHA  III,  WHICH  FAILED  OF  THE  KING'S  SIG- 
NATURE BY  REASON  OF  HIS  DEATH,  THE  ORIGINAL  BEING  ON 
FILE  IN  THE   OFFICE   OF   THE   SECRETARY   OF  STATE. 

[Confidential.] 

Treaty  of  annexation  concluded  between  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  and  the  United,  States  of  America. 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  being  convinced 
that  plans  have  been  and  still  are  on  foot  hostile  to  his  sovereignty 
and  to  the  peace  of  his  Kingdom,  which  His  Majesty  is  without  power 
to  resist  and  against  which  it  is  his  imperative  duty  to  provide  in 
order  to  prevent  the  evils  of  anarchy  and  to  secure  the  rights  and 
prosperity  of  his  subjects,  and  having,  in  conscientious  regard  thereto 
as  well  as  to  the  general  interests  of  his  Kingdom,  present  and  future, 
sought  to  incorporate  his  Kingdom  into  the  Union  of  the  United  States 
as  the  means  best  calculated  to  attain  these  ends  and  perpetuate  the 
blessings  of  freedom  and  equal  rights  to  himself,  his  chiefs,  and  his 
people,  and  the  Government  of  the  United  States,  being  actuated  solely 
by  the  desire  to  add  to  their  security  and  prosperity  and  to  meet  the 
wishes  of  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  and  of  his 
Government,  have  determined  to  accomplish,  by  treaty,  objects  so 
important  to  their  mutual  and  permanent  welfare. 

For  that  purpose  His  Majesty,  Kamehameha  III,  King  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  has  granted  full  powers  and  instructions  to  Eobert 
Chrichton  Wyllie,  esq.,  his  minister  of  foreign  relations,  his  secre- 
tary at  war  and  of  the  navy,  member  of  his  privy  council  of  state, 
member  of  the  house  of  nobles,  and  chairman  of  the  commissioners  of 
his  privy  purse,  and  the  President  of  the  United  States  has  invested 
with  like  powers  David  Lawrence  Gregg,  esq.,  commissioner  oi 
said  States  to  the  said  Kingdom;  and  the  said  plenipotentiaries,  after 
exchanging  their  full  powers,  have  agreed  to  and  concluded  the  'fol- 
lowing articles: 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  5 

Article  I. 

His  Majesty,  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  acting  in  conformity 
with  the  power  vested  in  him  by  the  constitution  of  his  Kingdom,  and 
with  the  wishes  of  his  chiefs  and  people  and  of  the  heads  of  every 
department  of  his  Government,  cedes  to  the  United  States  his  King- 
dom, with  all  its  territories,  to  be  held  by  them  in  Ml  sovereignty, 
subject  only  to  the  same  constitutional  provisions  as  the  other  States 
of  the  American  Union.  This  cession  includes  all  public  lots  and 
squares,  Government  lands,  mines  and  minerals,  salt  lakes  and  springs, 
fish  ponds,  public  edifices,  fortifications,  barracks,  forts,  ports,  and 
harbors,  reefs,  docks,  and  magazines,  arms,  armaments,  and  accouter- 
ments,  public  archives,  and  funds,  claims,  debts,  taxes,  and  dues  exist- 
ing, available,  and  unpaid  at  the  date  of  the  exchange  of  the  ratifica- 
tions of  this  treaty. 

Article  II. 

The  Kingdom  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  shall  be  incorporated  into 
the  American  Union  as  a  State  enjoying  the  same  degree  of  sover- 
eignty as  other  States,  and  admitted  as  such,  as  soon  as  it  can  be  done 
in  consistency  with  the  principles  and  requirements  of  the  Federal 
Constitution,  to  all  the  rights,  privileges,  and  immunities  of  a  State  as 
aforesaid,  on  a  perfect  equality  with  the  other  States  of  the  Union. 

Article  III. 

His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  his  chiefs  and  sub- 
jects of  every  class,  shall  continue  in  the  enjoyment  of  all  their 
existing  personal  and  private  rights,  civil,  political,  and  religious,  to 
the  utmost  extent  that  is  possible  under  the  Federal  Constitution,  and 
shall  possess  and  forever  enjoy  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  citizens 
of  the  United  States  on  terms  of  perfect  equality,  in  all  respects,  with 
other  American  citizens. 

Article  IV. 

The  decisions  of  the  Board  of  Land  Commissioners,  made  and  not 
appealed  from  at  the  date  of  the  final  ratification  of  this  treaty,  shall  be 
and  remain  forever  valid  and  undisturbed,  and  all  titles  to  real  estate, 
which  are  now  or  shall  have  then  been  declared  valid  under  the  laws  of 
the  Hawaiian  Kingdom,  shall  beheld  to  be  equally  valid  by  the  United 
States,  and  measures  shall  be  adopted  by  the  United  States  for  the 
speedy  and  final  adjudication  of  all  unsettled  claims  to  land  in  con- 
formity with  the  laws  and  usages  under  which  they  may  have  originated. 

Article  V. 

All  engagements  of  whatsoever  kind,  affecting  the  rights  of  corpora- 
tions or  individuals,  validly  construed  and  lawfully  incumbent  upou 
the  King's  Government  or  the  Hawaiian  nation  to  pay  and  discharge, 
shall  be  respected  and  fulfilled  in  as  prompt,  fall,  and  complete  a  man- 
ner as  they  would  have  been  respected  and  fulfilled  had  no  change  of 
sovereignty  taken  place. 

Article  YI. 

The  public  lands  hereby  ceded,  shall  be  subject  to  the  laws  regulat- 
ing the  public  lands  in  other  parts  of  the  United  States,  liable,  how- 


b  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

ever,  to  such  alterations  and  changes  as  Congress  may  from  time  to 
time  enact.  The  grants  of  land  for  the  promotion  of  education  here- 
tofore made  by  the  Government  of  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
shall  be  confirmed  by  the  United  States,  which,  in  addition  thereto, 
shall  grant  and  set  apart,  for  the  purposes  of  common  schools,  semi- 
naries of  learning,  and  universities,  so  much  of  the  public  lands  and  of 
the  proceeds  thereof,  as  may  be  equal,  proportionally,  to  the  grants  for 
such  purposes  in  any  of  the  States  of  the  Union. 

Article  VII. 

The  laws  of  the  Hawaiian  Kingdom,  so  far  as  they  are  compatible 
with  republican  institutions,  and  conformable  to  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States,  shall  be  and  remain  in  full  force  and  effect  until  modi- 
fied, changed,  or  repealed  by  the  legislative  authority  of  the  State  con- 
templated by  this  treaty. 

Article  VIII. 

In  consideration  of  the  cession  made  by  this  treaty,  and  in  compen- 
sation to  all  who  may  suffer  or  incur  loss  consequent  thereon,  the 
United  States  shall  pay  the  aggregate  sum  of  $300,000  as  annuities, 
to  the  King,  the  Queen,  the  Crown  Prince,  those  standing  next  in  suc- 
cession to  the  throne,  the  chiefs,  and  all  other  persons  whom  the  King 
may  wish  to  compensate  or  reward,  to  be  apportioned  as  may  be  deter- 
mined by  His  Majesty,  the  King,  and  his  Privy  Council  of  State,  which 
amounts,  to  be  apportioned  as  aforesaid,  shall  be  paid  ratably,  without 
deduction  or  offset  on  any  ground  or  in  any  shape  whatever,  to  the 
parties  severally  named  in  such  apportionment,  at  Honolulu  on  the 
1st  day  of  July  of  each  successive  year  so  long  as  they  may  live.  It 
is,  however,  expressly  agreed  upon,  that  on  the  demise  of  his  present 
majesty,  the  annuity  of  the  immediate  heir  to  the  throne  shall  then  be 
increased  to  the  same  amount  before  allowed  and  paid  to  the  King 
himself. 

As  a  farther  consideration  for  the  cession  herein  made  and  in  order 
to  place  within  the  reach  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  the 
means  of  education,  present  and  future,  so  as  to  enable  them  the  more 
perfectly  to  enjoy  and  discharge  the  rights  and  duties  consequent  upon 
a  change  from  monarchical  to  republican  institutions,  the  United 
States  agrees  to  set  apart  and  pay  over  for  the  term  of  ten  years  the 
sum  of  $75,000  per  annum,  one- third  of  which  shall  be  applied  to  con- 
stitute the  principal  of  a  fund  for  the  benefit  of  a  college  or  university, 
or  colleges  or  universities,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  the  balance  for  the 
support  of  common  schools,  to  be  invested,  secured,  or  applied  as  may 
be  determined  by  the  legislative  authority  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
when  admitted  as  a  state  into  the  Union  as  aforesaid. 

Article  IX. 

Immediately  after  the  exchange  of  the  ratifications  of  this  treaty  the 
President  of  the  United  States  shall  appoint  a  commissioner  who  shall 
receive  in  due  form,  in  the  name  of  the  United  States,  the  transfer  of 
the  sovereignty  and  territories  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  also  all  public 
property,  archives,  and  other  things  hereinbefore  stipulated  to  be  con- 
veyed, and  who  shall  exercise  all  executive  authority  in  said  islands 
necessary  to  the  preservation  of  peace  and  order  and  to  the  proper 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  7 

execution  of  the  laws  until  the  state  contemplated  in  this  treaty  can  be 
duly  organized  and  admitted  as  such  state;  and  until  the  arrival  of 
such  commissioner  all  departments  of  His  Majesty's  Government  shall 
continue  as  now  constituted. 

Article  X. 

This  treaty  shall  be  ratified  by  the  respective  high  contracting  par- 
ties and  the  ratifications  exchanged  at  the  city  of  Honolulu  within 
eight  months  from  the  date  hereof,  or  sooner  if  possible;  but  it  is  agreed 
that  this  period  maybe  extended  by  mutual  consent  of  the  two  par- 
ties. 

In  witness  whereof  we,  the  undersigned,  plenipotentiaries  of  His 
Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  and  of  the  United  States 
of  America,  have  signed  three  originals  of  this  treaty  of  annexation  in 
Hawaiian  and  three  in  English,  and  have  thereunto  affixed  our  respec- 
tive official  seals. 

Done  at  Honolulu,  this day  of ,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  one 

thousand  eight  hundred  and  fifty-four. 

SEPARATE  AND   SECRET  ARTICLE. 

Whereas  it  is  desirable  to  guard  against  the  exigencies  declared  in 
the  preamble  to  the  foregoing  treaty,  and  to  secure  the  King  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  his  chiefs  and  all  who  reside  under  his  jurisdiction, 
from  the  dangers  therein  referred  to  and  expressed,  it  is  hereby  pro- 
vided and  expressly  agreed  that  at  any  time  before  the  final  exchange 
of  the  ratifications  of  said  treaty,  if  the  same  shall  be  duly  ratified  on 
the  part  of  His  Majesty  the  King,  and  satisfactory  notice  thereof  given 
to  the  commissioner  of  the  United  States,  it  shall  be  competent  for 
His  Majesty,  by  proclamation,  to  declare  his  islands  annexed  to  the 
American  Union,  subject  to  the  provisions  of  such  treaty  as  negotiated, 
and  the  commissioners  of  the  United  States  for  the  time  being  shall 
receive  and  accept  the  transfer  of  the  jurisdiction  of  the  said  islands, 
in  the  name  of  the  United  States,  and  protect  and  defend  them  by  the 
armed  forces  of  the  United  States  as  a  part  of  the  American  Union, 
holding  the  same  for  and  in  behalf  of  his  Government,  and  exercising 
the  jurisdiction  provided  for  in  said  treaty,  with  the  understanding, 
however,  that  in  case  the  said  treaty  is  not  finally  ratified,  or  other 
arrangement  made,  by  the  free  consent  and  to  the  mutual  satisfaction 
of  the  contracting  parties,  the  sovereignty  of  the  islands  shall  imme- 
diately revert,  without  prejudice,  to  His  Majesty,  or  his  immediate 
heirs  in  the  same  condition  as  before  the  transfer  thereof;  and  it  is 
further  understood  and  agreed  that  this  article  shall  be  as  binding  for 
all  the  ends  and  purposes  herein  expressed  as  if  it  formed  a  part  of 
the  foregoing  treaty. 

IV.  Also  the  following  instructions  from  hon.  w.  l.  marcy, 
secretary  of  war,  to  maj.  gen.  winfield  scott,  commanding 
the  army  of  the  united  states  in  mexico. 

War  Department, 
Washington,  I).  C,  January  18,  1894. 
Sir:  As  requested  in  your  letter  of  the  13th  instant,  I  have  the 
honor  to  transmit  herewith  a  copy  of  a  confidential  letter,  dated  April 
14,  1847,  addressed  by  the  Secretary  of  War  to  Maj.  Gen  Winfield 


8  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

Scott,  commanding  IT.  S.  Army  in  Mexico,  and  advising  him  that 
Nicholas  P.  Trist,  esq.,  has  been  commissioned  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States  to  proceed  to  the  headquarters  of  the  Army  in  Mexico, 
or  to  the  naval  squadron,  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  any  proposal 
which  the  enemy  may  make  for  peace  with  the  United  States,  and 
informing  Maj.  Gen.  Scott  as  to  the  diplomatic  powers  with  which  Mr.' 
Trist  is  clothed  under  his  instructions. 

Attention  is  invited  to  House  Ex.  Doc.  "No.  56,  Thirtieth  Congress, 
first  session,  " Correspondence  between  the  Secretary  of  War  and  Gen- 
erals Scott  and  Taylor,  and  between  Gen.  Scott  and  Mr.  Trist,"  which 
contains  all  the  information  in  possession  of  this  Department  on  the 
subject. 

Very  respectfully, 

Daniel  S.  Lamont, 

/Secretary  of  War. 
Hon.  John  T.  Morgan, 

Chairman  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  U.  S.  Senate. 


[Confidential.] 


War  Department, 
Washington,  April  14.  1847. 
Maj.  Gen.  Winfield  Scott, 

Commanding  the  Army  of  the  United  States,  Mexico: 

Sir  :  The  signal  successes  which  have  attended  our  military  opera- 
tions since  the  commencement  of  the  present  war  would  seem  to  justify 
the  expectation  that  Mexico  will  be  disposed  to  offer  fair  terms  oi 
accommodation.  With  a  view  to  a  result  so  desirable,  the  President 
has  commissioned  Nicholas  P.  Trist,  esquire,  of  the  State  Department, 
to  proceed  to  your  headquarters,  or  to  the  squadron,  as  to  him  may 
seem  most  convenient,  and  be  in  readiness  to  receive  any  proposal 
which  the  enemy  may  see  fit  to  make  for  the  restoration  of  peace. 

Mr.  Trist  is  clothed  with  such  diplomatic  powers  as  will  authorize 
him  to  enter  into  arrangements  with  the  Government  of  Mexico  for  the 
suspension  of  hostilities.  Should  he  make  known  to  you,  in  writing, 
that  the  contingency  has  occurred  in  consequence  of  which  the  Presi- 
dent is  willing  that  farther  active  military  operations  should  cease, 
you  will  regard  such  notice  as  a  direction  from  the  President  to  suspend 
them  until  further  orders  from  this  Department,  unless  continued  or 
recommenced  by  the  enemy;  but,  in  so  doing,  you  will  not  retire  from 
any  place  you  may  occupy,  or  abstain  from  any  change  of  position 
which  you  may  deem  necessary  to  the  health  or  safety  of  the  troops 
under  your  command,  unless,  on  consultation  with  Mr.  Trist,  a  change 
in  the  position  of  your  forces  should  be  deemed  necessary  to  the  suc- 
cess of  the  negotiation  for  peace.  Until  hostilities,  as  herein  proposed, 
shall  be  intermitted,  you  will  continue  to  carry  on  your  operations  with 
energy,  and  push  your  advantages  as  far  as  your  means  will  enable 
you  to  do. 

Mr.  Trist  is  also  the  bearer  of  a  dispatch  to  the  Secretary  of  Foreign 
Affairs  of  the  Government  of  Mexico,  in  reply  to  one  addressed  to  the 
Secretary  of  State  here.  You  will  transmit  that  dispatch  to  the  com- 
mander of  the  Mexican  forces,  with  a  request  that  it  may  be  laid  before 
his  Government,  at  the  same  time  giving  information  that  Mr.  Trist, 
an  officer  from  our  Department  for  Foreign  Affairs,  next  in  rank  to  its 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  9 

chief,  is  at  your  headquarters,  or  on  board  the  squadron,  as  the  case 
may  be. 

You  will  afford  Mr.  Trist  all  the  accommodation  and  facilities  in  your 
power  to  enable  him  to  accomplish  the  objects  of  his  mission. 
Very  respectfully^  your  obedient  servant, 

W.  L.  Marcy, 
Secretary  of  War. 

P.  S. — Should  a  suspension  of  hostilities  take  place,  you  will  lose  no 
time  in  communicating  the  fact  to  Maj.  Gen.  Taylor. 


V.  Also  the  following  treaty  of  reciprocity  between  the 

UNITED    STATES  AND   HAWAII,   DATED   AND   SIGNED    THE    20TH   OF 
JULY,  1855,  BUT   WHICH  WAS  NOT  RATIFIED  BY  THE   SENATE. 

[Confidential.    Executive,  No.  7.    Special  session.] 

TREATY    BETWEEN    THE    UNITED    STATES    AND    HIS    MAJESTY    THE 
KING  OF   THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 

March  9,  1857,  on  motion  by  Mr.  Mason,  referred  to  the  Committee  on  Foreign 
Relations,  and  ordered  to  be  printed  in  confidence  for  the  use  of  the  Senate. 

The  United  States  of  America  and  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  equally  animated  by  the  desire  to  strengthen  and 
perpetuate  the  friendly  relations  which  have  heretofore  uniformly  existed 
between  them,  and  to  consolidate  their  commercial  intercourse,  have 
resolved  to  enter  into  a  convention  for  commercial  reciprocity.  For  this 
purpose  the  President  of  the  United  States  of  America  has  conferred 
full  powers  on  William  L.  Marcy,  Secretary  of  State,  and  His  Majesty 
the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  has  conferred  like  powers  on  the  hon- 
orable William  Little  Lee,  chancellor  and  chief  justice  of  the  supreme 
court  of  those  islands,  a  member  of  his  Hawaiian  Majesty's  privy  council 
of  state  and  cabinet,  president  of  the  board  of  land  commissioners,  and 
His  Majesty's  envoy  extraordinary  and  minister  plenipotentiary  to  the 
United  States  of  America. 

And  the  said  plenipotentiaries,  after  having  exchanged  their  full 
powers,  which  were  found  to  be  in  due  form,  have  agreed  to  the  follow- 
ing articles : 

Article  I. 

For  and  in  consideration  of  the  rights  and  privileges  granted  by  His 
Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  in  the  next  succeeding  article 
of  this  convention,  and  as  an  equivalent  therefor,  the  United  States  of 
America  hereby  agree  to  admit  all  the  articles  named  in  the  following 
schedule,  the  same  being  the  growth  or  produce  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
into  all  the  ports  of  the  United  States  of  America  free  of  duty: 

Schedule. 

Muscovado,  brown,  clayed,  and  all  other  unrefined  srgars. 

Sirups  of  sugar ;  molasses. 

Coffee;  arrowrqot. 

Live  stock  and  animals  of  all  kinds. 

Cotton,  unmanufactured. 

Seeds,  and  vegetables  not  preserved 

Undried  fruits  not  preserved. 


10  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Poultry:  eggs. 

Plants,  shrubs,  and  trees. 

Pelts  j  wool,  unmanufactured. 

Eags. 

Hides,  furs,  skins,  undressed. 

Butter  ;  tallow. 

Article  II. 

For  and  in  consideration  of  the  rights  and  privileges  gn  nted  by  the 
United  States  of  America  in  the  preceding  article  of  this  convention, 
and  as  an  equivalent  therefor,  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  hereby  agrees  to  admit  all  the  articles  named  in  the  following, 
schedule,  the  same  being  the  growth  or  produce  of  the  United  States 
of  America,  into  all  the  ports  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  free  of  duty: 

Schedule. 
Flour  of  wheat. 
Fish  of  all  kinds. 
Coal. 

Timber  and  lumber  of  all  kinds,  round,  hewed,  and  sawed,  unmanu- 
factured, in  whole  or  in  part. 
Staves  and  heading. 
Cotton,  unmanufactured. 
Seeds,  and  vegetables  not  preserved. 
Undried  fruits,  not  preserved. 
Poultry;  eggs. 
Plants,  shrubs,  and  trees. 


Pelts;  wool,  unmanufactured. 

Eags. 

Hides,  furs,  skins,  undressed. 

Butter;  tallow. 


Article  III. 

The  evidence  that  articles  proposed  to  be  admitted  into  the  ports  ot 
the  United  States  of  America  or  the  ports  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
free  of  duty,  under  the  first  and  second  articles  of  this  convention,  are 
the  growth  or  the  produce  of  the  United  States  of  America  or  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  shall  be  a  certificate  to  that  effect  from  the  Ameri- 
can or  Hawaiian  consul  or  consular  agent  of  the  port  from  which  such 
articles  are  exported,  or,  in  case  there  shall  be  no  such  consul  or  con- 
sular agent  resident  in  such  port,  a  certificate  to  that  effect  from  the 
collector  of  the  port. 

Article  IV. 

The  present  convention  shall  take  effect  as  soon  as  the  law  required 
to  carry  it  into  operation  shall  have  been  passed  by  the  Congress  of 
the  United  States  of  America  and  the  convention  shall  have  been 
approved  by  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  in  council. 
The  convention  shall  remain  in  force  for  seven  years  from  the  date  at 
which  it  may  go  into  operation,  and  further,  until  the  expiration  of 
twelve  months  after  either  of  the  high  contracting 'parties  shall  give 
notice  to  the  other  of  its  wish  to  terminate  the  same,  each  of  the  high 
contracting  parties  being  at  liberty  to  give  such  notice  to  the  other  at 
the  end  of  the  said  term  of  seven  years,  or  at  any  time  afterwards. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  11 

Article  V. 

The  present  convention  shall  be  duly  ratified,  and  the  ratifications 

lall  be  exchanged  at  Honolulu  within  eighteen  months  from  tha  date 

Sreof,  or  earlier  if  possible. 

In  faith  whereof  the  respective  plenipotentiaries  have  signed  this 

mvention,  and  have  hereunto  .affixed  their  seals. 

Done,  in  triplicate,  in  the  English  language,  in  the  city  of  Wash- 

gton,  this  twentieth  day  of  July,  anno  Domini  one  thousand  eight 

mdred  and  fifty-five. 

W.  L.  Marcy.  [seal.1 
W.  L.  Lee.        [seal.] 


[Confidential.    Executive,  No.  7.    Thirty-fourth  Congress,  first  session.] 

'essage  of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  communicating  a  treaty  between  the  United 
/States  and  the  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

January  3, 1856,  read  first  time,  and,  on  motion  by  Mr.  Mason,  referred  to  the  Com- 

frttee  on  Foreign  Relations. 

January  10,  1856,  ordered  to  be  printed  in  confidence  -for  the  use  of  the  Senate. 

0  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

1  transmit  to  the  Senate  for  consideration,  with  a  view  to  ratification, 
treaty  between  the  United  States  and  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the 

Hawaiian  Islands,  signed  in  Washington,  the  twentieth  day  of  July, 
.  D.  1855. 

Franklin  Pierce. 
Washington,  December  27 ',  1855. 


I.  Also  the  following  report  on  the  physical  features, 

FACTS  OF  LANDING,  SUPPLIES,  CLIMATE,  DISEASES,  ETC.,  OF  THE 
HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS,  PREPARED  BY  CAPT.  GEORGE  P.  SCRIVEN, 
OF  THE  SIGNAL  CORPS,  ASSISTED  BY  LIEUT.  J.  Y.  MASON  BLUNT, 
OF   THE   FIFTH   CAVALRY,  WITH   THE   ACCOMPANYING  MAPS. 

eport  on  the  physical  features,  ports   of  landing^   supplies,   climate, 

diseases,  etc. 

[Compiled  from  the  best  available  sources  for  the  information  of  the  Army.] 

CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Dcation,  distances  from  the  Pacific  coast 12 

ummunications  with  the  United  States 12 

ames,  areas 13 

eneral  physical  characteristics 13 

nls 11 

limates 11 

arthquakes - 15 

opulation,  characteristics,  religious,  education 15-17 

aws,  military  forces,  police 17 

alienage,  Government -  -  17, 18 

usiness,  currency,  finance,  commerce 18, 19 

coducts,  resources,  vegetation 19 

ldustries 19 

iseases   (other  than  leprosy) 20 

annerof  life,  clothing 20 


12  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Pa 
Individual  characteristics  of  islands: 

Oahu 

Coast 

Interior 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports,  Honolulu 

Other  than  Honolulu 

Hawaii 

Coast 

Interior 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports 

Maui , 

Coast  .^. 

Interior 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports 

Kauai 

Coast 

Interior 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports 

Molokai 

Coast 

Interior 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports 

Lanai 

Niihau 

Cities,  towns,  and  ports 

Kahulaui T 

Kaula 

Lenua 

Molokini 

Communications 

Kailroads 

Roads  

Telegraphs,  telephones 

Inter-island  steamers  and  vessels 

Leprosy 

Report  on  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

The  Hawaiian  Islands  lie  between  parallels  18°  50/  and  23°  5'  noi 
latitude,  and  between  meridians  154°  40'  and  101°  50'  west  from  Gre< 
wich.  A  line  drawn  through  the  axis  of  the  group  would  approxiimi 
roughly  the  segment  of  a  circle  convex  towards  the  northeast;  t 
chord  connecting  the  most  widely  separated  points  would  have  a  leng 
of  about  400  statute  miles. 

Honolulu,  the  capital  and  chief  city,  lies  2,080  miles  from  San  Fr£i 
cisco;  approximately  3,800  miles  from  Auckland;  4,500  miles  from  Sy 
ney;  and  4,800  miles  from  Hongkong. 

Mean  time  Honolulu  noon  is  equivalent  to  lOh.  31m.  26s.  Green wi  j 
mean  time. 

COMMUNICATIONS   WITH   THE  UNITED  STATES. 

San  Francisco  to  Honolulu. — The  Australia  of  the  Oceanic  Steam  si 
Company  and  the  Zealandia  (W.  J.  Irwin)  leave  San  Francisco  a  i 
return  every  other  Tuesday. 

The  Oceanic  Steamship  Company's  steamers  Alameda,  Maripoi 
and  the  Union  Steamship  Company's  steamer  Monowai,  leave  San  Fn  j 
cisco  for  New  Zealand  via  Honolulu  once  a  month. 

Time. — San  Francisco  to  Honolulu,  seven  days. 

Sailing  vessels,  with  good  passenger  accommodations,  run  regula: ! 
from  San  Francisco  to  Honolulu. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


13 


Sailing  time.- San  Francisco  to  Honolulu,  ten  to  eighteen  days. 

Pacific  mail  steamers,  San  Francisco  to  China  and  Japan,  stop  at 
Honolulu  every  other  trip. 

"A  new  company  sends  its  first  steamer  this  month  (February,  1893), 
from  Tacoma  and  Seattle  to  Honolulu.  Steamers  of  the  Occidental 
uul  Oriental  line  to  China  and  Japan  [N.  Y.  Tribune,  February  16]  are 
due  to  stop  at  Honolulu." 

Steamers  of  the  Oceanic  and  Pacific  Mail  companies  are  under  the 
United  States  flag. 

POSITION,  AREAS,  AND   GEOGRAPHICAL  FEATURES. 

The  strategic  value  of  the  islands  and  their  geographical  position 
are  indicated  on  the  accompanying  chart  (A).  In  general  the  islands 
are  mountainous,  covered  with  verdure,  and  in  parts,  especially  of 
Hawaii,  possessing  very  considerable  areas  of  forest,  whose  vegetation 
is  that  of  the  tropics. 

The  Hawaiian  group  is  composed  of  eight  inhabited,  and  of  four 
uninhabited  islands.  [Chart  B.]  The  names  and  dimensions  of  the 
inhabited  islands  are: 


Name. 

Length. 

Breadth. 

Area. 

Miles. 
90 
46 
48 
25 
40 
17 
20 
11 

Miles. 

74 

25 

30 

22 

7 

9 

7 

8 

Square  miles. 
3  950 

Oahu     

530 

IMaui  

620 

500 

190 

100 

90 

60 

The  first  five  of  these  islands  contain  the  bulk  of  the  population  as 
well  as  the  chief  industries. 

Three  of  the  four  uninhabited  islands  of  the  group  are  Kaula,  Lenua, 
and  Molokini. 

The  total  area  of  the  inhabited  islands  is  about  6,040  square  miles. 

u  All  of  these  islands  are  volcanic.  No  other  rocks  than  volcanic  are 
found  upon  any  of  them,  excepting  a  few  remnants  of  raised  sea  beaches 
composed  of  consolidated  coral  sands.  All  tlie  larger  ones  are  very 
mountainous. 

"The  culminating  points  of  the  island  Hawaii  are  Mauna  Kea,  13,900 
feet,  and  Mauna  Loa,  13,700  feet,"  the  highest  points  of  the  group. 

"  In  general  the  island  group  consists  of  the  summits  of  a  gigantic 
submarine  mountain  chain,  projecting  its  loftier  peaks  and  domes  above 
the  water."  * 

On  the  island  of  Hawaii  the  volcanic  forces  are  still  in  operation ;  on 
the  other  islands  they  are  extinct. 

None  of  the  mountains  are  of  sufficient  height  to  reach  the  line  of 
eternal  snow. 


*  See  Hawaiian  volcanoes,  Capt.  C.  E.  Dutton,  U.  S.  A.  Capt.  (now  Major)  Dutton 
adds:  "Mauna  Loa  and  Mauna  Kea,  referred  to  their  true  bases  at  the  bottom  of  the 
Pacific,  are  therefore  mountains  not  far  from  30,000  feet  in  height. "  Maj.  Dutton  is 
frequently  quoted  in  the  following  paragraphs  relating  to  the  physical  character- 
istics of  tie  islands. 


14  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

SOIL. 

"Only  a  small  proportion  of  the  area  of  the  islands  is  capable  of  sus-T 
taining  a  dense  population.  The  most  habitable  tracts  are  near  the 
seacoast,  and  only  a  part  of  even  a  small  part  of  these  are  really  fertile^ 

"The  interior  portions  are  mountainous  and  craggy,  with  a  thin  soil, 
admirable  in  a  few  localities  for  pasturage,  but  unlit  for  agriculture. 

"Many  parts  of  the  shore  belt  are  arid  and  almost  barren.  Other* 
are  covered  with  lavas  too  recent  to  have  permitted  the  formation  of 
soil,  and  still  others  are  trenched  with  ravines  so  deep  and  abrupt  that 
access  is  difficult. 

"  Deep  rich  soils  at  altitudes  adapted  to  the  growth  of  the  sugar  cane 
probably  ferin  less  than  the  fortieth  part  of  the  entire  area. 

"Shallower  soils,  however,  are  a  little  more  extensive  and  yield  other 
crops  of  tropical  staples  in  abundance." 


CLIMATE. 


. 


The  climate  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  is  warm  but  salubrious,  the  te: 
perature  equable,  and  the  sky  usually  clear.  In  the  shade  it  is  nevetj 
hot  and  seldom  chilly,  and  there  is  so  little  humidity  in  the  air  that  it 
is  rarely  sweltering,  though  during  the  months  of  January,  February, 
and  March  the  wind  blows  strongly  from  the  southwest,  and  the  atmos- 
phere  is  damp  and  unpleasant.  After  such  seasons  the  arid  westerly 
slopes  are  clothed  with  verdure  and  the  capacity  of  the  pastures  vastly 
increased.  ♦ 

"Upon  the  islands  themselves  it  may  be  said  that  there  are  almost  as 
many  climates  as  there  are  square  leagues,  and  the  differences  of  cli- 
matic conditions  exhibited  by  localities  separated  only  half  a  dozen 
miles  are  extreme. 

"As  a  general  rule  the  windward  sides  are  excessively  rainy,  the  pre- 
cipitation frequently  exceeding  200  inches  in  a  year.  The  leeward  sides 
are  generally  arid,  but  to  this  there  are  some  striking  exceptions  ;  when- 
ever the  land  barrier  is  low  enough  to  permit  the  trade  winds  to  blow 
over  it  the  lee  of  the  barrier  is  invariably  dry  and  sometimes  is  as  parched 
and  barren  as  the  sage  plains  of  the  Eocky  Mountains  ;  the  winds  throw 
down  their  moisture  copiously  as  they  rise  to  the  dividing  crest  and 
descend  hot  and  dry ;  but  when  the  barrier  is  lofty  enough  to  effectually 
oppose  the  drift  of  the  air,  the  lee  becomes  subject  to  the  simple  alter- 
nation of  daily  land  and  sea  breeze.  As  the  sea  breeze  comes  in  and 
ascends  the  slope  it  sends  down  rain ;  as  the  land  breeze  floats  down 
ward  and  outward  it  is  dry  and  clear. 

"The  sea  breeze  sets  in  a  little  before  noon  and  the  land  breeze  goes 
out  a  little  before  midnight. 

"Belatively  to  human  comfort,  the  climate  is  perfection.  It  is  never 
hot,  and  at  moderate  altitudes  it  is  never  cold.  The  heat  of  summer 
is  never  sufficient  to  bring  lassitude,  and  labor  out  of  doors  is  far  more 
tolerable  than  in  the  summer  of  New  England  or  Minnesota.77 

When  the  mountains  are  low,  as  in  Oahu,  the  rains  extend  over  them 
and  maintain  copious  streams  for  irrigation  of  the  leeward  lands  where 
little  rain  falls.  Very  much  more  rain  falls  on  the  windward  north-, 
east  sides  of  the  large  islands.  At  Hilo  in  Hawaii  as  much  as  20  feet 
has  been  measured  in  one  year.  At  Honolulu  the  mean  annual  rain- 
fall for  five  years  ending  1877  varied  from  32-30  to  46-40  inches,  giving 
an  average  of  38  inches. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


15 


Hurricanes  and  typhoons  are  said  to  be  infrequent.  There  is7  how- 
ever, at  Kawaihae,  in  the  island  of  Hawaii,  a  wind  called  the  mumuTca 
which  rushes  violently  down  between  the  mountains,  and  is  dangerous 
to  shipping.  When  hurricanes  occur  on  the  island  of  Maui,  great 
damage  to  the  sugar  crop  ensues. 

The  temperature  varies  from  55°  in  winter  to  70°  in  summer  for  the 
early  mornings,  and  attains  an  average  maximum  of  75°  in  the  winter 
and  85°  in  the  summer  for  afternoon  heats. 

There  is  no  rapid,  sudden  change;  cold  or  hot  waves  are  unknown. 

During  the  heat  of  the  day  the  sun-heated  lava  and  rocks  create  a 
strong  draft,  loaded  with  vapor  from  the  ocean ;  this  vapor,  at  2,000 
feet  elevation,  forms  a  continuous  cloud  bank,  covering  the  mountains. 

Hail  sometimes  falls  in  the  vicinity  of  Hawaii. 

Table  from  Pacific  Coast  Commercial  Record  showing  temperatures  in  Honolulu : 

Maximum  temperature  for  1891  in  Honolulu 89° 

Minimum  temperature  for  1891  in  Honolulu 54° 

Maximum  daily  range  of  the  year 22° 

Average  weekly  maximum  from  July  1,  to  October  1 86° 

Table  from  u  Vistas  of  Hawaii"  showing  temperature  for  1890 : 


Date. 


January  7... 
February  4.. 

March  4 

April  1 

May  6 

June  3 

July  1 

August  5 

September  2. 

October  7 

November  4. 
December  2. 


6  a.  m. 

]  p.m. 

o 

• 

67 

77 

68 

72 

66 

76 

67 

78 

69 

78 

73 

78 

73 

82 

72 

84 

72 

83 

75 

81 

71 

80 

69 

78 

9  p.  m. 


From  the  above  it  is  evident  that  the  climate  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands  is  in  general  that  of  a  mild  summer.  The  hottest  months  are 
July  and  August,  when  the  thermometer  sometimes  rises  to  90°,  but 
this  is  considered  unusual.  Frost  is  unknown;  rains  are  warm;  and 
the  days  and  nights  are  of  so  nearly  the  same  temperature  that  little 
daily  change  of  clothing  is  necessary. 

EARTHQUAKES. 

Earthquakes  are  of  common  occurrence  in  the  islands,  but  they 
usually  have  their  center  of  disturbance  in  Hawaii.  In  the  islands  to 
the  northwestward  the  shocks  are  infrequent  and  feeble.  The  shocks 
are  seldom  of  a  very  alarming  or  destructive  character,  but  small  or 
moderate  tremors  are  frequent. 

POPULATION. 


The  total  population  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  in  1890*  was  89,990,  of 


which  58,714  are  males, 


31,276  females. 


Statesman's  Year  Book,  1893. 


16 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


Latest  official  census  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

[Taken  December  28,  1890.] 

BY  DISTRICTS   AND   ISLANDS. 


Hawaii: 

Hilo 9,935 

Pima , 834 

Kau 2,577 

North  Kona 1,  753 

South  Kona 1,  812 

North  Kohala 4,303 

South  Kohala 538 

Hamakua 5,  002 


26,  754 
Maui : 

Lahaina 2, 113 

Wailuku 6,  708 

Hana 3,270 

Makawoo 5, 266 


Molokai . 


17,  357 
2,632 


Lauai 

174 

Oahu: 

Honolulu 

22  907 

Ewa 

2  155 

Waianae 

903 

Waialua 

1,286 

Koolauloa 

Koolaupoko 

Kauai : 

Waimea 

1,444 

2,499 

31, 194 

2,523 

Niihau 

216 

Koloa 

1,755 

Kawaihau 

Hanalei 

2,101 

2,  472 

Lihue 

2,792 

11,  859 


BY  NATIONALITY — 1890  AND  1884  COMPARED. 


Natives 

Half-castes 

Chinese 

Americans 

Hawaiian-born,  foreign  par- 
ents  

Japanese 


1890. 


34, 436 
6,186 

15, 301 
1,928 

7,495 
12,360 


1884. 


40, 014 
4,218 

17, 937 
2,066 

2,040 
116 


Norwegian 

Britons 

Portuguese 

Germans 

French 

Other  foreigners 
Polynesian 


1884. 


227 

392 

1,344 

1,282 

8,602 

9,377 

1,034 

1.61)0 

70 

192 

419 

416 

588 

956 

Total  population  1890 89,990 

Total  population  1884 , 80,578 

Population  by  nationality  and  sex  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  also  of  the  principal  town- 
ship districts. 

[Compiled  from  tbe  latest  census,  1890.] 


Nationalities. 


Honolulu, 
Oahu. 


Wailuku, 
Maui. 


Lahaina, 
Maui. 


Hilo, 
Hawaii. 


Lihue, 
Kauai. 


Popula- 
tion whole 
islands. 


Natives,  males 

females '- 

Half-castes,  males 

females 

Chinese,  males 

females 

Hawaiian-born,  foreign  parents,  males. . 
females 

Americans,  males 

females 

British,  males * 

females 

Germans,  males 

females 

French,  males 

females 

Portuguese,  males 

females 

Japanese,  males 

females 

Norwegians,  males 

females 

Polynesians,  males 

females 

All  others,  males 

females 

Total 


4,494 

4,068 

1,  257 

1,346 

3,950 

457 

1,250 

1,  236 

767 

431 

529 

267 

261 

105 

25 

23 

933 

799 

277 

111 

55 

21 


151 

22 


1,260 

1,178 

267 

248 

1,202 

33 

254 

215 

65 

23 

53 

5 

29 

5 

7 


402 

326 

842 

183 

31 

11 

22 

14 

36 

32 


687 

599 

199 

101 

89 

5 

41 

39 

15 

11 

7 

4 

7 


29 

24 

249 

40 


1,076 

900 

175 

189 

1,264 

19 

537 

513 
90 
27 
68  i 
16  I 
27 

7 
4    . 


2,703 
708 


22, 907 


6,708 


2,113 


9  935 


411 

310 

49 

61 

347 

9 

203 

177 

11 

7 

8 

2 

163 

108 


237 
195 
363 


18, 364 

16,  072 

3,  085 

3, 101 

14, 552 

779 

3,  909 

3,586 

1,298 

630 

982 

362 

729 

305 

46 

24 

4,770 

3,  832 

10, 079 

2,281 

155 

72 

404 

184 

371 

48 


2,  792 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  17 

CHARACTERISTICS,   RELIGION,   EDUCATION. 

The  natives  are  a  good-tempered,  light- hearted,  pleasure-loving  peo- 
ple. It  is  probable  that  little  difficulty  is  found  in  governing  them  as, 
of  themselves,  they  are  not  inclined  to  turbulence  nor  disposed  to 
revolt  against  any  form  of  government.  Like  children,  they  are  easily 
led  and  controlled.  Even  when  the  Hawaiian  Islands  were  discovered, 
the  people  were  by  no  means  savages,  but  had  an  organized  state  of 
society.  After  discovery,  civilization  made  progress  as  rapidly,  it  is 
said,  with  these  people  as  with  the  Japanese;  and  in  twenty -five  years 
after  the  landing  of  the  missionaries  (1820),  the  whole  people  had,  in  a 
great  measure  become  Americanized.  But  to  day,  except  politically  as 
the  one-time  owners  of  the  islands,  the  natives  are  but  an  unimportant 
element  of  the  people  and  their  consent  or  opposition  could  have  but 
little  influence  upon  the  course  of  events.  They  are  a  peace-loving 
race,  and,  in  a  military  sense,  are  not  worth  consideration,  but  they  are 
brave  individually  and  make,  it  is  said,  excellent  seamen.  Little  resist- 
ance could  be  anticipated  from  them  even  in  defense  of  their  country. 

RELIGION. 

All  forms  of  religion  are  tolerated.  According  to  the  latest  statis- 
tics there  are : 

Protestants 1 29,685 

Roman  Catholics 20,072 

Mormons 3,  576 

Hebrews,  less  than 100 

EDUCATION. 

Education  is  general. 

There  are  178  schools,  with  10,000  pupils,  of  whom  5,559  are  natives 
and  1,573  half-castes.  In  1890-'92  $326,922  was  allotted  for  public 
instruction.  (Sum  allotted  for  public  instruction,  1892->94,  $210,600. 
Statesman's  Year  Book,  1893.) 

•     LAWS. 

The  laws  are  modeled  on  those  of  the  United  States.  There  is  a 
supreme  court  of  justice,  and,  in  addition,  circuit  judges  and  justices 
of  the  peace. 

MILITARY  FORCES  AND  POLICE. 

The  military  forces  authorized  by  law  consist  of  the  household 
guards,  fixed  at  65  men.  It  is  reported  that  all  but  16  of  these  men 
have  been  discharged,  that  number  being  retained  as  a  guard  for  the 
deposed  queen  (February,  1893).  Volunteer  military  organizations 
are  prohibited  by  law. 

There  is  also  an  organized  police  force. 

LANGUAGE. 

The  language  is  very  largely  made  up  of  vowels,  giving  to  the  spoken 
tongue  a  pleasant  liquid  sound  somewhat  difficult  to  acquire.     The 
consonants  all  have  the  English  sound,  the  vowels  that  of  the  German 
S.  Rep.  227 2 


IS 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


vowels,  except  i,  which  is  the  same  as  the  German  ie.    rj?here  are  no 
silent  letters  in  the  written  Hawaiian  language. 
English  is  very  generally  spoken  throughout  the  group. 

GOVERNMENT. 

Under  the  great  chief  Kamehameha  the  islands  of  the  Hawaiian 
group  became  consolidated  into  a  kingdom  about  the  beginning  of  the 
present  century,  and  continued,  with  occasional  interference  from 
European  powers,  as  an  independent  nation  under  the  rule  of  the 
descen  dents  of  the  first  great  chief. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  present  year  the  Government  was  a  consti- 
tutional monarchy,  ruled  by  a  queen  aided  by  a  cabinet  consisting  of 
4  ministers,  and  by  a  legislature  composed  of  24  members  of  the  house 
of  nobles  and  24  representatives.  These,  with  the  ministers,  made  a 
total  of  52.  Members  of  both  houses  were  elected  by  a  popular  vote. 
An  educational  qualification  was  necessary  for  all  voters,  and  a  prop- 
erty qualification  for  electors  for  nobles.  In  January  of  this  year  the 
revolution  occurred  which  resulted  in  the  present  Provisional  Govern- 
ment. 

BUSINESS. 

Business  is  almost  entirely  carried  on  by  foreigners,  principally 
Americans,  British,  Germans,  and  Chinamen.  Many  of  the  principal 
offices  are  filled  by  foreigners  or  by  native-born  whites. 

CURRENCY. 


Gold  and  silver  coins  of  all  nations  are  current  as  legal  tender  at 
real  or  nominal  value.  From  1884  only  United  States  gold  coins  have 
been  legal  tender  for  more  than  $10;  no  paper  money  exists  excepting 
in  form  of  treasury  certificates  for  coin  deposited. 

FINANCE.* 

The  budget  is  (was)  voted  for  a  biennial  period.  The  following  table 
shows  the  revenue  and  expenditures  in  dollars  for  the  last  five  financial 
periods :     ■ 


1882-r84. 

1884-'86. 

1886-'88. 

1888-'90. 

1890-'92. 

$3, 092, 085 
2,216,406 

$3, 010, 655 
2,  988,  722 

$4,812,576 
4,712,285 

$3.  632, 197 
3, 250,  510 

$4, 408, 033 

4,  095,  891 

The  revenue  is  largely  derived  from  customs  ($1,204,305,  1890->92) 
and  internal  taxes  ($963,495,  1890-'92),  while  the  largest  item  of 
expenditure  was  for  the 'interior  ($1,641,848,  1890->92).  The  debt, 
March,  1892,  was: 

Bonded  debt .' $2;  ^U,  000 

Dae  depositors'  postal-savings  bank 903,162 

Interest  varies  from  5  to  12  per  cent. 


*  Statesman's  Year  Book,  1893. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 


19 


COMMERCE — EXPORTS  AND   IMPORTS. 

Sugar  and  rice  are  the  staple  industries,  while  coffee,  hides,  bananas, 
and  wool  are  also  exported. 
The  following  table  shows  the  commerce  and  shipping  for  five  years: 


Years. 

Imports. 

Native  ex- 
ports. 

Customs 
receipts. 

Ships  en- 
tered . 

Tonnage. 

1887 

$4, 944,  000 

4,  541.  000 

5,  439,  000 

6,  962,  000 

7,  439,  000 

$9, 435,  000 
11,631,000 
14.  040,  000 
13,143,000 
10,  259.  000 

$595,  000 

'  546,000 

550,  000 

696,  000 

660, 000 

254 

210.  703 

1888 

246  |       221.148 

1889 

288  !      223,  567 

1890 r 

295  !      230,120 

1891 

310 

The  chief  exports  in  1891  were : 

Sugar pounds..  274,983,580 

Rice - do....       4,900,450 

Bananas bunches . .  116,  660 

Wool pounds . .  97, 119 

The  imports  are  mainly  groceries,  provisions,  clothing,  grain,  timber, 
machinery,  hardware,  and  cotton  goods. 
Ninety-one  per  cent  of  the  trade  is  with  the  United  States.* 

PRODUCTS,  RESOURCES,  VEGETATION. 

Besides  sugar  and  rice,  the  staple  products,  coffee,  bananas,  oranges, 
and  other  fruits  are  largely  grown.  Food  products  are  abundant, 
especially  of  the  kind  suitable  to  a  hot  climate. 

The  native  food  consists  largely  of  the  taro  plant,  of  which  the  best 
varieties  are  grown  in  shallow  ponds  of  fresh  water.  It  is  stated  that 
about  40  square  feet  of  taro  will  yield  enough  to  supply  one  man  for 
a  year,  this  being  his  principal  food.  'From  this  plant  is  made  the^oi, 
which  is  the  ordinary  food  of  the  Kanaka. 

The  sweet  potato  grows  even  amongst  the  rocks  and  flourishes 
abundantly  in  good  soil,  while  the  common  potato  sometimes  grows 
well,  though  is  often  injured  by  worms. 

Wheat  and  corn  are  grown;  the  former  wns  once  cultivated  for 
export.  Flour  is  made,  but  it  is  said  that  the  islands  now  receive  all 
their  cereal  products  from  California. 

The  quality  of  the  coffee  raised  is  said  to  be  equal  to  the  choicest. 

The  climate  is  also  very  favorable  to  the  growth  of  the  long  staple 
sea-island  cotton;  but  as  this  variety  must  be  picked  by  hand  the  high 
price  of  labor  in  the  islands  renders  its  culture  unprofitable. 

Tropical  fruits  of  nearly  all  kinds  grow  in  the  greatest  abundance, 
the  orange,  lemon,  lime,  mango,  pineapple,  chirimoya  or  custard  apple, 
the  alligator  pear,  pomegranate,  and  guava,  all  of  which  are  exotic. 

The  banana  is  indigenous,  and  is  the  most  abundant  of  all  fruits ; 
besides  it  there  are  the  ohia  apple — a  fruit  peculiar  to  the  Pacific 
islands,  soft,  juicy,  and  mildy  acid — many  varieties  of  palms,  the 
choicest  trees  of  India,  the  caoutchouc,  the  papaya,  the  traveler's  tree 
of  Madagascar,  and  other  foreign  plants. 

INDUSTRIES. 

"The  chief  industry  of  the  islands  is  the  cultivation  of  sugar  cane. 
For  this  the  soil  (although  the  area  is  limited)  seems  better  adapted 

"Statesman's  Year  Book,  1893. 


20  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

than-  any  other  in  the  world.  The  yield  will  average  about  5,000 
pounds  of  sugar  to  the  acre,  and  choice  fields  sometimes  yield  twice' 
that  amount.  Large  amounts  of  American  capital  have  heen  invested 
in  the  plantations  and  in  the  accessory  commerce." 

Large  flocks  of  sheep  and  herds  of  cattle  are  found.  These  animals 
are  raised  chiefly  for  their  wool  and  hides.  On  the  island  of  Lanai 
great  flocks  of  sheep  pasture,  while  in  Hawaii  considerable  numbers  of 
wild  cattle  are  still  found  in  the  mountains;*  wild  goats  and  wild  hogs 
also  exist  in  great  numbers,  and  it  is  said  that  wild  horses  and  asses 
are  also  found. 

DISEASES   (OTHER  THAN  LEPROSY). 

It  is  asserted  that  diseases,  other  than  leprosy,  are  not  as  trouble- 
some as  in  most  places  considered  healthful.  Malarial  fevers  are 
thought  to  be  infrequent,  nevertheless  in  the  monthly  table  (March, 
1891)  the  greatest  number  of  deaths  for  the  year,  89,  is  recorded  as  due 
to  "fever." 

Consumption  (probably  imported  cases)  comes  next  with  74;  uold 
age"  next  with  59.  Amongst  the  other  more  important  causes  of  death 
are  diarrhea,  29 ;  dysentery,  15.  From  diseases  of  the  liver  but  2  died, 
while  25  died  of  disease  of  the  heart. 

From  this  it  would  seem  that  the  diseases  common  to  the  tropics — 
fever  and  stomach  troubles — are  to  be  guarded  against.  Eheumatism 
is  prevalent  in  many  of  the  damper  localities;  smallpox  occasionally 
appears;  and  measels  has  on  one  or  two  occasions  carried  oft'  many  of 
the  natives,  owing  to  their  manner  of  life,  but  this  disease  is  now  easily 
controlled  when  it  makes  its  appearance.  Lung  and  chest  troubles  are 
almost  unknown  to  natives  of  the  islands.  In  fact,  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
are  regions  of  unusual  healthfulness. 

The  general  health  of  the  natives  is  steadily  improving;  leprosy, 
now  largely  under  medical  control,  is  gradually  being  stamped  out. 
{See  Leprosy.) 

MANNER   OF  LIFE,   CLOTHING. 

The  whites  live,  of  course,  much  as  they  live  at  home,  and  usually  in 
well- constructed  nouses  of  European  style.  The  natives  live  as  a  rule 
in  grass  huts,  upon  native  food,  largely  taro  and  fruit,  and  wear  clothing 
of  light  cotton  stuff,  a  straw  hat,  but  shoes  rarely. 

Woolens  are  not  in  general  use,  but  very  light  flannels  are  recom- 
mended for  strangers  at  all  seasons. 

At  night  blankets  are  rarely  needed,  but  a  light  blanket  is  otten  com- 
fortable.    Houses  have  no  fireplaces. 

For  troops  clothing  for  all  seasons  should  be  light  flannel  drawers 
and  shirts,  wide  straw  hats  or  helmets,  and  the  light  quality  of  outer 
garments  issued  to  troops  on  the  southern  stations. 

Ample  tentage  should  be  provided  for  use  in  localities  where  heavy 
and  sudden  rainfalls  are  frequent,  and  light  blankets  should  be  carried. 

The  ration  should  be  suited  to  the  requirements  of  a  warm  climate. 

"Descended  from  the  animals  introduced  by  Vancouver  in  1792. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  21 


INDIVIDUAL  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  EIGHT  INHABITED  ISLANDS 
OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  GROUP. 

Island  of  Oahu  (Map  0). 

This  island  has  the  form  of  an  irregular  quadrangle;  it  lies  23  miles 
northwest  of  the  nearest  island  of  the  group,  Molokai.  Length  about 
4G,  breadth  about  25  miles. 

Oahu,  though  not  the  largest,  is  the  most  important  of  the  Hawaiian 
group,  as  it  contains  Honolulu,  the  capital,  chief  seaport,  and  principal 
city. 

Coast. — The  greater  part  of  the  island  is  surrounded  by  a  coral  reef 
often  half  a  mile  wide. 

The  windward  side  of  the  island  presents  a  gigantic  cliff  hardly  acces- 
sible, except  at  one  point  reached  by  a  road  cut  with  great  labor  from 
the  mountain  side;  but  the  leeward  side  descends  from  the  mountain 
to  the  sea  in  very  moderate  slopes  deeply  cut  by  ravines. 

The  northeastern  coast  of  the  island  is  generally  a  rugged  plateau 
descending  by  gentle  slopes  to  the  water.  When  viewed  from  the 
ocean,  this  coast  appears  to  be  formed  of  detached  hills  rising  steeply 
and  covered  with  woods.  The  intervening  valleys  are  fertile  and  well 
cultivated.  From  the  southeast  extremity  of  the  island,  called  Makapuu 
Point,  to  the  Mokapu  Peninsula,  the  coast  is  often  marked  by  scattered 
islets  and  rocks;  and  beyond,  the  peninsula  is  indented  by  a  con- 
siderable bay  extending  to  Kaoio  Point,  thence  to  Kahuku,  the  northern 
point  of  Oahu.  Along  this  part  of  the  coast  is  a  narrow  strip  of  land, 
varying  from  a  half  to  2  miles  in  breadth,  only  a  few  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  sea.  It  is  very  fertile,  and  has  a  gradual  ascent  to  the  foot 
of  the  mountains. 

From  Kahuku  to  the  village  of  Waimea  lies  a  level  plain  from  2  to  6 
miles  wide,  and  but  slightly  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  It  is  a  good 
pasture,  and  at  many  of  its  frequent  holes  and  crevices  may  be  seen 
streams  of  clear  and  cool  fresh  water  making  their  subterranean  way 
from  the  mountains  to  the  outlets  in  the  sea  below  low- water  mark. 

The  southwest  side  of  the  island  is  composed  chiefly  of  craggy  moun- 
tains, some  descending  abruptly  to  the  sea,  others  terminating  a  small 
distance  from  it;  thence  a  low  border  of  land  extends  to  Ashore  formed 
by  sandy  beaches,  bounded  by  rocks  on  which  the  surf  beats  heavily. 

The  southwest  extremity  is  Laeloa,  or  Barber  Point;  thence  the  shore 
continues  low,  flat,  and  covered  with  bushes  to  the  entrance  of  Pearl 
River,  about  12  miles  from  Honolulu. 

Some  of  the  land  in  this  vicinity  is  of  extreme  fertility. 

Interior. — Two  parallel  ranges  of  hills  traverse  Oahu  from  southeast 
to  northwest,  separated  by  a  low  plain.  The  highest  point  is  Kauia, 
4,0G0  feet,  in  the  west  range.  The  east  range  is  much  longer  than  the 
other,  and  its  ridge  is  very  broken ;  lateral  spurs  extend  from  many 
ravines  on  the  land  side,  but  for  30  miles  on  the  other  side  the  range 
presents  to  the  sea  a  nearly  vertical  wall  without  a  break.  There  are 
few  craters  in  the  loftier  heights;  volcanic  activity  seems  to  have  ceased; 
but  several  groups  of  small  cones  with  craters,  some  of  lava,  some  of 
tufa,  exist.  Valleys  are  numerous,  with  lateral  ravines,  in  which  water 
courses  and  cascades  are  found. 

A  chain  of  mountains  rises  near  the  center  of  the  east  part  of  the 
island  to  3,175  feet,  and  descends  near  the  middle  into  the  Ewa  Plain, 
which  divides  this  range  from  the  distant  and  elevated  mountains  that 


22  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

rise  in  a  line  parallel  with  the  southwest  shore.  The  Ewa  Divide  lies  5 
miles  west  of  Honolulu.  This  Ewa  Plain  is  nearly  20  miles  in  length 
from  Pearl  Kiver  to  Waialua,  and  in  some  parts  is  9  or  10  miles  across; 
its  soil  is  fertile,  and  watered  by  a  number  of  rivulets  running  along 
deep  water  courses  emptying  into  the  sea. 

Plain  of  Honolulu. — This  plain  is  some  10  miles  in  length,  and  in 
some  parts  2  miles  in  width  from  the  sea  to  the  foot  of  the  mountains. 

The  whole  plain  is  covered  with  rich,  alluvial  soils,  in  places  2  or  3 
feet  deep.  Under  this  lie  volcanic  ashes  and  cinders  14  to  16  feet  deep, 
resting  on  a  stratum  of  solid  nonvolcanic  rock,  a  kind  of  sediment 
deposited  by  the  sea,  in  which  branches  of  white  coral,  bones  of  fish 
and  animals,  and  several  varieties  of  marine  shells  have  been  found. 
A  number  of  wells  have  been  dug  to  a  depth  of  12  to  13  feet  in  the 
substratum  of  rock,  always  reaching  good  clear  water,  which,  though 
free  from  salt  or  brackish  taste,  rises  and  falls  with  the  tide. 

Inland  from  Waikiki,  near  Honolulu,  and  reached  by  the  Punahou 
road,  lies  the  Manoa  Valley,  whose  upper  portion  divides  into  numerous 
canyons. 

There  is  a  broad  valley  called  Nuuanu,  bounded  by  a  mountain  wall 
20  miles  in  length,  which  rises  from  the  green,  rolling  plain  below. 

Less  than  5  miles  from  Honolulu,  in  a  westerly  direction,  lies  the 
valley  of  Moanalua.  Here  are  fine  rice  fields,  cocoanut  groves,  and 
fish  ponds. 

In  the  district  of  Waianae  the  bases  of  the  mountain  lie  farther  from" 
the  sea  and  a  narrow  valley,  presenting  a  fertile  and  cultivated  aspect, 
seems  to  wind  for  some  distance  through  hills. 

In  the  Waialua  bay  district  the  soil  is  sandy  and  poor,  but  a  short 
distance  iirshore  an  agreeable  change  takes  place. 


Honolulu. 

Honolulu  is  the  capital  and  principal  port  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
and  is  situated  on  the  south  side  of  Oahu,  on  a  narrow  plain  at  the 
foot  of  the  eastern  range  of  mountains. 

The  aspect  of  the  country  around  Honolulu,  as  seen  from  the  roads, 
is  barren;  and  the  plain  on  which  the  town  stands  is  destitute  of  ver- 
dure. This  plain  extends  east  and  west  from  the  town,  while  behind  it 
the  land  rises  gradually  towards  the  Nuuanu  Valley.  Several  crater- 
shaped  hills  are  in  sight,  one  of  which,  named  Punch  Bowl  Hill,  498 
feet  high,  lies  close  to  the  northeast  side  of  the  town. 

The  central  part  of  Honolulu  consists  of  regularly  laid  out  streets, 
on  either  side  of  which  stand  houses  and  warehouses  of  European  style, 
frequently  placed  within  spacious,  inclosed  gardens.  The  outer  por- 
tions of  the  town  are  chiefly  composed  of  grass  huts  inhabited  by 
natives.    Honolulu  would,  probably,  burn  easily  to  the  ground. 

Amongst  the  principal  buildings  are  the  spacious  Government  houses, 
in  which  all  the  public  offices  are  inclosed,  the  King's  palace,  a  fort, 
two  hospitals,  several  churches  and  chapels  belonging  to  the  different 
religious  denominations,  custom  house,  sailors'  home,  and  several 
schools. 

Hospitals. — There  is  a  quarantine  hospital  on  the  west  side  of  the 
harbor,  and  a  good  general  hospital  to  which  sailors  and  others  are 
admitted  at  $1.25  per  diem. 

Shops. — There  are  foundries,  workshops,  and  shipyards,  where  con- 
siderable repairs  can  be  effected. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 


23 


Patent  slip.—  k  patent  slip  has  been  constructed  by  the  Government 
on  the  east  side  of  the  harbor  opposite,  the  outer  light  house.  This  slip 
can  take  a  vessel  of  1,700  tons. 

The  harbor  is  formed  by  an  opening  in  the  coral  reef,  about  150  yards 
wide  at  the  entrance  and  300  yards  wide  off  the  town,  and  rather  more 
than  a  mile  in  length.  Though  small  it  is  capable  of  accommodating 
a  good  number  of  vessels.    Depili  on  bar  is  30  feet. 

Wharves. — The  railway  crosses  the  Hats  on  the  north  side  of  the  har- 
bor and  terminates  at  two  wharves,  with  19  feet  of  water  alongside 
each  of  them.     The  west  wharf  is  used  by  ships. 

There  is  in  the  harbor  altogether  1,900  feet  of  wharf  frontage,  with  a 
depth  of  21J  feet,  and  700  feet  with  depths  of  from  17  to  19  feet,  and 
about  1,200  feet  with  less  depth. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  are  regular,  running  six  hours  each  way. 
.The  flood  is  to  the  westward.     Springs  rise  from  2 J  to  3  feet. 

Supplies. — Supplies  of  all  kinds  are  plentiful.  Beef,  mutton,  fowls, 
eggs,  vegetables,  and  fruit  can  be  obtained  at  moderate  prices. 

Water  can  be  procured  from  the  shore  in  a  tank.  It  is  good,  but  very 
expensive,  even  in  the  inner  anchorage  being  $2.50  a  ton.  This  for 
ships. 

Implements  and  building  materials  (with  the  exception  of  timber, 
which  is  good  and  moderate  in  price)  are  excessively  costly  in  Hono- 
lulu. The  demand  for  and  sale  of  articles  required  for  the  equipment 
of  ships  have  greatly  diminished. 

Probably  material  for  repair  of  arms,  equipments,  and  munitions  of 
troops  could  be  obtained  with  difficulty,  or  not  at  all. 

Water  and  lighting. — Honolulu  has  an  abundant  supply  of  excellent 
water — pure,  free  from  limestone  or  alkali,  soft,  and  adapted  to  all  the 
uses  of  the  city.  It  is  brought  from  reservoirs  at  the  upper  end  of  the 
lovely  Nuuanu  Valley,  and  conveyed  by  pipes  through  the  business 
and  principal  residence  districts.  The  city  is  lighted  by  electricity, 
the  power  for  the  generation  of  which  is  derived  from  the  reservoirs 
referred  to.  Both  the  water  and  lighting  systems  are  controlled  by  the 
Government. 

Coal. — Welsh  or  Australian  coal  of  good  quality  can  be  obtained  from 
European  firms.  About  15,000  tons  is  the  quantity  generally  kept  in 
stock. 

Climate. — The  climate  of  Honolulu  is  generally  very  pleasant  and 
healthful,  especially  when  the  northeast  trade  wind  prevails, 
southerly  and  southwesterly  winds  are  called  by  the  natives  the 
winds,"  because  they  are  followed  by  small  ailments,  gastric  maladies, 
and  intermittent  fevers,  as  is  the  case  with  the  sirocco  in  Europe. 

The  following  table*  gives  meteorological  observations  taken  at 
Honolulu,  1876: 


The 

"  sick 


Months. 


January . . 
February  . 

March 

April 

May 

June 

July 

August . . . 
September 


Mean  thermometer. 

Noon. 

Midnight. 

78 

70 

78 

69 

75 

72 

77 

71 

79 

72 

80 

73 

80 

•       .  75 

811 

75 

81 

75 

Prevailing  winds. 


16     NE.,  force  8,  maximum. 

10  |  NE.,  force  3,  average. 
15     S..  force  3,  calm  at  night. 
15     NE.,  force*,  light  at  night. 

11  I  NE.,  force  4. 
5     NE.,  force  3. 

13     NE.,  calm  at  night. 
15     NE. 
5     NE.,  21  days;  SE.,  9  days. 


*  Pacific  islands.     Sailing  directions.    Admiralty. 


24  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

The  barometer  generally  falls  below  30  during  southerly  winds. 

Population. — Honolulu  has  a  population  of  23,000  or  24,000,  of  various 
nationalities,  consisting  principally  of  whites,  natives,  Chinese,  and 
Portuguese.  Of  these  the  whites  are  the  controlling  element  in  com- 
mercial, manufacturing,  and  general  affairs,  though  there  are  several 
business  houses  in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese.  The  Portuguese  are 
chiefly  engaged  in  manual  labor. 

The  most  intelligent  class  of  Hawaiians  are  employed  in  government 
or  commercial  positions;  of  the  lower  classes  of  the  natives  some  are 
laborers;  others  exist  by  fishing,  farming,  and  various  occupations. 

Of  the  whites,  Americans  or  those  of  American  descent  largely  pre- 
dominate in  numbers  and  influence,  though  those  of  German  and 
British  extraction  are  very  prominent. 

Horses,  carriages,  etc. — Hacks  are  very  common  in  Honolulu.  They 
are  stationed  at  the  corners  of  all  the  main  thoroughfares,  and  the  fare 
to  any  part  of  the  city  is  25  cents.  The  horses  in  use  are  said  to  be 
superior  to  those  of  many  large  cities.  There  are  four  livery  stables, 
well  equipped  with  saddle  and  carriage  animals. 

Hotels. — The  Royal  Hawaiian  has  accommodations  for  150  guests, 
electric  lights,  electric  bells,  water  from  artesian  wells;  Eagle  hotel; 
Arlington;  Waikiki  Villa,  at  Waikiki,  3  miles  from  Honolulu,  connected 
by  tram  cars  from  Honolulu. 

Tram  cars. — About  12  or  14  miles  of  tram-car  lines  exist.  These  cars 
are  drawn  by  mules  or  horses.    The  cars  are  of  American  make. 

Telephones. — There  is  said  to  be  an  excellent  system  of  telephonic 
communication;  two  companies;  rates  low;  1,300  telephones  in  use. 

Public  buildings. — Iolani  Palace,  in  King  street,  said  to  have  cost 
$500,000. 

Aliiolani  hall,  the  main  Government  building,  in  which  the  Legisla- 
ture meets. 

The  Queen's  hospital,  intended  for  the  relief  of  afflicted  Hawaiians 
of  both  sexes,  gratis. 

The  opera  house,  seating  capacity  1,000. 

The  Lunalilo  home,  a  home  for  aged  Hawaiians. 

The  insane  asylum,  from  50  to  75  inmates. 

The  Oahu  jail.  Prisoners  are  required  to  do  road  work  and  other 
labor  in  and  around  Honolulu. 

The  fish  market. 

The  Royal  Mausoleum. 

Honolulu  Free  Library,  contains  10,000  volumes,  on  general  subjects. 

Young  Men's  Christian  Association  building. 

Post  office  building. 

Police  station  house  for  the  reception  of  petty  offenders. 

Current  publications. — Pacific  Commercial  Advertiser,  frequency  of 
publication  unknown. 

The  Hawaiian  Gazette,  a  weekly  publication. 

The  Kuokoa,  a  weekly  publication. 

The  Bulletin,  an  evening  daily. 

Ka  Leo,  native,  daily  and  weekly. 

Holomua,  native,  weekly. 

Elele,  native,  weekly. 

Monthly  publications. — The  Friend,  The  Anglican  Churchman,  The 
Planter's  Monthly,  The  Paradise  of  the  Pacific. 

A  Tourist's  Guide  is  issued  annually. 

The  Hawaiian  Annual. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  25 

The  Hawaiian  Gazette  Publishing  Company  possesses  a  very  com- 
plete printing  establishment. 

Manufacturing. — Honolulu  Iron  Works,  incorporated  1877.  Number 
of  hands  employed,  usually  about  200.  This  institution  is  said  to  be 
equipped  with  excellent  appliances  in  all  its  departments. 

Honolulu  Steam  Bice  Mills — Large  quantities  of  rice  milled  for  home 
and  foreign  use. 

Hawaiian  Carriage  Manufacturing  Company. — Manufacture  to  order 
and  attend  to  all  kinds  of  repairing;  deal  in  and  keep  on  hand  wagon 
makers'  supplies. 

Hopper's  Planing  Mill  and  Iron  Works. — Extensive  plant,  said  to 
execute  all  kinds  of  work  in  wood  and  iron. 

Enterprise  Planing  Mill. — Sash,  doors,  etc. 

Lucas  Bros. — Sash,  doors,  etc. 

Hawaiian  Gazette. — Bookbinding,  etc. 

Press  Publishing  Company. — Well  equipped  printing  house. 

Tahiti  Lemonade  Works. — For  manufacture  of  all  kinds  of  aerated 
waters. 

Another  establishment  of  thcsame  kind. 

The  usual  number  of  blacksmith  and  wagqn  shops,  cooperages,  etc. 

Banking  houses. — Bishop  &  Co.;  Glaus  Spreckles  &  Go.,  whose  Cali- 
fornia correspondent  is  the  Anglo-California  bank. 

The  mercantile  houses  are  numerous. 

CITIES  OF   OAHU   (OTHER   THAN  HONOLULU). 

Kanehoe,  in  the  Kulau  district,  the  principal  place  on  its  side  of  the 

land,  situated  near  Waialai  harbor,  just  beneath  the  Pali,  back  of 
Honolulu.  No  details  of  settlement.  The  climate  here  is  cooler  by  a 
few  degrees  than  on  the  leeward  side,  and  frequent  showers  keep  up 
the  verdure. 

Waiahia,  a  large  village,  lies  at  the  northern  end  of  the  plain  which 
separates  the  two  ranges  of  mountains.    No  details. 

Waianae,  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  southwest  coast  of  the  island, 
a  village  lying  at  the  base  of  the  mountains  in  a  narrow  valley,  fertile 
and  cultivated.  The  shore  here  forms  a  small  sandy  bay,  and  on  the 
southern  side,  between  two  high  rocky  precipices,  in  a  grove  of  cocoa- 
nut  trees,  stands  the  village. 

Pearl  City,  situated  on  the  south  side  of  the  island,  is  a  large,  irregu- 
larly-shaped lagoon  or  inlet,  greatly  cut  up  by  projecting  points  and 
islands.  This  is  Puuloa  River  and  Pearl  Lochs,  where  the  United 
States  Government  has  acquired  certain  rights.*  On  the  west  side  of 
the  channel  lies  Puuloa  village,  in  the  neighborhood  of  which  are  large 
salt  works.  Along  the  inshore  side  of  the  Pearl  Lochs  is  a  strip  of 
very  fertile  land  of  variable  breadth,  part  of  which  is  under  cultivation  j 
behind  the  land  rises  gradually  to  the  Ewa  plain. 

Pearl  City  is  said  ,to  be  one  of  the  pleasantest  spots  on  the  island, 
made  accessible  by  the  building  of  the  Oahu  Eailroad.    It  is  situated 


*In  1887  a  treaty  between  Hawaii  and  the  United  States  was  made  which  agreed 
that,  on  condition  of  the  remission  of  duties  on  certain  articles  of  Hawaiian  produce, 
the  United  States  was  ceded  the  exclusive  right  to  establish  and  fortify  a  naval  sta- 
tion in  the  Hawaiian  Islands.     Pearl  Harbor  was  designated  as  the  station. 

In  1889  an  enlargement  of  the  treaty  provisions,  so  as  to  confer  special  advantages 
upon  both  parties,  was  proposed  by  the  United  States.  It  was  suggested  that  the 
cession  of  a  naval  station  be  perpetual  as  well  as  exclusive.  Another  provision  was 
proposed,  viz,  to  allow  the  United  States  to  land  troops  in  Hawaii  whenever  neces- 
sary to  preserve  order.  These  provisions  have  not  so  far  been  taken  advantage  of  by 
the  United  States. 


26  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

in  the  midst  of  a  highly  productive  and  fertile  district,  12  miles  distant 
from  Honolulu,  and  is  now  a  beautiful  town,  with  an  abundant  supply 
of  pure  artesian  water,  with  wide  streets,  a  substantial  station,  and 
several  modern  residences  already  built,  and  with  improvements  going 
on  as  rapidly  as  a  large  force  of  workmen  can  push  them  to  completion. 

The  Oahu  Land  and  Eailroad  Company  founded  the  town. 

Water  supply. — Pearl  City  is  said  to  have  facilities  for  supplying 
10,000  inhabitants.  There  is  now  an  artesian  well  which  flows  to  a 
height  of  28  feet,  and  lias  a  capacity,  when  pumped,  of  2,000,000  gallons 
per  day.  The  water  from  this  well  will  be  pumped  into  a  reservoir  100 
feet  high,  and  be  used  to  supply  the  peninsula. 

There  is  another  reservoir  on  the  more  elevated  ground,  200  feet 
above  sea  level,  with  a  capacity  of  1,500,000  gallons,  which  can  be 
increased  to  16,000,000  as  soon  as  necessary.  This  is  supplied  from 
mountain  streams. 

Pearl  City  consists  of  2,200  acres  of  land,  which  was  owned  in  fee 
simple  by  the  Oahu  Eailroad  and  Land  Company,  18,000  acres  adjoin- 
ing which  is  held  by  the  same  company  under  a  fifty-year  lease,  and  is 
being  sublet  for  fruit-growing  purposes'.  Three  companies  have  recently 
been  incorporated,  two  oft  them  with  a  capital  of  $30,000  each,  and  have 
rented  a  choice  portion  of  this  land,  which  will  be  planted  principally 
in  bananas  and  pineapples. 

The  2,200  acres  Which  the  town  proper  comprises,  includes  the  whole 
of  the  peninsula  extending  into  the  harbor,  and  the  lots  on  the  main- 
land, the  latter  of  which  are  on  a  gradual  slope  of  land  inclining  toward 
the  mountains. 

The  site  of  Pearl  City  has  long  been  a  favorite  spot  where  boating, 
bathing,  and  fishing  can  be  enjoyed  under  the  most  favorable  circum- 
stances. A  good  breeze  is  always  blowing  from  the  ocean.  The  tem- 
perature of  the  water  is  perfect  for  bathing  all  the- year  round.* 

Diamond  Hill. — About  3  J  miles  southeast  of  Honolulu;  a  signal 
station  for  incoming  vessels. 

WaikiM. — A  village  lying  about  1  mile  northwest  of  Diamond  Hill. 
There  is  no  anchorage  in  front  of  it. 

Island  of  Hawaii.    (Map  D.) 

In  shape  the  island  of  Hawaii  is  a  wide  triangle,  sides  85,  75,  and  65 
geographical  miles.  Almost  the  whole  surface  is  a  gentle  slope  from 
one  of  the  four  volcanic  mountains :  Mauna  Kea,  on  north,  13,805  feet, 
the  highest  peak  in  the  Pacific  Ocean;  Mauna  Loa,  on  south,  13,600 
feet;  Mauna  Hualalai,  on  west,  8,275  feet;  and  Mauna  Kohala,  on  north- 
west, 5,505  feet.  The  slopes  on  the  west  are  so  gentle  that  the  base  of 
terminal  cones  may  be  reached  on  horseback.  In  the  Mahukona  dis- 
trict the  face  of  the  country  is  regular,  ascending  gradually  from  coast 
to  summit  of  highland. 

The  plain  lying  between  the  mountains  of  Hawaii  is  many  square 
miles  in  extent. 

Coast. — The  south  point  of  the  island  of  Hawaii,  called  Ka  Lae,  is 
very  low,  rising  with  a  gentle  slope  to  the  hills  behind.  The  southern 
side  of  the  island  is  much  drier  and  the  country  more  open  and  free 
from  forest  than  on  the  north,  where,  indeed,  the  forests  are  very  dense. 

From  the  south  to  Kumukahi,  the  east  point  of  Hawaii,  there  are  no 
bays  or  good  anchoi/ages.t    The  coast  is  exposed  to  wind  and  swell. 


*  Pacific  Coast  Commercial  Record.        t  Ej  lept  the  small  bay  at  Kaalualu. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  27 

From  the  east  point  almost  to  Hilo  Bay  the  coast  is  precipitous,  and 
against  it  the  sea  continually  beats  with  violence;  thence  for  thirty 
miles  the  shore  is  remarkable  for  the  number  of  streams  (85),  running 
at  the  bottom  of  ravines,  1,800  to  2,000  feet  deep,  which  furrow  the  side 
of  Manna  Kea  and  render  travel  along  its  coast  very  laborious.  Ridges 
between  the  ravines,  terminating  at  the  sea  in  precipices  from  100  to 
500  feet  high,  oblige  the  road  to  run  inland.  The  northeastern  coast  is 
very  generally  steep  and  rocky,  though  here  and  there  are  small  bays  or 
breaks  in  the  cliffs  where  the  natives  are  able  to  land  their  canoes. 

Upolu  Point  is  the  northern  extremity  of  the  island.  Behind  it  lies 
an  extensive  plain  in  good  state  of  cultivation,  rising  gradually  to  the 
foot  of  the  mountains. 

From  the  north  point  of  the  island  the  west  coast  is  at  first  barren, 
owing  to  want  of  rain;  the  face  of  the  country  is  regular,  ascending 
gradually  from  the  coast  to  the  summit  of  highland  in  the  interior. 
From  Kawaihe  Bay  to  the  village  of  Kailua  there  is  no  anchorage  or 
shelter. 

Kealalcelcua  Bay,  where  stands  the  monument  to  Capt.  Cook,  R.  N.,  is 
the  best  anchorage  of  the  south  coast;  but  south  of  it  lies  a  rugged 
lava  covered  shore,  where  large  masses  of  rock,  miles  in  extent,  often 
form  perpendicular  cliffs  against  which  the  sea  beats  with  fury. 

This  formation  extends  half  a  mile  into  the  interior,  and  as  the  dis- 
tance from  the  sea  increases  the  soil  becomes  richer  and  more  productive. 
The  face  of  the  country  within  this  rocky  barrier  is  rough  and  covered 
with  blocks  of  lava  more  or  less  decomposed,  but  at  a  distance  of  2 
miles  from  the  coast  begins  to  be  well  covered  with  woods  of  various 
kinds,  which  are  rendered  almost  impassable  by  an  undergrowth  of 
vines  and  ferns. 

The  interior  of  the  island  of  Hawaii  is  a  strange  blending  of  fertility 
and  desolation.  In  the  valleys  are  often  found  regions  of  extraordinary 
richness,  that  are  reached  only  by  crossing  arid  districts  strewn  with 
rocks  and  bowlders,  or  overlaid  by  recent  streams  of  lava  still  uncovered 
by  soil. 

Barren  wastes  are  succeeded  by  vegetation  so  dense  as  to  be  almost 
impenetrable,  or  by  pleasant  grass  lands  lying  near  forests  of  the  pecu- 
liar koa  tree,  which  is  characteristic  of  this  island.  The  trees  in  the 
koa  forests  frequently  grow  close  together  from  a  soil  carpeted  with 
long  rich  grass;  they  are  large  in  size,  of  hard,  dark  wood,  and  were 
formerly  greatly  used  to  make  the  canoes  of  the  islanders. 

The  density  of  the  forests  is  proportional  to  the  amount  of  rainfall, 
which,  upon  the  windward  side  of  Hawaii,  is  phenomenally  great.* 

On  Hawaii  is  found  a  peculiar  grass,  said  to  have  been  brought  to 
the  island  by  accident.  In  its  green  state  it  is  hardly  fit  for  pasture. 
Cattle  and  horses  eat  it,  but  it  apparently  affords  very  little  nourish- 
ment, though  more  when  cured.  So  dense  and  high  is  this  grass  that 
it  is  difficult  to  ride  through  it.  Another,  and  perhaps  the  best  variety 
of  grass,  comes  from  Mexico;  it  is  called,  locally,  maniania  grass,  and 
wherever  it  grows  forms  the  richest  and  most  velvety  sward  imagin- 
able.    It  is  highly  nutritious  and  animals  are  very  fond  of  it. 

Such  being  the  character  of  the  interior  of  the  island,  roads  are  in 
general  bad,  and  communication  difficult. 


*  Mnj.  Dutton  says  that  this  may  attain  to  more  than  300  inches  annually  in  the 
nterior  of  Hawaii;  240  inches  have  heen  measured  at  Hilo. 


28  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

CITIES,   TOWNS,   AND  PORTS,   HAWAII. 

Hilo. — Hilo,  or  Byron  Bay,  on  the  northeast  side  of  Hawaii,  is  the 
only  anchorage  on  the  northeast  coast;  the  bay  is  about  7£  miles  wide 
and  3  miles  deep.     It  is  fully  exposed  to  the  northeast,  trade  wind. 

The  scene  which  the  island  presents,  as  viewed  from  the  anchorage 
in  Hilo  Bay,  is  novel  and  beautiful;  the  shores  are  shielded  with  exten- 
sive groves  of  cocoanut  and  bread  fruit  trees,  interspersed  with  plan- 
tations of  sugar  cane,  through  which  numerous  streams  are  seen  hur- 
rying to  the  ocean.  To  this  belt  succeeds  a  region  some  miles  in  width, 
free  from  woods,  but  clothed  in  verdure,  while  beyond  is  a  wider  belt  of 
forest,  whose  trees,  as  they  rise  higher  and  higher  from  the  sea,  change 
their  character  from  the  vegetation  of  the  tropics  to  that  of  the  polar 
regions.    Above  all  tower  the  snow-capped  summits  of  the  mountains.* 

On  the  coast  of  the  bay  near  Cocoanut  Island  lie  the  creek  and  vil- 
lage of  Whyeatea,  where  landing  may  be  effected  in  all  weathers. 
There  are  two  piers  to  the  northward  of  the  entrance  of  the  creek, 
alongside  the  northernmost  of  which  ships  drawing  15  feet  of  water  can 
lie.  The  shore  then  turns  westward  along  a  sandy  beach  for  nearly  1 
mile  to  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  where  the  town  of  Hilo  is  situated. 

Hilo  is  the  principal  town  in  Hawaii,  and  ranks  next  to  Honolulu  in 
importance  and  population.  The  town  may  be  easily  recognized  from 
the  seaward  by  the  tall  white  square  towers  of  the  Eoman  Catholic 
church  and  the  pointed  white  spire  of  the  Protestant  church.  There  are 
also  several  other  large  buikliugs,  both  public  and  private,  such  as  a 
court-house,  schools,  governor's  house,  stores,  etc. 

There  are  several  sugar  plantations  in  the  vicinity  of  Hilo  on  which 
the  town  is  mainly  dependent  for  prosperity. 

Besides  sugar  and  molasses,  Hilo  exports  hides,  tallow,  goatskins, 
arrowroot,  rice,  and  a  small  amount  of  coffee. 

As  before  stated,  the  rainfall  here  is  very  great,  and  accounts  for 
the  luxuriant  verdure  of  the  district. 

The  Hawaiian  Government  steam  vessels  communicate  with  Hilo  from 
Honolulu  once  a  week,  and  schooners  ply  constantly  between  the  two 
ports.     (See  Communications  and  Appendix  I.) 

Supplies. — Supplies  of  nearly  all  descriptions  can  be  obtained:  Beef, 
10  cents  per  pound;  bread,  about  9  cents,  and  vegetables  at  6  cents. 

A  small  pier  has  been  built  in  front  of  the  town,  but  in  1888  the  sand 
had  washed  up  and  closed  it  as  a  landing  place.  The  only  landing 
place  is  at  Whyeatea. 

Close  to  the  west  of  the  town  is  Waterfall  Creek,  the  mouth  of 
WTailuku  Kiver,  and  about  2  miles  from  the  entrance  is  Cocoanut  Point. 
There  is  a  good  watering  place  up  this  creek  which  is  generally  easy  of 
access,  except  when  the  wind  is  blowing  hard  from  seaward;  on  such 
occasions  the  surf  is  high,  and  the  rocky  bar  at  the  entrance  becomes 
dangerous  for  boats  to  pass.    The  water  is  excellent  and  abundant. 

Hilo  Bay  is  a  safe  anchorage,  and  next  to  Honolulu  may  be  con- 
sidered the  best  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  With  a  strong  trade  wind 
there  is  a  slight  sea,  unpleasant  enough  for  boats  but  not  sufficient  to 
endanger  the  safety  of  a  ship.  The  westerly  wind,  which  is  felt  most, 
seldom  blows  strongly. 

A  well- sheltered  anchorage  can  be  picked  up  anywhere  under  the 
lee  of  Blonde  Beef  in  from  5  to  7  fathoms.    A  vessel  drawing  15  feet  or 


*  Pacific  Islands,  Vol.  n,  Hydro-graphic  Office.    Admiralty. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  29 

less  may  anchor  so  as  to  be  quite  under  the  lee  of  Cocoanut  Island  and 
Keo  Kea  Point. 

MahuTcona. — A  small  village  with  anchorage  off  it  about  6  miles  south 
of  Upolii  Point.  The  place  is  becoming  important,  through  the  energy 
of  a  Mr.  Wilder,  who  has  made  a  most  convenient  landing  place,  and 
constructed  a  railway  15  miles  long  to  bring  sugar  from  the  Kohala 
district  round  the  north  end  of  the  island. 

The  cargo  boats  lay  along  the  side  of  the  pier  and  are  laden  and 
cleared  very  quickly  by  means  of  a  steam  "  crab  "which  works  a  truck 
up  and  down  the  incline. 

There  is  no  water  in  the  place.  All  the  fresh  water  has  to  be  brought 
from  Kohala  by  train.    An  attempt  to  obtain  artesian  water  failed. 

The  anchorage  is  indifferent,  and  with  winds  to  the  westward  of 
north  or  south  would  be  untenable.  Freight  is  disembarked  and  ship- 
ped at  night,  during  the  greater  part  of  the  year. 

The  soil  along  the  shore  is  barren  for  3  or  4  miles  inland  owing  to 
the  want  of  rain.  The  face  of  the  country  is  regular,  ascending  grad- 
ally  from  the  coast  to  the  summit  of  the  high  land. 

Kawaihae  village  is  situated  in  a  grove  of  cocoanut  trees,  just  behind 
a  sandy  point  near  the  center  of  the  bay  of  the  same  name.  The  vil- 
lage consists  (1891)  of  a  general  store,  2  or  3  houses,  and  several 
huts  along  the  shore.    In  front  of  the  village  is  a  pier  for  boats. 

So  much  of  the  soil  of  this  district  as  lies  along  the  coast,  though 
rich,  is  badly  watered;  7  or  8  miles  inland  from  Kawaihae  Bay  it 
becomes  exceedingly  rocky  and  barren. 

The  climate  is  upon  the  whole  unpleasant,  especially  at  Waimea, 
about  9  miles  eastward  of  Kawaihae,  in  consequence  of  the  exceed- 
ingly strong  trade  wind,  which  brings  with  it  a  mist  toward  sunset. 
This  wind  rushes  furiously  down  between  the  mountains  which  bound 
the  valley  of  Waimea  and  becomes  very  dangerous  to  the  shipping  in 
the  bay.  It  is  called  by  the  natives  mumulm,  and  is  foretold  by  an 
illuminated  streak  seen  far  inland,  believed  to  be  caused  by  the  reflec- 
tion of  the  twilight  on  the  mist  that  always  accompanies  the  mumuku. 

The  principal  exports  of  the  district  are  hides,  tallow,  and  beef. 

On  approaching  the  anchorage  a  good  landmark  is  a  conspicuous 
mound  situated  a  short  distance  south  of  the  village.  Another  con- 
spicuous landmark  is  a  white  tomb  in  the  form  of  a  pyramid. 

There  is  a  coral  reef  in  front  of  the  village,  but  a  boat  passage  exists 
around  the  north  end  and  close  to  the  shore,  where  landing  is  easy. 

With  strong  westerly  winds  the  anchorage  would  be  very  exposed 
and  unsafe.  The  sea  breeze  from  the  westward  lasts  all  day,  and  the 
northeast  trade  or  land  breeze  sometimes  blows  strong  all  night. 

Supplies. — Beef  may  be  obtained  here  at  6  cents  a  pound ;  potatoes  are 
abundant,  and  plenty  of  fish  may  be  caught  with  the  seine. 

The  watering  place,  which  is  in  a  small  sandy  bay,  is  only  a  pool  of 
rain  water  collected  in  a  hole,  and  would  require  500  feet  of  hose  to 
pump  into  a  boat.  In  the  summer  the  water  becomes  somewhat  stag- 
nant and  unfit  for  drinking j  in  winter  more  rain  falls,  and  it  then 
becomes  a  stream. 

Settlement — Kailua  Bay. — The  bay  affords  a  good  anchorage  at  most 
seasons  of  the  year.  (In  1841  the  residence  of  the  governor  of  Hawaii 
Island  was  established  here,  and  great  advances  were  being  made  in  the 
civilized  arts  and  industries.)  There  is  a  most  convenient  landing  place 
on  a  sandy  beach  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay,  formed  by  the  jutting  out 
of  two  points,  between  which  is  a  small  cove  protected  from  the  surf  by 
rocks. 


30  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

Kain  seldom  falls  here  except  in  showers,  and  a  rainy  day  once  in  the 
year  is  looked  upon  as  remarkable.  This,  together  with  the  absence  of 
all  dew,  prevents  the  existence  of  much  cultivation.  There  grows, 
nevertheless,  a  coarse  vegetation  sufficient  to  pasture  a  few  hundred 
goats,  and  a  mile  back  from  the  shore  the  surface  is  covered  with  herb- 
age which  maintains  cattle,  etc. ;  2  miles  in  the  interior  there  is  suffi- 
cient moisture  to  keep  up  a  constant  verdure. 

The  temperature  is  mild  and  equable.  During  the  winter  the  ther- 
mometer ranges  from  64°  to  85°;  summer,  68°  to  86°. 

The  prevailing  winds  are  the  land  and  sea  breezes,  which  are  very 
regular ;  the  most  severe  gales  are  those  from  the  southwest,  which  last 
from  a  few  hours  to  two  or  three  days,  and  render  anchorage  unsafe. 

On  approaching  Kailua  Bay,  the  town  may  be  recognized  by  the  2 
churches  and  the  cocoanut  groves  on  the  shore  to  the  westward. 

There  is  a  most  convenient  landing  place,  as  noted  above. 

Kona. — Settlement  near  Kealakekua  Bay,  situated  west  side  Hawaii; 
best  anchorage  on  that  coast.  Climate  mild,  62°  to  76°  in  winter,  70° 
to  86°  in  summer.  Strong  winds  are  seldom  felt.  During  day,  cool 
sea  breeze;  during  night,  land  breeze.  It  was  at  Kealakekua  Bay  that 
Capt.  Cook  was  killed  (1779).  On  west  of  Kanwalda  Cove  is  a  village 
of  same  name,  where  the  monument  to  Cook  now  stands.  The  shore 
all  around  the  bay  is  rocky,  making  landing  dangerous  when  there  is 
a  swell  setting  in,  except  at  Kealakekua  village.  Here  there  is  a  fine 
sandy  beach,  with  burying  place  at  one  extremity  and  a  small  well  of 
fresh  water  at  the  other.  The  bay  is  easy  of  access ;  but  anchorage  is 
not  good,  owing  to  the  great  depth  of  water  and  foul  bottom.  Kan- 
walda Cove,  though  exposed  to  winds  south  and  southwest,  may  be  con- 
sidered safe  anchorage,  except  in  winter. 

Kona  is  a  village  a  few  miles  inland,  and  is  considered  one  of  the 
most  healthy  spots  in  the  whole  group,  and  especially  beneficial  to  peo- 
ple suffering  from  weakness  or  disease  of  lungs  or  chest.  It  is  said 
that  many  visitors  come  here  from  California  to  pass  the  winter,  and 
there  are  one  or  two  commodious  boarding  houses  for  their  accommo- 
dation. 

From  the  landing  place,  about  half  a  cable  southwest  of  Cook's  mon- 
ument, there  is  a  good  road  leading  to  Kona. 

Supplies. — Beef,  fowls,  sweet  potatoes,  and  plantains  can  be  obtained 
in  Kealakekua;  also  water  at  Napupu,  a  village  south  of  Kealakekua; 
but  the  tank  is  falling  to  decay,  and  the  water  is  brackish  in  all  wells 
in  the  vicinity  of  Kanwalda  Cove. 

Island  of  Maui.    (Map  E.) 

The  island  of  Maui  lies  northwest  of  Hawaii.  The  channel  which 
separates  them  has  a  width  of  28  miles. 

The  island  is  48  miles  long  in  a  west-by-north  and  east-by-south  direc- 
tion; it  is  divided  into  two  oval-shaped  peninsulas,  connected  by  a  low 
isthmus  6  miles  across,  and  only  a  few  feet  higher  than  the  beach. 

The  whole  island,  which  is  volcanic,  was  probably  produced  by  the 
action  of  the  two  adjacent  volcanoes. 

Coast. — The  southwest  point  of  Maui,  Cape  Hanamanioa,  is  formed 
by  rugged,  craggy  rocks.  From  here  along  the  coast  25  miles  to 
Alau  islet  the  whole  shore  is  rugged  and  offers  no  anchorage  or 
shelter.  From  seaward  the  land  appears  to  ascend  abruptly;  it  is 
densely  covered  with  trees  and  vegetation,  while  here  and  there  a  few 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  31 

habitations  appear.  Alau  islet,  lying  off  the  east  coast  of  Maui,  is  very 
small.  Kauiki  head,  the  eastern  point  of  Maui,  is  an  old  crater  which 
is  connected  by  a  low  spit  to  the  mainland,  and  at  a  distance  appears 
like  an  island. 

Near  this,  peninsula  lies  Hana  harbor,  from  Avhich  a  coast  that  affords 
no  shelter  extends  for  31  miles. 

The  north  coast  of  East  Maui  is  a  succession  of  deep  ravines,  which 

gradually  diminish  in  breadth  as  they  ascend,  and  are  finally  lost  in 

,the  flanks  of  the  mountains;  traveling  along  the  coast,  in  consequence, 

becomes  almost  impossible.     Cascades  several  hundred  feet  in  height, 

but  having  little  volume  of  water,  are  seen  falling  into  these  ravines. 

The  east  coast  of  West  Maui  is  an  abrupt  precipice  several  hundred 
feet  in  height,  terminating  at  Kahakuloa  Point,  the  northern  extremity 
of  the  island.  The  southern  side  of  West  Maui  has  a  forbidding  appear- 
ance. Tue  shores,  however,  are  not  so  steep  and  rocky  as  elsewhere, 
and  have  generally  a  sandy  beach. 

Off  Makena,  near  the  southwest  extremity  of  the  island,  lies  a  small 
baneu  islet  called  Molokini,  only  visited  by  fishermen  who  dry  their 
nets  on  its  barren  surface. 

Interior. — The  eastern  peninsula  of  Maui,  the  larger  of  the  two,  is 
lofty;  but  though  the  mountains  are  often  seen  above  the  clouds,  they 
are  never  covered  with  snow. 

East  Maui  rises  in  an  unbroken  mountain. 

East  Maui,  although  mountainous,  has  much  cultivated  land;  and 
the  rich  volcanic  soil  of  the  Kula  district,  on  the  southwest  side  of  the 
island,  raises  abundant  crops  of  potatoes.  Wheat  and  other  grains 
are  also  cultivated. 

West  Maui  has  many  sharp  peaks  and  ridges,  which  are  divided  by 
deep  valleys,  descending  towards  the  sea,  and  opening  out  into  sloping 
plains  of  considerable  extent  in  the  north  and  south  sides. 

The  highest  peak  of  West  Maui  is  Mauna  Ika,  6,130  feet. 

The  connecting  isthmus  Consists  of  sand,  which  is  constantly  shift- 
ing and  w  thrown  up  in  dunes;  this  region  is  naturally  dry,  but  dur- 
ing nine  months  of  the  year  affords  fine  grazing,  feeding  large  herds 
of  cattle  that  are  mostly  owned  by  foreigners. 

The  productions  of  Maui  are  those  of  the  other  islands,  with  the 
addition  of  a  few  fruits,  such  as  grapes,  etc. 

The  highest  point  of  Maui,  named  Kolakole,  is  10,030  feet  above  the 
sea.  It  is  destitute  of  trees  to  the  height  of  about  2,000  feet;  then 
succeeds  a  belt  of  forest  to  the  height  of  about  6,500  feet,  and  again 
the  summit  is  bare. 

The  crater  of  Haleakala  is  a  deep  gorge,  open  at  the  north  and  east, 
forming  a  kind  of  elbow.  The  inside  is  entirely  bare  of  vegetation. 
The  natives  have  no  tradition  of  an  eruption. 

Though  arid  and  sandy  in  appearance,  the  soil  of  the  isthmus  con- 
necting the  two  parts  of  the  island  is  good,  deep,  and  exceedingly  fertile 
where  irrigation  has  been  introduced.  At  Spreckelsville,  in  the  north- 
ern part  of  the  peninsula,  lie  the  largest  sugar  estates  of  the  island. 

CITIES,  TOWNS,  AND  PORTS,  MAUI. 

Hana  Harbor. — The  anchorage  is  well  protected  from  the  wind  and 
sea,  and  is  very  convenient.    There  is  a  town  here.    Details  unknown. 

Kahului  Harbor. — Situated  between  the  coral  reefs  on  the  northern 
side  of  the  low  isthmus  joining  the  two  peninsulas.  Channels  about 
3£  cables  wide,  4  cables  deep,  fully  exposed  to  the  northward. 


32  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

Kalmlui. — An  important  place  for  exporting  the  produce  of  the  north- 
ern part  of  Maui y  there  are  railways  connecting  it  with  Wailu'ui  to 
the  westward,  and  Spreckelsville  and  Haiku  on  the  east.  {Set  Oom= 
inunications.) 

There  was  being  built  in  1881,  out  from  the  shore  near  the  custom- 
house, a  jetty  which  it  was  proposed  to  extend  as  far  as  the  edge  of 
the  reef. 

Anchorage  may  be  obtained  in  from  2£  to  7  fathoms. 

WailuJcu. — A  flourishing  village  about  2  miles  northwest  of  Kahu- 
lui.  Here  there  is  a  female  seminary  occupying  an  extensive  range 
of  coral  buildings,  beautifully  situated  on  an  inclined  plane,  with  high 
precipices  behind.  It  is  considered  one  of  the  best  organized  establish- 
ments in  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

Lahaina. — A  town  situated  on  the  west  side  of  West  Maui,  and  at 
one  time  a  flourishing  place  much  frequented  by  whaling  vessels  for 
refitting  and  for  obtaining  supplies,  but  now  only  visited  by  vessels 
loading  with  sugar,  which  is  grown  on  the  estates  in  the  vicinity. 

The  town  is  built  along  the  beach  for  a  distance  of  three-fourths  of 
a  mile.  It  is  principally  composed  of  grass  houses  situated  as  near 
the  beach  as  possible.  It  has  one  principal  street,  with  a  few  others 
at  right  angles  to  it.  From  seaward  the  town  may  be  recognized  by 
some  conspicuous  buildings,  especially  Government  House,  which  is 
near  the  beach  and  has  a  tall  flagstaff  before  it.  The  seminary  of 
Lahaiualuna  is  situated  on  the  side  of  the  mountain  above  the  town. 

Off  the  town  there  is  an  open  roadstead  which  is  completely  shel- 
tered from  the  trade  wind  by  the  high  land  of  Maui,  but  the  holding 
ground  is  reported  indifferent. 

Supplies. — Supplies  of  all  sorts  can  be  obtained  here — beef,  vegeta- 
bles, fruit,  and  water  in  abundance. 

Landing. — The  landing  place  is  at  a  small  pier,  extending  from  the 
light-house,  and  protected  by  a  breakwater. 

The  tide  is  irregular,  generally  running  northwest  sixteen  hours  out 
of  the  twenty-four. 

Patoa. — A  roadstead  (so  called  by  Vancouver)  situated  on  the  south- 
ern side  of  West  Maui.  "  The  anchorage  at  Patoa  is  abreast  of  the 
easternmost  of  these  valleys,  which  appeared  fruitful  and  well  culti- 
vated." 

Kamalalaea  Bay  settlements. — The  bay  is  on  the  west  side  of  Maui, 
lying  between  two  peninsulas,  the  western  side  formed  by  rocky  cliffs 
and  precipices.  Nearly  in  the  middle  of  this  side  is  a  village  called 
Mackerrey,  off  which  is  an  anchorage  in  7  fathoms.    No  details  known. 

Maalaea. — Near  the  head  of  Kamalalaea  Bay,  in  the  northeast  cor- 
ner, is  the  small  village  of  Maalaea.  Here  there  are  some  houses  for 
storing  sugar.  Besides  sugar  there  is  a  great  quantity  of  wheat, 
maize,  and  potatoes  grown  in  this  district,  and  supplies  of  fresh  pro- 
visions are  obtained  in  plenty  from  Wailuku,  which  is  about  6  miles 
distant. 

The  anchorage  off  this  place  is  not  good,  as  the  trade  wind  blows 
across  the  low  isthmus  in  heavy  gusts,  and  communication  with  the 
shore  by  boats  is  sometimes  interrupted. 

There  is  a  small  pier  here  for  loading  schooners  and  boats  can 
always  go  alongside,  the  channel  leading  to  the  landing  place  being 
#bout  20  yards  wide,  between  two  coral  reefs. 

Makena,  or  Malcees  Landing. — A  small  indentation  in  the  west  coast 
of  East  Maui,  near  the  southwestern  extremity  of  the  island.     It 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  33 

derives  the  latter  name  from  a  planter  whose  estate  is  situated  on  the 
side  of  Manna  Haleakala,  on  a  plateau  2,000  feet  above  the  sea  and 
about  5  miles  east  of  the  landing  place.  Near  the  landing  are  a  stone 
church  and  several  Rouses.  The  anchorage  is  exposed  to  the  heavy 
squalls  which  occasionally  blow  over  the  low  isthmus  in  the  center  of 
Maui,  and  landing  is  at  times  impracticable  for  ships'  boats  owing  to 
the  heavy  surf.    The  holding  ground  is  not  good. 

Island  of  Kauai.    (Map  F.) 

Kauai  lies  64  miles  west  by  north  of  Oalm,  and  is  separated  from  it 
by  the  Kaieie  Walio  channel.  This  island  is  of  volcanic  formation, 
somewhat  circular  in  shape,  25  miles  long  and  22  miles  wide,  and  rises 
in  the  center  to  a  peak  5,000  feet  in  height. 

Coast. — From  the  seaward  the  northeast  and  northwest  sides  appear 
broken  and  rugged,  but  to  the  south  the  laud  is  more  even;  the  hills 
rise  with  a  gentle  slope  from  the  shore,  and  at  some  distance  back  are 
covered  with  woods. 

The  southern  point  of  the  island  is  a  bold,  barren,  rocky  headland, 
falling  perpendicularly  into  the  sea. 

Ninini  Point,  north  point  of  Nawiliwili  Harbor,  is  low,  level,  grassy 
laud,  sprinkled  with  volcanic  bowlders  extending  from  a  range  of  low 
hills  that  stretch  along  the  coast  at  a  short  distance  from  the  beach, 
which  extends  northward  to  Wailua. 

Along  the  coast  from  Wailua  sugar  cane  appears  to  be  cultivated  in 
large  quantities,  especially  in  the  vicinity  of  Wailua  and  Kanala  Point, 
where  there  are  several  factories. 

From  this  point  to  Hanalei  Bay  are  several  small  villages  scattered 
along  the  coast  near  the  mouths  of  mountain  streams  which  are  closed 
by  sand  bars.  The  land  near  the  sea  is  flat  and  very  fertile,  but  soon 
rises  to  the  mountains  behind.  The  rivers  as  well  as  the  sea  abound 
in  fish. 

The  northwest  coast  of  Kauai,  forming  the  district  Na  Pali,  has  a 
very  rugged  appearance,  rising  to  lofty  abrupt  cliffs  that  jut  out  into 
a  variety  of  steep  rocky  points  destitute  of  both  soil  and  verdure,  but 
terminating  nearly  in  uniform  even  summits,  on  which,  in  the  valleys 
or  chasms  between  them,  are  several  patches  of  green.  Here  and 
there  a  stream  running  from  the  lofty  mountains  behind  finds  its  way 
to  the  ocean. 

Mana  Point,  the  western  extremity  of  Kauai,  is  along,  low  sand  spit, 
commencing  at  the  foot  of  a  high  range  of  mountains,  and  from  it  a 
sandy  plain  extends  to  the  town  of  Waimea.  This  plain  is  from  <* 
quarter  to  a  mile  wide  and  150  feet  above  the  sea,  whence  it  rises  grad- 
ually to  the  mountains. 

It  has  a  sunburnt  appearance  and  is  destitute  of  trees,  except  on  the 
low  grounds  where  the  cocoanut  thrives.  The  sea  here  abounds  in  fish. 
Between  Waimea  and  Kaloa  Bay,  the  south  point  of  Kauai,  extends  a 
series  of  sunburnt  hills  and  barren  plains,  sloping  gradually  to  the 
shore  from  the  mountains,  and  here  and  there  intersected  by  ravines. 
There  is  no  cultivation,  and  the  soil  only  produces  a  kind  of  coarse 
grass  quite  unfit  for  pasture. 

Interior. — The  island  of  Kauai  is  considered  one  of  the  most  pleasant 
of  the  group.  Portions  of  it  appear  better  adapted  to  agriculture  than 
the  other  islands,  and  the  coffee  and  sugar  plantations  on  the  weather 

gf  Bep,  227 ? 


34  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

side,  which  is  well  watered  with  streams  and  by  frequent  rains,  ard 
very  productive  j  but  the  lee  side  is  dry  and  adapted  to  cultivation^ 
only  in  valleys. 

CITIES,   TOWNS,   AND  PORTS,   KAUAI. 

Wawiliwili  Bay  village. — The  harbor  of  Nawiliwili  is  a  small  cove  on] 
the  southeast  side  of  the  island,  at  the  head  of  a  bay  of  this  nainel 
The  greater  part  of  the  harbor  is  blocked  by  shoals  and  reefs. 

At  Nawiliwili  Bay  is  a  large  village;  the  soil  in  the  vicinity  is  richj 
producing  sugar  cane,  taro,  beans,  sweet  potatoes,  etc. 

There  is  a  small  pier  in  the  northwest  corner  of  the  harbor,  wherec 
landing  may  be  easily  effected;  but  the  pier  should  be  approached  with 
caution,  as  a  reef  extends  from  the  shore  to  the  southward  of  it  fon 
two  cables  in  an  easterly  direction. 

The  local  mail  steamer  runs  to  this  point.     (See  Communications.)   i 

Wailua. — Formerly  a  place  of  some  importance,  5 J  miles  from  Kiirini 
Point,  situated  on  a  small  river  of  the  same  name,  in  a  barren  sandjl 
spot,  surrounded  by  an  extremely  fertile  district.  The  river,  in  com  moil 
with  the  others  along  this  coast,  is  closed  at  the  mouth  with  sand  barsj 
but  inside  is  deep  and  navigable  by  canoes  for  several  miles. 

Coast  villages. — From  Kanala  Point,  north  and  west,  14  miles  to 
Hanalei  Bay,  there  are  several  small  villages  scattered  along  the  coastj 
near  the  mouth  of  mountain  streams  closed  by  sand  bars. 

Hanalei. — Situated  near  the  bottom  of  a  bay  of  this  name. 

Anchorage  ground  in  the  bay  is  spacious  in  tine  weather,  but  there  il 
only  room  for  about  three  vessels  in  bad  weather  under  the  lee  of  tha 
reef  near  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay. 

A  landing  is  generally  effected  inside  the  mouth  of  the  river. 

Supplies. — Supplies  are  plentiful — beef,  vegetables,  and  fruits  may  bd 
obtained  in  abundance.  Water  may  be  procured  by  sending  boats  inta 
the  river,  which  is  easy  of  access  iu  fine  weather,  and  a  short  distance! 
from  the  mouth  the  water  is  perfectly  fresh.  The  town  is  very  picturj 
esquely  placed;  the  mountains  rise  to  a  height  of  from  3,000  to  4,000j 
feet,  and  are  clothed  with  verdure  from  base  to  summit,  with  numeroua 
rills  running  down  their  precipitous  sides. 

In  front  of  the  town  is  a  good  beach  where  great  quantities  of  fish 
may  be  caught  with  a  seine. 

The  district  derives  its  name  from  the  numerous  rainbows  formed  byj 
passing  showers.  The  rains  are  so  frequent  as  to  clothe  the  country  iil 
perpetual  green. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  is  a  conspicuous  dark  bluff-head^ 
with  two  sandy  beaches  a  short  distance  to  the  eastward. 

A  little  way  to  the  southward  of  this  bluff  is  the  mouth  of  a  small 
river,  in  front  of  which  is  a  bar  that  may  be  crossed  by  boats  at  half 
flood;  inside,  the  bar  carries  a  depth  of  from  one  to  three  quarter! 
of  a  fathom  and  is  navigable  for  several  miles  for  boats  drawing  3 
feet.  About  4  cables  from  the  mouth  of  the  river,  on  the  northern 
bank,  is  a  large  farm,  called  u Charlton  farm,"  owned  by  the  Englisfl 
consul,  who  keeps  a  large  number  of  cattle  of  good  breed. 

Waimea  village. — Situated  on  Waimea  Bay,  southwest  coast,  placed! 
at  the  mouth  of  river  of  the  same  name,  which  runs  about  15  milel 
inland.  At  one  time  a  populous  native  town,  but  now  (1891)  only! 
small  village  of  little  importance.    It  contains  a  church. 

Boats  may  ascend  the  river  for  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile;  thid 
is  the  only  water  here  that  is  not  brackish.    A  little  to  the  eastward 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  35 

of  the  village  a  shoal  projects.  The  trade  winds,  deflected  by  the 
mountains,  often  raise  a  surf  which  renders  landing  at  times  very 
unpleasant,  sometimes  impracticable. 

Waimea  Bay  should  be  approached  with  caution,  as  reefs  extend  to 
the  southward.  There  is  a  railroad  from  Waimea  to  Kekaha.  No 
details  known. 

Kaloa  Bay  village. — About  1  mile  west  of  the  south  point  of  Kauai 
is  a  slight  indentation  of  the  coast,  where  there  is  a  considerable  vil- 
lage called  Kaloa,  off  which  anchorage  may  be  obtained  but  in  a  very 
exposed  position. 

The  country  around  the  village  of  Kaloa  is  much  broken  by  hills 
and  inactive  craters;  but  the  soil  is  good,  though  dry  and  very  stony, 
and  is  capable  of  cultivation  in  many  places.  There  is  a  sugar  planta- 
tion here,  and  there  are  several  large  cattle  ranches  in  the  vicinity. 

The  village  may  be  recognized  by  many  high  buildings  and  two 
churches;  it  extends  from  the  beach  to  a  distance  of  2  miles  up  the 
slope  of  a  hill.  Between  the  village  and  Makanuena,  the  southern 
extremity  of  the  island,  there  is  a  low  point  running  out  into  a  rocky 
ledge  that  somewhat  protects  the  anchorage. 

There  is  a  good  landing  place  at  Kaloa,  in  a  small  cove  protected  by 
a  reef  extending  about  1  cable  from  shore;  an  artificial  creek  has  been 
made  at  the  head  of  this  cove,  with  sufficient  space  for  one  boat  to  enter. 

Supplies. — Supplies  of  beef,  vegetables,  and  fruit  may  be  obtained  in 
abundance. 

Island  of  Molokai.    (Chart  B.) 

Molokai  is  situated  north  of  Lanai,  from  which  it  is  separated  by 
Pailolo  Channel,  6J  miles  wide. 

It  is  apparently  formed  by  a  chain  of  volcanic  mountains  about  40 
miles  long  and  7  miles  broad.  The  mountains  are  high  and  broken  by 
deep  ravines  and  water  courses ;  the  sides  are  clothed  with  verdure  and 
ornamented  with  shrubs  and  trees.  , 

Coast. — Lae  o  Ka  Laau,  the  southwest  extremity  of  Molokai,  is  a 
low  black  point.  On  the  south  side  of  the  island  are  several  small 
harbors,  the  best  of  which  is  Kaunakakai,  midway  between  the  two 
extremes. 

From  this  point  to  the  southeast  extremity  of  the  island  the  distance 
by  the  coast  is  about  21  miles,  thence  northward  to  Kalaua,  the  north- 
east point,  about  2  miles. 

Some  16  miles  from  Kalaua,  and  on  a  peninsula  projecting  about  2 
miles  into  the  sea,  is  placed  the  leper  settlement  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands. 

Interior. — One-third  of  the  island  of  Molokai,  towards  the  west  end, 
is  a  barren  waste  not  susceptible  of  cultivation,  except  in  the  rainy  sea- 
son. It  has  in  consequence  but  few  inhabitants,  who  are  engaged 
mostly  in  fishing. 

The  eastern  two-thirds  is  almost  one  entire  mountain,  rising  gradu- 
ally from  the  south  until  it  attains  an  elevation  of  2,500  feet,  while  on 
the  north  it  is  almost  perpendicular.  On  the  south  side  there  is  a 
narrow  strip  of  land  not  exceeding  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  width,  where 
dwell  the  greater  part  of  the  population.  The  soil  is  very  rich,  but 
owing  to  the  want  of  moisture  few  plants  will  thrive  even  here.  Resort 
is  therefore  bad  to  the  uplands,  which  are  found  to  be  susceptible  of 
the  highest  degree  of  cultivation. 


36  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

CITIES,   TOWNS,   AND   PORTS,  MOLOKAI. 

Kaundkakai. — A  town  or  village  situated  on  the  south  side  of  Molokai, 
midway  between  the  extremes.  There  are  outer  and  inner  anchorages: 
former  not  good,  latter  limited. 

No  supplies  are  to  be  obtained  at  Kaunakakai.  No  details  of  town 
known. 

Kalanao. — Situated  near  the  center  of  the  north  coast  of  Molokai,  at 
the  base  of  very  precipitous  mountains.  The  leper  establishment  was 
erected  here  about  1865.  The  anchorage  is  to  the  southward  of  a  low 
point,  extending  from  the  foot  of  two  remarkable,  steep  mountains. 
It  can  not  be  considered  safe,  being  exposed  to  a  heavy  swell ;  landing 
at  Kalanao,  always  difficult,  is  at  times  dangerous. 

Supplies. — No  supplies  can  be  obtained. 

Island  of  Lanai,  or  Ranai.    (Chart  B.) 

Lies  16  miles  northwest  of  Kahulaui,  and  is  separated  from  West 
Maui  by  Auau  Channel,  7J  miles  wide.  Lanai  is  a  dome-shaped  island, 
about  17  miles  long  and  9  miles  broad.  Large  fissures  are  visible  on  its 
sides. 

The  center  of  this  island  is  much  more  elevated  than  Kahulaui,  but 
is  neither  so  high  nor  so  broken  as  any  of  the  other  islands. 

Great  part  of  it  is  barren,  and  the  island  in  general  suffers  much 
from  the  long  droughts  which  prevail.  The  ravines  and  glens,  not- 
withstanding, are  filled  with  thickets  of  small  trees. 

The  island  is  volcanic;  the  soil  shallow  and  by  no  means  fertile.  The 
shores  abound  with  shellfish. 

Sheep  in  large  numbers,  it  is  said,  are  pastured  here. 

CITIES,   TOWNS,   AND  PORTS,   LANAI. 

No  towns  noted ;  probably  none  exist. 

Island  of  Niihau.    (Chart  B.) 

The  island  lies  17  miles  west-southwest  of  Kauai,  from  which  it  is 
separated  by  Kumukahi  Channel.  It  is  about  20  miles  long  by  7  miles 
broad. 

This  island  is  mostly  lowland,  except  on  the  eastern  side,  where  it 
rises  directly  from  the  sea  to  a  height  of  1,500  feet,  and  is  rocky  and 
unfit  for  cultivation.  On  the  western  side  is  a  level  plain  from  2  to  4 
miles  wide,  where  the  natives  cultivate  yams,  fruits,  sweet  potatoes,  etc. 
The  soil  being  dry,  the  yams  grow  to  great  size.  The* natives  are  few 
in  number  and  very  poor;  they  live  almost  entirely  on  the  western  side 
of  the  island. 

Of  late  years  Niihau  has  been  used  as  a  sheep  run,  and  in  1875  there 
were  said  to  be  about  70,000  sheep  on  the  island. 

The  eastern  shore  of  Niihau  is  rocky  and  wholly  destitute  of  shelter, 
but  on  the  western  shore  there  are  several  open  roadsteads. 

CITIES,  TOWNS,  AND  PORTS,  NIIHAU. 

Tarn  Bay. — An  open  roadstead  about  a  mile  and  a  half  south  of  Kona 
.{Point,  where,  in  fine  weather,  anchorage  may  be  obtained,    There  :~ 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  37 

only  one  place  in  the  bay  where  boats  can  effect  a  landing  in  safety 
when  the  sea  sets  in,  a  common  occurrence;  this  is  on  the  western  side 
behind  a  small  reef  of  rocks  that  lies  a  little  way  off  the  beach;  even 
here  it  is  necessary  to  guard  against  sunken  rocks.  No  inhabitants 
noted. 

Cook  anchorage. — On  the  southwest  of  Niihau,  about  4  miles  south  of 
Kona  Point;  is  exposed  to  the  heavy  northwesterly  swell;  the  bottom 
is  composed  of  large  rocks,  with  patches  of  sand. 

Near  the  beach  are  a  few  huts,  a  church,  and  a  derrick  for  loading 
and  unloading  boats. 

Landing. — The  landing  place  is  protected  by  some  rocks  forming  a 
breakwater  in  the  northeast  part  of  the  bay,  and  is  situated  just  inside 
a  lava  patch  which  from  seaward  appears  like  a  point.  Landing  can 
be  effected  easily  in  moderate  weather,  but  with  a  heavy  swell  it  is 
impracticable. 

Supplies. — Whalers  call  here  occasionally  for  fresh  meat,  but  the 
sheep  being  bred  for  wool  only,  very  little  meat  can  be  procured ;  and 
only  a  limited  quantity  of  vegetables  and  fruit. 

Fresh  water  can  only  be  procured  during  the  rainy  season,  when  the 
water  courses  are  full;  at  other  times  of  the  year  there  is  no  water  but 
what  the  natives  have  collected  in  wells  in  the  rock  for  their  own  use; 
these  wells  are  chiefly  near  the  south  end  of  the  island. 

Caution. — As  the  rollers  set  in  with  but  little  warning  at  Cook  anchor- 
age, sailing  vessels  should  proceed  to  sea  on  first  indications  of  them. 
These  rollers  generally  last  from  three  to  four  days. 

Island  of  Kahulaui.    (Chart  B.) 

Called  also  Tahurowa,  separated  from  East  Maui  by  Alalakeiki  Chan- 
nel, 6  miles  wide,  is  about  11  miles  in  length  and  8  miles  wide. 

It  is  low  and  almost  destitute  of  every  kind  of  shrub  or  verdure, 
excepting  a  species  of  coarse  grass.  The  rocks  of  which  it  is  formed 
are  volcanic,  but  nothing  is  known  of  any  active  or  extinct  craters  on 
the  island. 

Atone  time  this  island  was  used  as  a  penal  settlement;  but  it  is 
now  chiefly  used  as  a  sheep  run,  the  soil  of  decomposed  lava  being  of 
too  poor  a  quality  for  cultivation. 

CITIES,   TOWNS,   AND   PORTS,   KAHULAUI. 

No  towns  noted;  probably  none  exist. 

Island  of  Kaula.    (Chart  B.) 

This  island,  called  also  Tahura,  lies  17  miles  southwest  one-half  west 
from  Niihau.  It  is  a  small,  elevated,  barreu  rock,  destitute  of  vegeta- 
tion, and  uninhabited.  It  is  visited  to  collect  the  eggs  of  sea  birds, 
which  abound. 

Island  of  Lenua.    (Chart  B.) 

Lenua,  or  Egg  Island,  lies  off  the  north  point  of  Niihau.  It  is  a 
small,  rugged,  barren  rock,  apparently  destitute  ot  soil  and  without 
sign  of  habitation. 


38  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

Island  of  Molokinl    (Chart  E. ) 

A  small  islet  of  the  island  of  Maui,  which  see. 

Communications  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

railroads. 

There  are,  according  to  the  Statesman's  Year  Book  for  1893, 56  miles 
of  railway  in  the  islands  of  Hawaii,  Maui,  and  Oahu.  These  roads 
were  built  principally  for  the  transportation  of  products  from  the  interior 
to  the  seaports. 

RAILROADS   OF   OAHU. 

Oahu  Railroad.  —This  line  extends  from  Honolulu,  19  miles,  to  Ewa 
plantation ;  passing  around  Pearl  Lochs,  with  a  branch  along  the  pen- 
insula to  Pearl  City,  and  a  spur  extending  into  a  quarry  at  Palama. 
Eoadbed  good.  It  is  proposed  to  run  the  railroad  completely  around 
the  island. 

Depots. — There  is  an  excellent  depot  at  Honolulu;  also  turntable. 
Stations,  with  suitable  houses,  at  intervals  along  the  line.  A  fine  depot, 
also  turntable,  exists  at  Pearl  City. 

Wharfage. — The  company's  wharf  at  Honolulu  is  60  feet  wide  and 
200  feet  long  and  is  ample  for  present  needs.  Products  can  be  unloaded 
directly  from  cars  to  vessels  and  vice  versa. 

Rolling  stoclc,  etc. — The  rolling  stock  and  equipments  are  of  the  most 
approved  and  modern  style. 

At  the  port  of  Waianae,  in  northwest  portion  of  Oahu,  there  are  sev- 
eral small  railroads,  in  all  about  4  or  5  miles,  branching  to  plantations 
in  the  interior  and  along  the  coast.  About  these  there  are,  however, 
no  obtainable  data. 

RAILROADS  OF  HAWAII. 

In  Hawaii,  from  Mahukona  to  the  Kohola  district,  some  15  miles  of 
railroad  exist. 

RAILROADS  OF  MAUI. 

In  the  island  Maui  a  little  railway  of  very  narrow  gauge  now  con- 
nects Wailuku  and  Kaluilui.  The  railway  also  extends  3  miles  further 
eastward  to  the  sugar  mills  of  the  great  plantation  of  Sprecklesville,  in 
all  13  miles. 

(The  distances  between  these  places  are  given  from  the  overland  dis- 
tance tables  in  the  Hawaiian  Annual  for  1893.) 

Data  concerning  gauge,  quantity  of  rolling  stock,  etc.,  as  well  as  reli- 
able maps,  are  at  present  unobtainable. 

RAILROADS   OF  KAUI. 

On  the  island  of  Kani  there  is  (according  to  the  Hydrographic  Office 
chart  of  Waimea  Bay)  a  railroad  from  Waimea  village  to  Kekaha.  No 
details  known. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  39 

ROADS. 

There  are  a  few  well- constructed  roads  on  the  Island  of  Oahu,  leading 
from  Honolulu  to  places  of  interest  to  tourists ;  but  in  general  the  roads 
on  the  island  are  not  good,  being  frequently  heavy  with  sand  and 
muddy  in  wet  districts.    No  positive  information  obtainable. 

TELEGRAPHS. 

There  are  telegraphs  round  the  island  of  Oahu  as  well  as  in  Hawaii 
and  Maui.  Oahu  and  Hawaii  are  connected  by  telegraphic  cable. 
Total  length  of  telegraphs,  250  miles. 

TELEPHONES. 

Telephones  are  in  general  use  in  Honolulu  and  probably  elsewhere 
on  the  islands. 

POSTAL   SERVICE. 

For  Hawaiian  Islands  postal  service  and  post-offices. 

INTER-ISLAND   STEAMERS  AND   VESSELS. 

There  are  22  coasting  steamers  plying  between  the  ports  of  the  island, 
of  which  9  belong  the  Inter-Island  Steam  Navigation  Company,  7  to 
the  Wilder  Steamship  Company,  and  the  remainder  to  various  private 
owners. 

There  are  also  25  sailing  vessels  belonging  to  various  firms  and  owners. 

There  are,  besides,  2  steam  and  6  sailing  merchantmen  and  traders 
of  Hawaiian  register  plying  between  the  islands  and  foreign  ports. 


LEPROSY. 

In  his  report  to  the  Hawaiian  legislative  assembly  of  1884,  the  presi- 
dent of  the  board  of  health  makes  the  assertion  that  "  Hawaii  has  to 
meet  a  calamity  of  widespread  disease.  *  *  At  least  2  per  cent 
of  her  entire  native  population  is  attacked  by  a  fearful  and  supposed 
incurable  malady  [leprosy],  of  an  exceptional  character,  that  demands 
separation  and  isolation."  In  the  same  report  it  is  shown  that  the 
appropriation  of  $90,000,  for  the  segregation  and  care  of  lepers,  voted 
in  1882,  for  the  biennial  period  closing  March  31, 1884,  had  fallen  short 
of  the  demands  upon  the  health  authorities.  The  Hawaiian  law  has 
provided  for  the  strict  segregation  of  lepers  since  1865,  and  the  district 
of  Kalawao  on  Molokai,  a  territory  of  about  5,000  acres,  was  selected 
at  that  time  for  the  leper  settlement. 

It  is  asserted  that  up  to  1882  at  least,  the  law  requiring  segregation 
was  not  carried  out  with  vigor,  but  it  is  shown  that  under  the  partial 
enforcement  of  the  law  during  sixteen  years  prior  to  June  1,  1882, 
2,602  cases,  an  average  of  162-62  cases  per  year,  had  been  sent  to  the 


40  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 

leper  settlement.  The  biennial  report  of  the  president  of  the  board  of 
health  for  1890  states  that  "the  work  of  collecting  and  segregating 
lepers  had  been  carried  on  with  firmness  and  impartiality,  and  that  the 
number  of  lepers  collected  and  sent  to  Molokai  for  the  biennial  period 
closing  March  31,  1890,  was  798.  Of  these  2  were  of  British  and  2 
were  of  American  birth."  The  report  shows  that  $331,057.80  was 
expended  by  the  board  of  health  during  the  biennial  period,  and  it  is 
asserted  u  that  the  maintenance  of  the  leper  establishment  is  the  almost 
bottomless  pit  into  which  more  than  three-fourths  of  the  money  appro- 
priated is  cast.7' 

It  is  hopefully  claimed,  however,  "that  its  requirements  are  on  the 
wane,  and  judging  from  the  most  reliable  information  obtainable  there 
are  but  very  few  undoubted  cases  of  leprosy  now  at  large  in  the  country, 
and  they  will  come  under  the  care  of  the  board  as  rapidly  as  it  is  pos- 
sible to  get  control  of  them."  In  proof  of  this  it  is  stated  that  on  the 
31st  of  March,  1888,  it  was  estimated  that  there  were  then  at  large 
throughout  the  Kingdom  644  lepers,  while  at  the  date  of  the  report 
under  consideration,  March  31,  1890,  "according  to  the  best  informa- 
tion obtainable,  there  are  *  *  *  about  100  persons  supposed  to  be 
affected  by  the  disease  still  at  large  who  have  not  been  before  the 
examining  board."  The  reasons  why  these  suspected  lepers  have  not 
been  examined  are  stated  to  be  that  some  very  bad  and  unmistakable 
cases  are  hiding  in  fastnesses  of  the  mountains,  while  some  mild  cases 
change  their  residence  so  often  as  to  baffle  the  efforts  of  the  officers  of 
the  law  for  their  arrest. 

In  regard  to  the  contagious  character  of  the  disease  and  the  precau- 
tions necessary  to  be  taken  it  is  claimed  by  Surg.  Tyron,  U.  S. 
Navy,*  that  the  spread  of  the  disease  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands  is  due, 
or  was  due  at  that  time,  1883,  to  the  general  belief  that  "the  disease 
is  only  slightly  contagious,  and  its  treatment  as  such  from  the  begin- 
ning, allowing  free  individual  intercourse,  with  weak  enforcement  of 
the  laws  for  its  suppression." 

That  leprosy  has  not  always  been  regarded  by  the  authorities  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  as  eminently  contagious  is  shown  by  the  following 
extracts  from  the  report  of  the  president  of  the  board  of  health  to  the 
legislative  assembly  of  1884.  He  says:  "Such  a  characterization  is 
entirely  uncalled  for,  is  not  warranted  by  experienced  medical  opinion, 
and  the  violent  and  hasty  segregation  which  it  would  inspire  is  a  wrong 
to  a  suffering  community."  "The  confirmed  leper  should  be  separated 
from  the  community,  but  there  should  be  no  alarm  in  consequence  of 
the  temporary  presence  in  the  street  of  a  leper,  or  on  account  of  any 
ordinary  intercourse  with  a  sufferer  from  the  disease." 

On  the  other  hand  the  report  of  the  board  of  health  for  1890  declares 
in  the  most  emphatic  manner  that  "complete, thorough,  and  absolute 
segregation  offers  the  only  safeguard"  against  the  ravages  of  leprosy. 
The  same  report  asserts  that  if,  from  the  time  when  leprosy  was  first 
recognized  as  an  established  fact  in  the  islands,  the  policy  of  absolute 
segregation  had  been  firmly  decided  upon  and  unflinchingly  pursued, 
*  #  #  Hawaii  would  be  as  free  from  leprosy  to-day  as  any  civilized 
nation."  The  report  concludes  with  the  hopeful  words:  "It  is  safe  to 
say  that  if  we  do  not  relax  our  efforts  we  have  seen  the  worst  of  lep- 
rosy in  this  country."  The  average  leper  population  of  the  leper  set- 
tlements in  Molokai  for  the  two  years  ending  March  31,  1890,  was 
1,035. 


*  American  Journal  Medical  Science,  April,  1883. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  41 

A.  Lutz,  M.  D.,  a  specialist  employed  by  the  Hawaiian  Government 
as  "government  physician  for  the  study  and  treatment  of  leprosy," 
reports,  under  date  of  April  1, 1890,  as  follows:  "The  infection  from  one 
person  to  the  other  furnishes  probably  the  largest  number  of  patients; 
heredity,  if  it  really  exists  at  all,  is  quite  secondary,  being  perhaps  only 
simulated  by  family  infection.  The  influence  of  vaccination  appears 
most  doubtful." 

From  the  Sanitary  Instructions  for  Hawaiians,  by  the  chairman  of 
the  sanitary  committee  of  the  Hawaiian  legislature,  the  following  state- 
ment of  predisposing  causes  of  leprosy  and  rules  to  be  observed  is 
made  up : 

"Be  careful  that  where  the  operation  of  vaccination  is  performed 
pure  vaccine  is  used." 

"Avoid  a  leprous  bedfellow  as  you  would  a  pit  of  fire." 

"Eat  regularly  and  of  the  best  obtainable  food." 

"Avoid  dark,  damp,  badly- ventilated  rooms." 

"  Never  lie  down  to  repose  in  damp  or  dirty  clothing,  and  keep  the 
body  clean." 

"Nearly  all  the  lepers  come  from  among  the  poor,  who  have  fared 
badly  and  have  lodged  in  damp  and  ill  ventilated  huts." 

"Take  care  of  the  first  symptoms  of  leprosy.  The  moment  numb- 
ness of  feeling,  or  any  marks  or  swellings  that  indicate  leprosy  are 
observed,  a  physician  should  be  consulted." 

Venereal  diseases  favor  the  attack  of  leprosy.  "If  two  men,  one 
perfectly  well  and  clean  in  body  and  the  other  diseased  with  venereal 
virus,  were  each  brought  into  intimate  contact  with  a  leprous  individ- 
ual, the  diseased  man  would  be  affected  and  become  a  leper  far  sooner 
than  the  sound  man." 

Dr.  Lutz,  Hawaiian  Government  physician  for  the  treatment  and 
study  of  leprosy,  was  encouraged  to  declare,  under  date  of  April,  1890, 
that  he  believes  "we  shall  *  *  *  see  cures,  which  may  be  attrib- 
uted, not  to  extraordinary  chance,  but  to  our  methods  of  treatment."  It 
appears,  however,  from  later  reports,  that  the  study  of  leprosy  by  spe- 
cialists employed  by  the  Government  was  soon  abandoned.  Dr.  Lutz 
resigned  September,  1890,  without  having  effected  a  permanent 
cure. 

The  president  of  the  board  of  health  reports  to  the  legislative  assem- 
bly, session  of  1892,  on  the  subject  of  the  study  of  leprosy  by  Govern- 
ment specialists,  as  follows:  "In  deference  to  the  oft-repeated  requests, 
*  *  *  the  board  of  health  opened  correspondence  with  the  leprosy 
commission  of  England  and  with  Dr.  E.  Arning,  of  Hamburg,  Ger- 
many, with  a  view  of  *  *  *  continuing  the  study  and  treatment 
of  leprosy."  The  substance  of  Dr.  Arning's  reply  is:  "That  the  scien- 
tific work  connected  with  the  etiology  and  pathology  of  leprosy  can, 
with  surer  prospects  of  success,  be  carried  on  here  in  its  European 
centers,  and  this  is  actually  being  done;  there  are  a  number  of  bac- 
teriologists *  *  *  at  work  on  this  intricate  question  and  slowly 
unraveling  knot  on  knot  towards  its  solution." 

The  report  of  the  board  of  health  for  1892  states  that  on  "  December 
31, 1890,  there  were  1,213  lepers  in  the  custody  of  the  board,  that  being 
the  highest  number  ever  reached,  and  on  March  31,  1892,  there  were 
only  1,115,  a  decrease  of  98  during  the  period."  In  regard  to  the  segre- 
gation of  lepers  the  report  affirms  that  at  this  date,%March  31,  1892, 
"  there  are  very  few  known  lepers  at  large,  with  the  exception  of  per- 
haps 17  at  Kalalau,  Kaui,  but  there  are  about  60  suspects  at  liberty  in 


42  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS. 

Honolulu,  and  some  in  the  outer  districts,  and  more  or  less  of  them 
will,  in  time,  become  confirmed  cases." 

The  same  report  shows  that  the  cost  of  the  "  segregation,  support, 
and  treatment  of  lepers  "  for  the  biennial  period  closing  March  31, 1892, 
was  $224,331.88. 

In  regard  to  venereal  diseases,  so  well  known  as  prevalent  in  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  the  statement  is  made  in  the  Medical  Record  for 
April,  1889,  that  the  "  effects  of  hereditary  immunity  *  *  *  has 
resulted  in  the  production  of  a  much  milder  form  of  the  disease  in  the 
course  of  three  or  four  generations.  At  the  present  day  syphilis  in  the 
Sandwich  Islands  is  comparatively  a  benign  disease,  and  furnishes  but 
a  small  contingent  to  the  sum  of  mortality."  The  writer,  Dr.  P.  A. 
Morrow,  states  that  "  not  only  has  the  disease  moderated  in  severity, 
mit,  according  to  the  testimony  of  numerous  physicians,  #  *  *  it 
has  materially  decreased  in  frequency."  The  writer  also  asserts  the 
"comparative  rarity  of  hereditary  transmission"  of  syphilis  in  the 
islands,  and  explains  it  by  the  fact  that  the  native  Hawaiian s  of  to-day 
are  a  sterile  race.  u  In  some  of  the  districts  the  percentage  of  births 
does  not  exceed  2  per  1,000  instead  of  28  per  1,000,  as  it  should  be,  to  bal- 
ance the  mortality  rate." 


Note. — The  maps  and  charts  mentioned  in  this  paper  omitted. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  43 

VII.  Also  the  following-  lecture,  delivered  at  the  tj.  s. 

NATIONAL  MUSEUM,  FEBRUARY  9,  AND  MARCH  15,  1881,  BY  CAPT.  C. 
E.  DUTTON,  OF  THE  U.  S.  ARMY,  IN  WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

[Ordnance  notes— No.  343,  Washington,  April  23,  1884.] 

THE  HAWAIIAN  ISLANDS  AND  PEOPLE. 

Lectures  delivered  at  the  TJ.  S.  National  Museum  February  9  and  March 
15 j  1884,  under  the  auspices  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  and  of  the 
Anthropological  and  Biological  Societies  of  Washington. . 

[By  Capt.  C.  E.  Dutton,  Ordnance  Department,  U.  S.  A.,  on  IT.  S.  Geological  duty.] 

Ladies  and  Gentleman  :  The  Hawaiian  Islands  are  the  summits  of 
a  gigantic  submarine  mountain  range.  If  the  waters  of  the  Pacific  were 
removed  from  their  vicinity  we  might  behold  a  range  of  mountains  as 
loug  as  our  Appalachian  system,  from  Lake  Champlain  to  Chattanooga, 
and  quite  as  wide,  with  summits  five  times  as  high  as  Mount  Washing- 
ton. The  summits  of  Mauna  Loa  and  Mauna  Kea  are  nearly  14,000  feet 
above  the  ocean,  and  their  bases  are  from  15,000  to  18,000  feet  beneath 
it.  Kef erred  to  the  bottom  of  the  ocean  these  mountains  are  higher 
than  the  Himalayas.  Standing  upon  the  northeastern  coast  of  Hawaii 
the  crest  of  Mauna  Kea  is  less  than  20  miles  away,  and  is  nearly  3  miles 
above  us.  At  a  distance  of  30  miles  at  sea  the  ocean  floor  is  about  3  J 
miles  below  us.  I  am  not  aware  of  any  other  place  in  the  world  where, 
along  a  line  less  than  50  miles  in  length,  may  be  found  a  difference  in 
altitude  of  more  than  6  miles. 

The  Hawaiian  group  consists  of  four  larger  and  four  smaller  islands. 
The  largest  island  is  named  Hawaii.  It  has  a  length  of  about  90  and  a 
width  of  70  miles.  Its  area  is  nearly  4,000  square  miles,  being  a  little 
less  than  two-thirds  of  the  area  of  the  entire  group.  It  is  not,  however, 
the  most  populous,  for  that  distinction  belongs  to  the  islands  of  Oahu, 
on  which  is  situated  the  principal  town  and  capital,  Honolulu,  which  is 
the  center  of  trade  and  the  seat  of  the  Government. 

Only  a  small  portion  of  each  island  is  capable  of  sustaining  a  dense 
population.  The  interiors  are  mountainous  and  generally  rough,  craggy, 
and  cut  with  profound  gorges  of  the  wildest  description.  The  habit- 
able portions  are  near  the  seacoast,  forming  a  ring  around  each  island; 
but  only  a  part  of  each  ring  is  habitable  or  cultivable.  Some  portions 
are  arid  and  barren;  others  are  covered  with  recent  floods  of  lava,  and 
still  others  are  bounded  by  lofty  rocky  coasts,  and  trenched  with  ravines 
so  deep  and  abrupt  that  access  is  difficult.  Generally  speaking,  the 
proportion  of  habitable  area  is  singularly  small.  But  those  portions 
which  are  well  favored  are  probably  capable  of  sustaining  as  dense  a 
population  as  any  tracts  in  the  world. 

The  climate  of  these  islands  is  the  climate  of  Paradise.  It  is  never 
hot,  and,  except  at  considerable  altitudes,  it  is  never  cold.  Rarely  has 
the  thermometer  been  known  to  reach  90°  on  the  seacoast,  or  to  fall 
below  65°.  The  temperature  in  most  localities  may  be  averaged  the 
year  round  as  varying  between  75°  and  85°.  But  while  the  tempera- 
ture of  any  given  locality  is  uniform,  there  is  wonderful  variety  in  the 
climate  as  we  pass  from  one  place  to  another.  Indeed,  there  are  almost 
as  many  climates  as  there  are  square  leagues.  As  a  rule  the  windward 
or  eastern  sides  are  rainy  and  the  leeward  sides  dry.  On  the  eastern 
coast  of  Hawaii  the  annual  rainfall  varies  from  150  to  250  inches.  On 
the  northwest  coast  of  the  same  island  it  is  probably  less  than  the 


44  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


twentieth  part  of  those  amounts.  The  islands  being  situated  within 
the  trade-wind  belt,  the  wind  blows  constantly  from  the  east  and  north  j 
east  during  the  greater  part  of  the  year,  and  is  only  subject  to  brie: 
interruptions  during  midwinter.  Violent  storms  occur  only  in  thr 
winter  time,  and  these,  coming  once  or  twice  a  year  from  the  southwest 
are  known  as  konas,  which  means  in  the  native  language  the  south  § 
west.  During  a  stay  of  six  months  on  the  islands  I  only  heard  a  single 
peal  of  thunder. 

These  islands  are  all  of  volcanic  origin.  They  are  composed  01 
basaltic  lavas,  and  no  other  rocks  are  found  there  excepting  a  few  con: 
solidated  coral  sands,  which  are  remnants  of  old  sea-beaches,  upheaved 
from  50  to  200  feet.  In  the  two  westerly  islands  the  volcanic  activity 
has  long  been  extinct.  Most  of  the  ancient  craters  have  been  obliter 
ated,  and  the  volcanic  piles  built  up  during  the  periods  of  activity  have j 
been  greatly  ravaged  and  wasted  by  subsequent  erosion.  Next  to  the< 
plateaus  and  canyon  country  of  the  Eocky  Mountain  region,  it  would  b* 
difficult  to  find  anywhere  more  impressive  and  suggestive  examples  oi> 
the  wasting  and  slow  destruction  of  the  land  than  those  presented  by 
these  islands.  We  find  there  grand  illustrations  of  the  two  methods 
by  which  the  general  process  of  erosion  accomplishes  its  work.  First 
is  the  action  of  the  rains,  followed  by  the  decomposition  of  the  massive i 
rocks  and  their  conversion  into  soil,  and  also  the  action  of  running, 
water  and  decay  of  the  rock  masses,  resulting  in  the  formation  ol 
ravines  and  mountain  gorges  of  imposing  grandeur ;  secondly,  we  find' 
the  slow  but  incessant  inroads  made  by  the  waves  of  the  ocean  upon  I 
seacoast,  gradually  wearing  back  the  cliffs  and  slowly  paring  away  the 
rocky  shore,  until,  after  the  lapse  of  thousands  of  years,  the  sea  has 
eaten  its  way  several  miles  into  the  land.  Thus  we  have  on  the  one* 
hand  striking  examples  of  one  way  in  which  mountains  are  built,  and 
we  have  on  the  other  hand  equally  striking  examples  of  the  ways  ini 
which  those  mountains  are  destroyed. 

Travelers  in  the  lofty  volcanic  islands  of  the  Pacific  have  frequently 
noted  with  some  surprise  the  singularly  sharp,  angular,  abrupt  features 
of  their  mountain  scenery.  It  is  very  impressive  in  the  Fijis  and 
Samoa,  in  the  Ladrone,  Caroline,  and  Society  groups.  But  none  of 
them  rival  in  wildness  and  grandeur  the  still  loftier  islands  of  Hawaii. 
Gorges  little  inferior  to  Yosemite  in  magnitude  are  rather  numerous. 
But  in  a  certain  sharpness  of  detail  and  animation  in  the  sculpture  they 
are  unique.  The  island  of  Kauai  and  the  western  portion  of  the  island 
of  Maui  consist  of  old  volcanic  piles  as  high  as  Mount  Washington,  and 
much  broader  and  longer.  They  are  literally  sawed  to  pieces  by  many 
immense  canyon-like  gorges,  which  cut  them  to  their  foundations.  Over 
all  is  spread  a  mantle  of  tropical  vegetation  in  comparison  with  which 
the  richest  verdure  of  our  temperate  zone  is  but  the  garb  of  poverty. 
Whoever  reads  Shakspeare's  Tempest  and  visits  the  Bermudas  will 
be  disenchanted  from  some  of  the  most  pleasing  illusions  of  the  play. 
But,  if  Shakspeare  could  have  known  the  eastern  shores  of  Maui  or 
Hawaii  and  made  them  the  scenes  of  his  play,  it  would  have  had,  if 
possible,  another  claim  to  immortality. 

This  wealth  of  verdure  and  splendor  of  scenery  usually  occur  upon 
the  windward  sides  of  the  islands,  for  upon  those  sides  is  found  the 
cause  which  produces  them.  This  cause  is  the  copious  rainfall  brought 
by  the  perpetual  trade  winds.  Nothing  can  be  more  pleasing  to  the 
lover  of  beautiful  scenery  than  a  ride  along  the  windward  coasts  of 
Maui  and  Hawaii.  The  land  terminates  in  cliffs,  varying  from  200  to 
500  feet  in  height,  plunging  down  almost  vertically  into  the  Pacific. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  45 

The  long  heavy  swell,  driven  for  thousands  of  miles  before  the  trade 
wind,  breaks  with  great  force  against  these  iron  walls.  The  surface 
jabove  slopes  upward  towards  the  mountainous  interior,  at  first  with  a 
gentle  acclivity,  which  becomes  steeper  inland,  and  at  length  precipi- 
tous. This  plat  forniis  gashed  at  short  intervals  by  true  canyons,  which 
^iead  far  up  the  mountain  slopes,  and  open  seaward  in  the  great  ter- 
minal wall.  A  mile  or  two  inland  from  the  brink  of  the  cliff-bound 
Shore  is  a  forest  so  dense  that  it  can  be  penetrated  only  by  hewing  a 
^ay  through  it  or  following  a  path  already  hewn.  To  describe  the 
glories  of  this  tropical  vegetation  is  impossible.  Only  those  who  have 
beheld  it  can  conceive  of  its  splendor  and  luxurance.  Yet  there  is  one 
unrivaled  feature  of  the  island  vegetation  which  has  no  parallel  else- 
where than  in  the  Pacific  and  Austral  islands,  and  which  may  be  men- 
tioned. This  is  the  ferns.  There  are  more  than  300  species  of  them  in 
the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  the  most  conspicuous  are  tree  ferns  which 
grow  in  amazing  abundance  and  sumptuousness.  They  often  cover 
the  sides  of  the  ravines,  forming  a  thicket  which  is  quite  impenetrable, 
and  become  a  mantle  of  green  velvet  so  deep,  rich,  and  exquisitely 
patterned  that  it  makes  an  imperial  robe  seem  ridiculous. 

But  there  are  contrasts.  There  are  portions  of  the  islands  where 
the  features  have  at  first  sight  no  more  in  common  with  those  just 
spoken  of  than  if  they  belonged  to  another  planet.  The  beautiful  or 
grand  scenery  is  found  in  those  parts  where  the  volcanic  activity  has 
long  been  dormant.  The  contrasted  portions  are  those  where  the 
volcanoes  are  still  in  action,  or  have  recently  put  out  their  fires. 

The  southern  half  of  the  great  island  of  Hawaii  is  covered  with  the 
two  grandest  volcanoes  in  the  world — Mauna  Loa  and  Kilauea.  The 
great  central  pile  is  Mauna  Loa,  which  is  certainly  the  monarch  of 
modern  volcanoes.  Its  name  signifies  the  Great  Mountain.  No  other 
in  the  world  approaches  it  in  the  vastness  of  its  mass  or  in  the  magni- 
tude of  its  eruptive  activity.  There  are  many  volcanic  peaks  higher  in 
air,  but  these  are  planted  upon  elevated  platforms  of  stratified  rock, 
where  they  appear  as  mere  cones,  of  greater  or  less  size.  Eegarding 
the  platforms  on  which  tjiey  stand  as  their  true  bases,  the  cones  them- 
selves and  the  lavas  which  have  emanated  from  them  never  approach 
the  magnitude  of  Mauna  Loa.  iEtna  and  all  its  adjuncts  are  immeas- 
urably inferior ;  while  Shasta,  Hood,  and  Eanier,  if  melted  doAvn  and 
run  together  into  one  pile,  would  still  fall  much  below  the  volume  of 
the  island  volcano.  In  the  greatness  of  its  eruptions,  Mauna  Loa  is 
also  without  a  rival.  Some  of  the  volcanoes  of  Iceland  have  been 
known  to  disgorge  at  a  single  outbreak  volumes  of  lava  quite  equal  to 
them.  But  in  that  island  such  extravasations  are  infrequent,  and  a 
century  has  now  elapsed  since  any  such  have  been  emitted.  The 
eruptions  of  Mauna  Loa  are  all  of  great  volume  and  occur  irregularly, 
with  an  average  interval  of  about  eight  years.  Any  one  of  its  moderate 
eruptions  represents  more  lava  than  Vesuvius  has  outpoured  since  the 
last  days  of  Pompeii.  The  great  flow  of  1855  would  nearly  have  built 
Vesuvius,  and  those  of  1859  and  1881  were  not  greatly  inferior. 

The  Hawaiian  volcanoes  are  in  some  respects  abnormal.  The  most 
distinctive  of  their  characteristics  is  the  quiet  and  undemonstrative 
method  of  their  eruptions,  liarely  are  these  portentous  events  attended 
by  any  of  that  explosive  action  which  is  manifested  by  all  other  vol- 
canoes. In  only  one  or  two  instances  within  the  historic  period  have 
they  been  accompanied  by  earthquakes  and  subterraneous  rumblings. 
The  vast  jets  of  steam  blown  miles  high,  hurling  cinders  and  lapillifar 
ajid  wide  and  filling  the  heavens  with  vapor,  dust,  and  ashes?  hay§  ueyer 


46  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

been  observed  here.  Some  action  of  the  sort  is  indeed  represented 
sometimes,  but  only  in  a  feeble  way.  Ordinarily  the  lava  spouts  for  til 
in  stupendous  quantities,  but  as  quietly  as  water  from  a  fountain.  Sq 
mild  are  the  eruptive  forces  that  the  observer  may  stand  to  the  wind-! 
ward  of  one  of  these  fountains  and  so  near  it  that  the  heat  will  makd 
the  face  tingle,  yet  without  danger.  Usually  the  outbreak  takes  place 
without  warning,  and  even  without  the  knowledge  of  people  in  th| 
vicinity,  who  first  become  aware  of  it  at  nightfall,  when  the  heaveni 
are  aglow  with  the  reflected  light  and  the  fiery  fountains  are  seen; 
playing.  As  the  news  spreads  hundreds  of  people  flock  to  witness  thj 
sublime  spectacle,  and  display  as  much  eagerness  to  approach  the 
scene  of  an  eruption  as  the  people  of  other  countries  show  to  get  awaj 
from  one. 

All  this  is  in  contrast  with  the  ordinary  volcano.  At  the  othen 
extreme  is  such  an  eruption  as  that  which  happened  last  August,  at 
Krakatoa,  in  the  Straits  of  Sunda.  With  the  published  details  of  thil 
catastrophe  you  are  all  familiar.  Appalling  as  it  was,  the  eruption  of 
Sumbawa  in  1815  must  have  been,  if  can  rely  upon  the  accounts  of 
it,  even  more  energetic  and  destructive.  The  eruption  of  Ooseguinaj 
in  Nicaragua,  in  1835,  appears  to  have  been  of  the  same  character,  oi 
upon  a  scale  quite  equal;  while  once  or  twice  in  a  century  Cotapaxi 
shakes  the  chain  of  the  Andes  through  half  its  length,  fills  the  skj 
with  dust,  and  converts  noonday  into  midnight  for  a  hundred  inilel 
around.  The  eruptions  of  ^Etna  have  all  been  on  a  smaller  scale,  buj 
still  sufficient  to  fill  all  Sicily  with  terror.  Vesuvius  is  usually  regarded 
as  an  obstreperous  vent,  but  its  performances  are  mere  Fourth  of  Jul I 
fireworks  in  comparison  with  these  Day-of- Judgment  proceedings  al 
Sumbawa,  Krakatoa,  and  Cotapaxi. 

The  explosive  agent  in  these  terrible  convulsions  is  steam.  In  theinj 
original  seat,  miles  deep  in  the  earth,  the  lavas  contain  considerabS 
quantities  of  water;  but  the  condition  of  this  water  is  such  as  we  navel 
at  the  surface  of  the  earth,  no  experience  with,  except  as  we  observe  it 
in  volcanoes.  It  is  water  red  hot,  or  even  yellow  hot,  and  under  J 
pressure  hundreds  of  times  greater  than  that  of  the  steam  in  a  loco] 
motive  boiler — a  pressure  probably  comparable  to  that  exerted  by 
gunpowder  in  a  powerful  cannon.  Under  the  enormous  pressure! 
occurring  at  a  depth  of  several  miles  within  the  earth,  water  is  absorbed 
by  the  lavas  in  much  the  same  way  as  water  itself  absorbs  ammonia 
gas,  or  as  wine  absorbs  carbonic  acid.  When  the  lavas  rise  to  thd 
surface  where  the  pressure  is  removed  their  explosive  energy  becomes 
terrible.  The  steam  is  given  off  as  the  uncorked  bottle  of  wine  gives 
off  its  gas,  only  a  thousand  times  more  violently  and  energetically.  Sal 
densely  charged  with  vapor  of  water  are  some  lavas  that  when,  as  inj 
the  case  of  Krakatoa,  a  vent  is  found,  the  explosive  energy  becomes  sol 
great  that  the  lava  is  blown  into  fine  dust  and  dissipated  in  the  surj 
rounding  atmosphere.  Although  this  extreme  of  explosive  activity  is 
far  too  common  for  the  comfort  and  safety  of  the  human  race  it  is  bjj 
no  means  the  most  frequent.  The  more  ordinary  type  of  volcano  is 
one  in  which  the  explosiveness  is  not  so  intense  as  to  blow  the  whold 
of  the  ejected  matter  into  impalpable  dust,  but  blows  it  into  pellet! 
termed  lapilli.  These  grains  of  lapilli  are  of  all  sizes,  from  that  of  a 
kernel  of  wheat  up  to  those  of  cannon  balls,  and  sometimes  weigh  a 
hundred  tons  or  more.  With  a  majority  of  volcanoes,  whether  activa 
or  extinct,  the  greater  part  of  the  material  ejected  is  cast  into  the  ail 
in  this  fragmental  form.  Falling  back  around  the  orifice  it  builds  up  a 
fairly  regular  cone,  with  a  cup  om  the  summit.    This  is  termed  a  cindel 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  47 

cone.  Most  ol  the  volcanic  piles  of  the  world  are  crowned  with  cinder 
cones,  the  principal  bulk  of  which  consists  of  lapilli  and  scoriaceous 
lumps,  with  some  massive  portions  of  flowing  lava  streams  mixed  in. 
It  is  probable  that  quite  half  of  the  volcanic  material  now  visible  upon 
the  globe  consists  of  accumulations  of  such  fragmental  matter. 

To  this  general  method  of  extravasation  Mauna  Loa  and  Kilaueaare 
remarkable  exceptions.  They  consist  almost  wholly  of  massive  sheets 
and  floods  of  lava.  On  Mauna  Loa  there  are  but  the  most  insignificant 
traces  of  fragmental  products,  and  on  Kilauea  there  are  only  a  dozen 
or  two  of  small  cinder  cones.  The  lavas  of  these  great  volcanoes  flowed 
quietly  out  in  enormous  deluges,  running  sometimes  for  months,  or  even 
a  whole  year,  with  little  or  no  explosive  action  throughout  the  entire 
duration  of  the  flows. 

One  consequence  of  this  quiet  method  of  eruption  has  been  to  give  to 
these  colossal  piles  a  wholly  exceptional  form  among  volcanoes.  Instead 
of  a  huge  cone  crowning  the  apex  of  Mauna  Loa,  its  summit  is  nearly 
a  flat  plain,  5J  miles  long  and  nearly  4  miles  wide.  Within  this  plain  is 
sunken  a  pit  3  miles  long,  2  miles  wide,  and  1,000  feet  in  depth.  In 
the  floor  of  this  pit  at  certain  times  may  be  seen  a  lake  of  red-hot  liquid 
lava,  varying  in  size  from  time  to  time,  but  occasionally  as  large  as  30 
or  40  acres.  At  intervals  of  fifteen  or  twenty  minutes  a  column  of 
liquid  lava  of  great  brilliancy,  as  large  and  as  high  as  the  Washington 
monument  will  be  when  it  is  completed,  is  shot  upward  and  falls  back 
into  the  lava  pool  in  a  fiery  spray.  This  grand  display  is  sometimes 
kept  up  for  months,  and  is  generally  terminated  by  an  eruption. 
When  an  outbreak  occurs  it  does  not  take  place  usually  at  the  summit, 
but  a  fissure  suddenly  opens  in  the  side  of  the  mountain,  out  of 
which  a  sheet  of  lava  spouts  hundreds  of  feet  into  the  air,  and, 
falling,  collects  into  a  river  of  fire  half  a  mile  in  width,  and  rushes 
at  first  with  great  velocity  down  the  slope.  After  running  some 
miles  it  reaches  more  level  ground,  where  it  spreads  out  in  great  lakes 
or  fields.  It  also  cools  on  the  surface,  which  gradually  freezes  over. 
But  it  is  still  hot  within,  and  beneath  its  hardened  covering  the  liquid 
rivers  are  still  running,  and  at  the  edges  and  along  the  front  of  the 
great  sheet  the  limpid  lava  constantly  breaks  forth,  pushing  out  fiery 
rivulets  in  advance  and  laterally. 

These  rivulets  are  shot  out  in  quick  succession  here,  there,  and  every- 
where, gradually  covering  the  ground  by  repeated  offshoots.  They 
soon  blacken  and  harden,  but  only  to  be  covered  by  another  and  another 
belch.  The  later  progress  of  the  stream  is  slow.  When  the  lava  first 
leaves  the  vent  it  may  run  10  or  15  miles  an  hour.  But  later  on  the 
stream  may  advance  less  than  100  yards  in  a  day.  In  November,  1880, 
a  great  eruption  broke  forth  near  the  summit  of  Mauna  Loa,  and  the 
ava  poured  out  in  heavy  streams  unceasingly  for  eleven  months.  There 
were  three  great  streams  flowing  in  as  many  directions,  and  the  largest 
one  extended  from  the  vent  a  distance  of  nearly  50  miles.  It  reached 
the  outskirts  of  the  beautiful  little  town  of  Hilo,  whose  inhabitants  had 
abandoned  all  hope  that  their  village  would  escape,  and  had  removed 
their  portable  property.  But  the  flow  stopped  just  at  the  edge  of  the 
village. 

The  massive  and  highly  liquid  character  of  the  flows  from  Mauna 
Loa  is  the  cause  which  has  given  this  mountain  its  peculiar  form.  It 
is  in  contrast  with  all  other  volcanoes  by  virtue  of  its  flat  and  gently 
sloped  profiles.  It  ia  a  gently  rising  dome  whose  steeper  slopes  are 
only  about  7  degrees,  while  its  longer  ones  are  only  4  degrees.  Most 
volcanoes  have  slopes  ranging  all  the  way  from  15  to  30  and  even  40 


48  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

degrees.  The  liquid  lavas  run  off  from  the  summit  and  upper  dome  and 
distribute  themselves  at  immense  distances.  But  if  fragmental  prod- 
ucts were  ejected  in  any  quantity  they  would  pile  up  around  the  orifices 
from  which  they  were  ejected  and  thus  form  steep  conical  hills. 

The  ascent  of  Mauna  Loa  is  a  feat  wholly  unworthy  of  the  name  of 
mountaineering.  It  is  necessary,  however,  to  procure  a  guide  who 
knows  the  way,  otherwise  the  journey  is  pretty  sure  to  prove  more 
interesting  than  was  expected.  Many  of  the  lava  streams  are  masses 
of  clinkers  of  the  most  angular  and  cruel  aspect  imaginable;  indeed, 
the  hummocks  of  an  arctic  ice  field  are  good  traveling  in  comparison, 
and  only  a  guide  familiar  with  the  mountain  knows  how  to  avoid  them. 

Just  east  of  Mauna  Loa,  about  20  or  25  miles,  is  the  far-famed  vol- 
cano Kilauea.  This  has  been  visited  and  described  so  often  that  little 
needs  to  be  said  here.  It  contains  a  great  pit  similar  to  that  on  Mauna 
Loa,  and  somewhat  larger,  though  not  so  deep. 

Within  it  are  the •  great  lakes  of  fire  always  burning.  The  lake  at 
the  summit  of  Mauna  Loa  is  frozen  over  and  silent,  without  a  trace  of 
volcanic  activity,  for  several  years  at  a  time,  and  is  open  only  for  sev- 
eral months  or  sometimes  a  year  or  so  before  a  great  eruption.  But  at 
Kilauea  the  lava  lakes  are  always  aflame,  and  have  been  so  ever  since 
the  earliest  traditions  of  the  natives.  Forty  years  ago  there  was  a  pit 
within  a  pit,  and  in  the  lowest  deep  was  a  lava  pool  half  a  mile  or  more 
in  diameter,  always  boiling,  spouting,  and  flaming.  At  the  present 
time  the  inner  pit  is  quite  filled  up  with  solid  lava,  and  a  large  conical 
pile  of  rocks  is  built  up  over  the  site  of  this  former  lake.  Within  this 
pile  of  rocks,  however,  is  the  remnant  of  this  lake,  now  about  10  acres 
in  area.  Half  a  mile  distant  is  a  second  lake  which  is  easily  visited, 
and  it  is  an  exhilarating  sight  to  stand  at  night  upon  the  brink  of  it 
and  watch  the  boiling,  surging,  and  swirling  of  6  acres  of  melted  lava. 
At  brief  intervals  the  surface  darkens  over  by  the  formation  of  a  black 
solid  crust  with  streaks  of  fire  around  the  edges.  Suddenly  a  network 
of  cracks  shoots  through  the  entire  crust,  and  the  fragments  turn  down 
edgewise  and  sink,  leaving  the  pool  one  glowing  expanse  of  exactly  the 
appearance  of  so  much  melted  cast  iron.  The  heat  of  fusion  in  this  lake 
is  maintained,  in  spite  of  the  enormous  loss  of  heat  by  radiation,  by  the 
constant  ascent  of  large  quantities  of  intensely  hot  vapors  from  the 
depths  of  the  earth. 

An  hour's  lecture,  ladies  and  gentlemen,  leaves  no  time  for  rhetoric 
and  graceful  transitions  from  one  theme  to  another.  Having  shoveled 
out  to  you,  so  to  speak,  some  incoherent  remarks  concerning  points  of 
special  interest  in  the  islands,  I  proceed  at  once  to  a  subject  which 
will,  I  hope,  prove  more  interesting,  and  that  is  the  people  who  inhabit 
them. 

When  we  were  boys  and  girls  our  general  idea  of  the  inhabitants  of 
the  Pacific  islands  was  that  they  were  typical  savages.  What  savages 
were  we  knew  pretty  well,  or  thought  we  knew,  for  had  we  not  all  read 
Robinson  Crusoe?  We  thought  of  them  as  naked,  black  creatures, 
whose  principal  occupation  was  blowing  conch-shells,  brandishing 
thigh  bones,  and  dancing  a  horrible  cancan  around  a  fire  where  a  human 
carcass  was  roasting.  But  we  were  mistaken.  The  Polynesians,  as 
a  rule,  were  not  savages,  though  many  of  the  white  people  who  first 
visited  them  were  so. 

In  the  Pacific  islands  two  very  distinct  races  are  found.  Of  one  race 
the  Hawaiians  or  Tahitians  may  be  regarded  as  the  type.  This  race 
peoples  also  the  Society,  Samoan,  Navigators,  and  Friendly  groups, 
#n4  includes  the  Maoris  of  New  Zealand    All  these  islanders  have  tu§ 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  49 

same  physical  features,  similar  social  cults,  and  speak  dialects  of  the 
same  language.  The  difference  between  the  language  of  a  Hawaiian  and 
of  a  Society  islander  is  not  greater  than  that  between  the  German  and 
the  Dutch.  The  difference  between  the  language  of  a  Hawaiian  and  a 
Maori  is  less  than  between  the  Dutch  and  the  English.  This  and  the 
community  of  physical  type  establish  the  identity  of  race  sufficiently. 
The  western  islands  of  the  Pacific  are  occupied  by  a  race  which  has 
such  apparent  affinity  with  the  inhabitants  of  Papua  or  New  Guinea 
as  to  raise  a  very  strong  presumption  of  their  community,  and  the  sup- 
position is  corroborated  by  many  other  circumstances.  Of  the  two 
races,  the  first  mentioned  is  much  superior  physically,  mentally,  and 
morally,  and  of  all  branches  of  that  race  the  noblest  is  the  Hawaiian. 

Physically  they  are  rather  large,  and  have  a  light-brown  color,  straight 
hair,  and  are  handsomely  formed,  of  good  bearing,  and  well  featured. 
The  women  also  are  pleasing  and  comely.  There  is  nothing  about  them 
savoring  of  the  squaw,  hag,  or  wench,  which  is  almost  universal  among 
so  many  of  the  primitive  dark-skinned  races,  and  they  are  not  without 
beauty,  even  according  to  the  taste  of  the  white  man,  if  he  is  willing  to 
admire  a  robust  type  of  feminine  grace  as  easily  as  he  does  the  "pale, 
pious,  pulmonary"  persuasion.  Among  the  Hawaiians  the  old  kings 
and  chiefs  seemed  to  form  a  distinct  caste  and  a  breed  greatly  superior 
to  the  common  herd.  They  were  very  large,  sometimes  almost  gigantic 
in  size,  and  of  very  impressive  form  and  bearing.  Their  color  was 
lighter,  and  they  were  of  more  massive  frames. 

At  the  time  of  the  discovery  of  these  islands  by  Capt.  Cook,  in  1776, 
these  people  were  by  no  means  savages.  Their  social  system  was  as 
much  above  savagery  on  the  one  hand  as  it  was  below  civilization  on 
the  other.  A  careful  study  of  their  habits  and  customs  discloses  the 
interesting  fact  that  their  social  organization  bore  a  striking  similitude 
to  that  of  Europe  in  the  tenth  and  eleventh  centuries.  It  was  a  feudal 
system  almost  exactly.  They  had  kings  who  were  in  all  strictness  heredi- 
tary suzerains.  Under  them  were  chiefs  who  owed  them  fealty,  and 
who  held  lands  and  titles  by  a  tenure  which  can  hardly  be  distinguished 
from  enfeoffment,  and  which,  at  all  events,  was  a  truly  feudal  tenure; 
for  it  carried  with  it  the  recognition  of  the  principle  that  the  allodium 
was  vested  in  the  king  alone,  and  the  tenure  was  granted  to  the  chief 
as  a  vassal  in  consideration  of  military  service.  The  common  people 
were  mere  villains,  bound  to  the  soil,  though  in  some  sort  as  tenants  at 
will.  The  islands  were  divided  up  into  several  kingdoms,  over  each  of 
which  a  king  reigned,  whose  power  was  very  absolute;  in  all  things  he 
was  lord  paramount.  The  kingdom  was  subdivided  into  tracts,  for 
which  the  term  now  used  in  the  islands  is  simply  the  word  "lands." 
These  lands  were  lorded  over  by  chiefs,  of  whom  there  were  several 
grades.  They  were  subdivided  again  and  again  down  to  the  smallest 
holdings,  of  a  fraction  of  an  acre,  tenanted  by  the  lower  classes,  and 
all  were  marked  off'  by  metes  and  bounds. 

The  power  of  the  King  was  absolute,  and  limited  only  by  the  endur- 
ance of  his  subjects.  Life  and  death,  as  well  as  property,  were  subject 
to  his  will;  and  yet  there  was  a  division  of  power.  To  make  the  par- 
allel with  mediaeval  Europe  more  complete,  the  power  of  the  King  was 
rivaled,  and  in  some  cases  even  overborne,  by  the  power  of  a  priest- 
hood ;  and  the  priests  enforced  their  sway  with  a  spiritual  weapon  of 
resistless  potency.  The  weapons  of  Eome  were  many,  chief  among 
which  were  excommunication,  the  inquisition,  and  the  interdict.  The 
Hawaiian  priest  had  a  weapon  more  powerful  than  them  all.  it  wa» 
the  tabu.  This  word  has  been  adopted,  metaphorically,  into  the  Eng- 
S.  Kep.  227 4 


50  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

lish  and  many  other  languages,  but  few  people  comprehend  its  signiflj 
cance  in  the  places  where  it  originated.  The  word  means  prohibited 
or  forbidden,  and  a  great  deal  more  besides.  Almost  anything  might 
be  tabu.  The  penalty  of  violating  a  tabu  was  always  death.  The  instti 
tution  derived  its  power  from  the  fact  that  there  was  not  a  native  in  all 
Polynesia  who  did  not  devoutly  believe  that  even  if  the  King  or  priesti 
did  not  cause  him  to  be  killed  for  violating  a  tabu  the  gods  certainlj 
would. 

In  respect  to  the  arts  possessed  by  these  people  they  were  few  ant! 
simple.  The  islands  contained  no  metals  and  very  few  substitutes  fo| 
them,  except  stone,  and  not  the  best  kinds  of  stone  for  implements  at 
that.  Considering  the  want  of  materials,  however,  their  arts  werd 
hardly  to  be  despised.  They  made  many  articles  of  wood  with  suil 
prising  neatness.  Their  only  substitutes  for  cloth  were  a  fabric  made! 
of  a  peculiar  bark,  macerated  in  water  and  pounded  out  as  thin  as 
paper,  and  mats  woven  from  the  fibers  of  the  pandanus  with  ho  little 
skill.  Their  houses  were  large,  commodious  structures  made  of  grass! 
often  neatly  woven,  and  attached  to  a  framework  of  poles.  They  were 
scrupulously  neat  within,  and  matting  of  pleasing  aspect  was  useq 
abundantly.  They  were  wonderfully  expert  fishermen,  and  had  device! 
suited  for  capturing  each  kind  of  fish.  More  than  that,  they  had  fish 
ponds  and  preserves  for  rearing  select  varieties. 

Agriculture  was  practiced  systematically.  They  constructed  caualj 
for  irrigating,  the  remains  of  which  are  still  visible  in  numerous  places] 
Their  chief  vegetable  was  the  root  of  the  taro  plant,  a  species  of  arunj 
to  which  the  calla  lilies  belong.  It  may  not  be  generally  known  thaf 
this  is  probably  the  most  prolific  food  plant  in  the  world.  Humboldl 
gives  that  distinction  to  the  banana,  but  the  banana  is  nowhere  in  thd 
comparison ;  for  a  square  yard  and  a  half  planted  with  taro  will  yield 
food  enough  to  support  a  man  for  a  year.  This  plant  is  poisonous  when 
raw,  but  cooking  completely  destroys  the  poisonous  quality  and  renders 
it  very  wholesome.  The  Hawaiians  first  bake  it  and  then  pound  iq 
gradually  adding  water,  which  is  kneaded  in  like  oil  in  a  mayonnaise! 
and  when  fully  prepared  it  is  of  a  consistency  very  muchlikemayonnaiseJ 
In  that  state  it  is  termed  poi;  and  to  this  day  the  natives  regard  it  as 
we  do  bread,  and  it  serves  still  as  their  favorite  food.  Many  of  thj 
white  residents  also  have  become  exceedingly  fond  of  it. 

The  primitive  Hawaiians  were  very  bold  and  skillful  navigators! 
There  can  be  no  question  that  they  frequently  visited  in  their  littlj 
canoes  the  Society  Islands  and  Tahiti,  south  of  the  equator  and  2,401 
miles  distant  from  Hawaii.  How  they  could  cross  such  vast  wastes  01 
ocean  seems  at  first  mysterious  ;  but  they  had  a  knowledge  of  astronom^ 
such  as  we  sometimes  marvel  at  in  the  old  Egyptians  and  Chaldeansi 
They  knew  the  planets,  and  had  names  for  the  brighter  stars.  Thej 
also  had  a  good  calendar.  Their  year  was  three  hundred  and  sixt^l 
five  days  long,  and  began  when  the  Pleiades  rose  at  sunset.  They  had 
twelve  months,  of  which  eleven  had  thirty  days  each,  and  the  twelftM 
thirty-five  days.  They  had  also  a  primitive  arithmetic  and  a  system  of 
numerals  in  which  they  could  number  up  into  the  hundreds  of  thou] 
sands.    It  was  partly  decimal  and  partly  tesseral. 

The  religion  of  this  people  was  in  some  respects  analogous  to  that  ol 
the  Greeks.  Their  gods  were  hero  gods  and  of  many  grades.  Indeed] 
it  is  quite  literal  to  say  that  the  woods  were  full  of  them.  Every 
locality,  every  conspicuous  rock  or  tree,  had  its  tutelar,  corresponding 
perh  ips  to  the  Grecian  fauns  and  dryads.  They  also  had  animal  gods! 
most  notably  the  shark  god,  and  the  divinity  of  the  volcano  of  Kilauei 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  51 

was  a  female  named  Pele.  The  amount  of  myth  and  legendary  lore  in 
which  these  divinities  figured  was  something  amazing.  We  have  for 
some  years  been  finding  out  that  our  own  Indians  were  rich  in  myths, 
if  nothing  else.  But  the  extent  of  such  lore  among  the  Hawaiians 
quite  surpasses  any  tiling  known  of  other  primitive  peoples.  Many  of 
them  are  highly  poetical  and  ingenious. 

The  origin  of  the  Polynesian  race  has  always  been  a  mystery.  There 
is  very  little  light  thrown  upon  it  as  yet  by  ethnologic  research.  The 
view  most  favored  is  that  they  came  from  the  East  Indies  at  a  remote 
period.  That  the  larger  islands  of  the  Pacific  have  been  inhabited  for 
many  centuries  is  an  inference  which  finds  considerable  support. 
Attempts  have  been  made  to  ascertain  whether  the  language  has  any 
affinity  to  known  languages  of  southeastern  Asia,  but  the  results  are 
little  better  than  negative.  Some  coincidences  have  been  found,  or 
supposed  to  have  been  found,  but  it  does  not  seem  that  they  are  any 
better  or  more  significant  than  such  as  may  be  frequently  discovered 
between  two  languages  which  are  surely  known  to  have  absolutely 
nothing  in  common.  Coincidences  between  legends  and  customs  have 
also  been  discovered.  But  ethnologists  of  the  present  day  have  come 
to  attach  less  importance  to  them,  if  possible,  than  to  languages. 
Thus  the  manners  and  customs,  and  also  the  legends,  of  the  Maoris  of 
New  Zealand  have  very  little  in  common  with  those  of  the  Hawaiians. 
Yet  the  absolute  identity  of  physical  type  and  the  virtual  identity  of 
their  languages  are  tantamount  to  proof  of  a  common  race.  And  primi- 
tive peoples,  world  over,  are  constantly  surprising  us  by  furnishing 
correspondences  in  legends  and  peculiar  customs,  when  it  is  absolutely 
certain  that  they  are  widely  distinct.  On  the  other  hand,  there  is  good 
ground  for  believing  that  if  the  Polynesians  did  not  come  from  some 
known  Asiatic  or  East  Indian  stock,  they  may  at  least  have  communi- 
cated with  them  in  one  way  or  another. 

When  the  islands  were  discovered  by  Capt.  Cook  pigs  were  very 
abundant  there,  and  the  animal  was  an  East  Indian  variety.  The 
peculiar  tusks,  the  portentiously  long  snout  like  an  icthyosaurus,  and 
ears  set  in  the  middle  of  its  body1;  give  us  pretty  reliable  testimony  as 
to  its  origin.  They  also  had  dogs,  and  certainly  no  dog  could  have 
come  either  from  America  or  Australia.  Finally,  and  even  more  con- 
clusively, they  had  common  hens  and  chickens,  which  are  certainly  of 
Asiatic  origin.  What  people  brought  these  animals  to  the  islands  is  a 
question.  I  have  already  mentioned  to  you  that  the  Hawaiians  often 
made  voyages  to  Tahiti  in  their  little  canoes,  a  distance  of  2,400  miles; 
and  their  ancient  poems  and  legends  are  full  of  vague  accounts  of  voy- 
ages to  even  greater  distances.  They  knew  of  the  Samoan  and  Tonga 
islands,  which  are  more  than  3,000  miles  away  and  farther  westward. 
Possibly  also  they  knew  of  New  Zealand,  but  the  evidence  of  that  is 
not  so  clear.  But  I  have  never  learned  that  anything. in  their  poetry 
or  traditions  indicated  a  knowledge  of  either  America  or  Asia.  While, 
therefore,  it  is  not  impossible  that  they  may  have  had  communication 
with  Asia,  there  is  no  other  evidence  of  it  than  the  fact  that  domestic 
animals  of  Asiatic  origin  were  found  among  them. 

The  transition  of  this  people  from  barbarism  to  civilization  has  been 
wonderfully  rapid  and  complete.  It  is  a  very  remarkable  fact,  too, 
that  it  is  the  only  dark-skinned  race  that  has  ever  been  brought  into 
full  contact  and  relation  with  civilization  without  Avar  and  generations 
of  bloodshed,  ending  in  subjugation.  The  reasons  are  many.  Promi- 
nent among  them  are  the  following:  In  the  first  place,  there  can  be 
little  question  that  it  is  the  finest  and  most  intelligent  race  of  dark- 


52  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

skinned  people  in  the  world.  In  the  second  place,  it  is  due  in  a  great 
measure  to  the  wisdom,  tact,  and  good  sense  of  the  missionaries  through 
whom  this  civilizatioii  was  imparted.  But  it  seems  to  me  the  third 
reason  is  still  more  potent,  and  this  was  the  great  ability,  wisdom,  and 
good  sense  of  the  kings  of  the  line  of  the  Kamehamehas  and  the  abso- 
lute power  they  originally  held  over  their  people. 

Fortunately,  also,  at  the  time  of  the  advent  of  the  white  men  the  con-  \ 
trol  of  the  islands  had  already  been  consolidated  into  the  hands  of  one 
man,  who  was  fully  capable  of  wielding  it.  If  the  lot  of  the  first 
Kamehameha  had  been  cast  in  Europe  instead  of  the  remotest  islands 
of  the  sea  he  would  have  been  one  of  the  most  conspicuous  figures  of 
history.  Originally  a  little  kinglet  of  a  district  at  the  north  end  of 
Hawaii,  he  gradually  conquered  the  whole  of  that  island  and  finally 
the  whole  group.  No  King  in  history  ever  knew  better  how  to  rule  his 
people.  Brought  into  contact  with  civilization,  he  grasped  its  meaning 
with  a  breadth  of  comprehension  which  is  perhaps  without  example 
among  barbarians.  He  knew  instinctively  how  resistless  was  its  power 
and  how  inexorably  it  crowds  the  weaker  races  to  the  wall.  But  he 
had  the  wisdom  not  only  to  avert  the  destruction  of  his  own  power  and 
the  obliteration  of  the  nationality  of  his  people,  but  actually  to  draw 
strength  from  it  and  make  it  his  servant  instead  of  his  master.  The 
greatest  achievement  of  his  life  was  the  work  of  his  declining  years,  and 
it  was  an  achievement  of  surpassing  skill.  He  broke  completely  the 
secular  power  of  the  priesthood.  He  had  the  sagacity  to  discover  alone 
and  unaided  the  grandest  truth  in  political  science,  and  one  which  white 
men  never  discovered  until  three  or  four  centuries  ago.  That  great 
truth  was  that  church  and  state  had  better  let  each  other  alone.  We 
need  not  wonder,  however,  that  he  discovered  it,  for  the  Kings  of 
Europe  understood  it  well  enough;  indeed  they  were  about  the  only 
ones  who  did.  The  marvel  was  that  this  barbarian  should  have  had 
the  courage  and  address  to  make  the  truth  a  practical  reality  and  put 
it  into  execution.  It  is  one  thing  to  perceive  the  foolishness  of  super- 
.stition  and  quite  another  to  break  down  a  whole  religion.  W  hen  Kame- 
hameha began  his  career  the  priesthood  was  far  more  powerful  than  he. 
When  he  died  they  were  as  powerless  in  secular  matters  as  the  Pope 
now  is  in  Italy.  The  finishing  stroke  was  given  when  his  dead  body, 
as  yet  unburied,  was  awaiting  the  obsequies.  His  widow  and  son 
deliberately  broke  many  of  the  most  sacred  tabus,  and  enjoined  the 
same  sacrilegious  acts  upon  their  households  and  followers.  They  were 
promptly  obeyed,  and  the  example  was  followed  by  the  whole  nation. 
Next  the  temples  were  despoiled,  the  images  of  the  gods  broken  and 
burned,  and  the  priests  themselves  driven  into  the  forests  and  jungles. 

An  act  so  sweeping  and  revolutionary  as  the  trampling  under  foot  of 
the  most  binding  superstition  or  religious  conviction  that  ever  held 
sway  over  the  human  race  would  never  have  been  ventured  if  the  peo- 
ple had  not  been  gradually  wrought  up  to  it.  In  truth,  Kamehameha 
had  first  revolutionized  the  whole  social  and  political  condition  of  the 
people,  and  had  elevated  them  immensely  against  the  influences  of  a 
priestcraft  which  was  all  the  time  "striving  to  hold  them  down.  When 
the  issue  came  the  King  triumphed  and  the  priest  was  overthrown.  It 
was  probably  this  change  which  prepared  the  Hawaiian  people  for 
what  followed.  It  established  the  kingly  power  independently  of  a 
priesthood  and  left  the  people  without  a  religion. 

The  year  following  this  important  event  the  missionaries  landed 
there  for  the  first  time.  They  soon  secured  the  good  will  of  the  second 
Kamehameha  and  found  their  work  a  comparatively  easy  one.    To  the 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  53 

missionariis  is  due  the  credit  of  having  bees  the  agents  through  whom 
civilization  was  imparted  to  'he  islands.  Those  who  are  specially 
devoted  to  the  interests  of  foreign  missions  have  been  in  the  habit  of 
regarding  the  Hawaiian  Islands  as  a  signal  instance  of  the  triumph  of 
Protestant  propagandism.  On  the  whole,  there  is  a  large  measure  of 
justice  in  this  claim.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  a  closer  view  will  prob- 
ably disclose  to  the  impartial  mind  the  fact  that,  while  the  amount  of 
Christian  proselytism  has  been  very  considerable,  the  outside  view  of  it 
is  somewhat  overdrawn. 

There  are  certainly  many  devout  Christians  among  the  Hawaiians, 
but  there  are  also  many  who  cherish  their  old  religion,  and  the  greater 
part  of  them  are  more  or  less  tinctured  with  the  ancient  superstitions. 
But  whatever  doubts  may  arise  as  to  the  complete  success  of  the  prop- 
aganda, there  can  be  none  as  to  the  success  in  imparting  civilization. 
Fortunately,  they  had  to  deal  with  and  through  a  succession  of  kings 
who  were  men  of  preeminent  sense  and  of  practical  wisdom,  and  who 
knew  how  to  manage  their  subjects.  They  were  kings  in  the  best  pos- 
sible signification.  Boyalty  was  inborn  in  them,  and  the  loyalty  of 
their  subjects  was  such  that  the  loyalty  of  an  Englishman  is  a  feeble 
sentiment  in  comparison.  The  Kamehamehas,  from  the  II  to  the  V, 
inclusive,  were  quick  to  recognize  the  advantages  of  civilization,  and 
had  wonderful  tact  in  discriminating  between  good  and  bad  advice. 
The  missionaries  proved  to  be  discreet  and  judicious  advisers,  and  the 
transition  from  barbarism  to  civilization  was  effected  safely \  step  by 
step ;  the  Government  was  transformed  into  a  constitutional  monarchy, 
the  feudal  tenure  of  lands  was  changed  to  fee  simple.  Statute  laws 
were  enacted  and  codified,  and  suffrage  was  made  as  broad  and  liberal 
as  in  America.  Perhaps  the  most  important  step  was  compulsory 
education,  which  is  provided  for  by  the  State,  and  to  day  it  is  hard  to 
find  a  native  who  can  not  read,  write,  and  cipher. 

The  economic  condition  of  the  Hawaiian  is  probably  superior  at  the 
present  time  to  that  of  any  other  tropical  people  in  the  world;  and,  on 
the  whole,  I  think  it  quite  safe  to  say  that  it  is  but  very  little  sur- 
passed, if  at  allv.by,that  of  the  working  classes  of  America.  He  has 
even  more  to  eat  and  better  food,  plenty  of  beef,  pork,  and  fish,  and 
could  have  an  abundance  of  flour  if  he  desired  it,  but  he  prefers  his 
taro.  He  owns  his  property  in  fee;  he  makes  laws  and  executes  them ; 
he  reads  and  writes;  he  has  but  one  wife;  he  tills  the  soil  and  tends 
flocks;  sometimes  he  accumulates  wealth  and  sometimes  he  does  not; 
he  makes  his  will  in  due  form,  dies,  and  receives  a  Christian  burial; 
in  no  land  in  the  world  is  property  more  secure.  Indeed,  I  have  yet  to 
learn  of  any  where  it  is  equally  secure  from  burglary,  rapine,  and  thiev- 
ery or  those  subtler  devices  by  which  the  cunning  get  possession  of  the 
property  of  the  less  astute  without  giving  an  equivalent  for  it.  The 
few  relics  of  barbarism  remaining  are  of  the  most  harmless  description, 
and  probably  quite  as  good  for  him  as  anything  he  might  adopt  in 
place  of  them. 

Unfortunately,  the  population  is  rapidly  decreasing.  A  century  ago 
a  fair  estimate  would  probable,  have  been  over  150,000.  To-day  the 
native  population  is  45,000  to  5b,000.  The  causes  of  this  decrease  are 
many.  It  has  usually  been  attributed  to  diseases  brought  by  contact 
with  the  whites.  While  it  is  indisputable  that  such  diseases  have  in  a 
measure  contributed  to  the  result,  I  believe  there  is  still  another  cause 
at  work  tending  to  the  same  result,  which  is  as  follows:  The  Hawaiian 
is  the  most  amiable  and  social  creature  in  the  world.  Life  without 
plenty  of  society  is  intolerable  to  him.    He  is  also  fond  of  display — of 


54  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

giving  feasts,  of  treating,  and  extravagantly  fond  of  dress,  horses,  and 
sport.  His  instinct  is  to  leave  the  country  and  crowd  into  the  towns. 
This  is  as  common  among  the  women  as  among  the  men.  But  to  live  in 
town,  or  to  indulge  in  dissipation,  requires  money,  and  therefore  a  fam- 
ily is  a  burden,  especially  to  women,  who  are  so  fond  of  gaiety.  There 
is,  therefore,  a  deliberate  and  willful  curtailment  of  the  birth  rate,  and, 
in  my  judgment,  this  has  been  not  much  less  potent  in  reducing  the 
population  than  the  abnormal  increase  in  the  death  rate. 

The  Government  of  the  islands  is  now  a  constitutional  monarchy.  The 
King  is  the  chief  executive  officer,  and  his  powers,  though  in  theory  no 
greater  than  those  of  the  English  sovereign,  are  in  reality  much  more 
extensive  and  effectual.  The  legislative  branch  consists  of  a  repre- 
sentative assembly,  elected  biennially  by  the  people,  and  a  house  of 
nobles  limited  by  the  constitution  to  20  members.  The  nobles  are 
appointed  for  life  by  the  King,  but  their  titles  are  not  hereditary.  The 
judiciary  is  organized  upon  a  plan  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  New 
York  State,  though  considerably  simpler.  At  the  head  of  the  judicial 
branch  is  the  chief  justice  or  chancellor  and  two  vice-chancellors,  who 
perform  the  functions  of  a  supreme  court  and  final  court  of  appeals. 
They  have  also  original  jurisdiction  in  a  wide  range  of  subjects,  and 
indeed  in  almost  all  important  cases  of  whatsoever  nature.  Each  of 
these  justices  holds  circuit  courts  in  various  parts  of  the  Kingdom,  at 
which  cases  are  tried  both  originally  and  on  appeal.  There  are  also 
lower  courts  in  which  petty  cases  are  tried,  and  in  which  more  impor- 
tant ones  may  originate.  The  higher  judges  are  white  men  truly  learned 
in  the  law,  and  they  have  reflected  honor  upon  their  profession  and 
upon  their  adopted  country.  All  of  them  are  Americans,  who  received 
their  education  and  training  in  law  in  the  United  States.  The  primary 
judges  are  in  some  cases  whites,  in  others  natives.  The  native  judges 
were  formerly  appointed  by  the  chancellor,  but  are  now  appointed  by 
the  Crown.  There  is  generally  much  difficulty  in  finding  men  of  native 
birth  who  possess  the  requisite  legal  knowledge  and  experience.  Their 
intentions  are  always  of  the  best,  but  their  tendency  is  to  construe  law 
in  accordance  with  their  own  notions  of  abstract  justice  rather  than 
upon  legal  principles,  and  few  of  them  are  capable  as  yet  of  under- 
standing the  value  and  significance  of  precedents.  But  the  higher 
courts  are  always  open  to  appeal.  The  administration  of  law  is  excel- 
lent and  will,  on  the  whole,  compare  favorably  with  any  country  in  the 
world.  The  respect  of  the  native  for  statute  law  is  very  great,  and  the 
sheriff,  policeman,  or  taxgatherer  has  no  more  difficulty  in  executing 
his  process  than  in  England  or  Massachusetts ;  indeed,  he  has,  if  any- 
thing, less  difficulty. 

The  statutory  code  is  in  general  modeled  after  that  of  New  York, 
though  it  is  apparent  that  in  matters  of  detail  many  minor  differences 
were  at  the  first  and  still  are  necessary.  But  the  underlying  princi- 
ples were  identical.  The  tenure  of  real  estate,  the  laws  relating  to 
liens  and  mortgages,  to  wills  and  inheritance  of  property,  to  bank- 
ruptcy and  debt,,  to  marriage  and  divorce,  to  partnership  and  corpora- 
tions, are  founded  upon  those  of  New  York  State.  The  system  of 
jurisprudence  is  also  fundamentally  the  same.  There  are  many  differ- 
ences of  detail  and  these  are  sometimes  wide,  but  never  so  wide  as  to 
constitute  differences  of  principle.  The  processes  of  the  courts  are 
more  frequently  summary,  and  their  action  is  much  more  speedy  and 
direct.  Devices  for  protracting  and  complicating  litigation  have  not 
as  yet  been  developed  to  any  great  extent. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  55 

All  laws  are  enacted -by  the  Legislature,  which  regulates  taxation 
and  customs  and  appropriates  specifically  for  all  public  expenditures. 
In  theory  the  powers  of  this  body  are  very  nearly  the  same  in  their 
broader  features  as  those  of  one  of  our  State  legislatures.  The  mem 
bers  of  the  lower  house  are  elected  biennially  and  are  mostly  natives. 
In  practice,  however,  there  is  a  wide  difference.  In  England  and 
America  the  representative  body  dominates  everything  and  every- 
body, especially  the  chief  magistrate.  In  Hawaii  the  King  dominates 
the  representative  body.  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  this  people 
has  always  been  intensely  loyal  to  the  King  for  scores  of  generations, 
and  the  habit  of  unquestioning  submission  to  the  royal  will  is  far  too 
strongly  settled  and  ingrained  to  be  readily  shaken  off.  The  want  of 
experience  in  self-government  on  the  part  of  the  people,  and  the  habit 
of  absolute  command  on  the  part  of  the  kings,  will  suggest  the  expla- 
nation of  the  great  influence  which  the  King  holds  over  the  Legislature. 

At  the  present  time  the  condition  of  the  people  of  the  islands  is  one 
of  great  prosperity,  and  they  are  rapidly  advancing  in  wealth  and  gen- 
eral improvement.  The  reciprocity  treaty  now  existing  between  the 
islands  and  the  United  States  has  been  mutually  beneficial.  Large 
amounts  of  American  capital  have  been  invested  there  in  sugar  planta- 
tions and  in  the  commerce  with  the  little  Kingdom.  The  result  has 
been  to  give  abundant  employment  to  the  entire  population.  Wages 
are  high,  and  all  the  produce  of  the  islands  brings  good  prices.  Thus 
the  condition  of  the  natives  has  been  greatly  improved.  They  are  no 
longer  idlers,  but  the  recipients  of  well-earned  wages  and  incomes. 
They  are  rapidly  replacing  their  primitive  grass  nouses  with  neat 
frame  buildings,  built  in  the  regular  California  cottage  style.  They 
have  adopted  civilized  clothing,  hats,  boots,  and  shoes,  and  the  women 
"cultivate  the  fashions  as  eagerly  as  our  own  farmers'  wives  and  daugh- 
ters, and  it  is  by  no  means  uncommon  to  see  them  clothed  in  silks  or 
delicate  woolen  fabrics,  or  white  lawns  made  in  scrupulous  regard  to 
the  latest  numbers  of  Harper's  Bazaar.  They  wear  them  as  easily  and 
naturally  as  the  mulattoes  or  quadroons  in  our  own  country.  The 
women  of  rank  are  ladies  who  are  competent  to  sustain  with  grace  and 
dignity  all  the  appearances  of  cultivated  society,  though  it  would  be 
expecting  too  much  to  look  for  any  high  degrees  of  mental  culture 
according  to  the  rigorous  standard  of  the  great  white  nations.  Both 
men  and  women,  however,  are  quick  to  catch  the  externals  of  social 
customs  and  refinement.  The  better  culture,  however,  will  come  in 
*time  as  wealth  and  the  comforts  and  luxuries  of  civilized  life  increase 
among  them. 

One  of  the  most  important  agencies,  and  perhaps  the  most  impor- 
tant, has  been  the  enforcement  of  education.  Common  schools  are 
sustained  at  public  expense,  and  a  college  for  the  higher  education  has 
been  established.  Unfortunately  the  natives  have  never  been  taught 
to  speak  the  English  language,  and  this  has  been  a  serious  obstacle  in 
the  way  of  their  intellectual  advancement.  It  is  far  easier  for  a  white 
man  to  acquire  the  Hawaiian  language  than  for  the  Hawaiian  to 
acquire  English,  and  as  a  consequence  few  of  the  natives  are  able  to 
converse  or  read  except  in  their  own  tongue.  On  the  other  han£,  the 
white  residents  can  converse  easily  with  the  natives,  and  some  of  them 
have  obtained  an  excellent  knowledge  of  the  Hawaiian  language, 
while  almost  all  the  whites  can  at  least  use  an  intelligible  jargon.  The 
defect  is  in  some  measure  offset  by  the  extensive  use  of  books  and 
newspapers  printed  in  the  Hawaiian  language,  and  by  a  postal  system 
which,  under  the  circumstances,  is  a  highly  creditable  one  to  the 


56  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

nation.    By  means   of  the  newspapers  the  natives  are  kept  fulb 
informed  about  their  own  affairs,  and  receive  considerable  knowledge 
of  the  great  far-off  world  beyond  the  sea.    That  the  papers  and  posts 
system  have  been  of  great  potency  and  utility  to  them  is  sufficiently 
apparent. 

Whoever  wishes  for  a  delightful  and  instructive  journey  will  do  wel 
to  visit  these  islands.     They  are  only  seven  days'  sail  from  San  Fran 
cisco  in  a  first-class  steamer,  and  across  an  ocean  which  is  rareb 
troubled  with  storms.     He  will  find  scenery  as  beautiful  as  any  in  tin- 
world  and  as  novel  as  it  is  beautiful.    He  will  find  charming  sociel 
among  his  own  people  residing  there,  and  unbounded  hospitality, 
he  is  philosophically  disposed  he  will  find  many  instructive  subjects 
for  his  contemplation.     If,  without  forgetting  for  a  moment  the  splendor 
of  the  civilization  in  which  he  has  been  reared,  he  can  rise  above  its 
prejudices,  and  if  he  is  able  to  study  men  and  human  society  from  a 
relative  rather  than  an  arbitrary  standpoint,  and  judge  them  according 
to  the  fundamental  principles  of  human  nature,  he  will  find  his  own 
humanities  greatly  enlarged  and  he  will  be  much  instructed  and  bene- 
fited. 


VIII.  Also  the  following  paper  prepared  by  hon.  sanford  b. 

DOLE    AND    READ    BEFORE    THE    HAWAIIAN    HISTORICAL    SOCIETY 
DECEMBER  5,  1892. 

[Papers  of  the  Hawaiian  Historical  Society  No.  3.] 

Evolution  of  Hawaiian  Land  Tenures. 

[Read  before  tbe  Hawaiian  Historical  Society,  December  5,  1892,  by  the  Hon.  Sanford  B.  Dole.] 

When  the  Hawaiian  pilgrim  fathers  first  landed  on  the  lonely  coast 
of  Hawaii  from  their  long  and  exhausting  ocean  voyage  in  their  canoes 
decked  with  mats  and  rigged  with  mat  sails,  it  was  for  them  a  new 
departure  in  government  and  social  and  indus  trial  economy.  Their  past, 
with  its  myths  of  origin,  its  legends  of  struggling  and  wandering,  its 
faiths  and  customs,  and  rites  and  ceremonies,  its  lessons  of  victory  and 
defeat,  its  successes  over  nature,  was  still  their  present  authority  and 
paramount  influence,  as  they  feebly  began  a  new  sosial  enterprise  upon 
the  desolate  yet  grand  and  beautiful  shores  of  their  new  inheritance. 

Their  past  still  held  them  through  its  venerable  sanctions,  and  yet 
they  were  free  in  the  freedom  of  a  new  and  unoccupied  land  to  add  to 
its  accumulations  and  to  improve  on  its  lessons. 

We  may  imagine  that  the  remnant  of  the  freight  of  their  storm-worn 
canoes  included  a  few  household  idols,  a  live  pig  or  two,  some  emaciated 
chickens,  a  surviving  bread-fruit  plant,  fcow,  and  other  seeds. 

There  were  women  as  well  as  men  in  the  company;  the  little  children 
had  succumbed  to  the  hardships  of  the  voyage  which  was  undertaken 
to  escape  the  indignities  and  confiscations  incident  to  the  status  of  a 
defeated  party  in  tribal  warfare. 

These  people,  lean  and  half- famished,  gladly  and  with  fresh  courage 
took  possession  of  their  new  world.  As  soon  as  they  recovered  their 
strength  they  built  a  heiau*  and  sacrificed  to  their  gods. 

After  a  little  exploration  they  settled  in  a  deep  valley  sheltered  by 
steep  cliifs  and  watered  by  an  abundant  stream  of  clear  water,  abound- 
ing in  fish  and  shrimps.     At  the  mouth  of  the  gorge  was  the  sea,  where 

* Heiau — temple. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  57 

there  were  shellfish,  crabs,  and  a  variety  of  fish.  Fruits  of  various 
kinds  nourished  on  the  hillsides,  some  of  which  they  were  acquainted 
with,  while  others  were  new  to  them.  They  found  varieties  of  the 
Jccupa*  plant,  and  understanding  the  process  of  making  its  bark  into 
cloth,  they  restored  their  wardrobes  which  had  for  the  most  part  dis- 
appeared in  the  vicissitudes  of  the  voyage.  They  also  discovered  the 
taro]  growing  wild  in  mountain  streams,  which  they  hailed  as  an  old 
friend,  feeling  that  now  their  satisfaction  with  their  new  home  was 
complete.  The  cultivation  of  this  was  begun  at  once  as  a  field  or  dry- 
land crop,  as  had  been  the  practice  in  the  home  land,  but  as  time  went 
on  and  some  crops  failed  for  want  of  rain,  irrigation  was  used,  until 
at  length,  it  may  have  been  generations  after,  the  present  method  of 
cultivating  the  crop  in  permanent  patches  of  standing  water  became 
established.  This  result  was  greatly  favored  by  the  abundance  of 
running  water,  which  wras  a  feature  of  the  country. 

Children  were  born  and  grew  up  and  intermarried,  and  the  colony 
grew  and  prospered.  Exploring  parties  went  out  from  time  to  time,  and 
other  watered  valleys  were  found,  and  bays  and  reefs  rich  in  fishing 
resources.  As  the  community  began  to  crowd  the  limited  area  of  the 
valley  which  was  their  first  resting  place,  one  and  another  of  these  newly 
discovered  and  favored  localities  was  settled,  generally  by  a  family  con- 
sisting of  the  parents  and  grown-up  boys  and  girls.  And  now  and  then 
new  companies  of  exiles  from  the  southern  islands  found  their  weary 
way  over  the  ocean,  bringing,  perhaps,  later  customs  and  adding  new 
gods  to  the  Hawaiian  pantheon. 

So  Hawraii  was  gradually  populated,  and  when  its  best  localities  were 
occupied,  Maui  began  to  be  colonized,  and  then  its  adjacent  islands, 
until  the  whole  group  was  stocked  with  people. 

There  may  have  been  a  few  chiefs  in  the  pioneer  company  who  largely 
directed  the  affairs  of  the  colony,  and  whose  descendants  furnished 
chiefs  for  the  growing  demands  of  the  branch  colonies.  Among  the  new 
arrivals  also  from  the  outside  world  were  occasional  chiefs,  who  were 
hospitably  welcomed  and  accredited  as  such,  and  accorded  correspond- 
ing position  and  influence. 

It  is  also  probable  that  in  the  very  early  period  when  chiefs  were 
scarce  the  head  men  of  some  of  the  settlements  which  had  branched 
off  from  the  parent  colony  acquired  the  rank  of  chiefs,  from  the  impor- 
tance of  their  positions  and  the  influence  which  their  authority  over 
the  lands  of  their  respective  settlements  naturally  gave  them.  Such 
acquired  rank  descended  to  their  children,  in  some  cases  doubtless 
with  an  increase  of  dignity  due  to  marriages  with  women  of  chief  rank; 
and  so  some  new  families  of  chiefs,  originating  from  the  common  peo- 
ple or  malmainanas,%  were  established. 

This  early  period  of  Hawaiian  history  for  a  number  of  generations 
was  a  time  of  industrial  enterprise  and  peaceful  and  prosperous  growth. 
There  was  no  occasion  for  fighting,  for  there  was  land  and  water  enough 
for  all  and  every  one  was  busily  employed.  It  wras  the  golden  age  of 
Hawaii.  There  were  taboos^  indeed,  but  only  religious  ones.  No  chief 
was  powerful  enough  yet  to  proclaim  taboos  for  political  purposes,  nor 
had  the  necessities  for  political  taboos  yet  arisen.  The  arts  prospered ; 
the  Hawaiian  canoe  developed;  the  manufacture  of  kapa  flourished 
and  made  progress  in  the  direction  of  variety  of  fabric  and  its  esthetic 
finish  and  decoration ;  royal  garments  of  birds'  feathers  were  manufac- 

*Kapa — native  cloth.  t  Malmainanas — common  people, 

t  Taro— arum  esculentum.  §  Taboo— -repressive  enactment. 


58  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

tured;  implements  of  stone  and  of  wood  for  mechanical  and  industrial 
work  were  invented  and  improved  upon ;  and  great  engineering  enter- 
prises were  taken,  such  as  the  irrigating  systems  of  Wakiawa,  Kapaa, 
and  Kilauea  on  the  island  of  Kauai,  and  great  seawalls  inclosing  bjys 
and  reefs  for  fish-ponds,  such  as  the  one  at  Huleia,  on  Kauai,  and  at 
many  other  places  all  over  the  islands.  The  antiquity  of  some  of  these 
is  so  great  that  even  tradition  fails  to  account  for  their  origin,  as  in  the 
case  of  the  parallel  irrigating  ditches  at  Kilauea,  on  Kauai,  the  dig- 
ging of  which  is  attributed  by  the  Hawaiian s  to  the  fabled  moo,  or 
dragon,  and  the  deep  water  fish-pond  wall  at  the  Huleia  Eiver,  on 
Kauai,  which  is  supposed  to  have  been  built  by  the  Menehunes — the 
fabled  race  of  dwarfs,  distinguished  for  cunning  industry  and  mechanical 
and  engineering  skill  and  intelligence.  In  reality  they  were  the  pio- 
neers of  the  Hawaiian  race,  who  took  complete  industrial  and  peaceful 
possession  of  the  country,  and  this  early  period  is  distinctly  the  age  of 
the  Menehunes,  or  skillful  workers. 

Principles  of  land  tenure  developed  slowly  through  this  period,  proba- 
bly from  some  form  of  the  patriarchal  system  into  a  system  of  tribal 
or  communal  ownership.  There  was  laud  enough  for  everyone,  and 
holdings  at  first  were  based  upon  possession  and  use. 

As  in  the  irrigating  customs  of  the  Hawaiians,  where  there  was  an 
abundance  of  water,  every  taro  grower  used  it  freely  and  at  all  times 
according  to  his  own  convenience,  and  there  were  no  regulations,  but 
in  those  localities  where  the  watersupply  was  limited  strict  rules  for 
its  distribution  grew  up ;  so  that  when  the  land  was  not  all  occupied 
there  was  freedom  in  its  use,  it  being  easier  to  locate  new  holdings  than 
to  quarrel  about  old  ones. 

But  as  land  irrigation  developed,  requiring  permanent  and  costly 
improvements  in  the  way  of  irrigating  ditches  and  the  building  of  ter- 
races on  the  valley  slopes  for  the  foundation  of  taro  patches,  such 
improved  localities  acquired  a  special  value,  and  the  more  real  sense  of 
ownership  in  land,  which  is  based  upon  an  investment  of  labor  in  the 
soil  beyond  the  amount  required  for  the  cultivation  of  a  crop,  began. 
A  quality  of  this  ownership  was  necessarily  permanence,  because  of 
the  permanence  of  the  improvements  which  created  it. 

Another  element  of  tenure  arose  as  the  population  increased,  and  the 
best  lands  became  occupied;  the  increasing  demand  gave  them  a  mar- 
ket value,  so  to  speak,  which  gave  rise  to  disputes  over  boundaries. 
Although  such  feuds,  sometimes  attended  with  personal  violence, 
favored  the  development  of  the  later  feudalism  of  the  Hawaiians,  yet 
the  early  period,  containing  many  of  the  features  of  tribal  government 
and  land  tenure  common  to  the  Samoans,  Fijians,  and  Maories  of  New 
Zealand,  probably  lasted  for  a  long  time,  with  a  gradual  development  of 
the  principle  of  ownership  in  land  and  descent  from  parent  to  child, 
subject  to  tribal  control,  until  it  was  perhaps  radically  and  violently 
intemrpted  by  the  turbulent  times  beginning  in  the  thirteenth  century, 
and  lasting  until  the  conquest  of  the  group  by  Kamehameha  I.  This  was 
a  period  of  internecine  warfare,  promoted  by  the  ambition  of  chiefs  for 
political  power  and  personal  aggrandizement,  and  was  most  favorable 
to  the  growth  of  feudalism,  which  rapidly  took  the  place  of  the  previous 
political  status.  As  was  inevitable  under  the  new  conditions,  the 
importance  and  influence  of  the  chiefs  was  greatly  increased,  to  the 
immediate  prejudice  of  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the  people,  who 
were  oppressively  taxed  in  support  of  the  wars  brought  on  by  the  whim 
of  their  respective  rulers,  or  to  defend  them  from  the  attacks  of  ambi- 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  59 

tious  rivals.  The  growing  necessity  for  protection  of  life  and  p  /operty 
caused  everyone  to  attach  himself  closely  to  some  chief,  who  afforded 
such  protection  in  consideration  of  service  and  a  portion  of  the  pro- 
duce of  the  soil.  Then  the  chiefs,  as  their  power  increased,  began  to 
levy  contributions  of  supplies  arbitrarily,  until  it  came  to  pass  that  the 
chief  was  the  owner  of  the  whole  of  the  products  of  the  soil  and  of  the 
entire  services  of  the  people,  and  so  it  was  a  natural  consequence  that 
he  became  finally  the  owner  also  of  the  soil  itself.  These  results,  which 
were  hastened  by  the  constant  wars  of  this  period,  were  yet  of  slow 
growth.  The  small  valley  and  district  sovereignties  one  by  one  disap- 
peared in  the  clutch  of  rising  warrior  chiefs,  who  thus  added  to  their 
dominions  and  power.  As  such  principalities  became  formidable,  it 
became  necessary  for  the  remaining  smaller  chiefdoms  to  ally  them- 
selves to  some  one  of  them.  And  so  this  process  went  on  until  each 
island  was  at  length  under  the  control  of  its  high  chief,  and  then 
finally  the  whole  group  passed  under  the  sovereignty  of  Kamehameha 
I.,  and  the  feudal  programme  was  complete. 

During  this  period  the  control  of  land  became  very  firmly  established 
in  the  ruling  chiefs,  who  reserved  what  portions  they  pleased  for  their 
own  use  and  divided  the  rest  among  the  leading  chiefs  subject  to 
them.  The  position  of  the  latter  was  analogous  $o  that  of  the  barons 
of  European  feudalism;  they  furnished  supplies  to  their  sovereign,  and 
in  case  of  war  were  expected  to  take  the  field  with  what  fighting  men 
their  estates  could  furnish.  These  barons  held  almost  despotic  sway 
over  their  special  domains,  apportioning  the  land  among  their  followers 
according  to  the  whim  of  the  moment  or  the  demands  of  policy,  or 
farming  it  out  under  their  special  agents,  the  Jconohilcis*  whose  oppress- 
ive severity  in  dealing  with  the  actual  cultivators  of  the  soil  was 
notorious.  "  Thus  the  occupancy  of  land  had  now  become  entirely  sub- 
ject to  the  will  of  the  ruling  chief,  who  not  only  had  the  power  to  give 
but  also  to  take  away  at  his  royal  pleasure.  This  despotic  control 
over  land  developed  in  the  direction  of  greater  severity  rather  than 
toward  any  recognition  of  the  subjects'  rights,  and  it  finally  became  an 
established  custom  for  a  chief  who  succeeded  to  the  sovereign  power, 
even  peacefully  by  inheritance,  to  redistribute  the  lands  of  the  realm. 

It  is  evident  that  this  status  was,  for  the  time  being,  disastrous  and 
destructive  to  all  popular  rights  in  land  that  may  have  previously 
existed.  If  there  was  formerly  anything  like  succession  in  tenure  from 
father  to  son  and  tribal  ownership,  such  holdings  were  now  utterly 
destroyed,  and  the  cultivators  of  the  soil  were  without  rights  of  culti- 
vation or  even  of  habitation.  "The  count;  was  full  of  people  who 
were  hemo,  i.  e.  dispossessed  of  their  lands  at  the  caprice  of  a  chief. 
Three  words  from  a  new  to  a  former  Jconohiki* — cJJa  hemo  oeJ] — would 
dispossess  a  thousand  unoffending  people  and  send  them  houseless  and 
homeless  to  find  their  makamalcas%  in  other  valleys."  (Alexander's 
reply  to  Bishop  "Staley.) 

The  redistribution  of  lands  upon  the  accession  of  a  ruling  chief  was 

naturally  carried  out  with  great  severity  when  his  accession  was  the 

result  of  civil  war  between  rival  factions  or  the  triumph  of  an  invading 

army.    In  the  case  of  a  peaceful  accession  of  a  young  chief  to  sover- 

I  eign  power,  the  redistribution  was  mainly  to  his  personal  friends  and 

I  companions,  and  was  less  complete  than  in  the  case  of  a  revolution  of 

!  force.    Yery  influential  men  of  the  previous  reign  would  not  be  dis- 

*Konohiki — land  agent  of  chief.  \Ua  hemooe — you  are  removed. 

t  Makamaka — friend. 


60  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

turbed,  both  because  it  would  be  dangerous  and  impolitic  to  do  sojl 
and  because  their  assistance  was  desired.  A  curious  survival  of  thin 
feudal  custom  of  redistribution  of  power  and  land  upon  the  accession 
of  a  new  ruler  is  recognizable  in  the  equally  reprehensible  sentimenfl 
of  modern  politics  expressed  in  the  well-known  words,  "  to  the  victor J 
belong  the  spoils." 

When  Kamehameha  I  conquered  the  group,  excepting  the  island  of 
Kauai,  which  was  accomplished  only  after  the  most  desperate  fighting! 
his  success  carried  with  it  the  fullest  and  severest  application  of  this 
custom,  and  it  meant  to  his  defeated  enemies  loss  of  all  political  powen 
and  of  the  lands  which  were  the  basis  of  such  power.     The  island  of 
Kauai,  through  the  treaty  of  annexation  between  the  King  of  that 
island,  Kaumualii,  and  Kamehameha,  might  have  escaped  such  misl 
fortunes  but  for  the  rebellion  of  Humehume,  the  son  of  KaumnaliiJ 
some  years  later,  which,  being  suppressed,  subjected  the  insurgent 
chiefs  to  the  rigorous  rule  of  confiscation  of  their  lands  and  the  annihi-1 
lation  of  their  political  influence. 

Thus  Kamehameha  became  at  last,  through  these  feudal  customs  and 
by  virtue  of  his  conquest,  the  fountain  head  of  land  tenures  for  the 
whole  group.  The  principles  adopted  by  the  land  commission  in  1847 
opens  with  the  following  statement: 

"When  the  islands  were  conquered  by  Kamehameha  I  he  followed; 
the  example  of  his  predecessors  and  divided  the  lands  among  his  prinl 
cipal  warrior  chiefs,  retaining,  however,  a  portion  in  his  hands  to  be  cul-l 
tivated  or  managed  by  his  own  immediate  servants  or  attendants  J 
Each  principal  chief  divided  his  lands  anew,  and  gave  them  out  to  an] 
inferior  order  of  chiefs  or  persons  of  rank,  by  whom  they  were  subdi-t! 
vided  again  and  again,  passing  through  the  hands  of  four,  five,  or  sin 
persons,  from  the  King  down  to  the  lowest  class  of  tenants.  All  these 
persons  were  considered  to  have  rights  in  the  lands  or  the  productions 
of  them.  The  proportions  of  these  rights  were  not  very  clearly  defined, 
but  were,  nevertheless,  universally  acknowledged." 

During  Kamehamena's  long  and  vigorous  reign  affairs  became  set- 
tled to  an  extent  to  which  the  country  had  been  unaccustomed.  Long 
and  undisturbed  possession  of  their  lands  by  chiefs  was  a  preparation 
for  the  development  of  a  sentiment  favorable  to  permanent  individual 
rights  in  land.  Such  a  sentiment  had  become  well  defined  in  the  mind 
of  Kamehameha  before  his  death,  and  may  be  regarded  as  the  seed 
germ  of  the  system  of  land  tenures  which  afterwards  developed. 

Many  of  those  who  have  been  interested  in  this  subject  have  been~ 
accustomed  to  regard  the  idea  of  private  rights  in  land  in  these  islands 
as  one  of  foreign  introduction  during  the  reign  of  Kamehameha  III,  at 
which  time  the  remarkable  change  from  feudal  to  private  real  estate 
control  took  place.  But  the  landed  reforms  of  that  reign  were  the 
results  of  causes  which  had  been  long  and  powerfully  at  work.  The 
century  plant  had  slowly  grown,  but  when  its  full  time  came  it  swiftly 
and  abundantly  blossomed. 

At  the  meeting  of  chiefs  at  Honolulu,  upon  the  arrival  of  the  frigate 
Blonde,  in  1825,  with  the  remains  of  Kamehameha  II  and  his  wife,  to 
consider  the  question  of  the  succession  to  the  throne  and  other  mat- 
ters, as  reported  in  the  Yoyage  of  the  Blonde,  page  152  and  following, 
Kalaimoku,  the  regent,  in  his  address  to  the  council,  referred  to  the 
inconveniences  arising  from  the  reversion  of  lands  to  the  King  on  the 
death  of  their  occupants — a  custom  partially  revived  under  Kame- 
hameha II,  but  which  it  had  been  the  object  of  Kamehameha  I  to 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  61 

(exchange  for  that  of  hereditary  succession.  This  project  of  their  great 
King  he  proposed  to  adopt  as  the  law,  excepting  in  such  cases  as  when 
a  chief  or  landholder  should  infringe  the  laws,  then  his  lands  should 
[be  forfeited  and  himself  tabooed.  Several  chiefs  at  once  exclaimed: 
"All  the  laws  of  the  great  Kamehameha  were  good;  let  us  have  the 
same!" 

Lord  Byron,  captain  of  the  Blonde,  presented  the  council  some  writ- 
ten suggestions  iu  regard  to  the  administration  of  affairs  which  are 
contained  the  following  article:  "That  the  lands  which  are  now  held 
by  the  chiefs  shall  not  be  taken  from  them,  but  shall  descend  to  their 
legitimate  children,  except  in  cases  of  rebellion,  and  then  all  their  prop- 
erty shall  be  forfeited  to  the  King."  The  account  proceeds  as  follows 
(page  157):  "These  hints,  it  will  be  at  once  perceived,  are  little  more 
than  a  recommendation  quietly  to  pursue  the  old  habits  and  regulations 
of  the  islands.  Kamehameha  I  had  begun  to  establish  the  hereditary 
transmission  of  estates,  and  Lord  Byron's  notice  only  adds  the  sanction 
of  the  British  name  to  it." 

This  principle,  adopted  previous  to  the  reign  of  Kamehameha  III, 
greatly  influenced  the  progress  of  events. 

When,  after  the  death  of  Kamehameha  I,  his  son,  Liholiho,  came  to 
the  throne  as  Kamehameha  II,  the  administration  of  the  Government 
was  shared  with  him  by  Kaahumanu,  the  Kuhina  Wwi*  one  of  Kameha- 
meha's  widows,  and  a  woman  of  great  force  of  character.  It  was  the 
desire  of  Kamehameha  II  to  make  a  redistribution  of  the  lands  of  the 
realm  according  to  custom,  but  Kaahumanu  was  opposed  to  it,  and  her 
influence,  together  with  the  united  strength  of  the  landed  interests 
which  had  become  firmly  established  in  the  chiefs  during  the  long  reign 
of  Kamehameha  I,  was  too  strong  for  him,  and  beyond  a  few  assign- 
ments among  his  intimate  friends,  he  relinquished  his  purpose.  The 
distribution  of  lands  therefore  by  Kamehameha  I  remained  for  the  most 
part  as  a  permanent  settlement  of  the  landed  interests  of  the  Kingdom, 
to  be  afterwards  modified  in  favor  of  the  common  people  and  the  Gov- 
ernment, but  never  ignored. 

During  the  period  from  the  distribution  of  lands  by  Kamehameha  I, 
about  1795,  till  the  year  1839,  the  sovereign  held  a  feudal  authority 
over  the  whole  landed  estate  of  the  Kingdom,  which  included  the  right, 
as  above  set  forth,  summarily  to  cancel  the  rights  in  land  of  any  chief 
or  commoner.  There  was  a  growing  tendency,  however,  during  this 
period  toward  the  provision  in  favor  of  the  descent  of  lauds  from 
parent  to  child  adopted  by  the  chiefs  upon  the  return  of  the  Blonde, 
and  the  feudal  right  of  the  sovereign  over  the  land  of  the  subject  was 
more  rarely  exercised  as  time  went  on.  Increasing  security  in  tenure 
led  to  increasing  activity  in  land  transactions.  Chiefs  transferred  lands 
to  others,  and  they  became  a  marketable  commodity.  There  was  buying 
and  selling — some  speculating.  The  sovereign  gave  away  and  sold 
lands  here  and  there.  Foreigners  became  landholders.  Still  there 
was  no  permanence  in  the  tenure,  the  enactment  by  the  chiefs  at  the 
time  of  the  Blonde  being  in  the  nature  rather  of  an  expression  of  an 
opinion  than  a  binding  law.  The  Kingdom  then  was  under  the  regency 
of  Kaahumanu  and  Kalanimoku,  and  Kamehameha  III,  being  still  a 
minor,  was  not  a  party  to  this  provision  and  it  was  not  regarded  as 
binding  upon  him. 

The  status  of  land  matters  at  this  time  was  similar  to  that  which 
existed  in  England  after  the  Norman  conquest,  but  here  the  progress 
of  events,  owing  undoubtedly  to  the  influence  of  a  foreign  civilization, 


*  Kuhina  Nui— -a  premier  or  minister  having  a  veto  on  the  King's  acts. 


62  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

was  far  more  rapid  than  there.     The  possession  of  land  by  foreigners 
with  strong  governments  back  of  them,  represented  here  by  men  oi 
war  and  zealous  consuls,  had  a  stimulating  effect  upon  this  movement! 
It  was  a  transition  period ;  the  strength  of  the  feudal  despotism  was 
fast  waning  and  there  was  as  yet  nothing  of  a  positive  nature  to  take  its] 
place.    This  uncertainty  in  regard  to  land  tenure  was  a  serious  obstacle  tol 
material  progress.    The  large  1  audholders — the  chiefs  an d  some  to  whonj 
they  had  given  or  sold  lands — felt  a  degree  of  security  in  their  holdings 
through  the   growing  sentiment  toward  permanent  occupation   and 
hereditary  succession;  but  this  was  insufficient  to  place  land  matter* 
upon  a  satisfactory  footing  and  to  justify  extensive  outlays  in  permal 
n§nt  improvements.    But  that  class  of  occupiers  of  land  known  as  ten  J 
ants,  which  class  included  a  large  proportion  of  the  common  people, 
was  still  in  a  condition  which  had  scarcely  felt  the  favorable  influences 
which  had  begun  to  improve  the  status  of  the  chiefs.    They  were  hardly 
recognized  has  having  civil  rights,  although  they  enjoyed  freedom  of 
movement  and  were  not  attached  to  any  particular  lands  as  belongings 
of  the  soil.    If  a  man  wanted  a  piece  of  land  to  live  on  and  to  cultivate 
he  had  to  pay  for  it  by  a  heavy  rent  in  the  shape  of  regular  weekly, 
labor  for  his  landlord,  with  the  additional  liability  of  being  called  upon 
to  assist  in  work  of  a  public  character,  such  as  building  a  heiau  on 
making  a  road  or  fish-pond  sea  wall.     With  all  this  the  tenant  was  liable^ 
to  be  ejected  from  his  holding  without  notice  or  chance  of  redress! 
That  this  defenseless  condition  of  the  common  people  was  rigorously! 
taken  advantage  of  by  the  landholding  chiefs  and  their  JconohiJcis,  wel 
have  the  evidence  of  those  living  in  this  period,  including  some  of  the! 
early  missionaries,  that  it  was  a  feature  of  the  times  that  large  nunvj 
bers  of  homeless  natives  were  wandering  about  the  country.    Thisj 
want  of  security  in  the  profits  of  land  cultivation  led  many  to  attach  i 
themselves  to  the  persons  of  the  chiefs  as  hangers-on,  whereby  they 
might  be  at  least  fed  in  return  for  the  desultory  services  which  they| 
were  called  upon  to  perform  in  that  capacity.    This  practice  of  hang- j 
ing-on  or  of  following  a  chief  for  the  sake  of  food  was  a  feature  of  the! 
perfected  feudalism,  when  insecurity  of  land  tenure  was  at  its  height,* 
and  the  word  defining  it — lioopilimeaai* — probably  originated  at  that 
period. 

In  1833,  Kamehameha  III,  then  20  years  old,  assumed  the  throne,  I 
and  soon  became  deeply  interested  in  public  affairs.    In  many  waysj 
the  unsatisfactory  status  of  land  matters  was  pressed  upon  his  atten- 
tion.   The  growing  sentiment  toward  permanence  in  tenure  powerfully 
influenced  the  situation.    The  defenseless  and  wretched  condition  of 
the  common  people  in  regard  to  their  holdings  appealed  to  his  human- " 
ity  and  to  his  sense  of  responsibility  as  their  ruler.     The  inconsistency 
of  his  sovereign  control  of  all  the  lands  of  the  Kingdom  with  any  prog- 
ress based  upon  the  incoming  tide  of  civilization  became  more  and 
more  evident  every  day.    The  increasing  demand  among  foreigners :i 
for  the  right  to  buy  and  hold  land  was  an  element  of  importance  at  j 
this  national  crisis  and  doubtless  had  much  to  do  in  hastening  the 
course  of  events.    The  King  not  only  consulted  the  great  chiefs  of  thei 
realm,  who  certainly  were  in  favor  of  permanence  in  tenure  for  them- 1 
selves,  but  he  also  conferred  with  foreigners  on  the  subject.     In  1836 
Commodore    Kennedy   and   Capt.  Hollins   visited    Honolulu   in   the 
U.   S.    ships    Peacock   and   Enterprise,   and  during  their  stay  held 
conferences  with  the  chiefs,  in  which  the  question  of  land  tenure  j 
was  discussed.    In  1837,  Capt.  Bruce  of  the  British  frigate  Imogene 

*  Hoopilimeaai — adhering  for  food. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  63 

had  several  meetings  with  the  chiefs  in  regard  to  matter  j  of  govern- 
ment, when,  in  all  probability,  land  matters  were  considered.  The 
influence  of  Mr.  Richards,  for  a  long  time  the  confidential  adviser  of 
the  chiefs  was  undoubtedly  very  gre^t  with  the  King  in  leading  his 
mind  to  the  definite  conclusion  which  he  reached  in  1839,  in  which 
year,  on  the  7th  day  of  June,  he  proclaimed  a  bill  of  rights  which 
has  made  his  name  illustrious,  and  the  day  on  which  it  was 
announced  worthy  of  being  forever  commemorated  by  the  Hawaiian 
people.  This  document,  though  showing  in  its  phrases  the  influ- 
ence of  Anglo-Saxon  principles  of  liberty,  of  Robert  Burns  and  the 
American  Declaration  of  Independence,  is  especially  interesting  and 
impressive  as  the  Hawaiian  Magna  Charta,  not  wrung  from  an  unwil- 
ling sovereign  by  force  of  arms,  but  the  free  surrender  of  despotic 
power  by  a  wise  and  generous  ruler,  impressed  and  influenced  by  the 
logic  of  events,  by  the  needs  of  his  people,  and  by  the  principles  of  the 
new  civilization  that  was  dawning  on  his  land. 

The  following  is  the  translation  of  this  enlightened  and  munificent 
royal  grant: 

"God  hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men  to  dwell  on  the 
earth  in  unity  and  blessedness.  God  hath  also  bestowed  certain 
rights  alike  on  all  men  and  all  chiefs  and  all  people  of  all  lands. 

"  These  are  some  of  the  rights  which  He  has  given  alike  to  every  man 
and  every  chief  of  correct  deportment;  life,  limb,  liberty,  freedom  from 
oppression,  the  earnings  of  his  hands  and  the  productions  of  his  mind — 
not,  however,  to  those  who  act  in  violation  of  the  laws. 

"God  has  also  established  government  and  rule  for  the  purpose  of 
peace;  but  in  making  laws  for  the  nation  it  is  by  no  means  proper  to 
enact  laws  for  the  protection  of  the  rulers  only,  without  also  providing 
protection  for  their  subjects;  neither  is  it  proper  to  enact  laws  to  enrich 
the  chiefs  only,  without  regard  to  enriching  their  subjects  also,  and 
hereafter  there  shall  by  no  means  be  any  laws  enacted  which  are  at 
variance  with  what  is  above  expressed,  neither  shall  any  tax  be  assessed, 
nor  any  service  or  labor  required  of  any  man  in  a  manner  which  is  at 
variance  with  the  above  sentiments. 

"The  above  sentiments  are  hereby  proclaimed  for  the  purpose  of  pro- 
tecting alike  both  the  people  and  the  chiefs  of  all  these  islands  while 
they  maintain  a  correct  deportment;  that  no  chief  may  be  able  to 
caress  any  subject,  but  that  chiefs  and  people  may  enjoy  the  same 
protection  under  one  and  the  same  law. 

"Protection  is  hereby  secured  to  the  persons  of  all  the  people,  together 
with  their  lands,  their  building  lots,  and  all  their  property,  while 
they  conform  to  the  laws  of  the  kingdom,  and  nothing  whatever  shall 
be  taken  from  any  individual  except  by  express  provision  of  the  laws. 
Whatever  chief  shall  act  perseveringly  in  violation  of  this  declaration 
shall  no  longer  remain  a  chief  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  and  the  same 
shall  be  true  of  the  governors,  officers,  and  all  land  agents.  But  if 
anyone  who  is  deposed  should  change  his  course  and  regulate  his  con- 
duct by  law,  it  shall  then  be  in  the  power  of  the  chiefs  to  reinstate  him 
in  the  place  he  occupied  previous  to  his  being  deposed." 

It  will  be  seen  that  this  bill  of  rights  left  much  to  be  done  in  defin- 
ing the  rights  in  land  granted  by  it.  It  appears  by  the  constitution 
enacted  by  the  King,*  the  Imhina  nui,  or  premier,  and  the  chiefs,  the  fol- 
lowing year,  that  the  feudal  right  of  controlling  transfers  of  land  was 
still  retained  in  the  Sovereign,  in  the  following  words:  "Kamehameha 
I.  was  the  founder  of  the  kingdom,  and  to  him  belonged  all  the  land 
from  one  end  of  the  islands  to  the  other,  though  it  was  not  his  own 
private  property.    It  belonged  to  the  chiefs  and  people  in  common, 


64  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

of  wlioin  Kamehameha  I.  was  the  head  and  had  the  management  of  the 
landed  property.  Wherefore  there  was  not  formerly  and  is  not  now, 
any  person  who  could  or  can  convey  away  the  smallest  portion  of  land 
without  the  consent  of  the  one  who  had  or  has  the  direction  of  the 
kingdom." 

The  bill  of  rights  promoted  activity  in  land  matters,  and  for  the  next 
few  years  difficulties  arising  from  land  disputes  pressed  upon  the  King, 
producing  great  confusion  and  even  endangering  the  autonomy  of  the 
kingdom.  In  1841,  Ladd  &  Co.,  the  pioneers  in  sugar  cultivation  in 
this  country,  obtained  from  the  King  a  franchise  which  gave  them  the 
privilege  of  leasing  any  unoccupied  lands  for  one  hundred  years  at  a 
low  rental.  This  franchise  was  afterwards  transferred  to  a  Belgian  col- 
onization company  of  which  Ladd  &  Co.  were  partners,  under  circum- 
stances that  made  a  good  deal  of  trouble  for  the  Hawaiian  Government 
before  the  m  atter  finally  disappeared  from  Hawaiian  politics.  The  intim- 
idation of  the  King  by  Lord  Paulet,  captain  of  the  British  frigate 
Carysfort,  under  which  the  provisional  cession  of  the  country  to  Eng- 
land was  made  in  1843,  was  based  largely  upon  a  land  claim  of  Mr. 
Charlton,  an  Englishman,  which  was  regarded  by  the  King  as  illegal, 
but  which  he  finally  indorsed  under  Paulet- s  threat  of  bombarding  Hon- 
olulu. These  troubles  naturally  developed  among  the  Hawaiians  an 
opposition  against  the  policy  of  allowing  foreigners  to  acquire  land 
which,  in  1845,  reached  the  definite  stage  of  political  agitation  and  peti- 
tions to  the  Government. 

During  these  years  of  undefined  rights,  the  common  people  were  pro- 
tected in  their  holdings  by  law  to  a  certain  extent,  but  their  tenure 
was  based  mainly  upon  their  industrious  cultivation  of  their  lands, 
except  as  to  house  lots  and  the  payment  of  rent  in  labor. 

The  question  of  the  proportionate  interests  of  the  King,  the  chiefs, 
and  the  common  people  in  the  lands  of  the  kingdom  was  one  of  great 
difficulty.  As  we  have  seen,  the  constitution  of  1840  distinctly  recog- 
nized such  a  community  of  interest,  but  Hawaiian  precedents  threw  no 
light  upon  the  problem  of  division.  It  had  been  a  new  departure  to 
admit  that  the  people  had  any  inherent  right  in  the  soil,  and  now  to 
carry  out  that  principle  required  the  adoption  of  methods  entirely  for- 
eign to  the  traditions  of  Hawaiian  feudalism. 

In  this  transition  time  the  necessity  of  an  organized  government  sep- 
arate from  the  person  of  the  King,  became  apparent  even  to  the  chiefs, 
and  this  was  carried  out  by  three  comprehensive  acts  in  1845, 1846,  and 
1847.  The  first,  "to  organize  the  executive  ministry  of  the  Hawaiian 
Islands;"  the  second,  "to  organize  the  executive  departments  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands;"  and  the  third,  "to  organize  the  judiciary  depart- 
ment of  the  Hawaiian  Islands." 

As  soon  as  the  existence  of  a  responsible  government,  detached  from 
the  person  of  the  King,  became  an  accepted  feature  of  the  political  sys- 
tem, it  was  felt  that  in  some  way  or  other  the  Government  ought  to  have 
public  lands  and  become  the  source  of  land  titles.  At  its  inception  the 
Government,  as  a  distinct  organization,  was  possessed  of  no  landed 
property ;  it  may  be  said  to  have  had  a  right  to  that  portion  of  the  King's 
interest  in  the  landed  property  of  the  Kingdom  which  he  held  in  his 
official  capacity,  in  distinction  from  that  which  belonged  to  him  in  his 
private  capacity;  but  this  was  a  mere  theoretic  right,  dimly  recognized 
at  first,  and  only  after  innumerable  difficulties  and  fruitless  expedients 
was  it  finally  developed  and  carried  out  in  the  great  mahele  or  division 
of  lands  between  King,  chiefs,  and  people  in  1848.  Elaborate  laws  were 
made  for  the  purchase  of  land  by  the  Government  from  private  land- 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  65 

holders  which  do  not  appear  to  have  added  materially  to  the  public 
domain. 

The  act  to  organize  the  executive  department  contained  a  statute 
establishing  a  board  of  royal  commissioners  to  quiet  land  titles.  This 
statute  was  passed  December  10, 1845.  It  was  a  tentative  scheme  to 
solve  the  land  problem,  and  though  not  in  itself  sufficiently  comprehen- 
sive for  the  situation,  it  was  in  the  right  direction,  and  led,  through  the 
announcement  of  principles  of  land  tenure  by  the  commission,  which 
were  adopted  by  the  Legislature,  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  sub- 
ject, and  finally,  in  the  latter  part  of  1847,  to  the  enactment  by  the  King 
and  privy  council  of  rules  for  the  division  of  the  lands  of  the  King- 
dom, which,  with  the  statute  creating  the  land  commission  and  the 
principles  adopted  by  them,  formed  a  complete  and  adequate  provision 
for  the  adjustment  of  all  recognized  interests  in  land  on  the  basis  of  the 
new  departure  in  the  principles  of  tenure. 

At  the  time  of  the  creation  of  the  board  of  commissioners  to  quiet 
land  titles  and  up  to  the  enactment  of  rules  by  the  privy  council  for 
land  division,  the  nation  was  still  feeling  its  way  through  the  maze  of 
the  difficult  questions  which  were  pressing  upon  it  in  this  great  reform 
in  land  matters.  Each  step  which  it  made  threw  light  upon  the  path 
for  the  next  one.  The  rapidity  with  which  this  reform  was  accom- 
plished must  be  attributed  not  only  to  the  wisdom  and  fidelity  of  the 
advisers  of  the  nation,  but  largely  to  the  earnestness  and  patriotism  of 
the  King  and  chiefs,  who  cheerfully  made  great  sacrifices  of  authority 
and  interest  for  the  sake  of  a  satisfactory  solution  of  these  questions. 

The  commissioners  to  quiet  land  titles  were  authorized  to  consider 
claims  to  land  from  private  individuals,  acquired  previous  to  the  pas- 
sage of  the  act  creating  the  commission.  This  included  natives  who 
were  in  the  occupancy  of  holdings  under  the  conditions  of  use  or  pay- 
ment of  rent  in  labor,  and  also  both  natives  and  foreigners  who  had 
received  lands  from  the  King  or  chiefs  in  the  way  of  grants.  The 
awards  of  the  board  were  binding  upon  the  Government  if  not  appealed 
from,  and  entitled  the  claimant  to  a  lease  or  a  royal  patent,  according 
to  the  terms  of  the  award,  the  royal  patent  being  based  upon  the  pay- 
ment of  a  commutation  of  one-fourth  or  one-third  of  the  unimproved 
value  of  the  land,  which  commutation  was  understood  to  purchase  the 
interest  of  the  Government  in  the  soil. 

The  principles  adopted  by  the  land  commission  use  the  words  King 
and  Government  interchangeably,  and  failed  to  reach  any  adjudication 
of  the  separate  rights  of  the  King  in  distinction  from  those  of  the  Gov- 
ernment in  the  public  domain,  or,  in  other  words,  they  failed  to  define 
the  King's  public  or  official  interests  in  distinction  from  his  private  rights, 
although  they  fully  recognized  the  distinction.  There  was,  however,  an 
implied  apportionment  of  these  two  interests  through  the  proceedings 
by  which  an  occupying  claimant  obtained  an  allodial  title.  The  com- 
mission decided  that  their  authority  coming  from  the  King  to  award  lands 
represented  only  his  private  interests  in  the  lands  claimed.  Therefore, 
as  the  further  payment  of  the  claimant  as  a  condition  of  his  receiving 
a  title  in  fee  simple  from  the  Government  was  one-third  of  the  original 
value  of  the  land,  it  follows  that  the  King's  private  interest  was  an  undi- 
vided two-thirds,  leaving  an  undivided  one-third  belonging  to  the  Gov- 
ernment as  such. 

The  commission  also  decided  that  there  were  but  three  classes  of 
vested  or  original  rights  in  land,  which  were  in  the  King  or  Govern- 
ment, the  chiefs,  and  the  people,  and  these  three  classes  of  interests 
were  about  equal  in  extent. 

The  land  commission  began  to  work  February  11;  1846,  and  made 
S,  Sep.  227 5 


66  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

great  progress  iD  adjudicating  the  claims  of  the  common  people,  but 
its  powers  were  not  adequate  to  dispose  of  the  still  unsettled  questions 
between  the  King,  the  chiefs,  and  the  Government,  though  it  must  be 
admitted  that  it  made  progress  in  that  direction.  Neither  was  the 
chiefs  ready  to  submit  their  claims  to  its  decision. 

After  earnest  efforts  between  the  King  and  chiefs  to  reach  a  settle- 
ment of  these  questions,  the  rules  already  referred  to  were  unanimously 
adopted  by  the  King  and  chiefs  in  privy  council  December  18,  1847. 
These  rules,  which  were  drawn  up  by  Judge  Lee,  embodied  the  follow- 
ing points:  The  King  should  retain  his  private  lands  as  his  individual 
property,  to  descend  to  his  heirs  and  successors;  the  remainder  of  the 
landed  property  to  be  divided  equally  between  the  Government,  the 
chiefs,  and  the  common  people. 

As  the  land  was  all  held  at  this  time  by  the  King,  the  chiefs,  and 
their  tenants,  this  division  involved  the  surrender  by  the  chiefs  of  a 
third  of  their  lands  to  the  Government,  or  a  payment  in  lieu  thereof  in 
money,  as  had  already  been  required  of  the  tenant  landholders.  A 
committee,  of  which  Dr.  Judd  was  chairman,  was  appointed  to  carry  out 
the  division  authorized  by  the  privy  council,  and  the  work  was  com- 
pleted in  forty  days.  The  division  between  the  King  and  the  chiefs 
was  effected  through  partition  deeds  signed  by  both  parties.  The  chiefs 
then  went  before  the  land  commission  and  received  awards  for  the 
lands  thus  partitioned  off  to  them,  and  afterwards  many  of  them  com- 
muted for  the  remaining  one-third  interest  of  the  Government  by  a 
surrender  of  a  portion. 

After  the  division  between  the  King  and  the  chiefs  was  finished  he 
again  divided  the  lands  which  had  been  surrendered  to  him  between 
himself  and  the  Government,  the  former  being  known  thereafter  as 
Grown  lands  and  the  latter  as  Government  lands. 

This  division,  with  the  remaining  work  of  the  land  commission, 
completed  the  great  land  reform,  the  first  signal  of  which  was 
announced  by  Kamehameha  III,  in  his  declaration  of  rights,  June  7, 
1839.  A  brief  ten  years  had  been  sufficient  for  the  Hawaiian  nation 
to  break  down  the  hoary  traditions  and  venerable  customs  of  the  past, 
and  to  climb  the  difficult  path  from  a  selfish  feudalism  to  equal  rights, 
from  royal  control  of  all  the  public  domain  to  peasant  proprietorship 
and  fee-simple  titles  for  poor  and  for  rich.  It  came  quickly  and  without 
bloodshed  because  the  nation  was  ready  for  it.  Foreign  intercourse, 
hostile  and  friendly,  and  the  spirit  of  a  Ghristian  civilization  had  an 
educating  influence  upon  the  eager  nation,  united  by  the  genius  of 
Kamehameha  I,  with  its  brave  and  intelligent  warrior  chiefs  resting 
from  the  conquest  of  arms,  their  exuberant  energies  free  for  the  con- 
quest of  new  ideas;  with  rare  wisdom,  judgment,  and  patriotism  they 
proved  equal  to  the  demands  of  the  time  upon  them. 

IX.  Also  the  following  extract  from  the  report  of  hon. 

JOHN  QUINCY  ADAMS,  CHAIRMAN  OF   THE   COMMITTEE   ON  FOREIGN 
AFFAIRS  OF   THE  HOUSE  OF  REPRESENTATIVES. 

"It  is  a  subject  of  cheering  contemplation  to  the  friends  of  human 
improvement  and  virtue,  that  by  the  mild  and  gentle  influence  of 
Ghristian  charity,  dispensed  by  humble  missionaries  of  the  gospel, 
unarmed  with  secular  power7  within  the  last  quarter  of  a  century,  the 
people  of  this  group  of  islands  have  been  converted  from  the  lowest 
debasement  of  idolatry  to  the  blessings  of  the  Ghristian  gospel;  united 
under  one  balanced  government;  rallied  to  the  fold  of  civilization  by 
a  written  language  and  constitution,  providing  security  for  the  rights 
of  persons,  property,  and  mind,  and  invested  with  all  the  elements  of 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  67 

right  and  power  which  can  entitle  them  to  be  acknowledged  by  their 
brethren  of  the  human  race  as  a  separate  and  independent  community. 
To  the  consummation  of  their  acknowledgment  the  people  of  the  North 
American  Union  are  urged  by  an  interest  of  their  own,  deeper  than 
that  of  any  other  portion  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth — by  a  virtual 
right  of  conquest,  not  over  the  freedom  of  their  brother  man  by  the 
brutal  arm  of  physical  power,  but  over  the  mind  and  heart  by  the  celes- 
tial panoply  of  the  gospel  of  peace  and  love." 

X.  Also  the  following  Hawaiian  treaty  and  review  of  its 
commercial  results. 

The  Hawaiian  Treaty. 
a  review  of  its  commercial  results. 

The  Hawaiian  treaty  was  negotiated  for  the  purpose  of  securing 
political  control  of  those  islands,  making  them  industrially  and  com^ 
mercially  a  part  of  the  United  States  and  preventing  any  other  great 
power  from  acquiring  a  foothold  there,  which  might  be  adverse  to  the 
welfare  and  safety  of  our  Pacific  coast  in  time  of  war.  They  are  situated 
midway  on  the  direct  way  from  Panama  to  Hongkong  and  directly  on 
the  shortest  line  from  the  Columbia  Eiver  or  Puget  Sound  to  Australia. 
Here  the  two  great  lines  of  future  commerce  of  the  Pacific  Ocean  inter- 
sect, and  vessels  must  stop  there  for  refreshment  and  refuge. 

The  islands  prior  to  the  treaty  were  declining  in  population,  and 
owing  to  the  decay  of  the  whale  fishery,  were  declining  in  wealth. 
Their  soil  is,  perhaps,  the  most  productive  for  sugar  raising  of  any 
known  in  the  world.  But  the  high  tariff  on  sugar  and  the  exceedingly 
low  wages  which  must  be  paid  in  tropical  countries  for  raising  sugar  to 
supply  the  United  States  rendered  the  industry  difficult.  In  1875  a 
movement  arose  in  the  islands  for  the  importation  of  Hindoo  coolies  to 
supply  the  requisite  cheap  labor,  and  the  consent  of  England  was 
promised.  The  growth  of  the  Australian  colonies  had  gradually  devel- 
oped an  improving  market  for  Hawaiian  sugar,  and,  after  a  trial  of  it 
by  some  of  the  Hawaiian  planters,  it  was  found  that  better  prices 
could  be  obtained  in  the  free-trade  port  of  Sydney  than  in  San  Fran- 
cisco, and  return  cargoes  could  be  bought  there  much  more  cheaply. 
Preparations  were  making  for  sending  there  the  entire  crops  of  1876- 
?77.  These  matters  came  to  the  knowledge  of  the  State  Department. 
The  Hawaii ans  had  been  pressing  for  many  years  for  a  commercial 
treaty  with  the  United  States,  but  without  success.  It  was  now  felt  in 
the  State  Department  that  the  question  was  assuming  graver  impor- 
tance, and,  as  political  supremacy  in  the  islands  must  inevitably  follow 
the  commerce,  it  was  recognized  that  this  country  must  make  favorable 
concessions  to  them,  or  else  let  them  follow  the  inevitable  tendency 
and  drift  slowly  into  the  status  of  an  English  colony.  The  result  was 
the  negotiation  of  the  existing  treaty  and  its  ratification  by  the  con- 
sent of  the  Senate.    The  effect  of  the  treaty  was  as  follows : 

It  was  anticipated  that  the  remission  of  duties  would  make  the  profits 
of  sugar  culture  very  great.  But  a  sugar  plantation  requires  for  the 
most  economical  work  a  large  amount  of  capital,  $500,000  being  very 
moderate  for  a  single  plantation,  and  $250,000  being  about  as  small  as 
is  prudent.  The  islanders  had  no  capital  of  any  consequence  and  were 
obliged  to  borrow  it  from  the  United  States  (i.  e.,  from  or  through  the 
mercantile  houses  of  San  Francisco  who  import  their  sugar  and  act  as 
agents  to  the  planters  for  selling  it  to  the  refineries).  The  opening  of 
plantations  proceeded  rapidly  until  the  output  of  sugar  has  now  nearly 


68  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

reached  the  full  capacity  of  the  soil,  and  is  seven  or  eight  times  greater 
than  in  1874-75.  Our  exports  to  the  islands  have  increased  in  very 
nearly  the  same  ratio,  being  five  or  six  times  greater  than  in  1874-?75, 
or,  if  measured  in  quantity  rather  than  by  price,  are  about  seven  times 
as  great.  A  new  merchant  marine  has  been  created,  consisting  of 
vessels  built  expressly  for  the  service,  costing  over  $3,500,000.  Of  this 
total  tonnage  over  90  per  cent  is  American  built,  and  the  rest  was 
bought.  These  mercantile  houses,  with  their  shipping,  transact  the 
entire  commerce  both  ways,  and  transport  annually  about  $12,000,000 
worth  of  merchandise  at  very  high  rates  of  freight,  commission,  and 
exchange. 

In  general,  the  effect  of  the  treaty  has  been  to  make  the  islands  a 
field  for  very  profitable  investment  of  American  capital.  It  has  created 
a  demand  which  would  not  have  existed  otherwise  for  American  prod- 
uce to  an  amount  which  may  seem  small  ($23,000,000  in  nine  years) 
when  viewed  in  comparison  with  our  total  export,  but  which,  when 
viewed  in  connection  with  the  fact  that  the  population  which  has 
made  that  demand  is  less  than  80,000,  is  remarkably  large.  During 
the  last  four  years  it  has  averaged  about  $40  per  capita  per  annum, 
and,  if  the  transportation  charges  be  added  as  they  properly  should 
be,  it  will  amount  to  over  $50  per  capita  per  annum.  This  is  four  or 
1i\e  times  as  much  per  capita  as  England  or  Canada  buys  of  us.  The 
general-results  of  the  trade  may  be  seen  in  the  following  tables: 

Values  delivered  by  the  United  States  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands  for  nine   years — 1876 

to  1885. 

Invoice  value  of  United  States  exports  to  Hawaii $23,  686,  328 

Bills  of  exchange  to  pay  for  all  Hawaiian  imports  from  third  countries.       9,  868,  674 

Difference  between  coin  exported  to  and  received  from  Hawaii 2,  222, 181 

Outstanding  liabilities  of  United  States  to  Hawaii  not  known 

Total  values  paid  by  United  States 35,777, 183 

To  balance  the  account : 

Profits  already  realized  on  merchandise  account * $18,  414, 766 

Cash  debts  payable  to  United  States  at  maturity  out  of  future  shipments .       6,  500,  000 
Increased  values  of  productive  properties  in  the  islands  owned  by  Amer- 
icans       11,680,164 

72,  372, 113 

Values  received  and  receivable  by  the  United  States  from  the  Hawaiian  Islands  for  nine 

years— 1867  to  1885. 

Invoice  value  of  Hawaiian  exports  to  the  United  States. . .  $51, 294,  764 
Add  freight  and  insurance  to  obtain  value  in  United  States 
ports 2,897,185 

Value  of  merchandise  received $54, 191,  949 

Liabilities  of  the  islands  to  the  United  States  for  advances  on 

crops 3,000,000 

Bonded  debts  payable  in  United   States  and  secured  on 

island  property 2, 500,  000 

Hawaiian  Government  bonds  paid  for%  in  silver,  coined  on 

Hawaiian  Government  account '. 1, 000,  000 

Total  liabilities  to  United  States 5,500,000 

Increased  value  of  plantation  properties  owned  by  United 

States  citizens,  as  assessed  in  1883 10, 180, 164 

Value  of  other  productive  properties 1,  500,  000 

11,680,164 

Total  values  received  and  receivable  , , 72,372,113 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  63 

General  distribution  of  profits. 

To  American  shipping: 

Freights  and  insurance  on  imports  from  the  islands... \ $2,  897, 185 

Freights  and  insurance  on  exports 5, 127,  964 

Passenger  receipts • 1,  325,  000 

$9,350,149 

Commission  on  purchases  for  export  to  the  islands 592, 158 

Commission  on  sales  of  islands'  produce 2,  209,  463 

2,  801,  621 

Premium  on  exchange 812,  839 

Interest  on  loans  and  advances 2, 160,  000 

Dividends  and  miscellaneous  profits 3,  290, 157 

Total  profits  already  realized 18,  414,  766 

Debts  receivable  held  chiefly  by  the  San  Francisco  banks 6,  500,  000 

Increased  values  of  productive  properties  owned  by  Americans 11,  735,  464 

Total  gross  profits 36,650,230 

1.  In  the  foregoing  table,  beginning  with  values  delivered,  the  first 
item  is  the  invoice  value  of  our  exports  to  the  islands,  as  shown  in  the 
Treasury  statistics  for  the  nine  years.  It  is  the  home  value,  and,  since 
we  are  comparing  San  Francisco  values  with  San  Francisco  values, 
freights  are  not  added. 

2.  The  second  item  represents  what  we  have  paid  in  the  form  of  bills 
of  exchange  to  settle  the  balance  of  trade  against  us.  Since  the 
Hawaiians  export  almost  nothing  to  third  countries,  but  do  import  con- 
siderable from  them,  it  follows  that  they  must  draw  upon  shipments  to 
the  United  States  to  pay  for  all  they  import  from  third  countries. 
They  have  no  other  source  of  credit  to  draw  upon.  Hence  turning  to 
Hawaiian  official  statistics  we  find  their  total  imports  in  nine  years  to 
have  been  $9,181,522.  The  freight  and  insurance  must  be  added,  and, 
as  these  are  known  to  be  about  10  per  cent  of  the  value,  we  get 
$10,099,674.  Deducting  $231,000,  which  is  their  total  export  to  tkird 
countries  in  nine  years,  and  which  liquidated  just  so  much  of  their 
indebtedness  to  third  countries,  we  have  $9,868,674  on  merchandise 
accounts,  which  we  must  pay  in  bills  of  exchange  drawn  in  San  Fran- 
cisco against  Hawaiian  account  and  in  favor  of  third  countries^ 

3.  In  further  settlement  of  the  balance  of  trade  are  coin  remittances. 
In  nine  years  the  excess  of  coin  shipped  to  Hawaii  over  coin  received 
from  Hawaii  amounts  to  $2,222,181.  Of  this  $1,000,000  was  a  silver 
coinage  for  the  Hawaiian  Government  struck  at  the  San  Francisco  mint, 
for  which  that  Government  gave  its  bonds  for  $1,000,000,  which  are  now 
held  in  this  country. 

If  we  have  given  Hawaii  any  other  consideration  it  must  be  in  the 
form  of  obligations  of  some  sort  which  do  not  appear  in  statistics.  None 
such  are  known,  and  in  a  small  community  like  the  islands,  where 
everybody's  business  is  known  to  everybody  else,  it  is  hardly  possible 
that  if  any  appreciable  amount  of  them  existed  it  would  not  be  known. 
As  the  Hawaiians  are  deeply  in  debt  to  the  United  States  it  is  not 
likely  that  any  such  obligations  of  importance  exist.  This  side  of  the 
exhibit  is  therefore  as  complete  as  present  knowledge  can  make  it. 
On  the  other  side  of  the  account  we  have: 

(1)  Value  of  Hawaiian  exports  to  the  United  States,  $51,294,764. 
This  is  the  invoice  value  at  Honolulu.  As  we  are  comparing  San  Fran- 
cisco values  with  San  Francisco  values  it  is  necessary  to  add  freights 
and  insurance.  (The  American  consul  at  Honohdu  requires  invoices  to 
state  the  values  delivered,  less  cost  of  transportation.)  This  require- 
ment, being  a  matter  of  indifference  to  shippers,  is  complied  with.    If 


70  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

the  merchandise  had  to  pay  an  ad  valorem  duty  they  would  put  the 
invoice  value  as  low  as  possible  in  accordance  with  the  actual  export 
costs. 

(2)  Liabilities  of  the  islands  to  the  United  States. — The  sugar  crop 
is  an  enormously  expensive  one  to  raise.  It  requires  fifteen  to  sixteen 
months  to  mature,  and  employs  hundreds  of  laborers  to  each  planta- 
tion and  sugar  mill.  The  planter  must,  therefore,  borrow  large  amounts 
of  money  to  mature  it,  giving  a  lien  upon  the  crop  .as  a  security  to  his 
factor.  The  factor  in  turn  borrows  the  necessary  amounts  from  the 
San  Francisco  banks.  On  an  average  this  lien  amounts  to  nearly  or 
quite  half  the  market  value  of  the  crop.  I  have  estimated  it  for  safety 
at  about  one-third  that  value,  or  $3,000,000. 

(3)  Many  plantations  have  also  mortgaged  debts  held  in  San  Fran- 
cisco. The  amount  of  these  is  not  fully  known ;  but  I  am  sure  of  at 
least  $2,500,000,  and  believe  the  real  amount  to  be  much  more  than 
that. 

(4)  The  value  of  the  plantation  properties  held  by  Americans  was 
assessed  by  the  Hawaiian  Government  in  1883  at  $10,180,164.  This 
was  assumed  to  be  about  two-thirds  the  real  value.  This  value  has 
been  created  almost  wholly  since  1876  out  of  the  ground,  buildings,  and 
machinery.* 

(5)  Other  productive  properties  held  by  Americans  are  the  inter- 
island  mercantile  marine,  two  railroads  and  equipment,  a  marine  rail- 
way, warehouses,  etc.,  all  of  them  the  creation  of  the  treaty.  The  esti- 
mate of  $1,500,000  is  a  very  low  one.  The  value  of  these  properties  far 
exceeds  the  sum  of  their  mortgages  and  capital  stock  indebtedness. 
No  man  is  rated  in  this  argument  as  an  American  citizen  unless  he  has 
the  right  to  vote  in  the  United  States  tcithout  naturalization  and  has  the 
right  to  the  protection  of  our  Government  under  public  law. 

The  most  striking  feature  of  this  exhibit  is  the  very  large  profit  to 
the  United  States — so  large  that  it  seems  at  first  unaccountable;  but 
the  "great  discrepancy  between  the  exports  and  imports  will  vanish 
when  we  take  full  account  of  the  fact  that  the  whole  carrying  trade  and 
mercantile  business  is  ours  in  both  directions.  All  economists  regard 
transportation  and  mercantile  functions  in  the  passage  of  commodities 
from  the  purchaser  to  the  consumer  as  a  part  of  the  production.  To 
the  value  of  our  produce  at  San  Francisco  must  be  added  all  further 
accessions  of  value  until  it  finally  leaves  our  hands  and  passes  into 
those  of  the  Hawaiian.  Add,  then,  to  the  invoice  value  of  our  exports 
the  cost  of  transportation,  commission,  and  insurance  until  we  have  put 
the  produce  into  the  Hawaiian's  hands,  and  the  $36,000,000  becomes 
not  far  from  $44,000,000.  It  costs  the  Hawaiian  not  far  from  one- sixth 
of  the  value  of  his  crop  to  get  it  to  San  Francisco.  Deduct  that  from 
$54,000,000  and  we  have  $45,000,000.  Thus  if  we  reckon  Hawaiian 
values  against  Hawaiian  values  the  exchange  becomes  less  unequal,  as 
it  should,  for  the  real  exchange  takes  place  in  Hawaii.    It  is  there  that 

*  This  is  reckoned  as  profit  for  the  following  reasons :  Among  the  commodities 
whieh  we  send  to  the  islands,  and  also  among  those  which  we  buy  in  Europe  and 
send  there  on  Hawaiian  account,  are  machinery,  building  materials,  etc.  These  are 
used  in  construction.  The  labor  which  is  employed,  the  improvements  which  come 
from  cultivation,  and  the  natural  appreciation  of  land  make  up  together  the  final 
value  of  the  property.  The  cash  outlay  directly  applied  to  the  creation  of  this  value 
is,  of  course,  small  in  comparison  with  that  value.  Whatever  cash  value  has  been  so 
applied  is  already  accounted  for  and  included  in  the  table  showing  values  delivered 
to  Hawaii.  The  value  of  the  properties  thereby  acquired  should  of  course  appear 
on  the  other  side  of  the  account,  and  also  in  the  list  of  profits,  for  such  it  clearly  is. 
It  pertains,  however,  to  the  capital-stock  account  and  not  to  simple  mercantile  profit. 
The  figures  here  given  largely  understate  the  value  of  these  jjroperties. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  4  71 

our  own  products  finally  leave  our  hands,  and  it  is  there  that  Hawaiian 
values  first  come  into  our  hands. 

The  Committee  on  Ways  and  Means,  seeing'  that  our  exports  in  nine 
years  have  shown  on  invoice  value  of  $23,000,000,  while  our  imports 
show  $54,000,000,  have  hastily  concluded  that  the  apparent  balance  of 
trade  against  us  of  $31,000,000  had  to  be  liquidated  in  coin  aud  exchange. 
In  fact,  only  about  $13,000,000  is  liquidated  in  that  way,  and  the 
$18,000,000  remaining  is  paid  over  to  our  own  people  and  may  be  reck- 
oned as  a  gross  profit  already  realized.  Over  $9,000,000  has  gone  to 
American  shipping,  nearly  $3,000,000  to  San  Francisco  commission 
houses,  nearly  a  million  to  the  banks,  over  $2,000,000  for  interest  on 
loans  and  advances,  and  over  $3,000,000  as  dividends  and  miscellane- 
ous profits. 

In  addition  to  this  we  hold  $6,500,000  of  Hawaiian  debts  which 
they  must  liquidate  out  of  future  shipments,  and  have  created 
$15,000,000  worth  of  magnificent  productive  properties  in  the  islands 
out  of  the  soil  by  the  combined  action  of  capital  and  labor.  It  would 
be  difficult  to  find  in  all  the  annals  of  trade  and  production  a  result 
more  gratifying. 

The  Committee  on  Ways  and  Means  have  taken  it  for  granted  that 
the  loss  of  revenue  to  the  Treasury  is  equal  to  the  computed  remission 
of  duty.    This  is  a  grave  error. 

First.  The  tariff  on  sugar  for  more  than  twenty  years  has  been  so 
graduated  as  to  become  more  and  more  forbidding,  and,  finally,  pro- 
hibitory as  the  grade  and  quality  of  raw  sugar  increases.  This  excludes 
all  eatable  raw  sugar  from  the  grocery  trade  and  makes  it  more  profit- 
able to  the  refiner  to  buy  the  lowest  grades  he  can  get.  But  it  raw 
sugar  is  duty  free,  it  is  the  interest  of  the  refiner  to  buy  the  highest 
grades  and  the  interest  of  the  planter  to  make  them.  Accordingly  the 
Hawaiian  planter  makes  the  highest  grades,  not  exceeding  No.  20, 
above  which  grade  he  must  pay  duty. 

But  without  the  treaty  he  would  do  as  the  Cuban  does,  i.  e.,  make 
them  of  as  low  grade  as  possible,  so  as  to  pay  the  minimum  duty.  The 
Committee  on  VVays  and  Means  has  computed  the  remitted  duties  on 
Hawaiian  sugar  as  actually  imported  in  the  highest  grades  at  $3.18 
per  cwt.  prior  to  June  30,  1883,  and  $2.40  per  cwt.  subsequently  5  but 
Hawaiian  sugars,  which  would  have  been  imported  had  the  treaty  never 
existed,  would  have  been  in  lower  grades  and  paying  presumably  the 
same  average  duty  as  all  imported  sugars.  This  was,  prior  to  1883, 
about  $3.41  per  cwt.  and  about  $1.96  subsequently.  Of  course  we  can 
not  reckon  a  duty  we  never  could  have  collected,  as  a  loss  of  revenue. 

Instead,  therefore,  of  losing  on  sugar  $23,000,000  in  nine  years  the 
loss  has  not  been  ovef  $18,000,000. 

Second.  But  this  loss  must  have  had  very  large  compensations  to  the 
Treasury.  Fully  five-sixths  of  the  Hawaiian  crop  has  been  bought  and 
paid  for  by  exports,  transportation  services,  and  otherwise,  for  which 
the  treaty  has  created  a  demand,  and  for  which  no  demand  would  have 
existed  elsewhere  without  the  treaty.  Our  exports  to  third  countries 
could  not  possibly  have  been  diminished  by  it.  Now,  the  free  entry  of 
Hawaiian  sugar  has  no  doubt  caused  us  to  purchase  from  third  coun- 
tries less  dutiable  sugar.  Obviously  the  exported  values  withheld  from 
the  purchase  of  dutiable  sugar  remain  available  for  other  purchases. 
The  full  value  of  our  exports  must  come  back  to  us  somehow,  and  if  we 
get  less  dutiable  sugar  we  must  get  just  sq  much  more  of  something 
else.  The  only  question  is  whether  this  "  more  of  something  else"  pays 
as  much  duty  as  the  su^ar  would  have  paid.  Probably  it  does  no't; 
and  so  far  there  is*  a  loss,  because  some  of  these  residual  values  come 


72  •  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

back  in  the  shape  of  duty-free  articles  and  because  the  duty  on  sugar 
is  higher  (computed  ad  valorem)  than  the  average  of  our  total  imports. 
A  part  of  the  California  bullion  and  wheat  and  wine  sent  to  England 
pays  for  Hawaiian  sugar,  which  is  duty  free.  About  one  sixth  of  the 
Hawaiian  crop  is  thus  paid  for,  and  to  that  proportion  there  is  a  total 
loss  of  revenue.  While  it  is  impossible  to  compute  what  the  real  loss 
is,  I  think  it  safe  to  say  that  it  probably  does  not  exceed  one-third,  and 
certainly  does  not  amount  to  one-half  of  the  $18,000,000  computed  as 
lost  on  sugar.  In  any  event  the  duty  never  leaves  the  country.  It  is 
paid  over  by  the  refinery  to  the  consignee  of  the  Hawaiian,  and  is  paid 
out  again,  with  much  more  besides,  to  American  shipping,  banks,  mer- 
chants, and  stockholders.  The  gross  profit  of  $36,000,000  throws  into 
insignificance  the  possible  loss  of  $6,000,000  or  $8,000,000  of  revenue. 

It  has  been  said  repeatedly  that  all  the  profits  of  this  magnificent 
trade  and  industry  go  to  the  benefit  of  Olaus  Spreckels  and  a  small 
clique  of  speculators.  What  nonsense!  If  it  did,  he  would  richly 
deserve  it,  and  a  vote  of  thanks  by  Congress  besides. 

It  will  be  going  to  the  root  of^the  matter  at  once  to  say  that  the 
opposition  to  the  treaty  has  arisen  from  the  systematic  and  in  some 
measure  successful  attempts  to  saturate  the  public  press  and  Congress 
with  utterly  false  ideas  about  Claus  Spreckels  and  his  relation  to  the 
islands,  to  create  a  bitter  personal  prejudice  against  him,  and  by  impli- 
cation to  illogically  and  unjustly  extend  that  prejudice  to  the  commerce 
and  industries  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands.  Claus  Spreckels  certainly  has 
for  many  years  monopolized  the  manufacture  and  sale  of  refined  sugars 
on  the  Pacific  coast,  and  ruled  that  market  to  the  extent  of  his  powers 
with  a  rod  of  iron.  But  the  first  grand  mistake  consists  in  supposing 
that  the  Hawaiian  treaty  has  or  could  have  given  any  assistance  to 
the  establishment  of  his  monopoly  or  to  its  maintenance  or  confer  upon 
it  any  benefit  whatever.  The  second  mistake  consists  in  wholly  false 
impressions  about  the  wholly  distinct  personal  relations  of  Mr.  Spreckels 
to  the  industry  and  commerce  of  raw  sugar.  In  these  he  is  only  one 
of  many  men,  and  though  individually  his  relations  are  large,  yet  rel- 
atively to  the  whole  they  are  small,  and  he  can  no  more  control  the 
whole  than  the  Cunard  Company  can  control  our  commerce  with 
England.  As  a  monopolist  of  refined  sugar  he  can  not  escape  the  odium 
which  always  attaches  to  a  monopoly.  As  a  planter  and  stockholder,  as 
a  director  of  an  American  steamship  company,  and  a  banker,  his  whole 
career  and  course  of  conduct  will  compare  favorably  with  that  of  any 
great  and  successful  merchant  in  America. 

The  monopoly  of  refined  sugar  in  San  Francisco  is,  like  all  other 
monopolies,  a  perfectly  legitimate  object  of  attack;  and  if  it  can  be 
broken  up  in  any  way  such  an  end  is  devoutly  to  be  wished. 

But  Claus  Spreckels's  relations  to  the  island  trade  and  industry  are 
a  totally  different  matter,  and  when  rightly  understood  will  present 
themselves  to  the  unprejudiced  mind  in  a  totally  different  aspect.  In 
this  field  his  operations  are  perfectly  legitimate.  It  is  my  jmrpose  to 
point  out  that  any  attempt  to  terminate  the  treaty  is  simply  an  attempt 
to  strengthen  and  fortify  his  monopoly  and  to  break  down  commenda- 
ble enterprises  which  should  be  built  up  and  sustained,  and  in  which 
Claus  Spreckels  is  merely  one  of  many  participants.  Whatever  dam- 
age might  be  inflicted  upon  him  in  respect  to  his  island  interest  would 
be  more  than  compensated  to  him  out  of  enlarged  profits  of  his  monop- 
oly as  a  refiner,  while  the  blow  would  fall  with  full  and  disastrous 
effect  upon  thousands  of  innocent  third  parties,  both  in  Hawaii  and 
California,  whose  interests  should  be  dear  to  Congress  and  to  the  Ameri- 
can people. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  73 

The  Hawaiian  treaty  lias  become  an  object  of  attack  by  the  sugar- 
refining  interest  of  the  Eastern  States  and  of  the  sugar-planting  inter- 
ests of  Louisiana.  The  motives  which  have  led  to  this  attack  are  as 
follows: 

During  the  last  few  years  the  sales  of  sugar  imported  from  Hawaii, 
Manila,  and  Central  America,  and  refined  in  San  Francisco,  have 
been  extending  gradually  into  the  markets  of  the  Mississippi  Valley, 
advancing  further  eastward  every  year,  thereby  displacing  the  sales  of 
eastern  sugars  in  the  States  and  Territories  west  of  the  Mississippi 
Eiver.  The  Eastern  refiners  and  the  Louisiana  planters  believe  that 
the  possibility  of  this  arises  from  the  free  entry  of  Hawaiian  sugars, 
thus  enabling  (as  they  suppose)  the  San  Francisco  refiners  to  purchase 
raw  sugar  much  more  cheaply  than  they  otherwise  could.  Thus  they 
believe  that  the  treaty  discriminates  severely  against  their  interests, 
and  is  unjust  to  them. 

This  position  is  denied  by  the  San  Francisco  refiners  and  importers 
of  sugar  and  by  the  owners  of  Hawaiian  sugar  properties  in  California. 
They  contend  that  the  San  Francisco  refineries  get  their  raw  sugar  no 
cheaper  by  reason  of  the  treaty,  but  are  obliged  to  pay  the  same  price 
for  it  as  for  equivalent  dutiable  sugar  from  Asia;  that  the  ability  of 
the  Pacific  refiners  to  compete  successfully  with  the  Atlantic  refiners 
is  founded  upon  conditions  wholly  independent  of  the  treaty,  viz :  First, 
because  unlimited  amounts  of  Asiatic  sugar  can  be  laid  down  in  San 
Francisco  cheaper  than  raw  sugars  can  be  laid  down  in  New  York; 
second,  because  through  eastward  freights  over  the  Pacific  railways 
are  scantier  than  westward  through  freights,  and  the  railroads  natur- 
ally prefer  to  carry  sugar  at  low  rates  to  hauling  empty  cars.  They 
contend  that  this  competition  is  a  natural  one;  that  it  is  not  helped 
by  the  treaty  and  will  not  be  hindered  by  its  abrogation;  that  it  is  des- 
tined to  grow,  and  would  grow  if  the  Hawaiian  Islands  did  not  exist. 

Since  it  is  also  claimed  by  the  opponents  of  the  treaty  that  it  fosters 
and  sustains  a  monopoly  of  refined  sugars,  and  that  the  benefits  of  the 
treaty  accrue  only  to  that  monopoly,  and  since  the  whole  complaint  is 
founded  in  a  gross  misunderstanding  of  the  nature  and  conditions  of 
the  sugar  business  on  the  Pacific  coast,  it  seems  proper  to  discuss  the 
facts  at  some  length.  From  these  it  will  appear  that  these  charges,  as 
well  as  others,  are  utterly  without  foundation. 

It  is  a  self-evident  proposition  that  a  cargo  of  Manila  sugar  delivered 
in  New  York  must  sell  at  a  price  just  equal  to  that  of  so  much  Cuban 
sugar  of  equal  grade.  It  is  evident,  also,  that  the  price  of  that  cargo  at 
Manila  "free  on  board"  must  be  less  than  the  New  York  price  by  an 
amount  equal  to  the  cost  of  transportation.  It  is  further  evident  that 
the  price  of  a  similar  cargo  of  Manila  sugar  delivered  in  San  Francisco 
must  exceed  the  Manila  price  by  an  amount  equal  to  the  total  cost  of 
transportation.  It  is,  therefore,  an  easy  matter  to  compute  whether 
Manila  sugar  in  San  Francisco  ought  to  be  cheaper  than  Cuban  or 
Manila  sugar  in  New  York. 

The  rate  of  freight  from  Manila  or  Hongkong  to  San  Francisco  on 
sugar  is  very  low.  A  vessel  can  be  chartered  to  go  from  San  Francisco 
to  Manila  in  ballast  and  bring  back  sugar  at  $5  or  $6  per  ton,  but  dur- 
ing the  last  eight  years  Asiatic  sugar  has  largely  come  as  mere  ballast. 
Freights  from  Manila  to  New  York  range  from  $9  to  $12  per  ton. 
Interest,  insurance,  and  shrinkage  being  proportional  to  the  time  of 
the  voyage  are  evidently  in  favor  of  San  Francisco  as  compared  with 
New  York.  In  brief,  the  San  Francisco  price  of  raw  sugar  is  lower 
than  the  New  York  price  by  three-eighths  to  five-eighths  of  a  cent  per 
pound. 


74  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

Hawaiian  sugars  are  shipped  by  the  agents  or  factors  of  the  planters  j 
in  Honolulu  to  commission  merchants  and  importers  in  San  Francisco,  ] 
and  sold  by  the  latter  to  the  refinery.  The  terms  of  purchase  after  the. 
treaty  took  effect  were  known  as  the  "Manila  basis.'?  The  refinery  j 
agreed  in  substance  to  take  the  whole  of  each  planter's  crop  at  a  price  i 
which  should  be  equal  to  that  of  an  equivalent  quantity  and  grade  of  j 
Manila  sugar  delivered,  duty  paid,  in  San  Francisco.  The  price  of  a  j 
certain  grade  of  sugar  at  Manila  known  as  "extra  superior,"  polarizing  ■] 
91,  and  in  color  Eo.  10  Dutch  standard,  was  telegraphed  daily  to  Sani 
Francisco.  To  this  price  was  added  $6  per  ton  for  freight,  2.  per  cent! 
insurance,  the  cost  of  sixty  days'  exchange,  and  a  specific  allowance! 
for  the  remitted  duty.  This  constituted  the  Manila  basis  for  the  day 
of  quotation. 

Just  here  is  one  point  of  dispute  between  the  sugar  men  of  New  York  \ 
and  those  of  San  Francisco  and  Honolulu.    The  New  Yorkers  refuse  j 
to  believe  that  Spreckels  pays  the  full  normal  price  and  the  entire  duty  J 
to  the  Hawaiians.     If  anybody  is  particularly  interested  in  knowing 
whether  he  does  not  it  must  be  the  Hawaiian  planter  and  his  Honolulu 
factor,  for  an  eighth  of  a  cent  per  pound  means  to  them  a  profit  or  loss  1 
of  hundreds  of  thousands  of  dollars.    Time  and  again  they  have  exam- 
ined this  question  and  put  it  to  the  most  crucial  tests,  and  the  verdict 
is  universal  that  Spreckels  has  dealt  with  them  fairly  and  squarely,  and 
this  is  the  testimony  alike  of  friends  and  enemies  whose  bread  and 
butter  depends  on  knowing  the  truth  and  abiding  by  it.    Who  ought 
to  know  best  about  it,  they  or  people  who  live  3,500  miles  away0? 

A  little  over  a  year  ago  Spreckels  withdrew  the  tender  of  the  Manila  I 
basis  and  would  only  offer  the  Cuban.  The  result  was,  a  new  refinery 
competing  with  him.  Spreckels  has  always  contended  that  the  Manila 
basis  was  higher  than  it  ought  to  be;  that  he  was  overpaying  the 
planters  and  giving  them  more  than  Manila  and  China  sugar  would 
have  cost  him.  A  second  refinery,  C.  Adolf  Low  &  Co.,  which  was 
pooled  with  Spreckels  up  to  1885,  also  seemed  to  think  so,  for,  while 
having  the  option  of  taking  as  much  Hawaiian  sugar  as  they  wanted, 
they  declined  taking  any  on  the  ground  that  Manila  and  Central  Amer- 
ican sugars  were  cheaper.  My  opinion  is  that  Spreckels  was  in  a  great 
measure  right.*    To  show  this  would  require  a  detailed  examination, 

*  For  the  following  reasons:  Spreckels  allows  -$■  cent  per  pound  for  the  value  of 
every  degree  of  polariscope.  The  Manila  standard  polarizes  91°.  The  average 
polarization  of  the  whole  Hawaiian  crop  is  about  94°,  and  the  allowance,  therefore, 
is,  on  the  average,  f  cent  above  the  Manila  basis.  Suppose,  now,  the  price  of 
Hawaiian  sugar  delivered  is  5  cents  per  pound  for  91° ;  for  94°  it  is  5f  cents.  But  a 
94°  sugar  contains  -93r  more  of  pure  sugar  than  a  91°  sugar,  which  at  5  cents  is  \\ 
cent,  or  about  \  cent.  In  other  words,  Spreckels  pays  f  cent  for  what  is  worth  to 
him  only  £  cent.  The  lower  cost  of  refining  a  94°  sugar  than  a  91°  is  fully  covered 
by  the  -£5  cent  allowance  for  every  color  above  No.  10,  Dutch  standard.  This  differ- 
ence,  computed  on  the  last  Hawaiian  crop,  amounts  to  over  $350,000.  If  it  be  asked 
how  Spreckels  came  to  concede  too  much  for  quality  the  answer  is  that  when  it  was 
first  agreed  upon,  in  1876,  the  price  of  raw  sugar  was  very  high,  and  at  that  time  the 
allowance  was  not  very  excessive.  The  New  York  allowance  was  -fa  cent  per  degree 
of  polarization.  Moreover,  it  was  at  that  time  anticipated  that  the  run  of  the 
Hawaiian  crop  would  not  be  above  91°  or  92°.  Once  fixed,  the  allowance  became  a 
custom,  and  custom  is  a  powerful  conservative  force  sometimes  in  matters  of  price. 

Again,  the  great  bulk  of  the  Hawaiian  crop  comes  to  San  Francisco  in  December 
to  March,  inclusive,  and  Spreckels  must  pay  for  it  on  delivery.  Hence  he  must  carry 
an  enormous  surplus  stock,  worth  $3,000,000  to  $4,000,000,  during  a  great  part  of  the 
year,  and  the  interest  on  that  is  no  trifle.  If  he  could  buy  Asiatic  sugars  as  he  wanted 
them,  or  take  advantage  of  the  favorable  stages  of  the  market,  he  would  have  an 
advantage  he  does  nv>t  now  possess.  All  things  considered  I  have  no  ddubt  that  the 
practical  working  of  the  Manila  basis  was  to  make  Spreckels  pay  more  for  Hawaiian 
sugar  than  Manila  sugar  would  have  cost  him. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  75 

which  no  one  but  a  sugar  expert  would  easily  understand.  At  the 
same  time  it  seems  to  me  that  the  true  price,  while  lower  thau  the 
Manila  basis,  ought,  during  the  extremely  low  prices  of  sugar  last  year, 
to  have  been  a  little  better  than  the  Cuban  basis.  Be  this  as  it  may, 
the  vital  fact  remains  in  any  event  that  the  price  on  either  basis  would 
be  considerably  lower  in  San  Francisco  than  in  New  York.  It  also  re- 
mains true  that  the  attempt  of  Spreckels  to  better  himself  in  respect  to  \ 
the  terms  on  which  he  purchases  Hawaiian  sugar  has  cost  him  very 
dear  in  the  organization  of  an  opposition  refinery,  and  the  end  is  not 
yet.    And  this  brings  to  us  the  next  link  in  the  chain. 

Mr.  Spreckels  was  obliged  to  buy  the  whole  Hawaiian  crop  and  pay 
the  full  market  price  for  it,  including  the  entire  duty,  or  else  subject 
himself  to  competition.  To  understand  this  it  is  necessary  to  look  at 
the  nature  of  this  monopoly.  A  monopoly  means  the  want  of  effective 
and  full  competition.  What  are  the  possible  sources  of  competition  in 
the  sale  of  refined  sugars  in  California?  There  can  be  none  from 
foreign  refined  sugars,  because  the  duty  upon  them  is  prohibitory. 
There  can  be  no  effective  competition  from  Eastern  refined  sugars, 
because  their  price  is  established  on  the  Atlantic  seaboard,  where 
sugar  is  dearer  and  the  railway  transportation  is  prohibitory.  Why  is 
there  no  local  competition"?  Because  there  is  not  work  enough  for  two 
refineries.  A  single  refinery  half  as  large  as  Havemeyer  &  Elder's  can 
saturate  with  sugar  the  whole  country  west  of  Denver.  If,  then,  there 
are  two  refineries,  as  has  actually  been  the  case,  they  must  either  pool 
and  divide  the  market,  which  they  did,  or  else  begin  a  war  of  extermi- 
nation, which  they  are  hoav  doing.  The  causes  which  have  rendered  a 
monopoly  easily  possible  are,  therefore,  a  prohibitory  tariff  on  refined 
sugar,  the  isolation  of  California  from  other  States  where  sugar  is 
refined,  its  comparatively  small  population,  and  the  fact  that  one  ordi- 
nary refinery  is  ample  for  all  needs.  Under  such  circumstances  a  monop- 
oly, or  else  a  pool,  which  amounts  to  the  same  thing,  is  inevitable. 
Nothing  on  earth  can  stop  it  but  time  and  the  changes  of  conditions, 
which  time  will  ultimately  bring. 

The  Hawaiian  treaty  has  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  establishment 
of  this  monopoly;  the  monopoly  was  fixed  before  the  treaty,  and  so  far 
from  being  helped  by  it,  has  been  embarrassed  and  weakened  by  it,  and 
may  be  yet  more  seriously  embarrassed  by  its  continuance,  for  the 
treaty  rendered  possible  two  new  sources  of  competition.  The  nature 
of  this  competition  is  very  instructive  and  will  repay  careful  examina- 
tion. 

The  duty  upon  raw  sugars  not  only  increases  with  their  purity  and 
lightness  of  color,  but  increases  in  a  faster  ratio  than  the  value  of  the 
sugar  itself.  The  result  in  New  York  is  that  it  is  cheaper  and  more 
profitable  for  the  refineries  to  purchase  the  impurest  sugars  they  can 
get,  and  that  raw  sugars  of  fine  high  quality  are,  in  consequence  of 
this  disportionate  duty,  dearer  than  refined  sugars.  In  short,  the 
duty  on  raw  sugars  which  are  fit  to  eat  is,  to  all  intents  and  purposes, 
prohibitory.  This  is  the  reason  why  raw  sugar  has  entirely  disap- 
peared from  our  grocery  stores.  In  England,  the  greatest  sugar-eat- 
ing country  in  the  world,  where  sugar  is  duty  free,  a  large  proportion 
of  the  sugar  consumed  does  not  go  through  the  refinery  at  all,  but  is 
sold  to  customers  just  as  it  comes  from  the  plantations.  If  the  tariff 
on  sugar  were  exactly  proportional  to  its  purity  vast  quantities  of  raw 
sugar  would  be  sold  in  the  stores  in  the  place  of  just  so  much  refined 
sugar.  So  it  would  be  in  the  Eastern  States  if  raw  sugars  up  to  20 
Dutch  standard  were  duty  free.    It  is  easy  to  see  that  in  California 


76  Hawaiian  Islands. 

tlie  free  entry  of  Hawaiian  sugar  up  to  No.  20  put  the  refinery  into  the 
following  difficulty :  It  must  not  permit  the  sugars  to  go  upon  the  open 
market.  How  was  it  to  prevent  it?  By  making  it  more  profitable  to 
the  planter  to  sell  to  the  refinery  than  the  grocery  store.  How  was  ■ 
to  do  that?  First,  by  paying  a  maximum  price  for  the  raws,  and,', 
second,  by  keeping  down  the  price  of  refined  sugar  to  points  whichj 
should  not  exceed  the  price  of  raws  by  more  than  a  certain  smallj 
percentage.  The  maximum  price  of  the  raws  was  the  Manila  basis,! 
and  if  the  price  of  the  refined  exceeded  the  Manila  basis  by  more  than] 
a  certain  small  percentage  the  Hawaiian  sugar  would  be  tempted] 
into  the  grocery  trade  direct. 

Congress  has  been  saturated  with  the  idea  that  Spreckels  has  bought^ 
Hawaiian  sugar  at  his  own  price,  appropriating  the  remitted  duty  toj 
himself  and  at  the  same  time  increasing  the  price  of  refined  sugar,  j 
The  idea  is  absurd  and  impossible.  The  truth  is  just  the  reverse.  The- 
command  of  prices  for  raw  sugar  up  to  the  Maniia  basis  rests  with  thei 
planter,  and  Spreckels  must  yield  or  provoke  a  competition  in  which] 
the  planter  is  sure  to  win.  Above  the  Manila  basis  the  planter  can  ni 
go  without  loss  to  himself.  Spreckels,  moreover,  has  been  obliged  to] 
sell  refined  sugar  at  lower  prices  than  he  could  command  if  the  Hawaiian] 
crop  were  out  of  the  way.  To  restore  the  duty  would  crush  the] 
planter,  leaving  him  to  Spreckels'  dictation  and  give  him  ( Spreckels)] 
the  power  of  exacting  a  larger  price  for  his  output  without  fear  ofl 
any  competition  from  the  planter.  The  effect  of  the  treaty  upon  thei 
monopoly  has  been  to  hold  up  the  price  of  raw  sugar  to  the  full  normal] 
price  and  to  bring  the  price  of  refined  nearer  to  that  of  raws  than  it 
would  otherwise  have  been. 

(2)  The    second    source  of   competition    is   a    new    refinery.     Mr  J 
Spreckels  himself  controls,  as  a  majority  stockholder,  only  one  planta-] 
tion  on  the  islands.     He  has  a  minority  interest  in  each  of  four  others] 
(unless  he  has  acquired  more  since  1884).     He  and  his  friends  together - 
can  not  control  more  than  a  fourth  part  of  the  Hawaiian  crop  except  by  j 
buying  it  on  terms  satisfactory  to  the  planters.     Suppose  the  others 
planters  to  become  dissatisfied  with  the  terms  of  purchase  he  may] 
offer,  what  is  to  prevent  them  from  joining  hands  and  starting  a  new 
refinery  in  San  Francisco  to  work  their  own  sugars?    Nothing,  except 
the  want  of  an. inducement.    The  question  of  capital  offers  no  difficulty 
if  there  is  anything  to  be  gained.     What  would  constitute  an  induce- 
ment?   Not  the  prospect  of  profit  on  the  sale  of  refined  sugars  unless 
they  are  prepared  to  crush  Spreckels  out  completely  and  set  up  a  new 
monopoly  in  place  of  his.    But  a  genuine  inducement  would  be  estab- 
lished  at  once  if  Spreckels  were  to  insist  upon  paying  too  low  a  price  . 
for  their  raw  sugar.     Suppose  the  cost  of  Asiatic  sugar,  duty  paid,  in 
San  Francisco  is  5  cents  and  Spreckels  will  only  pay  the  Hawaiians  4J 
cents.     Suppose  two-thirds  of  the  planters  refuse  and  start  a  new  j 
refinery.    A  war  of  rates  instantly  follows.     How  low  can  Spreckles 
afford  to  sell  refined  sugar?    As  low  as  the  price  of  Asiatic  sugar  plus] 
the  cost  of  refining.    How  low  could  the  planters  afford  to  sell  sugar?] 
As  low  as  the  cost  of  raising  raw  sugar,  shipping  it  to  San  Francisco,] 
and  refining  it.     When  Spreckels  has  touched  the  bottom  price  the] 
planter  is  still  making  the  full  profit  on  his  raw  sugar,  but  nothing  on 
his  refined,  and  Spreckels  is  making  no  profit  out  of  his  refinery. 

This  is  precisely  what  has  happened.     When  Spreckels  dropped  from 
the  Manila  to  the  Cuban  basis  some  of  the  California  stockholders  and] 
some  of  the  keen  Yankees  in  the  island  thought  he  was  going  too  low.  3 
They  clubbed  together,  and,  with  the  aid  of  San  Francisco  capitalists! 
who  hold  Hawaiian  plantation  stocks,  they  started  a  new  refinery.    They  j 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  77 

did  not  expect  to  make  much  profit  out  of  refined  sugar,  but  they  do 
expect  to  get  the  fullest  price  of  their  raws.  The  ultimate  result  of 
this  contest  will  depend  upon  whether  Spreekels  is  right  in  his  asser- 
tion that  the  Cuban  basis  is  the  normal  price  of  sugar. 

GENERAL  RESULTS   OF  THE    TREATY. 

The  treaty  has  developed  a  trade  with  the  islands  which,  relatively 
to  the  population,  is  enormous,  and  of  which  the  profits  have  been  and 
still  are  exceedingly  large.  The  profits  have  not,  as  generally  sup- 
posed, accrued  to  the  great  sugar  monopoly,  but  chiefly  to  the  Ameri- 
can snipping  which  was  evoked  by  the  treaty,  to  the  mercantile  houses 
which  have  handled  the  merchandise,  and  to  the  investors  who  have 
advanced  the  capital  to  open  and  develop  the  productive  properties. 
These  profits  have  been  nearly  double  the  remitted  duties  and  four  or 
five  times  as  great  as  the  probable  loss  of  revenue. 

So  far  has  the  treaty  been  from  benefiting  a  monopoly  of  refined 
sugars  in  California  that  it  has  restricted  its  powers  and  embarrassed 
it,  and  may  even  yet  destroy  it.  The  refinery  is  powerless  to  obtain 
the  benefit  of  the  remitted  duties  in  any  degree  whatever.  It  must 
pay  them  in- full  to  the  consignee  of  the  planter,  who,  in  turn,  pays 
them,  and  more  besides,  over  to  our  shipping,  banks,  mercantile  houses, 
and  investors.    The  remitted  duties  never  leave  the  country. 

The  treaty  has  brought  up  a  mercantile  marine  of  our  own,  employ- 
ing American-built  steamers  and  sailing  vessels,  and  the  entire  com- 
merce, amounting  to  $12,000,000  annually,  is  in  our  hands.  It  is  the 
only  foreign  commerce  to-day  which  we  can  call  our  own.  Before  the 
treaty  the  sugar  and  rice  imported  at  San  Francisco  came  chiefly  from 
A  sia  and  the  East  India  Islands,  where  it  was  bought  with  London 
exchange  and  shipped  in  foreign  vessels. 

The  treaty  has  had  no  assignable  effect  whatever  upon  the  sales  of 
sugar  in  the  Mississippi  Valley.  These  sales  would  have  been  the 
same  and  would  continue  to  be  the  same  without  the  treaty  as  with  it. 
San  Francisco  is  the  natural  source  of  supply  of  sugar  for  almost  the 
whole  country  west  of  the  Kansas  Missouri  line,  and  of  a  considerable 
territory  still  further  east.  The  only  real  competition  of  San  Francisco 
in  that  region  is  the  Louisiana  planter,  who  has  no  more  right  to  com- 
plain of  it  than  of  the  competition  of  New  York.  This  competition  is 
independent  of  the  treaty.  Congress  can  not  prevent  it,  and  ought  not 
to  if  it  could,  for  it  is  a  normal  and  healthy  one. 

XL  Also  the  following  article  in  the  forum  for  march, 

1893,  ON  "HAWAII  AND   OUR  FUTURE   SEA-POWER,"  AND  WRITTEN 
BY  CAPT.  A.  T.  MAHAN. 

[The  Forum,  March,  1893.] 

HAWAII  AND  OUK  FUTUEE  SEA  POWEE.* 

The  suddenness  so  far,  at  least,  as  the  general  public  is  concerned, 
with  which  the  long-existing  troubles  in  Hawaii  have  come  to  a  head, 
and  the  character  of  the  advances  reported  to  be  addressed  to  the 
United  States  by  the  revolutionary  government,  formally  recognized 
as  de  facto  by  our  representative  on  the  spot,  add  another  to  the  many 
significant  instances  furnished  by  history  that,  as  men  in  the  midst 

*  Copyright,  1892,  by  the  Forum  Publishing  Company. 


78  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

of  life  are  in  death,  so  nations  in  the  midst  of  peace  find  themselves] 
confronted  with  unexpected  causes  of  dissension,  conflicts  of  interests, j 
whose  results  may  be,  on  the  one  hand,  war,  or,  on  the  other,  aban-1 
donment  of  clear  and  imperative  national  advantage  in  order  to  avoid 
an  issue  for  which  preparation  has  not  been  made.    By  no  premedi-j 
tated  contrivance  of  our  own,  by  the  cooperation  of  a  series  of  eventsj 
which,  however  dependent,  step  by  step,  upon  human  action,  were  not, 
intended  to  prepare  the  present  crisis,  the  United  States  finds  herself] 
compelled  to  answer  a  question,  to  make  a  decision,  not  unlike  and 
not  less  momentous  than  that  required  of  the  Roman  senate  when  the 
Mamertine  garrison  invited  it  to  occupy  Messina  and  so  to  abandon] 
the  hitherto  traditional  policy  which  had  confined  the  expansion  of 
Eome  to  the  Italian  peninsula.    For  let  it  not  be  overlooked  that, 
whether  we  wish  or  no,  we  must  answer  the  question,  we  must  make 
the  decision.    The  issue  can  not  be  dodged.    Absolute  inaction  in  such 
a  case  is  a  decision  as  truly  as  the  most  vehement  action.     We  can  now| 
advance,  but,  the  conditions  of  the  world  being  what  they  are,  if  we 
do  not  advance  we  recede;  for  there  is  involved  not  so  much  a  partic-j 
ular  action  as  a  question  of  principle  pregnant  of  great  consequences i 
in  one  direction  or  in  the  other. 

Occasion  of  serious  difficulty  should  not,  indeed,  here  arise.  Unlike  j 
the  historical  instance  just  cited,  the  two  nations  that  have  now  coma 
into  contact  are  so  alike  in  inherited  traditions,  habits  of  thought,  and 
views  of  right,  that  injury  to  the  one  need  not  be  anticipated  from  the; 
predominance  of  the  other  in  a  quarter  where  its  interests  also  pre- 
dominate. JDespite  the  heterogeneous  character  of  the  immigration 
which  the  past  few  years  have  been  pouring  into  our  country,  our  polit- 
ical traditions  and  racial  characteristics  still  continue  English — Mr. 
Douglas  Campbell  would  say  Dutch,  but  the  stock  is  the  same.  Though 
thus  somewhat  gorged  with  food  not  wholly  to  its  taste,  our  political 
digestion  has  so  far  contrived  to  master  the  incongruous  mass  of  mate- 
rials it  has  been  unable  to  reject;  and,  if  assimilation  has  been  at  times 
imperfect,  the  political  constitution  and  spirit  remain  English  in  essen- 
tial features.  Imbued  with  like  ideals  of  liberty,  of  law,  of  right,  cer- 
tainly not  less  progressive  than  our  kin  beyond  sea,  we  ar,e,  in  the 
safeguards  deliberately  placed  around  our  fundamental  law,  even  more 
conservative  than  they.  That  which  we  received  of  the  true  spirit  of 
freedom  we  have  kept — liberty  and  law — not  the  one  or  the  other,  but 
both.  In  that  spirit  we  have  not  only  occupied  our  original  inheritance, 
but  also,  step  by  step,  as  Rome  incorporated  the  other  nations  of  the 
peninsula,  we  have  added  to  it,  spreading  and  perpetuating  every- 
where the  same  foundation  principles  of  free  and  good  government 
which,  to  her  honor  be  it  said,  Great  Britain  also  has  throughout  her 
course  maintained.  And  now,  arrested  on  the  south  by  the  rights  of 
a  race  wholly  alien  to  us,  and  on  the  north  by  a  body  of  states  of  like 
traditions  to  our  own,  whose  freedom  to  choose  their  own  affiliations 
we  respect,  we  have  come  to  the  sea.  In  our  infancy  we  bordered  upon 
the  Atlantic  only:  our  youth  carried  our  boundary  to  the  Gulf  of  Mex- 
ico; to-day  maturity  sees  us  upon  the  Pacific.  Have  we  no  right  or 
no  call  to  progress  farther  in  any  direction?  Are  there  for  us  beyond 
the  sea  horizon  none  of  those  essential  interests,  of  those  evident  dan- 
gers, which  impose  a  policy  and  confer  rights? 

This  is  the  question  that  has  long  been  looming  upon  the  brow  of  a 
future  now  rapidly  passing  into  the  present.  Of  it  the  Hawaiian  inci- 
dent is  a  part,  intrinsically,  perhaps,  a  small  part,  but  in  its  relations 
to  the  whole  so  vital  that,  as  has  before  been  said,  a  wrong  decision 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS  79 

does  not  stand  by  itself,  but  involves,  not  only  in  principle  but  in  fact, 
recession  along  the  whole  line.  In  our  natural,  necessary,  irrepressible 
expansion,  we  are  here  come  into  contact  with  the  progress  of  another 
great  people,  the  law  of  whose  being  has  impressed  upon  it  a  principle 
of  growth  which  has  wrought  mightily  in  the  past  and  in  the  present 
is  visible  by  recurring  manifestations.  Of  this  working,  Gibraltar, 
Malta,  Cyprus,  Egypt,  Aden,  India,  in  geographical  succession  though 
not  in  strict  order  of  time,  show  a  completed  chain;  forged  link  by 
link,  by  open  force  or  politic  bargain,  but  always  resulting  from  the 
steady  pressure  of  a  national  instinct,  so  powerful  and  so  accurate  that 
statesmen  of  every  school,  willing  or  unwilling,  have  found  themselves 
carried  along  by  a  tendency  which  no  individuality  can  resist  or  greatly 
modify.  Unsubstantial  rumor  and  incautious  personal  utterance  have 
each  suggested  an  impatient  desire  in  Mr.  Gladstone  to  be  rid  of  the 
occupation  of  Egypt;  but  scarcely  has  his  long  exclusion  from  office 
ended  than  the  irony  of  events  signalizes  his  return  thereto  by  an 
increase  in  the  force  of  occupation.  It  may  further  be  profitably 
noted,  of  the  chain  just  cited,  that  the  two  extremities  were  first  pos- 
sessed—first India,  then  Gibraltar,  far  later  Malta,  Aden,  Cyprus, 
Egypt — and  that,  with  scarce  an  exception,  each  step  has  been  taken, 
despite  the  jealous  vexation  of  a  rival.  Spain  has  never  ceased  angrily 
to  bewail  Gibraltar.  "I  had  rather,"  said  the  first  Napoleon,  u  see  the 
English  on  the  heights  of  Montmartre  than  in  Malta."  The  feelings 
of  France  about  Egypt  are  matter  of  common  knowledge,  not  even 
dissembled;  and,  for  our  warning  be  it  added,  her  annoyance  is 
increased  by  the  bitter  sense  of  opportunity  rejected. 

It  is  needless  to  do  more  than  refer  to  that  other  chain  of  mari- 
time possessions,  Halifax,  Bermuda,  Santa  Lucia,  Jamaica,  which 
strengthen  the  British  hold  upon  the  Atlantic,  the  Caribbean,  and  the 
Isthmus  of  Panama.  In  the  Pacific  the  position  is  for  them  much  less 
satisfactory,  nowhere,  perhaps,  is  it  less  so,  and  from  obvious  natural 
causes.  The  commercial  development  of  the  eastern  Pacific  has  been 
far  later  and  is  still  less  complete  than  that  of  its  western  shores.  The 
latter  when  first  opened  to  European  adventure  were  already  the  seat 
of  ancient  civilizations,  in  China  and  Japan,  furnishing  abundance  of 
curious  and  luxurious  products  to  tempt  the  trader  by  good  hopes  of 
profit.  The  western  coast  of  America,  for  the  most  part  peopled  by 
savages,  offered  little  save  the  gold  and  silver  of  Mexico  and  Peru,  and 
these  were  jealously  monopolized  by  the  Spaniards,  not  a  commercial 
nation,  during  their  long  ascendency.  Being  so  very  far  from  Eng- 
land and  affording  so  little  material  for  trade,  Pacific  America  did  not 
draw  the  enterprise  of  a  country  the  chief  and  honorable  inducement 
of  whose  seamen  was  the  hope  of  gain,  in  pursuit  of  which  they  settled 
and  annexed  point  after  point  in  the  regions  where  they  penetrated 
and  upon  the  routes  leading  thither.  The  western  coasts  of  North 
America,  being  reached  only  by  the  long  and  perilous  voyage  around 
Cape  Horn,  or  by  a  more  toilsome  and  dangerous  passage  across  the 
continent,  remained  among  the  last  of  the  temperate  productive  sea- 
boards of  the  earth  to  be  possessed  by  white  men.  The  United  States 
were  already  a  nation,  in  fact,  as  well  as  in  form,  when  Vancouver  was 
exploring  Puget  Sound  and  passed  first  through  the  channel  separating 
the  mainland  of  British  America  from  the  island  that  now  bears  his 
name.  Thus  it  has  happened  that,  from  the  late  development  of  British 
Columbia  in  the  northeastern  Pacific  and  of  Australia  and  New  Zea- 
land in  the  southwestern,  Great  Britain  is  again  found  holding  the  two 
extremities  of  a  line  between  which  she  must  inevitably  desire  the 


80  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

intermediate  links;  nor  is  there  any  good  reason  why  she  should  not 
have  them,  except  the  superior,  more  urgent,  more  vital  necessities  of 
another  people — our  own.  Of  these  links  the  Hawaiian  group  pos- 
sesses unique  importance,  not  from  its  intrinsic  commercial  value,  hut 
from  its  favorable  position  for  maratime  and  military  control. 

The  military  or  strategic  value  of  a  naval  position  depends  upon 
its  situation,  upon  its  strength,  and  upon  its  resources.  Of  the  three,, 
the  first  is  of  most  consequence,  because  it  results  from  the  nature  of 
things;  whereas  the  two  latter,  when  deficient,  can  be  artificially  sup- 
plied, in  whole  or  in  part.  Fortifications  remedy  the  weakness  of  a 
position,  foresight  accumulates  beforehand  the  resources  which  nature 
does  not  yield  on  the  spot;  but  it  is  not  within  the  power  of  man  to 
change  the  geographical  situation  of  a  point  which  lies  outside  the 
limit  of  strategic  effect.  It  is  instructive,  and  yet  apparent  to  the 
most  superficial  reading,  to  notice  how  the  first  Napoleon,  in  comment- 
ing upon  a  region  likely  to  be  the  scene  of  war,  begins  by  considering 
the  most  conspicuous  natural  features,  and  then  enumerates  the  com- 
manding positions,  their  distances  from  each  other,  the  relative  direc- 
tions, or,  as  the  sea  phrase  is,  their  u bearings,"  and  the  particular 
facilities  each  offers  for  operations  of  war.  This  furnishes  the  ground  l 
plan,  the  skeleton,  detached  from  confusing  secondary  considerations, 
and  from  which  a  clear  estimate  of  the  decisive  points  can  be  made. 
The  number  of  such  points  varies  greatly,  according  to  the  character 
of  the  region.  In  a  mountainous,  broken  country  they  may  be  very 
many;  whereas  in  a  plain  devoid  of  natural  obstacles  there  may  be 
few  or  more  save  those  created  by  man.  If  few,  the  value  of  each  is 
necessarily  greater  than  if  many,  and  if  there  be  but  one  its  importance 
is  not  only  unique,  but  extreme,  measured  only  by  the  size  of  the  field 
over  which  its  unshared  influence  extends. 

The  sea,  until  it  approaches  the  land,  realizes  the  ideal  of  a  vast! 
plain,  unbroken  by  obstacles.  On  the  sea,  says  an  eminent  French 
tactician,  there  is  no  field  of  battle;  meaning  that  there  is  none  of  the 
natural  conditions  which,  determine,  and  often  fetter,  the  movements 
of  the  general.  But  upon  a  plain,  however  flat  and  monotonous,, 
causes,  possibly  slight,  determine  the  concentration  of  population  into 
town  and  villages,  and  the  necessary  communications  between  the 
centers  create  roads.  Where  the  latter  converge,  or  cross,  tenure 
confers  command,  depending  for  importance  upon  the  number  of 
routes  thus  meeting  and  upon  their  individual  value.  It  is  just  so  at 
sea.  While  in  itself  the  ocean  opposes  no  obstacle  to  a  vessel  taking 
any  one  of  the  numerous  routes  that  can  be  traced  upon  the  surface  of 
the  globe  between  two  points,  conditions  of  distance  or  convenience, 
of  traffic  or  of  wind,  do  prescribe  certain  usual  courses.  Where  these 
pass  near  an  ocean  position,  still  more  where  they  use  it,  it  has  an 
influence  over  them,  and  where  several  routes  cross  near  by  that 
influence  becomes  very  great — is  commanding. 

Let  us  now  apply  these  considerations  to  the  Hawaiian  group.  To 
anyone  viewing  a  map  that  shows  the  full  extent  of  the  Pacific  Ocean, 
with  its  shores  on  either  side,  two  circumstances  will  be  strikingly  and 
immediately  apparent.  He  will  see  at  a  glance  that  the  Sandwich. 
Islands  stand  by  themselves,  in  a  state  of  comparative  isolation,  amid 
a  vast  expanse  of  sea;  and,  again,  that  they  form  the  center  of  a  large 
circle  whose  radius  is  approximately,  and  very  closely,  the  distance 
from  Honolulu  to  San  Francisco.  The  circumference  of  this  circle,  if 
the  trouble  is  taken  to  describe  it  with  compass  upon  the  map,  will  be 
seen,  on  the  west  and  south,  to  pass  through  the  outer  fringe  of  the 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  81 

system  of  archipelagoes  which,  from  Australia  and  New  Zealand,  extend 
to  the  northeast  toward  the  American  continent.  Within  the  circle  a 
few  scattered  islets,  bare  and  unimportant,  seem  only  to  emphasize  the 
failure  of  nature  to  bridge  the  interval  separating  Hawaii  from  her 
peers  of  the  Southern  Pacific.  Of  these,  however,  it  may  be  noted  that 
some,  like  Fanning  and  Christmas  islands,  have  within  a  few  years 
been  taken  into  British  possession.  The  distance  from  San  Francisco 
to  Honolulu,  2,100  miles,  easy  steaming  distance,  is  substantially  the 
same  as  that  from  Honolulu  to  the  Gilbert,  Marshall,  Samoan,  Society, 
and  Marquesas  groups,  all  under  European  control,  except  Samoa,  in 
which  we  have  a  part  influence. 

To  have  a  central  position  such  as  this,  and  to  be  alone,  having  no 
rival  and  admitting  no  alternative  throughout  an  extensive  tract,  are 
conditions  that  at  once  fix  the  attention  of  the  strategist — it  may  be 
added,  of  the  statesmen  of  commerce  likewise.  But  to  this  striking 
combination  is  to  be  added  the  remarkable  relations  borne  by  these 
singularly  placed  islands  to  the  greater  commercial  routes  traversing 
this  vast  expanse  known  to  us  as  the  Pacific,  not  only,  however,  to 
those  now  actually  in  use,  important  as  they  are,  but  also  to  those  that 
must  necessarily  be  called  into  being  by  that  future  to  which  the 
Hawaiian  incident  compels  our  too  unwilling  attention.  Oircum 
stances,  as  was  before  tritely  remarked,  create  centers,  between  which 
communication  necessarily  follows,  and  in  the  vista  of  the  future  all, 
however  dimly,  discern  a  new  and  great  center  that  must  greatly 
modify  existing  sea  routes,  as  well  as  bring  new  ones  into  existence. 
Whether  the  canal  of  the  Central  American  isthmus  be  eventually  at 
Panama  or  at  Nicaragua  matters  little  to  the  question  now  in  hand, 
although,  in  common  with  most  Americans  who  have  thought  upon 
the  subject,  I  believe  it  will  surely  be  at  the  latter  point.  Whichever 
it  be,  the  convergence  there  of  so  many  ships  from  the  Atlantic  and 
the  Pacific  will  constitute  a  center  of  commerce,  interoceanic  and 
inferior  to  few,  if  to  any,  in  the  world;  one  whose  approaches  will  be 
jealously  watched  and  whose  relations  to  the  other  centers  of  the 
Pacific  by  the  lines  joining  it  to  them  must  be  carefully  examined. 
Such  study  of  the  commercial  routes  and  their  relations  to  the  Hawaiian 
Islands,  taken  together  with  the  other  strategic  considerations  pre- 
viously set  forth,  completes  the  synopsis  of  facts  which  determine  the 
value  of  the  group  for  conferring  either  commercial  or  naval  control. 

Kef erring  again  to  the  map,  it  will  be  seen  that  while  the  shortest 
routes  from  the  isthmus  to  Australia  and  New  Zealand,  as  well  as 
those  to  South  America,  go  well  clear  of  any  probable  connection  with 
or  interference  from  Hawaii,  those  directed  toward  China  and  Japan 
pass  either  through  the  group  or  in  close  proximity  to  it.  Vessels 
from  Central  America  bound  to  the  ports  of  Northern  America  come, 
of  course,  within  the  influence  of  our  own  coast.  These  circumstances 
and  the  existing  recognized  distribution  of  political  power  in  the 
Pacific  point  naturally  to  an  international  acquiescence  in  certain 
defined  spheres  of  influence  for  our  own  country  and  for  others,  such 
as  has  already  been  reached  between  Great  Britain,  Germany,  and 
Holland  in  the  Southwestern  Pacific,  to  avoid  conflict  there  between 
their  respective  claims.  Though  artificial  in  form,  such  a  recognition 
would,  in  the  case  here  suggested,  depend  upon  perfectly  natural  as 
well  as  indisputable  conditions.  The  United  States  is  by  far  the 
greatest  in  numbers,  interests,  and  power  of  the  communities  border- 
ing upon  the  North  Pacific;  and  the  relations  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
to  her  ni.turally  would  be,  and  actually  are,  more  numerous  and  more 
S.  Eep.  227. 6 


82  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

important  than  they  oin  be  to  any  other  state.  This  is  true,  although 
unfortunately  for  the  equally  natural  wishes  of  Great  Britain  and  her 
colonies,  the  direct  routes  from  British  Columbia  to  Eastern  Australia 
and  New  Zealand,  which  depend  upon  no  building  of  a  future  canal, 
pass  as  near  the  islands  as  those  already  mentioned.  Such  a  fact,  that 
this  additional  great  highway  runs  close  to  the  group,  both  augments 
and  emphasizes  their  strategic  importance;  but  it  does  not  affect  the*: 
statement  just  made  that  the  interest  of  the  United  States  in  them  is 
greater  than  that  of  Great  Britain,  and  dependent  upon  a  natural 
cause,  nearness,  which  has  always  been  admitted  as  a  reasonable 
ground  for  national  self-assertion.  It  is  unfortunate,  doubtless,  for  the 
wishes  of  British  Columbia  and  for  the  communications,  commercial 
and  military,  depending  upon  the  Canadian  Pacific  Kail  way,  that  the 
United  States  lies  between  them  and  the  South  Pacific  and  is  the  state 
nearest  to  Hawaii;  but,  the  fact  being  so,  the  interests  of  our  65,000,000. 
people,  in  a  position  so  vital  to  our  role  in  the  Pacific,  must  be  allowed 
to  outweigh  those  of  the  6,000,000  of  Canada. 

From  the  foregoing  considerations  may  be  inferred  the  importance 
of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  as  a  position  powerfully  influencing  the  com^ 
mercial  and  military  control  of  the  Pacific,  and  especially  of  the  north- 
ern' Pacific,  in  which  the  United  States,  geographically,  has  the 
strongest  right  to  assert  herself.  These  are  the  main  advantages, 
which  can  be  termed  positive;  those,  namely,  which  directly  advance 
commercial  security  and  naval  control.  To  the  negative  advantage^ 
of  possession,  by  removing  conditions  which,  if  the  islands  were  in  the 
hands  of  any  other  power,  would  constitute  to  us  disadvantages  an<| 
threats,  allusion  only  will  be  made.  The  serious  menace  to  our  Pacific 
coast  and  our  Pacific  trade,  if  so  important  a  position  were  held  by  a 
possible  enemy,  has  been  frequently  mentioned  in  the  press  and  dwelt 
upon  in  the  diplomatic  papers  which  are  from  time  to  time  given  to 
the  public.  It  may  be  assumed  that  it  is  generally  acknowledged. 
Upon  one  particular,  however,  too  much  stress  can  not  be  laid,  one  td. 
which  naval  officers  can  not  but  be  more  sensitive  than  the  general 
public,  and  that  is  the  immense  disadvantage  to  us  of  any  maritime 
enemy  having  a  coaling  station  well  within  2,500  miles,  as  this  is,  o| 
every  point  of  our  coast  line  from  Puget  Sound  to  Mexico.  Were  there 
many  others  available  we  might  find  it  difficult  to  exclude  from  all. 
There  is,  however,  but  the  one.  Shut  out  from  the  Sandwich  Islands 
as  a  coal  base,  an  enemy  is  thrown  back  for  supplies  of  fuel  to  dis- 
tances of  3,500  or  4,000  miles — or  between  7,000  and  8,000,  going  and 
coming — an  impediment  to  sustained  maritime  operations  well  nigh 
prohibitive.  The  coal  mines  of  British  Columbia  constitute,  of  course, 
a  qualification  to  this  statement;  but  upon  them,  if  need  arose,  we 
might  at  least  hope  to  impose  some  trammels  by  action  from  the  land 
side.  It  is  rarely  that  so  important  a  factor  in  the  attack  or  defense  of 
a  coast  line — of  a  sea  frontier — is  concentrated  in  a  single  position, 
and  the  circumstance  renders  doubly  imperative  upon  us  to  secure  it, 
if  we  righteously  can. 

It  is  to  be  hoped,  also,  that  the  opportunity  thus  thrust  upon  us  may 
not  be  narrowly  viewed,  as  though  it  concerned  but  one  section  of  our 
country  or  one  portion  of  its  external  trade  or  influence.  This  is  no 
mere  question  of  a  particular  act,  for  which,  possibly,  just  occasion 
may  not  yet  have  offered;  but  of  a  principle,  a  policy,  fruitful  of  many 
future  acts,  to  enter  upon  which,  in  the  fullness  of  our  national  prog? 
ress,  the  time  has  now  arrived.  The  principle  accepted,  to  be  con- 
ditioned only  by  a  just  and  candid  regard  for  the  rights  and  reasonal " 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  83 

susceptibilities  of  ether  nations — none  of  which  is  contravened  by  the 
step  here  immediately  under  discussion — the  annexation,  even,  of 
Hawaii  would  be  no  mere  sporadic  effort,  irrational  because  discon- 
nected from  an  adequate  motive,  but  a  first  fruit  and  a  token  that  the 
nation  in  its  evolution  has  aroused  itself  to  the  necessity  of  carrying- 
its  life — that  has  been  the  happiness  of  those  under  its  influence — 
beyond  the  borders  that  have  heretofore  sufficed  for  its  activities. 
That  the  vaunted  blessings  of  our  economy  are  not  to  be  forced  upon 
tin?  unwilling  may  be,  conceded ;  but  the  concession  does  not  deny  the 
right  nor  the  wisdom  of  gathering  in  those  who  wish  to  come.  Com- 
parative religion  teaches  that  creeds  which  reject  missionary  enter- 
prise are  foredoomed  to  decay.  May  it  not  be  so  with  nations?  Cer- 
tainly the  glorious  record  of  England  is  consequent  mainly  upon  the 
spirit  and  traceable  to  the  time  when  she  launched  out  into  the  deep — 
without  formulated  policy,  it  is  true,  or  foreseeing  the  future  to  which 
her  star  was  leading,  but  obeying  the  instinct  which  in  the  infancy  of 
nations  anticipates  the  more  reasoned  impulses  of  experience.  Let  us, 
too,  learn  from  her  experience.  Not  all  at  once  did  England  become 
the  great  sea  power  which  she  is,  but  step  by  step,  as  opportunity 
offered,  she  has  moved  on  to  the  world  wide  preeminence  now  held  by 
English  speech  and  by  institutions  sprung  from  English  germs.  How 
much  poorer  would  the  world  have  been  had  Englishmen  heeded  the 
cautious  hesitancy  that  now  bids  us  reject  every  advance  beyond  our 
shore  lines.  And  can  any  one  doubt  that  a  cordial,  if  unformulated, 
understanding  between  the  two  chief  states  of  English  tradition,  to 
spread  freely,  "without  mutual  jealously  and  in  mutual  support,  would 
greatly  increase  the  world's  sum  of  happiness  ?- 

But  if  a  plea  of  the  world's  welfare  seem  suspiciously  like  a  cloak  for 
national  self-interest,  let  the  latter  be  frankly  accepted  as  the  adequate 
motive  which  it  assuredly  is.  Let  us  not  sink  from  pitting  a  broad  self- 
Interest  against  the  narrow  self-interest  to  which  some  would  restrict 
us.  The  demands  of  our  three  great  seaboards,  the  Atlantic,  the  Gulf, 
and  the  Pacific — each  for  itself,  and  all  for  the  strength  that  comes  from 
drawing  closer  the  ties  between  them — are  calling  for  the  extension, 
through  the  Isthmian  Canal,  of  that  broad  sea  common  along  which, 
and  along  which  alone,  in  all  ages  prosperity  has  moved.  Land  carriage, 
always  restricted  and  therefore  always  slow,  toils  enviously  but  hope- 
lessly behind,  vainly  seeking  to  replace  and  supplant  the  royal  high- 
way of  nature's  own  making.  Corporate  interests,  vigorous  iu  that 
power  of  concentration  which  is  the  strength  of  armies  and  of  minori- 
ties, may  here  for  a  while  withstand  the  ill-organized  strivings  of  the 
multitude,  only  dimly  conscious  of  its  wants;  yet  the  latter,  however 
temporarily  opposed  and  baffled,  is  sure  at  last,  like  the  blind  forces  of 
nature,  to  overwhelm  all  that  stand  in  the  way  of  its  necessary  prog- 
ress. So  the  Isthmian  Canal  is  an  inevitable  part  in  the  future  of  the 
United  States;  yet  scarcely  an  integral  part,  for  it  can  not  be  separated 
from  other  necessary  incidents  of  a  policy  dependant  upon  it,  whose 
details  cannot  be  exactly  foreseen.  But  because  the  precise  steps  that 
may  hereafter  be  opportune  or  necessary  can  not  yet  be  certainly  fore- 
told, is  not  a  reason  the  less,  but  a  reason  the  more,  for  establishing  a 
pri nciple  of  action  which  may  serve  to  guide  as  opportunities  arise.  Let 
us  start  from  t-ne  fundamental  truth,  warranted  by  history,  that  the 
control  of  the  seas,  and  especially  along  the  great  lines  drawn  by 
national  interest  or  national  commerce,  is  the  chief  among  the  merely 
material  elements  in  the  power  and  prosperity  of  nations,    It  is  so 


84  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

because  the  sea  is  the  world's  great  medium  of  circulation.  From  this 
necessarily  follows  the  principle  that,  as  subsidiary  to  such  control,  it 
is  imperative  to  take  possession,  when  it  can  righteously  be  done, 
of  such  maritime  positions  as  contribute  to  secure  command.  If 
this  principle  be  adopted  there  will  be  no  hesitation  about 
taking  the  positions — and  they  are  many— upon  the  approaches 
to  the  Isthmus,  whose  interests  incline  them  to  seek  us.  It  has  its 
application  also  to  the  present  case  of  Hawaii. 

There  is,  however,  one  caution  to  be  given  from  that  military  point  of 
view  beyond  the  need  of  which  the  world  has  not  yet  passed.  Military 
positions,  fortified  posts,  by  land  or  by  sea,  however  strong  or  admirably 
situated,  do  not  by  themselves  confer  control.  People  often  say  that 
such  an  island  or  harbor  will  give  control  of  such  a  body  of  water.  It 
is  an  utter,  deplorable,  ruinous  mistake.  The  phrase  may  indeed  by 
some  be  used  only  loosly,  without  forgetting  other  implied  conditions 
of  adequate  protection  and  adequate  navies;  but  the  confidence  of  our 
nation  in  its  native  strength,  and  its  indifference  to  the  defense  of  its 
ports  and  the  sufficiency  of  its  fleet,  give  reason  to  fear  that  the  full 
consequences  of  a  forward  step  may  not  be  soberly  weighed.  Napoleon, 
who  knew  better,  once  talked  this  way.  "The  islands  of  San  Pietro, 
Corfu,  and  Malta,"  he  wrote,  "will  make  us  masters  of  the  whole  Medi- 
terranean." Yain  boast !  Within  one  year  Corfu,  in  two  years  Malta, 
were  rent  away  from  the  state  that  could  not  support  them  by  its  ships. 
Nay,  more;  had  Bonaparte  not  taken  the  latter  stronghold  out  of  the 
hands  of  its  degenerate  but  innocuous  government,  that  citadal  of  the 
Mediterranean  would  perhaps — would  probably — never  have  passed 
into  those  of  his  chief  enemy.    There  is  here  also  a  lesson  for  us. 

It  is  by  no  means  logical  to  leap,  from  this  recognition  of  the  neces- 
sity of  adequate  naval  force  to  secure  outlying  dependencies,  to  the  con- 
clusion that  the  United  States  would  for  that  object  need  a  navy  equal 
to  the  largest  now  existing.  A  nation  as  far  removed  as  is  our  own 
from  the  bases  of  foreign  naval  strength  may  reasonably  reckon  upon 
the  qualification  that  distance — not  to  speak  of  the  complex  European 
interests  close  at  hand — impresses  upon  the  exertion  of  naval  strength. 
The  mistake  is  when  our  remoteness,  unsupported  by  carefully  calcu- 
lated force,  is  regarded  as  an  armor  of  proof,  under  cover  of  which  any 
amount  of  swagger  may  be  safely  indulged.  Any  estimate  of  what  is 
an  adequate  naval  force  for  our  country  may  properly  take  large  account 
of  the  happy  interval  that  separates  both  our  present  territory  and  our 
future  aspirations  from  the  centers  of  interest  really  vital  to  European 
states.  If  to  these  safeguards  be  added,  On  our  part,  a  sober  recogni-. 
tion  of  what  our  reasonable  sphere  of  influence  is  and  a  candid  justice 
in  dealing  with  foreign  interests  within  that  sphere,  there  will  be  little 
disposition  to  question  our  preponderance  therein. 

Among  all  foreign  states  it  is  especially  to  be  hoped  that  each  pass- 
ing year  may  render  more  cordial  the  relations  between  ourselves  and 
the  great  nation  from  whose  loins  we  sprang.  The  radical  identity  of 
spirit  which  underlies  our  superficial  differences  of  polity  will  surely 
so  draw  us  closer  together,  if  we  do  not  willfully  set  our  faces  against 
a  tendency  which  would  give  our  race  the  predominance  over  the  seas  of 
the  world.  To  force  such  a  consummation  is  impossible,  and,  if  possible, 
would  not  be  wise ;  but  surely  it  would  be  a  lofty  aim,  fraught  with 
immeasurable  benefits,  to  desire  it,  and  to  raise  no  needless  impedi- 
ments by  advocating  perfectly  proper  acts,  demanded  by  our  evident 
interest?,  in  offensive  or  arrogant  terms. — (A,  T.  Mahan.) 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  85 

XII.  Also  the  following  extract  from  the  report  of  hon. 

JOHN  QUINCY  ADAMS,  CHAIRMAN  OF   THE   COMMITTEE   ON  FOREIGN 

)l 
OF  PRESIDENT   TYLER,  DECEMBER  30,  1842. 

"It  is  a  subject  of  cheering  contemplation  to  the  friends  of  human 
improvement  and  virtue  that,  by  the  mild  and  gentle  influence  of 
Christian  charity,  dispensed  by  humble  missionaries  of  the  gospel, 
unarmed  with  secular  power,  within  the  last  quarter  of  a  century,  the 
people  of  this  group  of  islands  have  been  converted  from  the  lowest 
debasement  of  idolatry  to  4he  blessings  of  the  Christian  gospel; 
united  under  one  balanced  government;  rallied  to  the  fold  of  civiliza- 
tion by  a  written  language  and  constitution,  providing  security  for  the 
rights  of  persons,  property  and  mind,  and  invested  with  all  the  ele- 
ments of  right  and  power  which  can  entitle  them  to  be  acknowledged 
by  their  brethren  of  the  •human  race  as  a  separate  and  independent 
community.  To  the  consummation  of  their  acknowledgment  the 
people  of  the  North  American  Union  are  urged  by  an  interest  of  their 
own,  deeper  than  that  of  any  other  portion  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
earth — by  a  virtual  right  of  conquest,  not  over  the  freedom  of  their 
brother  man  by  the  brutal  arm  of  physical  power,  but  over  the  mind 
and  heart  by  the  celestial  panoply  of  the  gospel  of  peace  and  love." 

XIII.  Also  the  following,  a  translation  of  the  constitution 

OF  THE  HAWAIIAN   GOVERNMENT  OF  1840. 

"In  the  Hawaiian  bill  of  rights,  the  chiefs  endeavored  to  incorporate 
in  few  words  the  general  basis  of  personal  rights,  both  of  the  chiefs  and 
common  people,  and  to  guard  against  perversion;  and  this  they  have 
accomplished  with,  perhaps,  as  much  precision  and  consistency  as  the 
Americans,  who  affirm  'that  all  men  are  born  free  and  equal,  possessing 
certain  inalienable  rights,  life,  liberty,  and  the  pursuit  of  happiness.7 

"  With  distinguished  and  commendable  care  do  the  Hawaiian s  of 
1840  acknowledge  the  paramount  authority  of  God,  in  which  Kaahu- 
manu  had  set  them  a  noble  example,  and  the  importance  of  an  unwav- 
ering purpose  in  legislation  not  to  controvene  his  word," 

The  following  translation  I  have  made  with  care  from  the  original, 
published  at  the  islands  as  the  constitution  of  1840 : 

"God  has  made  of  one  blood  all  the  nations  of  men,  that  they  might 
alike  dwell  upon  the  earth  iu  peace  and  prosperity.  And  he  has  given 
certain  equal  rights  to  all  people  and  chiefs  of  all  countries.  These  are 
the  rights  or  gifts  which  he  has  granted  to  every  man  and  chief  of  cor- 
rect deportment,  life,  the  members  of  the  body,  freedom  in  dwelling 
and  acting,  and  the  rightful  products  of  his  hands  and  mind;  but  not 
those  things  which  are  inhibited  by  the  laws. 

"  From  God  also  are  the  office  of  rulers  and  the  reign  of  chief  magis- 
trates for  protection;  but  in  enacting  the  laws  of  the  land  it  is  not 
right  to  make  a  law  protecting  the  magistrate  only  and  not  subjects; 
neither  is  it  proper  to  establish  laws  for  enriching  chiefs  only  without 
benefiting  the  people,  and  hereafter  no  law  shall  be  established  in 

!  opposition  to  the  above  declarations;  neither  shall  taxes,  servitude, 
nor  labor  be  exacted:  without  law  of  any  man  in  a  manner  at  variance 
1  with  those  principles. 


, 


"PROTECTION  FOR   ALL. 


c  Therefore  let  this  declaration  be  published  in  order  to  the  equal 
tection  of  all  the  people  and  all  the  chiefs  of  these  islands  while 


86  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

maintaining  a  Correct  deportment,  that  no  chief  may  oppress  any  sub- 
ject, and  that  chiefs  and  people  may  enjoy  equal  security  under  the 
same  system  of  law;  the  persons,  the  lands,  the  dwelling  enclosures, 
and  all  the  property  of  all  the  people  are  protected  while  they  conform 
to  the  laws  of  the  Kingdom,  neither  shall  any  of  these  be  taken  except 
by  the  provisions  of  law.  Any  chief  who  shall  perseveringly  act  in 
opposition  to  this  constitution  shall  cease  to  hold  his  office  as  a  chief 
of  these  Hawaiian  Islands;  and  the  same  shall  apply  to  governors,  offi- 
cers of  Government,  and  land  agents.  But  if  one  condemned  should 
turn  again  and  conform  himself  to  the  laws  it  shall  be  in  the  power  ol 
the  chiefs  to  reinstate  him  in  the  standing  he  occupied  before  his  tres- 
pass. 

"FOUNDATION   OF  LAWS. 

"According  to  the  principles  above  declared,  we  purpose  to  regulate 
this  Kingdom,  and  to  seek  the  good  of  all  the  chiefs  and  all  the  people 
of  these  Hawaiian  Islands.  We  are  aware  that  we  can  not  succeed  ty 
ourselves  alone,  but  through  God  we  can;  for  He  is  King  over  all  king- 
doms; by  whom  protection  and  prosperity  may  be  secured ;  therefore 
do  we  first  beseech  him  to  point  out  to  us  the  right  course,  and  aid  01 
work. 

"  Wherefore,  resolved, 

"I.  No  law  shall  be  enacted  at  variance  with  the  word  of  the  Lord 
Jehovah,  or  opposed  to  the  grand  design  of  that  word.  All  the  laws 
of  this  country  shall  accord  with  the  general  design  of  God's  law. 

"II.  All  men  of  every  form  of  worship  shall  be  protected  in  their 
worshipping  Jehovah,  and  in  their  serving  Him;  nor  shall  any  one  be 
punished  for  merely  neglecting  to  serve  God,  provided  he  injures  no 
man  and  brings  no  evil  on  the  Kingdom. 

"III.  The  law  shall  support  every  unblamable  man  who  is  injured  by 
another  all  shall  be  protected  in  every  good  work,  and  every  man  shall 
be  punishable  who  brings  evil  on  the  Kingdom  or  individuals.  Nor  shall 
any  unequal  law  be  established  to  give  favor  to  one  through  evil  to 
another. 

"IV.  No  man  sballbepnnisheelunlesshiscrimebe  first  maele  to  appeal 
nor  shall  he  be  punished  without  being  examined  in  the  presence  of  his 
accuser.    When  the  accused  and  the  accuser  have  met  face  to  face,  ane 
the  trial  proceeds  according  to  law,  and  guilt  is  established  before  thei 
both,  then  punishment  shall  follow. 

"  V.  It  shall  not  be  proper  for  any  man  or  chief  to  sit  as  judge 
juror  to  try  his  own  benefactor,  or  one  directly  connected  with  hii 
Therefore,  if  one  is  condemned  or  acquitted,  and  it  shall  soon  be  knowi 
that  some  of  the  triers  acted  with  partiality  to  favor  whom  he  loved, 
perhaps  to  enrich  himself,  then  there  may  be  a  new  trial  before  the 
impartial. 

"  EXPLANATION  OF  THE  POSITION  OF  THE  RULERS. 

"  The  nature  of  the  position  of  the  chief  magistrates  and  of  the  polie 
of  the  country  is  this :  Katnehameha  I  was  the  head  of  this  Kingdom 
dynasty.  To  him  pertained  all  the  lands  from  Hawaii  to  Niihan,  bi 
they  were  not  his  own  personal  property ;  they  belonged  to  the  people 
and  the  chiefs,  and  Kaineliameha  was  their  head  and  the  dictator  of 
the  country.  Therefore  no  one  had  before,  and  no  one  has  now,  the 
right  to  convey  away  the  smallest  portion  of  these  islands  without  the 
consent  of  the  dictator  of  the  Kingdom. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  87 

"  These  are  the  dictators  or  the  persons  who  have  had  the  direction  of 
it  from  that  time  down,  Kamehameha  II  and  Kaahumanu  I,  and  at  the 
present  time  Kamehameha  III.  To  these  persons  only  has  belonged 
the  direction  or  dictatorship  of  the  realm  down  to  the  present  time, 
and  the  documents  written  by  them  only  are  the  documents  of  the 
Kingdom. 

"The  Kingdom  is  to  be  perpetuated  to  Kamehameha  III  and  to  his 
heirs,  and  his  heir  shall  be  one  whom  he  and  the  chiefs  shall  appoint 
during  his  lifetime;  but  if  he  shall  not  nominate,  then  the  appointment 
shall  devolve  solely  on  the  nobles  and  representatives. 

"PREROGATIVES   OF   THE   KINO. 

"This  is  the  King's  position:  He  is  the  sovereign  of  all  the  people 
and  all  the  chiefs.  At  his  direction  are  the  soldiers,  the  guns,  the 
forts,  and  all  the  implements  of  war  of  the  Kingdom.  At  his  direction 
is  the  public  property,  the  revenue  from  the  poll  tax,  the  land  tax,  and 
the  three  days  monthly  labor  tax,  to  accord,  however,  with  the  pro- 
visions of  law.  He  shall  possess  his  own  private  lands,  and  such  as 
shall  be  forfeited  for  the  annual  tax. 

"  He  is  the  chief  judge  of  the  supreme  court,  and  to  him  belongs  the 
execution  of  the  laws  of  the  land,  the  decrees,  and  the  treaties  with 
other  countries,  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  laws  of  this 
country. 

"  It  is  for  him  to  make  treaties  with  the  rulers  of  all  other  kingdoms, 
and  to  hold  intercourse  with  ministers  sent  hither  from  other  coun- 
tries, and  to  consummate  agreements. 

"  It  is  for  him  to  declare  war  should  a  period  of  distress  arrive,  and 
the  chiefs  could  not  well  be  assembled;  and  he  shall  be  commander 
in  chief  of  the  army.  All  important  business  of  the  Kingdom  not  com- 
mitted by  law  to  others,  belongs  to  him  to  transact. 

"of  the  premier  of  the  kingdom. 

"  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  King  to  appoint  a  chief  of  ability  and 
high  rank  to  be  his  prime  minister,  who  shall  be  entitled  premier  of  the 
I  Kingdom,  whose  office  and  business  shall  be  like  that  of  Kaahumanu  I 
I  and  Kaahumanu  II.    For  in  the  life  time  of  Kamehameha,  the  ques- 
i  tions  of  life  and  death,  right  and  wrong,  were  for  Kaahumanu  to 
decide,  and  at  the  time  of  his  death  he  gave  charge,  i  Let  the  Kingdom 
be  Liholiho's,  and  Kaahumanu  the  prime  minister.'    That  policy  of 
Kamehameha,  wherein  he  sought  'to  secure  a  premier,  ,is  to  be  per- 
petuated in  this  Hawaaiian  country,  but  in  accordance  with  the  pro- 
visions of  law. 

"  This  is  the  business  of  the  premier :  Whatever  appropriate  business 
of  the  Kingdom  the  King  intends  to  do  the  premier  may  do  in  the  name 
of  the  King.  The  words  and  acts  of  the  Kingdom  by  the  premier  are 
the  words  and  acts  of  the  King.  The  premier  shall  receive  and 
acknowledge  the  revenue  of  the  Kingdom  and  deliver  it  to  the  King. 
The  premier  shall  be  the  King's  special  counsellor  in  all  the  important 
business  of  the  Kingdom.  The  King  shall  not  transact  public  business 
without  the  concurrence  of  the  premier;  nor  shall  the  premier  transact 
public  business  without  the  concurrence  of  the  King.*  If  the  King  shall 
veto  what  the  premier  counsels  or  attempts  that  is  a  negative.  What- 
ever important  public  business  the  King  chooses  to  transact  in  person 
he  may  do,  but  only  with  the  approbation  or  consent  of  the  premier. 


88  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

"OF   GOVERNORS. 


"There  shall  be  four  governors  in  this  Hawaiian  country;  one  of 
Hawaii,  one  of  Mani  and  the  adjacent  isles,  one  of  Oahu,  and  one  of 
Kauai  and  the  adjacent  isles.  All  the  governors  from  Hawaii  to  Kauai 
shall  hold  their  office  under  the  King. 

"This  is  the  character  and  duty  of  the  office  of  governor:  He  is  the 
director  of  all  the  tax  officers  in  his  island,  and  shall  sustain  their  orders 
which  he  shall  deem  right,  confirming  according  to  the  provisions  of 
law,  and  not  his  own  arbitrary  will.  He  shall  preside  over  all  the 
judges  of  his  island  and  execute  their  decisions  as  above  stated.  He 
shall  choose  the  judges  of  his  district  and  give  them  their  commissions. 

"The  governor  is  the  high  chief  (viceroy)  over  his  island  or  islands, 
and  shall  have  the  direction  of  the  forts,  the  soldiers,  guns,  and  all  the 
implements  of  war.  Under  the  King  and  premier  shall  be  all  the 
governors  from  Hawaii  to  Kauai.  Each  shall  have  charge  of  the  reve- 
nue of  his  island,  and  shall  deliver  it  to  the  premier. 

"In  case  of  distress  he  may  act  as  dictator,  if  neither  King  nor  pre- 
mier can  be  consulted.  He  shall  have  charge  of  all  the  King's  business 
on  the  island,  the  taxation,  improvements,  and  means  of  increasing 
wealthy  and  all  officers  there  shall  be  under  him.  To  him  belong  all 
questions  and  business  pertaining  to  the  government  of  the  island,  not 
assigned  by  law  to  others. 

"On  the  decease  of  a  governor,  the  chiefs  shall  assemble  at  such  a 
place  as  the  King  shall  appoint,  and  together  seek  out  a  successor  of 
the  departed  governor,  and  the  person  whom  they  shall  choose  and 
the  King  approve  by  writing  shall  be  the  new  governor. 


"OF  CHIEFS  OR  NOBLES  UNDER  THE  KING. 


: 


"In  the  public  councils  of  the  chiefs  these  are  the  counsellors  f( 
the  current  period:  Kamehameha  III,  Kekauluohi,  Hoapiliwahin 
Kaukini,  Kekauonohi,  Kahekili,  Paki,  Konia,  Keohokalole,  Leleiohoku, 
Kehuanaoa,  Keliiahonui,  Kanaina,  Li  Keoniana,  a  me  Haalilio,  and  if 
a  new  member  is  to  enter  the  law  shall  specify  it.  These  persons  shall 
take  part  in  the  councils  of  the  Kingdom.  But  if  the  council  choose  to 
admit  others  merely  for  consultation  it  shall  be  allowable,  the  specified 
counsellors  only  being  allowed  to  vote.  No  law  shall  be  enacted  for 
the  country  without  their  consent. 

"In  this  manner  shall  they  proceed:  They  shall  meet  annually  to 
devise  means  for  benefiting  the  country  and  enact  laws  for  the  King- 
dom. In  the  month  of  April  shall  they  assemble  at  such  time  and 
place  as  the  King  shall  appoint.  It  shall  be  proper  for  the  King  to  take 
counsel  with  them  on  all  the  important  concerns  of  the  Kingdom  in 
order  to  secure  harmony  and  prosperity,  or  the  general  good,  and  they 
shall  attend  to  all  the  business  which  the  King  shall  commit  to  them. 
They  shall  retain  their  own  personal  estates,  larger  or  smaller  divisions 
of  the  country,  and  may  conduct  their  affairs  on  their  own  lands  accord-, 
ing  to  their  pleasure,  but  not  in  opposition  to  the  laws  of  the  Kingdom. 

"OF  REPRESENTATIVES  ELECTED 

"  Several  men  shall  be  annually  chosen  to  act  in  council  with  the 
King  and  chiefs,  and  to  devise  with  them  laws  for  the  country.  Some 
from  Hawaii,  some  from  Maui,  some  from  Oahu,  and  some  from  Kauai, 
shall  the  plebeians  choose  according  to  their  o%n  pleasure.    The  law 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  89 

will  determine  the  method  of  choosing  and  the  number  to  be  chosen. 
These  chosen  representatives  shall  have  a  voice  in  the  Government, 
and  no  law  can  be  established  without  the  consent  of  the  majority  of 
fchem. 

"OF   THE   MEETINGS   OF   THE   LEGISLATURE   OR  PARLIAMENT. 

"There  shall  be  an  annual  meeting  as  aforesaid,  but  if  the  chiefs 
choose  another  meeting  at  another  time  they  may  meet  at  their  dis- 
cretion. 

"In  the  assembling  of  Parliament,  let  the  hereditary  nobles  meet  by 
themselves  and  the  elected  rulers  meet  by  themselves.  But  if  they 
choose  to  take  counsel  together  occasionally  at  their  discretion,  so  be  it. 

"In  this  manner  shall  they  proceed:  The  hereditary  chiefs  shall 
choose  a  secretary  for  their  body,  and  on  the  day  of  their  assembling 
he  shall  record  all  their  transactions;  and  that  book  shall  be  preserved 
that  what  they  devise  for  the  Kingdom  may  not  be  lost. 

"In  the  same  manner  shall  the  elected  representatives  proceed;  they 
shall  choose  a  secretary  for  themselves,  and  on  the  day  they  assemble, 
to  seek  the  good  of  the  Kingdom  and  agree  on  any  measure,  he  shall 
record  it  in  a  book,  which  shall  be  carefully  preserved,  in  order  that 
vthe  good  desired  for  the  country  may  not  be  lost.  And  no  new  law 
shall  be  established  without  the  consent  of  a  majority  of  the  nobles 
and  of  the  elected  representatives. 

"When  any  act  or  measure  shall  have  been  agreed  on  by  them  it  shall 
be  carried  on  paper  to  the  King,  and  if  he  approves  and  signs  his  name, 
and  also  the  premier,  then  it  shall  become  a  law  of  the  Kingdom,  and 
it  shall  not  be  repealed  except  by  the  body  which  enacted  it. 

"OF   THE   TAX  OFFICERS. 

"The  King  and  premier  shall  choose  tax  officers  and  give  them  a  com- 
mission in  writing.  They  shall  be  distinct  for  the  separate  islands. 
There  shall  be  three,  or  more  or  less,  for  each  island,  at  the  discretion 
of  the  King  and  premier. 

"A  tax  officer,  having  received  a  commission,  shall  not  be  removed 
without  a  trial.  If  convicted  of  crime  he  may  be  removed ;  but  the 
number  of  years  the  office  shall  continue  may  be  previously  limited  by 
law. 

"  This  is  clearly  the  business  of  the  tax  officers :  They  shall  apprise  the 
people  of  the  amount  of  assessment,  that  they  may  hear  beforehand  at 
the  proper  time;  they  shall  proceed  according  to  the  orders  of  the 
governors  and  the  provisions  of  law;  and  when  the  time  for  paying- 
taxes  shall  arrive,  they  shall  collect  the  amount  and  deliver  it  to  the 
governor,  and  the  governor  to  the  premier,  and  the  premier  to  the  King. 
The  tax  officers  shall  also  direct  the  public  labor  for  the  King,  but  may 
commit  its  details  to  the  land  agents,  presiding  themselves  over  them 
in  this  work.  They  shall  also  have  charge  of  any  new  business  which 
the  King  may  design  to  extend  through  the  Kingdom,  but  in  their 
doings  they  ahall  be  subordinate  to  the  governors.  They  shall  be 
arbiters  of  the  tax  laws,  and  in  all  cases  where  land  agents' or  landlords 
oppress  the  peasantry,  and  in  every  difficulty  between  land  agents  and 
tenants,  and  everything  specified  in  the  tax  law  established  June  7th, 
1839. 

"In  this  manner  shall  they  proceed:  Each  shall  exercise  his  office 


90  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

in  his  own  district.  If  a  difficulty  arise  between  &  land  agent  and  a 
tenant  the  tax  officer  shall  investigate  it,  and  if  th£  tenant  is  in  fault 
the  tax  officer  and  land  agent  shall  execute  the  law  upon  him;  but  if 
the  land  agent  is  in  fault  in  the  judgment  of  the  tax  officer  the  latter 
shall  call  the  other  tax  officers  of  the  island,  and,  if  they  agree  with 
him,  judgment  against  the  land  agent  is  confirmed,  and  the  governor 
shall  execute  the  law  on  him;  but  if  any  believe  the  tax  officer  to 
have  erred  the  governor  may  be  apprised  and  try  the  case  over  again, 
and  if  he  is  believed  to  have  erred  the  case  may  be  made  known  to 
the  supreme  judges,  and  they  shall  try  the  case  anew. 

"OF  THE  JUDGES. 

"The  governor  of  each  island  shall  choose  judges  for  the  island 
according  to  his  own  mind,  two  or  more,  at  his  own  discretion,  and 
give  them  a  written  commission.  When  they  receive  this  they  shall 
not  be  removed  without  trial,  but  the  law  may  limit  their  term  of  office. 

"  In  this  manner  shall  they  proceed :  The  court  days  shall  be  declared 
beforehand,  and  when  the  appointed  day  arrives  they  shall  proceed 
with  trials  according  to  law.  To  them  shall  be  given  jurisdiction  in 
respect  to  all  the  laws  except  those  connected  with  taxation,  and  to 
the  difficulties  between  land  agents,  landlords,  and  tenants.  The 
governor  shall  sustain  them  and  execute  their  judgment.  But  if  their 
judgment  is  thought  to  be  unjust  he  who  thinks  so  may  complain  or 
appeal  to  the  supreme  judges. 

."OF  THE   SUPEEME  JUDGES.      - 

"The  elected  representatives  shall  choose  four  judges  to  assist  the 
King  and  premier,  and  these  six  shall  be  the  supreme  judges  of  the 
Kingdom.  This  shall  be  their  business:  Cases  of  difficulty  not  well 
adjusted  by  the  tax  officers  or  island  judges  they  shall  try  again 
according  to  law;  the  court  days  shall  be  declared  beforehand,  that 
those  who  are  in  difficulty  may  apply,  and  the  decision  of  this  court 
shall  stand.  There  is  thereafter  no  appeal.  Life  and  death,  to  bind 
and  release,  to  fine  and  not  to  fine,  are  at  their  disposal,  and  with  them 
the  end  of  controversy. 

"OF  CHANGES  IN  THE  CONSTITUTION. 

"This  constitution  shall  not  be  considered  as  fully  established  until 
the  people  generally  shall  have  heard  it,  and  certain  persons  as  herein 
mentioned  shall  be  chosen  and  shall  assent  to  it,  then  firmly  estab- 
lished is  this  constitution. 

"And  thereafter,  if  it  be  designed  to  alter  it,  the  people  shall  be  first 
apprised  of  the  nature  of  the  amendment  intended  to  be  introduced, 
and  the  next  year,  at  the  meeting  of  the  nobles  and  representatives, 
if  they  agree  to  insert  a  passage  or  to  annul  a  passage,  they  may  do  it 
lawfully. 

"  This  constitution,  above  stated,  has  been  agreed  to  by  the  nobles, 
and  our  names  are  set  to  it  this  e"  ghth  day  of  October,  in  the  year  of 
our  Lord  1840,  at  Honolulu,  Oahu. 
(Signed), 

"  Kameiiameha  III, 
"  Kekauluohi." 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS  91 

a  The  house  of  nobles,  or  hereditary  lords  and  ladies,  consisted  of 
the  King  himself,  a  female  premier,  four  governors  of  islands,  four 
women  of  rank,  and  five  chiefs  of  the  tyiird  rank.  The  people  were 
allowed  to  choose  by  districts  annually  seven  men  to  be  members  of 
the  national  Legislature  for  a  year:  two  from  Hawaii,  two  from  Maui 
and  adjacent  islands,  two  from  Oahu,  and  one  from  Kauai,  the  Govern- 
ment bearing  their  expenses.  The  proposition  was  also  distinctly  made 
to  increase  the  number  after  a  time.  The  right  of  suffrage,  so  far  as 
to  vote  for  one  or  two  men  to  act  in  making  laws  and  appointing 
supreme  assistant  judges,  was  extended  to  all,  but  guarded  with  pecu- 
liar care." 

XIV.  Also  the  following  from  the  remarks  of  mr.  draper, 

OF  MASSACHUSETTS,  MADE  IN  THE  HOUSE  OF  REPRESENTATIVES, 
AND  PUBLISHED  IN  THE  CONGRESSIONAL  RECORD  OF  FEBRUARY 

4,  1894. 

I  believe  that  the  true  policy  of  this  Government  is  to  negotiate  a 
suitable  treaty  with  the  de  facto  Government  in  Hawaii,  and  annex  the 
islands. 

After  this  (or  before  if  necessary),  if  Liliuokalani  is  supposed  to  have 
any  rights,  purchase  them  (since  she  is  willing  to  sell),  biit  on  no 
account  ought  we  to  neglect  this  opportunity  of  securing  this  naval  and 
coaling  station,  so  important  to  us,  both  from  the  point  of  viewT  of  com- 
merce and  of  coast  defense. 

I  will  first  point  out  briefly  its  advantages  to  us  from  a  commercial 
point  of  view. 

Situated  at  the  intersection  of  the  trade  route  between  North  Amer- 
ica and  Australasia,  with  the  rich  commercial  stream  which  will  flow 
between  the  China  Seas  and  the  Atlantic  as  soon  as  the  Isthmus  canal 
(whether  it  be  through  Nicaragua  or  Panama)  is  opened,  the  position 
of  Hawaii  is  ideal  for  controlling  both  lines  of  commerce;  and,  for  a 
nation  which  expects  to  maintain  trade  routes  in  the  Pacific,  its  pos- 
session is  a  necessity. 

All  the  great  commercial  powers  recognize  the  fact  that  our  trade 
must  be  guarded;  that  convenient  stations,  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
well-defined  trade  routes,  must  be  established;  and  that  supplies  and 
facilities  for  refitting  may  be  available  at  distances  not  too  widely 
separated. 

Until  1886  Hawaii  was  nearer  to  the  territory  of  the  United  States 
than  to  that  of  any  other  power,  the  distance  to  San  Francisco  being 
but  2,100  miles,  while  the  British  fortified  port  of  Victoria,  with  its 
neighboring  dockyard  of  Esquimault,  and  coal  mines  of  Nanaimo,  was 
2,360  miles  distant.  The  next  nearest  British  port  was  Leonka,  in  the 
Fiji,  group,  2,700  miles  distant  in  an  opposite  direction. 

French  territory  was  2,380  miles  distant  at  Tahiti ;  Germany  held  the 
Admiralty  Islands,  distant  3,400  miles;  and  Spain  the  Caroline  Islands, 
2,600  miles  distant,  and  the  Ladrones,  about  2,900  miles  distant. 

Since  that  time  Germany  has  moved  up  to  a  distance  of  2,098  miles, 
by  annexing  the  Marshall  Islands  and  placing  herself  in  a  flanking 
position  on  both  the  South  Pacific  and  transpacific  trade  routes. 
France,  by  the  acquisition  of  the  Low  Archipelago  and  the  Marquesas 
Islands,  is  2,050  miles  distant  from  Hawaii,  on  the  South  Pacific  route. 
Great  Britain  has  advanced  from  Fiji  toward  the  intersecting  point  on 
clearly  define!  lines,  annexing  group  after  group  and  detached  islands 
when  they  were  on  the  line  of  approach,  even  though  uninhabited  or 
without  harbors  and  of  no  commercial  value,  until  in  1891  her  flag  was 


92  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

planted  on  Johnston  Island,  600  miles  from  Hawaii,  and  the  nearest 
point  she  can  approach  to  her  American  territory,  unless  the  next  move 
be  the  occupation  of  Hawaii  itself. 

In  one  year,  1888,  British  cruisers  took  possession  of  the  Savage, 
Suwarrow,  and  Phoenix  groups  and  Christmas  and  Fanning  islands, 
and  in  1892  the  occupation  of  the  Gilbert  and  Ellice  groups  and  Gard- 
ner and  Danger  islands  completed  the  covering  of  the  South  Pacilic 
trade  from  Johnston  Island  to  Australia.  The  only  unannexed  group 
on  that  line  remaining  is  the  Sainoan  Islands,  and  they  are  closely  sur- 
rounded by  British  and  French  possessions. 

It  has  not  been  a  blind  grab  for  territory  which  has  been  going  on 
in  the  South  Pacific  for  six  years  past,  but  a  working  out  of  strategical 
schemes  with  definite  ends  in  view;  and  the  United  States  is  the  only 
great  power  interested  in  the  Pacific  trade  which  has  uothad  the  wis- 
dom to  acquire  territory  in  localities  where  the  great  trade  of  the  future 
will  need  guarding  and  supplying. 

Samoa  and  Hawaii  have  been  ripe  to  our  hands  for  years.  They  are 
most  advantageously  situated  for  our  needs,  as  bases  from  which  our 
cruisers  could  work  in  time  of  war  to  protect  our  own  trade  and  break 
up  that  of  an  enemy.  The  moral  force  of  the  United  States  is  all  that 
has  kept  European  hands  off  these  two  groups  to  the  present  time,  but 
should  a  strategic  necessity  for  their  occupation  by  either  of  those 
powers  arise  moral  force  would  lose  its  power  and  we  would  have  to  be 
prepared  to  then  fight  for  them  or  to  retire  at  once  from  the  absurd 
dog-in-the-manger  position  we  have  so  long  occupied. 

To  appreciate  fully  the  question  of  ocean  trade  it  is  well  to  observe 
the  policy  which  Great  Britain  has  consistently  and  successfully  fol- 
lowed for  generations  in  developing  and  supporting  her  commerce. 
Trade  with  India  was  established,  then  the  route  was  guarded.  When 
the  Suez  Canal  was  cut  a  different  disposition  was  needed ;  and  they 
now  have  the  complete  chain  of  guard  stations  formed  by  Gibraltar, 
Malta,  Cyprus,  Egypt,  and  Aden,  the  chain  being  continued  to  China 
by  Ceylon,  Penang,  Singapore,  and  Hongkong.  The  route  around  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope  and  to  Australia  is  covered  by  Sierra  Leone, 
Ascension,  St.  Helena,  Cape  Town,  Natal,  Zanzibar,  and  Mauritius.  To 
America  the  route  is  guarded  by  St.  Johns,  Halifax,  Bermuda,  Jamaica, 
St.  Lucia,  Barbados,  Nassau,  Balize,  and  Demerara. 

The  Falkland  Islands  at  the  southern  extremity  of  America  form  a 
guard  station  for  the  trade  passing  around  Cape  Horn,  and  up  to  this 
point  it  is  well  to  note  that  no  station  is  farther  than  3,000  miles  from 
the  next  on  the  trade  route  it  is  designed  to  protect;  and  cruisers 
patrolling  the  routes,  as  well  as  merchant  vessels  traversing  them,  need 
never  be  farther  removed  than  1,500  miles  from  a  base  where  supplies 
of  coal  and  facilities  for  refitting  are  available. 

The  foresighted  statesmen  of  Great  Britain  have  had  a  full  under- 
standing of  the  fact  that  the  i)reservation  intact  of  the  circulation  of 
British  ships  in  the  great  arteries  of  trade  is  an  absolute  requisite  to 
the  well-being  and  even  life  of  the  British  Empire,  and  this  it  is  which 
has  guided  them  in  the  establishing  around  the  world  a  complete  chain 
of  guarded  stations,  from  which  her  commerce  can  be  supplied  and 
succored,  whether  peace  or  war  prevail. 

Until  very  recent  times  British  trade  in  the  Pacific  has  not  been 
essential  so  far  as  the  welfare  of  the  Empire  was  concerned,  and  the 
guarding  stations  at  the  Falkland  Islands,  Fiji,  and  Victoria,  British 
Columbia,  may  have  been  supposed  to  be  sufficient  for  all  needs;  but 
it  is  worthy  of  note  that  as  long  ago  as  1877  an  essayist  of  acknowl- 
edged ability  (Vice- Admiral  Colomb,  of  the  British  navy)  asserted,  "  I 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  93 

bold  it  futile  to  attempt  the  defense  of  the  Pacific  trade  route  by  any 
sort  of  vessels  which  must  rest  on  the  bases  of  Vancouver,  Fiji,  and 
the  Falkland  Islands."  It  is  also  worthy  of  note  that  contempora- 
neously with  the  completion  of  the  Canadian  Pacific  Bailroad,  and  the 
establishment  from  its  Pacific  terminus  of  regular  steamer  lines  to 
China  and  to  Australasia,  the  British  bases  began  to  be  moved  closer 
together;  and  when  the  probability  of  the  building  of  the  Nicaragua 
Canal  was  established,  the  movement  toward  the  trade  center  at  HaAvaii 
became  a  very  rapid  one. 

At  present,  instead  of  the  wide  gaps  in  the  British  system  of  3,000- 
mile  stations,  which  existed  when  the  Falkland  Island  station  was 
7,900  miles  from  that  at  Vancouver  and  6,700  miles  from  that  at  Fiji, 
which  in  turn  was  4,800  miles  from  Vancouver,  they  have  established 
the  flag  of  the  Empire  at  Easter  Island,  2,400  miles  from  the  Falkland 
group,  which  is  in  turn  600  miles  from  newly  acquired  Ducie  Island, 
from  where  Pitcairn  Island  is  300,  and  the  Cook  group  still  farther, 
1,800  miles,  on  a  line  toward  Fiji.  On  the  line  from  Fiji  to  Vancouver 
the  gap  has  been  shortened  to  L',900  miles  from  Johnston  Island  to  Van- 
couver, and  all  the  intermediate  territory  from  Johnston  Island  to  Fiji 
is  under  the  British  flag. 

Other  stations  are  still  needed,  and  British  strategists  make  no  secret 
of  the  assertion  that  on  the  outbreak  of  war  with  a  maritime  power,  a 
necessary  first  move,  unless  the  Pacific  trade  were  to  be  abandoned, 
would  be  the  occupation  and  retention  of  Hawaii,  Guadalupe  Island, 
off  the  coast  of  Lower  California,  and  one  of  the  islands  in  the  Bay  of 
Panama,  with  a  reliance  on  the  friendship  or  fears  of  the  South  Ameri- 
can States  for  depots  at  Callao  and  Valparaiso.  As  a  matter  of  fact, 
they  have  such  a  depot  at  present  in  the  harbor  of  Callao. 

Now,  Mr.  Speaker,  sentiment  has  not  hoisted  the  British  flag  over 
these  isolated  ports,  which,  to  maintain  in  a  state  of  efficiency,  are  a 
source  of  great  expense  without  any  apparent  return.  Their  coal 
depots,  storehouses,  repairing  facilities,  and  at  salient  points  batteries 
and  garrisons,  are  provided  by  a  business  instinct  purely,  which  recog- 
nizes that  the  trade  which  is  the  lifeblood  of  the  empire  must  be 
efficiently  guarded;  and  centuries  of  experience  have  taught  them  the 
proper  means  to  employ. 

If  there  is  a  gap  in  the  guard  stations  of  the  Pacific  trade  at  present, 
or  a  salient  point  which  should  be  possessed,  and  Hawaii  is  such  a 
point,  sentiment,  which  does  not  trouble  our  British  friends,  will  not  pre- 
vent their  cruisers,  under  the  direction  of  far-seeing  statesmen,  whose 
aim  is  to  secure  any  and  every  advantage  for  British  trade,  from  seizing 
and  holding,  when  the  time  to  them  seems  propitious,  just  what  is 
thought  necessary  to  strengthen  the  weak  places  in  their  trade-route 
patrol. 

War  ships  to  pa.trol  a  trade  route  efficiently,  to  guard  their  own  com- 
merce and  damage  that  of  an  enemy,  require  bases  from  which  to  operate 
with  the  certainty  of  finding  their  necessities  supplied  at  any  oneof  them. 
Merchant  vessels  in  time  of  war  require  them  as  points  of  rendezvous 
and  refuge,  and,  as  we  have  seen,  Great  Britain  has*  foreseen  the 
necessities  and  provided  such  bases  at  convenient  points.  No  other 
nation  has  this  immense  advantage,  although  France  and  Germany 
ar#  making  great  efforts,  the  former  in  Africa,  Asia,  and  Australasia, 
and  the  latter,  so  far,  in  Africa  and  Australasia  only,  where  coal  depots 
and  bases  for  naval  operations  have  been  established. 

The  United  States  has  the  right  to  establish  coal  depots  in  Samoa 
and  Hawaii,  and  at  present  small  supplies  exist  at  both  places;  but 


94  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

unprotected  they  are  of  no  value,  and  Germany  has  aiual  rights  in  the 
former. 

The  concession  in  1887  of  Pearl  River,  in  Hawaii,  to  the  United  States 
for  use  as  naval  station,  with  exclusive  privilege  of  establishing  a  dry 
dock,  storehouses,  and  repair  shops,  is  a  valuable  one,  but  has  never 
been  utilized.  The  situation  is  admirable,  and  the  estimated  cost  of 
necessary  fortifications  and  harbor  works  is  moderate  in  view  of  the 
great  advantage  to  our  nation. 

Our  position  with  regard  to  dry  docks  in  the  Pacific  is  peculiarly 
weak.  Modern  war  vessels  require  docking  at  intervals,  and  a  fleet  to 
maintain  command  of  the  sea  must  have  dry  docks  in  which  to  make 
repairs  and  maintain  the  ship  in  a  state  of  full  efficiency  as  to  speed. 
We  have  not  one  dock  outside  the  mainland  of  our  country  which 
would  be  available  for  our  ships  in  time  of  war;  and  on  the  entire 
Pacific  coast  have  at  present  but  one  large  and  one  small  dock,  at  the 
Mare  Island  navy-yard,  and  one  building  in  Puget  Sound,  and  our 
vessels  in  the  Pacific  would  have  to  return  to  them  whenever  docking 
was  requisite. 

Great  Britain,  on  the  contrary,  has  made  ample  provisions  in  this 
respect.  Bordering  on  the  Pacific  she  has  Government  dry  docks  at 
Esquimault,  Brisbane,  Sydney,  Melbourne,  and  Hongkong,  while  many 
private  docks  are  available  in  the  ports  of  Australia,  New  Zealand, 
Hongkong,  Singapore,  Penang,  and  Lndia. 

France  has  Government  dry  docks  in  New  Caledonia  and  Saigon, 
Cochin  China.  Holland  has  governmental  dry  docks,  which  would 
probably  be  available  for  Germany,  in  Sourabaya  and  Batavia;  and 
Russia  has  two  large  ones  in  the  southeast  corner  of  Siberia,  at  Vladi- 
vostock.  We  must  have  additional  docking  facilities  if  we  are  to 
maintain  either  naval  power  or  trade  in  the  Pacific  waters  it  time  of 
war. 

Coming  now  to  the  strategic  advantages  from  coast  defense  point  of 
view. 

No  naval  force  can  operate  on  a  hostile  coast  without  a  friendly  base 
within  easy  distance.  Our  Atlantic  coast  is  faced  by  a  line  of  foreign 
bases.  England  has  strongly  fortified  Halifax  on  our  Northeast  border, 
and  built  Government  dry  docks  both  there  and  at  St.  Johns.  Six 
hundred  and  ninety  miles  from  New  York,  and  less  than  600  from  the 
Carolina  coast,  she  has  at  great  expense  fortified  Bermuda,  furnished 
it  with  the  largest  floating  dry  dock  in  the  world,  and  supplied  it  with 
great  stores  of  coal  and  shops  for  repair  work,  and  all  for  the  sole  pur- 
pose of  maintaining  a  base  from  which  British  naval  forces  could  oper- 
ate against  the  Atlantic  coast  of  the  United  States  in  time  of  war. 
Jamaica  and  St.  Lucia  perform  the  same  duty  with  regard  to  our  Gulf 
coasts  and  the  isthmus  transit;  and  it  is  a  notable  fact  that  the 
defenses  of  all  these  places  have  been  extensively  augmented  since  an 
isthmus  canal  became  a  possibility  of  the  near  future. 

France  has  St.  Pierre  and  Miquelon  on  our  Northeast  borders,  with 
Guadeloupe,  Martinique,  and  Cayenne  on  the  South  coast.  Spain  has 
her  bases  in  Cuba  and  Porto  Rico;  the  Dutch  in  Curacoa,  and  the 
Danes  in  St.  Thomas;  and  it  is  not  improbable  that  either  of  the  two 
latter  may  be  available  for  a  German  base  should  occasion  arise. 

Any  power  which  has  not  such  a  naval  base  off  our  coast  can  not 
make  successful  war  upon  the  United  States,  a  fact  which  was  quickly 
appreciated  by  Italy  during  a  late  diplomatic  incident;  and  an  early 
move  of  the  United  States  in  a  war  with  either  of  the  European  powers 
possessing  these  bases  would  have  to  be  their  capture  and  retention,  if 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  95 

possible.  If  the  United  States  held  all  the  bases  named  it  would  be 
practically  free  from  attack  on  its  Atlantic  coast. 

In  the  Pacific  we  now  have  the  opportunity  to  secure  our  Western 
coast  by  accepting  possession  of  Hawaii  as  our  most  rational  form  of 
coast  defense.  With  adequate  fortifications  on  these  islands,  and  a 
suitable  naval  force  in  the  Pacific,  our  coast  would  be  far  more  secure 
in  time  of  war  than  it  could  be  made  by  any  expenditure  for  harbor 
defenses  on  the  mainland  alone. 

Further,  if  our  commercial  interests  are  to  predominate  in  the  future 
in  those  waters  our  fleet  must  predominate  there  also,  and  a  properly 
proportionate  fleet  would  be  a  sufficient  guaranty  that  serious  attack 
would  not  be  made  on  this  most  important  naval  base. 

The  same  is  equally  true  of  our  entire  Pacific  coast,  as  with  such  a 
fleet,  with  bases  at  San  Francisco,  Hawaii,  and  the  entrance  to  the 
Nicaragua  Canal,  not  only  would  our  Pacific  trade  be  secure  and  that 
of  any  other  power  untenable,  but  our  coast  line  would  be  equally  secure, 
and  American  control  of  the  canal,  so  far  as  the  Pacific  end  of  it  is 
concerned,  would  be  assured. 

Excepting  Hawaii  the  only  base  for  possible  extensive  naval  opera- 
tions against  the  Pacific  States  is  the  British  station  at  Esquimault, 
which  is  susceptible  of  capture  by  a  land  expedition. 

It  must  be  distinctly  understood  that  Hawaii  can  not  remain  indepen- 
dent supported  only  by  moral  force.  It  is  of  too  great  strategic  value 
and  will  assuredly  meet  the  fate  of  all  islands  and  isolated  points  of 
like  value  at  the  hands  of  either  Great  Britain,  France,  or  Germany, 
each  of  the  two  former  having  already  once  seized  them  (once  in  1843 
and  once  in  1849).  Even  if  the  United  States  were  by  moral  force  to  pre- 
serve Hawaiian  independence  during  time  of  peace  the  islands  would 
undoubtedly  be  seized  by  the  first  naval  power  with  whom  we  went  to 
war,  and  held  by  all  the  force  it  could  muster,  as  a  base  from  which  to 
attack  our  Western  coast  and  gain  control  of  the  prospective  canal. 

For  the  United  States  to  expend  great  sums  on  the  local  defense 
of  San  Francisco  in  the  shape  of  forts  and  harbor  defenses,  and  leave 
Hawaii  to  become  a  base  for  operations  against  them,  is  a  short-sighted 
and  extravagant  policy. 

As  Bermuda  is  a  standing  menace  in  front  of  our  Atlantic  coast,  so 
will  Ha  waii  become  a  similar  one  to  our  Pacific  coast,  if  we  do  not  hold 
it  as  an  essential  part  of  our  coast  defense. 

COAL. 

To  make  the  advantage  of  Hawaii  to  this  country  from  a  naval  stand- 
point clearer  I  will  devote  a  little  time  to  some  details  of  the  question 
of  coal  and  coaling  stations. 

The  possession  of  unlimited  coal  is  a  great  advantage  to  a  nation,  but 
in  order  to  convert  it  into  naval  advantage  it  must  be  placed  on  board 
of  a  ship  of  war.  This  is  a  simple  thing  with  us  so  long  as  our  naval 
vessels  are  in  home  ports,  or  so  long  as  we  are  at  peace,  wherever  the 
ships  may  be.  It  is  in  time  of  war  that  the  difficulties  of  making  our 
naval  strength  felt  away  from  our  own  coasts  will  become  apparent. 
Keutral  ports  will  then  be  closed  to  our  cruisers  so  far  as  supplying  their 
coal  necessities  is  concerned,  for  coal  will  be  contraband  of  war  as  much 
as  is  other  ammunition.  Coaling  in  the  open  sea  from  supply  ships  is, 
up  to  the  present  time,  an  unsolved  problem,  and  even  if  satisfactory 
mechanical  arrangements  be  devised  the  supply  vessels  must  run  the 
gauntlet  of  hostile  cruis  srs  for  great  distances.    A  certainty  of  finding 


96  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

the  collier  in  specified  localities  on  definite  dates,  which  is  almost  impos- 
sible without  naval  stations,  must  also  be  established,  as  a  failure  to 
meet  would  result  in  leaving  the  cruiser  helpless. 

Wind  is  no  longer  a  motive  power  for  ships  of  war,  and  the  days 
when  a  cruiser  could  keep  the  sea  and  do  the  work  she  was  designed 
for,  so  long  as  her  provisions  and  water  held  out,  are  gone.  Coal  is 
now  the  prime  necessity,  and  unless  our  cruisers  have  points  provided 
for  them  to  which  they  can  go  with  a  certainty  of  finding  a  supply, 
they  will  on  the  outbreak  of  war  have  to  be  brought  home  to  operate 
off  our  own  coasts  from  the  home  bases  of  supply,  or  else  be  left  pow- 
erless in  neutral  harbors  until  the  close  of  the  war. 

The  only  other  solution  is  to  build  cruisers  of  such  size  that  they 
can  carry  their  own  coal  and  remain  at  sea  for  long  periods  independent 
of  coal  depots  or  supply  vessels. 

According  to  the  published  performances  of  our  cruisers  the  very  best 
that  has  yet  been  done  by  one  of  them  is  the  late  voyage  of  the  Phila- 
delphia, steaming  from  Callao  to  Honolulu,  a  distance  of  5,200  miles, 
burning  703  tons  of  coal  in  eighteen  days,  at  the  rate  of  12  knots  an 
hour,  and  39  tons  of  coal  a  day,  which  gives  a  distance  of  7-3  knots 
per  ton  of  coal  burned. 

As  this  ship  and  all  the  others  of  her  class  (and  we  have  a  number 
of  them)  can  carry  only  about  1,000  tons  of  coal,  in  some  cases  less, 
she  would  have  been  powerless  to  reach  any  other  port  from  Honolulu 
had  she  not  been  able  to  replenish  her  supply  upon  arrival. 

It  is  not  known  that  the  cruisers  of  any  foreign  power  have  done  so 
well ;  and  it  is  a  fact  that,  class  for  class,  our  cr uisers  carry  more  coal 
and  steam  better  than  do  those  of  other  nations;  but  it  is  also  a  fact  that 
we  need  much  greater  coal-carrying  capacity  than  we  have  at  present, 
or  else  we  must  follow  foreign  example  and  establish  coal  depots. 

It  is  published  that  we  have  two  commerce-destroyers,  with  light 
batteries,  substantially  completed,  each  to  carry  2,200  tons  of  coal, 
which  at  the  Philadelphia's  rate  of  7*3  knots  per  ton  of  coal,  would 
enable  them  to  cover  at  slow  speed  about  16,000  miles ;  but  if  they  are 
to  destroy  commerce  they  will  have  to  occasionally  steam  at  much 
greater  speed  than  10  to  12  knots,  and  it  is  safe  to  say  that  in  time  of 
war  they  could  not  cover  a  greater  distance  than  12,000  miles  without 
replenishing  their  supply.  This  would  mean  an  immediate  return  after 
a  cruise  of  6,000  miles,  as  we  have  now  no  place  to  which  they  could  go 
away  from  our  mainland,  with  a  certainty  of  getting  the  coal  that  is 
absolutely  necessary  to  their  usefulness. 

England  does^not  need  a  coal  capacity  in  any  of  her  vessels  greater 
than  will  enable  them  to  traverse  4,000  or  5,000  miles,  as  we  have 
seen  that  her  coal  depots  are  planted  along  the  trade  routes  at  dis- 
tances of  about  3,000  miles. 

France,  where  she  has  important  commercial  interests,  has  similar 
depots;  so  have  Germany,  Holland,  and  Spain. 

Eussia  is  nearly  as  badly  off  as  is  the  United  States,  but  she  has  the 
fortified  depotof  Vladivostock  in  Asiatic  waters  and  has  lately  acquired 
the  use  of  French  ports  wherever  she  may  need  them.  Even  with  these 
advantages  she  is  furnishing  herself  with  crusiers  of  great  size,  carry- 
ing over  3,000  tons  of  coal. 

We  have  neither  the  depots  nor  the  cruisers  of  great  coal  endurance; 
and  the  most  rational  mode  of  strengthening  this  very  apparent  weakness 
would  seem  to  be  to  obtain  coal  depots,  as  the  English  do,  and  to  begin 
by  accepting  the  most  valuable  one  of  Hawaii, 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  97 

As  an  example  on  this  point,  no  foreign  armored  ships  have  a  greater 
coal  endurance  than  those  of  Italy,  yet  not  one  of  these  immense  ships 
can  steam  over  7,000  miles  without  replenishing  its  supply,  and  some 
of  them  can  not  do  so  well. 

As  the  distance  from  Italy  to  the  coast  of  the  United  States  is  prac- 
tically about  5,000  miles,  they  would  have  a  very  brief  period  of  use- 
fulness after  arrival  on  our  coasts,  in  the  absence  of  the  bases  possessed 
by  other  European  powers,  and  would  have  to  rely  on  supply  cruisers 
over  a  long  line  of  communication,  which  could  be  cut  off  by  cruisers, 
in  the  absence  of  the  most  efficient  patrol. 

The  same  is  quite  true  of  the  United  States  or  any  other  power  which 
undertakes  a  naval  expedition  without  a  base,  as  no  number  of  batteries 
or  battalions  stationed  on  the  mainland  can  secure  the  safety  of  the 
needed  supplies  while  in  transit,  or  the  usefulness  of  a  naval  force  at 
any  distance  from  a  home  port. 

The  development  of  foreign  commerce  is  one,  perhaps  the  principal, 
argument  advanced  for  the  free-trade  policy  of  the  Democratic  party. 
While  not  agreeing  with  this  policy,  I  am  willing  to  agree  that  ocean 
trade  is  an  important  source  of  prosperity  to  .any  nation.  That  of  the 
Pacific  is  just  opening  on  an  era  of  activity  which  will  be  vastly  aug- 
mented on  the  completion  of  an  isthmus  canal,  and  this  trade  belongs 
to  the  United  States,  if  we  are  wise  enough  to  secure  it. 

But  trade,  to  establish  itself  on  a  sound  basis,  must  feel  assured  of 
protection  at  all  times,  and  know  that  it  will  not  have  to  be  abandoned 
on  the  outbreak  of  every  little  war  which  may  turn  loose  upon  it  a  pack 
of  destroyers  of  insignificant  strength,  compelling  it  to  lie  idle  with  all 
the  capital  involved  until  peace  prevails  again. 

If  the  United  States  aim  at  commercial  supremacy  in  the  Pacific,  its 
trade  must  have  such  assurances,  and  a  first  necessity  is  the  acquisi- 
tion of  bases  for  the  protectors.  Not  only  Hawaii  is  needed,  but  Somoa 
(distant  2,260  miles) ;  a  station  at  the  mouth  of  the  canal  (say,  4,200 
miles  from  Honolulu  and  3,000  from  San  Francisco) ;  and  another  at 
the  Straits  of  Magellan  (distant  4,000  miles  from  the  isthmus  and  5,000 
from  Somoa).  With  these  bases,  a  properly  organized  fleet  of  suffi- 
cient size  to  keep  the  communications  open  between  them,  will  hold 
the  Pacific  as  an  American  ocean,  dominated  by  American  commercial 
enterprise  for  all  time. 

Now,  the  value  of  these  islands  to  the  United  States  for  the  reasons 
I  have  stated  has  long  been  appreciated  by  American  statesmen. 

Minister  Stevens,  whatever  attacks  may  be  made  upon  him,  is  cer- 
tainly an  able,  farsighted,  and  loyal  American,  and  his  letter  of 
November  20, 1892,  to  Secretary  Foster,  on  this  subject,  is  well  worthy 
of  perusal. 

Minister  McCook  wrote  in  1866  to  Secretary  Seward  in  regard  to  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  in  part,  as  follows: 

"They  are  the  resting  place,  supply  depot,  and  reshipping  point  of 
all  our  American  whaling  fleet.  The  greater  part  of  the  agricultural, 
commercial,  and  moneyed  interests  of  the  islands  are  in  the  hands  of 
American  citizens.  All  vessels  from  our  Pacific  coast  to  China  pass 
close  to  these  shores. 

"  Geographically  these  islands  occupy  the  same  important  relative 
position  toward  the  Pacific  that  the  Bermudas  do  toward  the  Atlantic 
coast  of  the  United  States,  a  position  which  makes  them  important  to 
the  English,  convenient  to  the  French,  and,  in  the  event  of  war  with 
either  of  those  powers,  absolutely  necessary  to  the  United  States-" 
S.  Kep.  227 Z 


98  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Minister  Pierce,  in  1871,  wrote  the  following  to  Secretary  Fish: 

"Impressed  with  the  importance  of  the  subject  now  presented  for 
consideration,  I  beg  leave  to  suggest  the  inquiry  whether  the  period 
has  not  arrived  making  it  proper,  wise,  and  sagacious  for  the  United 
States  Government  to  again  consider  the  project  of  annexing  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  to  the  territory  of  the  Eepnblic.  That  such  is  to  be 
the  political  destiny  of  this  archipelago  seems  a  foregone  conclusion 
in  the  opinion  of  all  who  have  given  attention  to  the  subject  in  this 
country,  the  United  States,  England,  France,  and  Germany. 

"A  majority  of  the  aborigines,  Creoles,  and  naturalized  foreigners  of 
this  country,  as  I  am  credibly  informed,  are  favorable,  even  anxious  for 
the  consummation  of  the  measure  named. 

"The  native  population  is  fast  disappearing.  The  number  existing 
is  now  estimated  at  45,000,  having  decreased  about  15,000  since  the 
census  of  1860.  The  number  of  foreigners  in  addition  is  between  5,000 
and  6,000,  two-thirds  of  whom  are  from  the  United  States,  and  they  own 
more  than  that  proportion  of  foreign  capital,  as  represented  in  the  agri- 
culture, commerce,  navigation,  and  whale  fisheries  of  the  Kingdom. 

"I  now  proceed  to  state  some  points  of  a  more  general  character 
which  should  influence  the  United  States  Government  in  their  decision 
of  the  policy  of  acquiring  possession  of  this  archipelago,  their  geograph- 
ical position,  occupying,  as  it  does,  an  important  central  strategical 
point  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean,  valuable,  perhaps  necessary,  to  the 
United  States  for  a  naval  depot  and  coaling  station,  and  to  shelter  and 
protect  our  commerce  and  navigation,  which  in  this  hemisphere  is  des- 
tined to  increase  enormously  from  our  intercourse  with  the  500,000,000 
population  of  China,  Japan,  and  Australia.  Humboldt  predicted  that 
the  commerce  on  the  Pacific  would  in  time  rival  that  of  the  Atlantic. 
A  future  generation,  no  doubt,  will  see  the  prophecy  fulfilled. 

"The  immense  injury  inflicted  on  American  navigation  and  commerce 
by  Great  Britain  in  the  war  of  1812-1814  through  her  possession  ot 
Bermuda  and  other  West  India  Islands,  as  also  that  suffered  by  the 
English  from  French  privateers  from  the  Isle  of  France  during  the  wars 
between  those  two  nations,  are  instances  in  proof  of  the  necessity  of 
anticipating  and  preventing,  if  we  can,  similar  evils  that  may  issue  from 
these  islands  if  held  by  other  powers. 

"Their  proximity  to  the  Pacific  States  of  the  Union,  fine  climate  and 
soil,  and  tropical  productions  of  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  fruits,  hides,  goat- 
skins, salt,  cotton,  fine  wool,  etc.,  required  in  the  West,  in  exchange  for 
flour,  grain,  lumber,  shooks,  and  manufactures  of  cotton,  wool,  iron,  and 
other  articles,  are  evidence  of  the  commercial  value  of  one  to  the  other 
region.  Is  it  probable  that  any  European  power  who  may  hereafter  be 
at  war  with  the  United  States  will  refrain  from  taking  possession  of  this 
weak  Kingdom  in  view  of  the  great  injury  that  could  be  done  to  our 
commerce  through  their  acquisition  to  them?" 

Secretary  Fish,  in  a  letter  of  instruction  of  March,  1873,  used  the  fol- 
lowing language: 

"The  position  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  as  an  outpost,  fronting  and 
commanding  the  whole  of  our  possessions  on  the  Pacific  Ocean,  gives  to 
the  future  of  those  islands  a  peculiar  interest  to  the  Government  and 
people  of  the  United  States.  It  is  very  clear  that  this  Government  can 
not  be  expected  to  assent  to  their  transfer  from  their  present  control  to 
that  of  any  powerful  maritime  or  commercial  nation.  Such  transfer  to 
a  maritime  power  would  threaten  a  military  surveillance  in  the  Pacific 
similar  to  that  which  Bermuda  has  afforded  in  the  Atlantic.    The  latter 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  99 

has  been  submitted  to  from  necessity,  inasmuch  as  it  was  congenital 
with  our  Government,  but  we  desire  no  additional  similar  outposts  in 
the  hands  of  those  who  may  at  some  future  time  use  them  to  our  dis- 
advantage.77 

Gen.  Schofield,  in  May,  1873,  under  confidential  instructions  from  the 
Secretary  of  War,  made  a  full  report  upon  the  value  of  Pearl  Harbor 
as  a  coaling  and  repair  station,  recommending  its  acquisition,  and  later 
lie  appeared  before  a  committee  of  the  House  of  Eepresentatives  to  urge 
the  importance  of  some  measure  looking  to  the  control  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  by  the  United  States. 

Now,  the  desired  and  desirable  opportunity  has  arrived.  The  Pro- 
visional Goverment  proposes  a  treaty  of  annexation,  and  the  so-called 
Queen  is  ready  to  part  with  such  rights  as  she  has  for  a  comparatively 
small  sum. 

The  whites  of  the  island  desire  earnestly  to  join  us,  and  the  natives 
certainly  are  not  violently  opposed. 

This  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  when  the  American  flag  was  lowered 
in  Hawaii,  by  order  of  Commissioner  Blount,  although  it  created  some 
excitement  in  this  country,  it  caused  no  rejoicing  there,  according  to 
Mr.  Blount's  report. 

He  says: 

"  Inspired  with  such  feelings,  and  confident  no  disorder  would  ensue, 
I  directed  the  removal  of  the  flag  of  the  United  States  from  the  Gov- 
ernment building,  and  the  return  of  the  American  troops  to  their  ves- 
sels. This  was  accomplished  without  any  demonstration  of  joy  or 
grief  on  the  part  of  the  populace.77 

Capt.  Hooper  says : 

"  There  were  no  demonstrations  of  any  kind  as  the  American  flag 
came  down,  and  not  a  single  cheer  greeted  the  Hawaiian  flag  as  it  was 
raised  aloft.  The  native  men  stood  around  in  groups,  or  singly,  smok- 
ing and  chatting  and  nodding  familiarly  to  passing  friends,  or  leaning 
idly  against  the  trees  and  fences,  while  the  women  and  children,  which 
formed  a  large  proportion  of  the  assemblage,  were  talking  and  laugh- 
ing good-naturedly.  As  the  hour  for  hauling  down  the  American  flag 
approached,  many  people,  men,  women,  and  children  could  be  seen 
approaching  the  Government  square  in  a  most  leisurely  manner,  and 
showing  more  interest  in  the  gala-day  appearance  of  the  crowd  than 
in  the  restoration  of  their  national  flag.  The  air  of  good-natured  indif- 
ference and  idle  curiosity  with  which  the  native  men  regarded  the  pro- 
ceedings, and  the  presence  of  the  women  and  children  in  their  white  or 
bright- colored  dresses  was  more  suggestive  of  a  country  "fair77  or 
horse  race  than  the  sequel  of  a  '  revolution.7  77 

Even  the  presence  of  the  "armed  forces77  of  the  Provisional  Govern- 
ment, numbering,  perhaps,  200,  parading  the  corridors  of  the  Govern- 
.ment  house,  failed  to  elicit  any  sign  of  a  feeling  of  anger  or  resentment. 

Mr.  John  F.  Colburn,  one  of  the  Queen7s  cabinet,  in  describing  the 
revolution,  says: 

"The  next  day  (Monday)  the  proclamation  dictated  by  these  gentle- 
men was  printed  and  posted  and  distributed  all  over  town.  Later  on 
in  the  day  two  mass  meetings  were  held,  one  by  the  native  element 
and  the  other  by  the  foreign  element.  At  the  former  the  natives 
accepted  the  proclamation,  though  it  was  directly  contrary  to  what 
they  wanted  (a  new  constitution),  and  the  latter  denounced  the  Queen 
and  left  everything  in  the  hands  of  the  committee  of  safetv  suoke.n 
about,77 


100  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

Colburn's  remark  that  the  natives  accepted  the  proclamation,  althoi  gh 
it  was  directly  contrary  to  what  they  wanted,  is  delicious. 

There  is  no  reason  against  annexation  in  the  dissimilarity  of  laws, 
as  an  official  document  issued  by  our  War  Department  in  February  of 
this  year  contains, the  following  statement: 

"The  laws  are  modeled  on  those  of  the  United  States.  There  is  a 
supreme  court  of  justice,  and,  in  addition,  circuit  judges  and  justices 
of  the  peace." 

On  the  authority  of  this  book  I  also  state  that  01  per  cent  of  the 
trade  of  these  islands  is  with  the  United  States. 

The  former  policy  of  our  Government  toward  Hawaii  and  the  antici- 
pation of  their  eventual  annexation  is  detailed  in  the  report  of  Secre- 
tary Foster,  of  February  15,  1893,  from  which  I  will  read  briefly. 

[Seriate  Ex.  Doc.  No.  77,  Fifty-second  Congress,  second  session.] 

"The  policy  of  the  United  States  has  been  consistently  and  con- 
stantly declared  against  any  foreign  aggression  in  the  Kingdom  of 
Hawaii  inimical  to  the  necessarily  paramount  rights  and  interests  of  the 
American  people  there  and  the  uniform  contemplation  of  their  annex- 
ation as  a  contingent  necessity.  But  beyond  that  it  is  shown  that 
annexation  has  been  on  more  than  one  occasion  avowed  as  a  policy  and 
attempted  as  a  fact.  Such  a  solution  was  admitted  as  early  as  1850 
by  so  farsighted  a  statesman  as  Lord  Palmerston  when  he  recom- 
mended to  a  visiting  Hawaiian  commission  the  contingency  of  a  pro- 
tectorate under  the  United  States,  or  of  becoming  an  integral  part  of 
this  nation  in  fulfillment  of  a  destiny  due  to  close  neighborhood  and 
commercial  dependence  upon  the  Pacific  States. 

"Early  in  1851  a  contingent  deed  of  cession  of  the  Kingdom  was 
drawn  and  signed  by  the  King  and  placed  sealed  in  the  hands  of  the 
commissioner  of  the  United  States,  who  was  to  open  it  and  act  upon 
its  provisions  at  the  first  hostile  shot  fired  by  France  in  subversion  ot 
Hawai ian  independence. 

"In  1851  Mr.  Marcy  aadvocated  annexation,  and  a  draft  of  a  treaty 
was  actually  agreed  upon  with  the  Hawaiian  ministry,  but  its  com- 
pletion was  delayed  by  the  successful  exercise  of  foreign  influence 
upon  the  heir  to  the  throne,  and  finally  defeated  by  the  death  of  the  King, 
Kamehameha  III. 

"In  1867  Mr.  Seward,  having  become  advised  of  a  strong  annexa- 
tion sentiment  in  the  islands,  instructed  our  minister  at  Honolulu 
favorably  to  receive  any  native  overtures  for  annexation.  And  on  the 
12th  of  September,  1867,  he  wrote  to  Mr.  McOook  that  'if  the  policy 
of  annexation  should  conflict  with  the  policy  of  reciprocity,  annexa- 
tion is  in  every  case  to  be  preferred.' 

"President  Johnson  in  his  annual  message  of  December  9,  1868, 
regarded  reciprocity  with  Hawaii  as  desirable  '  until  the  people  of  the 
island  shall  of  themselves,  at  no  distant  day,  voluntarily  apply  for 
admission  into  the  Union.' 

"In  1871,  on  the  5th  of  April,  President  Grant,  in  a  special  message, 
significantly  solicited  some  expression  of  the  views  of  the  Senate 
respecting  the  advisability  of  annexation. 

"In  an  instruction  of  March  25, 1873,  Mr.  Fish  considered  the  neces- 
sity of  annexing  the  islands  in  accordance  with  the  wise  foresight  of 
thoro  who  see  a  future  that  must  extend  the  jurisdiction  and  the  lim- 
its of  this  nation,  and  that  will  require  a  resting  spot  in  midocean 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  101 

between  tlie  Pacific  coast  and  the  vast  domains  of  Asia,  whicK  jire  now 
opening  to  commerce  and  Christian  civilization.'  And  he  directed  'our 
minister  not  to  discourage  the  feeling  which  may  exist  in  favor  of 
annexation  to  the  United  States,  but  to  seek  and  even  invite  infoi  [na- 
tion touching  the  terms  and  conditions  upon  which  that  object  might 
be  effected. 

U  Since  the  conclusion  of  the  reciprocity  treaty  of  1875  it  has  been 
the  obvious  policy  of  the  succeeding  administrations  to  assert  and 
defend  against  other  powers  the  exclusive  commercial  rights  of 
the  United  States  and  to  fortify  the  maintenance  of  the  existing 
Hawaiian  Government  through  the  direct  support  of  the  United  States 
so  long  as  that  Government  shall  prove  able  to  protect  our  paramount 
rights  and  interests. 

"On  December  1, 1881,  Mr.  Blaine,  in  an  instruction  to  the  American 
minister  at  Honolulu,  wrote: 

<uIt  (this  Government)  firmly  believes  that  the  position  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands,  as  the  key  to  the  dominion  of  the  American  Pacific, 
demands  their  benevolent  neutrality,  to  which  end  it  will  earnestly 
cooperate  with  the  native  Government.  And  if  through  any  cause  the 
maintenance  of  such  a  position  of  benevolent  neutrality  should  be 
found  by  Hawaii  to  be  impracticable,  this  Government  would  then 
unhesitatingly  meet  the  altered  situation  by  seeking  an  avowedly 
American  solution  of  the  grave  issues  presented.'" 

Now,  a  word  as  to  the  objections  to  annexation  and  I  will  close.  I 
know  that  a  new  line  of  thought  has  been  developed  among  us,  which 
I  can  not  better  characterize  than  by  calling  it  a  system  of  national 
self-abnegation. 

If  any  policy  can  be  shown  to  be  for  the  special  advantage  of  the 
United  States  gentlemen  holding  these  views  oppose  it. 

If  Hawaii  is  valuable  to  us  there  will  be  so  much  the  more  generosity 
in  presenting  it  to  England. 

If  our  business  has  been  more  prosperous,  and  our  labor  better  paid 
than  elsewhere,  they  think  this  is  not  fair  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  and 
advocate  a  reduction  of  the  tariff  to  equalize  conditions. 

I  do  not  address  myself  to  gentlemen  holding  such  views,  as  I  can 
not  understand  their  position  nor  they  mine. 

From  my  own  standpoint  I  have  heard  only  one  objection  to  the 
policy  of  annexation  that  seemed  to  me  to  have  substantial  weight.  It 
is  that  the  population  of  the  Sandwich  Islands  are  in  great  part  unfit 
for  American  citizenship.  This  may  be  true,  but  in  that  case  we  can 
annex  it  as  a  part  of  one  of  our  present  States,  or  maintain  a  territo- 
rial government  until  they  are  fitted,  as  we  are  doing  in  the  case  of 
Alaska,  and  as  we  have  done  heretofore  with  other  annexations. 

The  fear  of  annexing  these  small  islands,  which  we  so  much  need, 
ou  grounds  of  opposition  to  territorial  expansion,  seems  peculiar,  almost 
absurd,  in  a  country  more  than  three-quarters  of  whose  territory  comes 
from  annexations  by  purchase  or  otherwise. 

Square  miles. 

In  1783  our  territory  amounted  to 827,  844 

The  Louisiana  pnrcliase  added .V 1, 179,  931 

Florida  added 59,  268 

Texas  added 376, 133 

The  Mexican  cession,  California,  etc 545,  783 

The  G adsden  purchase 45,  535 

The  Alaska  purchase 577,  390 

Making  a  total  of 3,603,884 


102  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

After  as 'sim Hating  all  this  territory  we  ought  not  to  be  afraid  of 
(3,000  square  miles  more1. 

To  summarize:  These  islands  will  not  only  be  valuable  to  us,  but 
their  possession  is  a  commercial  and  naval  necessity.  They  are  offered 
to  us  by  both  of  the  parties  who  claim  to  be  entitled  to  their  control. 
If  we  do  not  accept,  their  incorporation  by  one  of  the  European  powers 
is  likely,  and  they  will  be  a  menace  to  our  Pacific  coast  from  that  time 
forward. 

As  Americans,  actuated  by  the  desire  to  advance  our  country's  inter- 
ests, we  shall  never  have  a  greater  opportunity  than  the  present  one, 
and  I  sincerely  hope  we  shall  take  advantage  of  it. 

XY.  Also  the  following  extract  from  an  article,  pub- 
lished IN  HARPER'S  MAGAZINE  FOR  SEPTEMBER,  1883,  PREPARED 
BY  MR.  MARSHALL,  A  SPECIAL  ENVOY  OF  KAMEHAMEHA  III  TO  j 
THE  UNITED  STATES  AND  ENGLAND,  TO  ARRANGE  FOR  THE  REVO- 
CATION OF  THE  ACTS  OF  LORD  GEORGE  PAULET  IN  OCCUPYING 
HAWAII  AS  TERRITORY  OF  GREAT  BRITAIN. 

AN  UNPUBLISHED  CHAPTER  OF  HAWAIIAN  HISTORY. 

"From  1838  till  1843  the  Hawaiian  Islands  were  a  bone  of  conten- 
tion. Intrigues  were  constantly  set  on  foot  by  agents  and  subjects  of 
France  and  England,  having  for  their  object  the  subversion  of  the 
native  Government  and  the  seizure  of  the  islands.  In  1839  the  French 
compelled,  the  King,  Kamehameha  III,  to  comply  with  certain  unwar- 
rantable demands,  and  as  a  security  for  future  good  behavior  to  deposit 
$20,000.  It  was  thought  that  the  demand  was  made  in  expectation 
that  the  King  would  be  unable  to  comply,  and  that  thus  the  French 
would  have  an  excuse  to  seize  the  groups.  The  American  merchants 
came  forward  and  raised  the  sum,  and  the  peril  was  for  a  time  averted. 

"But  the  plots  continued,  and  in  1842  the  British  consul,  Ei chard 
Charleton,  a  coarse  and  illiterate  man,  incited  by  an  ambitious  adven- 
turer, one  Alexander  Simpson,  endeavored  to  involve  the  native  Gov-, 
eminent  in  difficulties  that  would  result  in  hoisting  the  British  flag  over 
the  group.  In  the  same  year  Sir  George  Simpson,  governor  of  the 
Hudson  Bay  Company's  territories,  visited  the  islands.  An  English 
gentleman  of  liberal  views,  he  would  not  lend  himself  to  the  intrigues 
of  his  countrymen,  albeit  one  of  them  was  his  nephew,  and  by  his  advice 
the  King,  harassed  on  all  sides,  decided  to  send  commissioners  to  the 
United  States,  England,  and  France  to  try  to  obtain,  if  possible,  a  defi- 
nite acknowledgment  of  his  Kingdom  and  sovereignty. 

"  To  this  important  embassy  were  appointed  Eev.  William  Eichards, 
formerly  one  of  the  American  missionaries,  but  who  had  been  for  some 
time  acting  as  adviser  to  the  King,  and  Haalileo,  a  native  chief.  They 
quietly  embarked  in  a  small  schooner  for  Mazatlan,  and  crossed  Mex- 
ico to  Vera  Cruz.  As  soon  as  it  was  known  that  they  had  left  the 
islands  on  this  mission  the  British  consul,  Charleton,  also  secretly 
embarked  for  London,  via  Mexico,  to  lay  his  complaints  before  the 
British  Government,  leaving  Simpson  as  deputy  to  carry  out  their  joint 
designs,  whom,  however,  the  Hawaiian  Government  declined  to 
recognize. 

"On  the  Mexican  coast  Charleton  fell  in  with  Lord  George  Paulet, 
commanding  Her  British  Majesty's  frigate,  the  Carysfort,  and  made  his 
lordship,  as  his  course  afterward  showed,  a  convert  to  his  schemes, 
and,  by  his  formal  and  plausable  complaints  against  the  King,  induced 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  103 

Rear- Admiral  Thomas,  commanding  the  British  sqiladron  on  that  sta- 
tion, to  order  the  Carysfort  to  Honolulu  for  the  purpose  of  investigating 
the  alleged  grievances. 

uOn  his  arrival  Lord  Paulet,  a  hot  headed  young  nobleman,  readily 
lent  himself  to  the  designs  of  Simpson,  without  inquiring  into  the 
merits  of  the  case,  dazzled  by  the  idea  of  so  early  in  his  career  making 
a  brilliant  stroke  for  his  country,  and  extending  her  drumbeat  round 
the  world  by  one  more  station.  Making  outrageous  demands  upon  the 
King,  at  the  cannon's  mouth,  compliance  with  which  he  knew  would  be 
impossible,  he  required,  as  an  alternative,  the  immediate  cession  of  the 
Kingdom  to  England,  or  he  would  open  fire  upon  the  city  and  declare 
war  in  the  name  of  Great  Britain. 

"In  this  terrible  crisis  the  proclamation  issued  by  this  native  King 
to  his  people  is  so  touching  and  so  king-like  that  I  will  quote  it  here: 

"  i  Where  are  you,  chiefs,  people,  and  commons  from  my  ancestors, 
and  people  from  foreign  lands  ? 

"  *  Hear  ye!  I  make  known  to  you  that  I  am  in  perplexity  by  reason 
of  difficulties  into  which  I  have  been  brought  without  cause,  therefore 
I  have  given  away  the  life  of  our  land.  Hear  ye !  but  my  rule  over 
you,  my  people,  and  your  privileges  will  continue,  for  I  have  hope 
that  the  life  of  the  land  will  be  restored  when  my  conduct  is  justified. 

" '  Done  at  Honolulu,  Oahu,  this  25th  day  of  February,  1843. 

"  <  Kamehameha  III. 
" '  Kekatjltjohi.' 

u  Lord  Paulet  took  formal  possession  of  the  islands,  installing  himself 
as  governor  of  Her  Majesty's  new  dominion,  destroyed  every  Hawaiian 
flag  he  could  get  hold  of,  and  placed  an  embargo  on  every  native  vessel, 
so  that  no  one  could  go  out  and  carry  the  news. 

"An  American  man-of-war,  the  Boston,  Oapt.  Long,  had  come  in  a 
few  days  before  the  cession.  Oapt.  Quackenbush,  late  of  Norfolk,  Va., 
was  then  a  midshipman  on  board  of  her.  The  Americans  were  very 
indignant.  They  had  their  guns  double- shotted  in  hopes  of  an  oppor- 
tunity to  interfere,  but,  being  on  a  cruise,  could  not  go  out  of  their  way 
to  carry  the  news,  and  could  only  remain  neutral. 

"Lord  Paulet  would  thus  have  cruelly  prevented  the  King  from 
communicating  with,  his  ambassadors,  who  were  abroad  successfully 
working  for  the  acknowledgment  of  his  independence,  hoping  to  com- 
mit the  home  Government  to  an  acceptance  of  this  *  voluntary '  cession 
at  the  cannon's  mouth  before  the  other  side  of  the  story  could  be  pre- 
sented to  it.  His  young  lordship  and  Simpson  chuckled  over  the  suc- 
cess of  the  stroke  by  which  they  had,  as  they  supposed,  closed  every 
avenue  of  egress  for  Hawaiian  vessels,  and  secured  the  arrival  of  their 
own  dispatches  in  England  in  advance  of  every  other  version  of  the 
story.  V  ankee  shrewdness  was,  however,  too  much  for  his  lordship's 
plans. 

"  It  happened  that  the  King  had  chartered  his  own  yacht,  HoikaiJca 
(Swift  Runner),  previously  to  the  cession,  to  an  American  house  for  a 
voyage  to  Mazatland  and  back.  Lord  Paulet,  anxious  to  get  posses- 
sion of  the  only  creditable  craft  at  the  islands,  in  order  to  send  Simp- 
son as  his  bearer  of  dispatches  to  England  by  the  speediest  way,  and 
being  prevented,  by  its  charter,  from  seizing  the  vessel  without  the  con- 
sent of  the  American  house,  offered,  in  case  they  would  relinquish 
their  charter,  to  allow  them  to  send  an  agent  on  the  ship  to  attend  to 
their  business  on  the  coast,  and  to  bring  down  any  freight  on  the 
return  trip,  thereby  saving  them  the  whole  expense  of  the  charter. 


104  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

"It  must  be  remembered  that  in  those  days  communication  between 
the  islands  of  the  Pacific  and  the  coast  was  very  infrequent,  depending 
on  merchant  ships  that  came  from  Boston  twice  a  year,  except  for 
occasional  chance  vessels. 

"Lord  Paulet  rightly  conjectured  that  the  Yankee  merchants  would 
jump  at  the  offer  to  have  all  their  business  transacted  at  his  expense, 
but  he  little  dreamed  of  all  the  use  that  might  be  made  of  the  oppor- 
tunity he  was  giving  them. 

"The  officers  of  the  Boston,  who  would  have  been  glad  of  an  excuse 
for  a  forcible  interference  with  his  lordship's  plans,  not  being  allowed 
that  pleasure,  consoled  themselves  by  giving  a  ball  on  board,  to  which 
the  officers  of  the  Carysfort  were  not  invited. 

"I  was  then  a  young  merchant  in  Honolulu,  and  attended  the  ball 
with  many  other  of  the  American  residents.  At  its  height  I  was 
quietly  invited  into  the  cabin  of  the  Boston,  where  I  found  Capt.  Long, 
Dr.  Judd,  previously  a  prominent  American  missionary,  then  acting  as 
the  King's  minister,  and  other  influential  citizens  and  warm  friends  of 
the  King.  Here  I  was  told  of  the  King's  desire  to  send  an  envoy  to 
England  to  present  his  protest  against  Lord  Pauleys  act  of  violence, 
and  his  answer  to  the  charges  against  him,  and  to  demand  the  restitu- 
tion of  his  sovereignty.  I  was  informed  also  of  the  opportunity  offered 
to  the  firm  of  Ladd  &  Co.  of  sending  a  messenger  to  the  coast  in  the 
yacht. 

"  Ladd  &  Co.,  who  were  warm  friends  of  the  island  Government,  had. 
proposed  that  the  King  should  send  a  secret  ambassador,  in  the 
character  of  their  commercial  agent,  thus  turning  Lord  Poulet's  master- 
stroke against  himself  in  the  neatest  possible  way. 

"I  was  asked  if  I  would  go  in  this  double  capacity  of  ostensible  super- 
cargo and  actual  minister  plenipotentiary. 

"Mr.  Charles  Brewer,  who  was  one  of  the  council,  a  noble-hearted 
man,  with  whom  I  was  about  associating  myself  in  business — now 
enjoying  a  green  old  age  in  Boston — not  only  gave  consent  to  my 
going,  but  agreed  to  advance  for  the  King  the  necessary  funds,  and 
take  his  pay  in  fire-wood,  all  of  the  King's  other  revenues  having  been 
cut  off. 

"  I  readily  accepted  the  commission.  No  time  was  to  be  lost.  Lord 
Poulet  had  rechristened  the  Haikaika  as  'Her  Majesty's  tender  Albert,7 
and  was  fitting  her  out  with  all  possible  dispatch. 

"  The  King  and  his  premier,  a  princess  almost  equal  in  rank,  without 
whose  signature  none  of  his  acts  was  valid,  had  left  the  island  of  Oahu 
immediately  upon  the  cession,  and  in  sullen  dignity  of  despair  buried 
themselves  among  the  mountains  of  the  adjacent  island  of  Maui,  leaving 
Dr.  Judd,  his  minister,  to  represent  and  protect  his  interests — a  man 
of  indomitable  courage,  unusual  ability,  and  unflinching  devotion  to 
his  sovereign. 

"  Those  happy  isles  in  that  day  did  not  boast  a  lawyer.  My  creden- 
tials were  copied  verbatim,  except  necessary  variations,  from  the  old 
Blue  Book  containing  the  credentials  of  John  Adams  as  the  first  Amer- 
ican minister  to  England.  Mine  were  a  commission  as  envoy  extraor- 
dinary and  minister  plentipotentiary  to  the  court  of  St.  James  from  the 
native  King  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,"  the  title  Kamehameha  was 
allowed  by  Lord  Paulet  to  retain,  with  some  half  dozen  other  blank 
commissions  signed  by  the  King  and  premier,  to  be  filled  out  by  myself 
for  other  countries  as  occasion  might  require.  These  were  rendered 
necessary  by  the  unc  srtainty  of  my  finding  the  King's  other  ambassa- 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  105 

dors,  Haalileo  and  Kichards,  with  whom,  in  case  I  did  find  them,  I 
was  to  associate  myself. 

"  The  papers  were  drawn  up  by  Dr.  Judd  and  a  confidential  clerk  at 
midnight,  in  the  royal  tomb  in  Honolulu,  with  a  king's  coffin  for  a  table. 
So  secret  was  it  necessary  to  keep  the  transaction  that  even  this  clerk 
Was  not  trusted  with  the  name  of  the  ambassador,  which  was  left  to  be 
inserted  by  myself  after  I  had  sailed.  The  papers  prepared,  a  canoe 
with  picked  crew  of  Kanakas  was  dispatched  from  a  distant  point  of 
the  island  to  summon  His  Majesty  and  his  suite  to  a  midnight  council. 
Crossing  the  boisterous  channel  in  this  frail  conveyance,  they  landed  at 
midnight  on  the  shores  of  Waikiki,  a  suburb  of  Honolulu,'  and  in  its 
cocoauut  grove  my  credentials  received  the  signature  and  seal  of  the 
king  and  his  Kuhina-nui — a great  minister  " — Kekauluohi,  the  "Big- 
mouthed  Queen."  Then  the  King  and  his  attendants  returned  to  their 
mountains  without  Lord  Paulet  having  a  suspicion  that  they  had  ever 
left  them. 

"  The  American  consul  at  Honolulu  took  advantage  of  the  oppor- 
tunity also  to  make  me  the  bearer  of  his  dispatches  to  Washington, 
with  details  of  the  cession,  which  would,  of  course,  have  momentous 
interest  to  the  American  Government,  and  the  protest  of  the  Ameri- 
can residents  against  the  act  of  Lord  Paulet." 

XVI.  Also  the  following  extracts  from  the  history  of  the 

HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS,  BY  JAMES    JACKSON    JARVES,   PUBLISHED   IN 

1846. 

"The  chiefs,  fully  sensible  of  their  political  wants,  sent,  by  Mr.  Rich- 
ards, in  1836,  to  the  United  States  to  procure  a  suitable  person  to  fill 
the  situation  of  legal  adviser  and  teacher  in  the  new  policy  circum- 
stances were  forcing  upon  them.  In  this  way  they  were  backed  by 
the  opinion  of  the  mission,  who,  desirous  of  preserving  themselves 
from  the  responsibility,  would  gladly  have  seen  it  in  able  and  disinter- 
ested hands.  The  wants  of  the  chiefs  were  fully  appreciated  by  the 
American  board,  but  nothing  was  effected.  Individuals  of  talent,  by 
the  time  they  have  acquired  the  experience  suitable  for  such  a  post, 
which  in  its  real  effect  would  have  been  equivalent  to  the  supreme 
direction  of  public  affairs,  generally  have  fixed  themselves  in  permanent 
relations  at  home. 

"  With  all  the  modern  favor  in  the  cause  of  missions,  and  the  very 
many  excellent  discourses  yearly  uttered  from  pulpits,  we  rarely  see 
entire  disinterestedness  manifested  in  the  middle-aged — those  who  have 
known  the  world  and  tasted  its  goods,  however  prepared  they  may  be 
by  those  very  qualifications  for  the  posts  they  so  industriously  urge 
upon  others.  The  path  of  novelty,  enterprise,  and  benevolence  is  rarely 
filled  by  any  except  the  young  and  enthusiastic.  That  the  chiefs,  rely- 
ing on  the  philanthropy  of  any  experienced  public  man  to  have  com- 
plied with  their  request,  should  have  failed  is  what  might  reasonably 
have  been  anticipated.  A  young  man,  ambitious  of  the  influence  if 
not  of  the  actual  power  of  a  Peter  the  Great  or  an  Alfred,  on  a  petty 
scale,  might  readily  have  been  found,  but  the  chiefs  were  suspicious  of 
youth.  Desiring  age  and  experience,  they  should  have  offered  a  salary 
equivalent  to  some  of  the  highest  posts  in  the  United  States.  On  such 
a  contingency  few  objections  would  have  been  found  unanswerable. 
The  path  of  duty  would  have  been  opened  to  many  blind  to  all  other 
considerations.  This  is  human  nature,  as  we  see  it  in  the  pulpit  and 
on  the  bench.     In  every  position  it  requires  its  motive  power. 

"  It  is  said  that  the  honorable  Theo.  L.  Frelingshuysen  was  invited 


106  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 


, 


to  become  the  adviser  of  the  chiefs,  but  declined.    At  all  events, 
Richards  was  wholly  unsuccessful.     On  his  return,  the  position  of  the 
chiefs  being  none  the  less  embarrassing,  compelled  them  to  apply  to  the 
mission  for  aid.     Without  any  definite  action  of  their  body,  they  com- 
menced  that  system  which  by  the  natural  course  of  events  has  led  to  j 
the  direct  employment  of  several  of  their  number — having  first  been  i 
disconnected  from  their  ranks — in  the  service  of  the  Government.    For- 
eigners were  required  in  public  affairs.    The  chiefs  chose  those  on  whom  i 
they  could  most  rely,  and  whatever  may  have  been  their  errors  of  judg- 
ment, the  result  has  shown  that  they  were  not  mistaken  in  relying  upon 
their  zeal  and  fidelity:  and  it  may  be  well  be  doubted  whether,  at  that 
time,  the  Kingdom  furnished  men  more  suitable,  from  knowledge  and 
experience  with  the  people  and  foreigners  to  administer  to  its  wants. 
The  history  of  the  policy  they  adopted  will  be  traced  to  the  period  of 
its  present  development. 

u  The  mission  and  their  seceders  were  united  in  their  views  to  build' 
up  a  nation  of  Hawaiians   distinct  from  all  foreign  influence.     The  fol- 
lowing resolutions,  taken  from  the  missionary  minutes  for  1838,  show 
the  just  views  entertained  at  this  date: 

"  '1st  Resolved,  That  though  the  system  of  government  in  the  Sand-; 
wich  Islands  has,  since  the  commencement  of  the  reign  of  Liholiho, 
been  greatly  improved  through  the  influence  of  Christianity,  and  the 
introduction  of  written  and  printed  laws  and  the  salutary  agency  of 
Christian  chiefs  has  proved  a  great  blessing  to  the  people ;  still,  the 
system  is  so  very  imperfect  for  tie  management  of  the  affairs  of  a  civil^ 
ized  and  virtuous  nation  as  to  render  it  of  great  importance  that  cor-;! 
rect  views  of  the  rights  and  duties  of  rulers  and  subjects,  and  of  the 
principles  of  jurisprudence  and  political  economy,  should  be  held  up 
before  the  King  and  the  members  of  the  national  council. 

UL2d  Resolved)  That  it  is  the  duty  of  the  missionaries  to  teach  the 
doctrine  that  rulers  should  be  just,  ruling  in  the  fear  of  God,  seeking 
the  best  good  of  their  nation,  demanding  no  more  of  subjects,  as  such, 
than  the  various  ends  of  the  Government  may  justly  require 5  and  if 
church  members  among  them  violate  the  commands  of  God  they 
should  be  admonished  with  the  same  faithfulness  and  tenderness  in 
their  dependents. 

"  '3rd  Resolved,  That  rulers  in  power  are  so  by  the  province  of  God, 
and  in  an  important  sense  by  the  will  or  consent  of  the  people,  and 
ought  not  to  resign  or  shrink  from  the  cares  and  responsibilities  of 
their  offices;  therefore,  teachers  of  religion  ought  carefully  to  guard 
the  subjects  against  contempt  for  the  authority  of  their  rulers,  or  any 
evasion  or  resistance  of  government  orders,  unless  they  plainly  set  at 
defiance  the  commands  of  God. 

"  L4th  Resolved)  That  the  resources  of  the  nation  are  at  is  own  disposal 
for  its  defense,  improvement,  and  perfection,  and  subjects  ought  to  be 
taught  to  feel  that  a  portion  of  their  time  and  services,  their  property 
or  earnings,  may  rightfully  be  required  by  the  sovereign  or  national 
council  for  the  support  of  government  in  all  its  branches  and  depart- 
ments, and  that  it  is  a  Christian  duty  to  render  honor,  obedience,  fear  J 
custom,  and  tribute  to  whom  they  are  due,  as  taught  in  the  13th  of 
Romans,  and  that  the  sin  of  disloyalty,  which  tends  to  confusion,  anar- 
chy, and  ruin,  deserves  reproof  as  really  and  as  promptly  as  that  of 
injustice  on  the  part  of  rulers  or  any  other  violation  of  the  commands 
of  God.' 

"  '5th  Resolved,  That  rulers  should  be  allowed  to  do  what  they  will 
with  their  own,  or  with  what  they  have  a  right  to  demand  j  we  ought 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  107 

to  encourage  the  security  of  the  right  of  subjects  also  to  do  what  they 
will  with  their  own,  provided  they  render  to  Caesar  his  due.' 

"  i  6th  Resolved,  That  rulers  ought  to  be  prompted  to  direct  their 
efforts  to  the  promotion  of  general  intelligence  and  virtue  as  a  grand 
means  of  removing  the  existing  evils  of  the  system,  gradually  defining 
and  limiting  by  equitable  laws  the  rights  and  duties  of  all  classes, 
that  thus  by  improving  rather  than  revolutionizing  the  Government, 
its  administration  may  become  abundantly  salutary,  and  the  heredi- 
tary rulers  receive  no  detriment  but  corresponding  advantage.' 

" 1 7th  Resolved,  That  to  remove  the  improvidence  and  imbecility  of  the 
people,  and  promote  the  industry,  wealth,  and  happiness  of  the  nation, 
it  is  the  duty  of  the  mission  to  urge  mainly  the  motives  of  loyalty, 
patriotism,  social  kindness,  and  general  benevolence;  but,  while  on 
the  one  hand  he  should  not  condemn  their  artificial  wants,  ancient  or 
modern,  because  they  depend  on  fancy,  or  a  taste  not  refined,  he 
should,  on  the  other,  endeavor  to  encourage  and  multiply  such  as 
will  enlist  their  energies,  call  forth  ingenuity,  enterprise,  and  patient 
industry,  and  give  scope  for  enlarged  plans  of  profitable  exertion, 
which,  if  well  directed,  would  clothe  the  population  in  beautiful  cot- 
tons, fine  linen,  and  silk,  and  their  arable  fields  with  rich  and  various 
productions  suited  to  the  climate;  would  adorn  the  land  with  numer- 
ous comfortable,  substantial  habitations,  made  pleasant  by  elegant 
furniture,  cabinets,  and  libraries;  with  permanent  and  well  endowed 
school  houses  and  seminaries,  large,  commodious,  and  durable  churches, 
and  their  seas  and  harbors  with  ships  owned  by  natives  sufficient  to 
export  to  other  countries  annually  the  surplus  products  of  their  soil, 
which  may,  at  no  very  distant  period,  amount  to  millions. 

iU8th  Resolved,  That  we  deem  it  proper  for  members  of  this  mission 
to  devote  a  portion  of  their  time  to  instructing  the  natives  into  the 
best  method  of  cultivating  their  lands,  and  of  raising  flocks  and  herds, 
and  of  turning  the  various  products  of  the  country  to  the  best  advan- 
tage for  the  maintenance  of  their  families,  the  support  of  government 
and  of  schools,  and  the  institutions  of  the  gospel  and  its  ministers, 
at  home  and  abroad.7" 

"Mr.  Richards  entered  upon  his  official  duties  by  delivering  to  the 
chiefs  a  course  of  lectures  on  political  economy  and  the  general  science 
of  government.  From  the  ideas  thus  derived,  based  upon  their  old 
forms,  a  constitution  was  drawn  up.  Although  greatly  limiting  their 
power,  the  chiefs  passed  it  unanimously. 

"The  laws  of  the  Kingdom  were  carefully  revised  and  published.  In 
comparison  with  the  past  the  progress  of  the  nation  was  now  rapid. 
The  liberal  policy  of  other  nations,  and  whatever  of  their  forms  could 
with  propriety  be  here  transplanted,  were  embodied  in  the  new 
statutes,  but  on  a  scale  commensurate  with  the  feebleness  of  youth  of 
the  people.  The  penal  code  was  greatly  improved;  primary  and  courts 
of  appeal  established;  the  jury  system  adopted.  Provision  was  made 
for  the  more  regular  enforcement  of  debt — transmission  of  property, 
property  in  trust,  interest  in  accounts,  in  short  sufficient  was  done 
greatly  to  benefit  the  position  of  natives  and  foreigners.  Taxation  was 
rendered  more  equal  and  lighter.  Encouragement  was  proffered  to 
industry  and  to  the  increase  of  population.  An  enlightened  public- 
school  system  was  organized.  Their  laws,  imperfect  as  they  may  seem 
to  the  critical  eyes  of  a  superior  civilization,  were  yet  in  advance  of  the 
people.  But  Avherever  they  were  allowed  to  operate  fairly  and  system- 
atically much  good  was  effected,  and  they  served  to  prepare  the  way 
for  more  important  changes. 


108  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

V 

"  The  people  were  thoroughly  convinced  that  the  immunity  once  claim  ed 
by  chiefs  for  crimes  of  their  own  was  at  an  end  by  an  impartial  trial  by 
jury  of  one  of  that  class  in  1840  for  the  murder  of  his  wife.  He,  with 
an  accomplice,  were  both  brought  in  guilty,  and  suffered  the  full 
penalty  of  the  law,  death  by  hanging.  The  foreigners  also  began  to 
see  that  there  was  some  virtue  in  the  courts  by  a  fine  imposed  upon 
the  English  consul  for  riotous  conduct" 

"On  his  way  to  England  Mr.  Charlton  had  fallen  in  with  Lord  George 
Paulet,  commanding  H.  B.  M.  frigate  Carysfort,  and  by  his  representa- 
tions interested  his  lordship  in  his  views.  Simpson  had  also  sent 
dispatches  to  the  coast  of  Mexico,  which  induced  Bear-Admiral  Thomas 
to  order  the  Carysfort  to  Honolulu  for  the  purpose  of  inquiring  into 
the  matter.  She  arrived  on  the  10th  of  February,  1843,  before  the  sale  of 
Charlton's  property  had  taken  place.  Simpson  immediately  went  on 
board  to  concert  measures  with  Lord  George,  who,  from  his  entire  acqui- 
escence in  his  plans,  appears  to  have  been  wholly  won  over  at  this  inter- 
view to  sustain  them.  The  authorities  on  shore  suspected  there  was 
no  friendly  feeling  from  the  withholding  the  nsual  salutes.  Mr.  Judd, 
on  behalf  of  the  Government,  made  an  official  call  on  board,  but  was 
informed  he  could  not  be  received.  Visits  from  the  French  and  United 
States  consuls  were  similarly  declined.  Capt.  Paulet  addressed  the 
governor,  informing  him  that  he  wished  to  confer  with  the  King,  who 
was  then  absent. 

"  The  King  arrived  from  Maui  on  the  16th,  and  on  the  next  day 
received  the  following  letter  and  demands  from  Lord  George  Paulet : 

"'H.  B.  M.'s  Ship  Carysfort, 

"  i  Oahu,  17th  February,  1843. 
"  '  Sir  :  In  answer  to  your  letter  of  this  day's  date,  which  I  have  too 
good  an  opinion  of  Your  Majesty  to  allow  me  to  believe  ever  emanated 
from  yourself,  but  from  your  ill- advisers,  I  have  to  state  that  I  shall 
hold  no  communication  whatever  with  Dr.  G.  P.  Judd,  who,  it  has 
been  satisfactorily  proved  to  me,  has  been  the  Punic  mover  in  the 
unlawful  proceedings  of  your  Government  against  British  subjects. 

"'As  you  have  refused  me  a  personal  interview  I  inclose  you  the 
demands  which  I  Consider  it  my  duty  to  make  upon  your  Government, 
with  which  I  demand  a  compliance  at  or  before  4  o'clock  p.  m.  to-mor- 
row, Saturday;  otherwise  I  shall  be  obliged  to  take  immediate  coercive 
steps  to  obtain  these  measures  for  my  countrymen. 

"  '  I  have  the  honor  to  be,  your  Majesty's  most  obedient,  humble  serv- 
ant, 

"  <  George  Paulet, 

"  'Captain. 
"'His  Majesty  Kamehameha  III. 

"  'Demands  made  by  the  Bight  Honorable  Lord  George  Paulet,  captain, 
royal  navy,  commanding  R.  B.  M7s.  ship  Carysfort,  upon  the  King  oj 
the  Sandwich  Islands. 

"'First.  The  immediate  removal,  by  public  advertisement,  written  in 
the  native  and  English  languages,  and  signed  by  the  governor  of  this 
island  and  F.  W.  Thompson,  of  the  attachment  placed  upon  Mr.  Charl- 
ton's property;  the  restoration  of  the  land  taken  by  Government  for 
its  own  use,  and  really  appertaining  to  Mr.  Charlton;  and  reparation 
or  the  heaTTy  loss  to  which  Mr.  Charlton's  representatives  have  been 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  109 

exposed  by  the  oppressive  and  unjust  proceedings  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  Government. 

u '  Second.  The  immediate  acknowledgment  of  the  right  of  Mr.  Simp- 
son to  perform  the  functions  delegated  to  him  by  Mr.  Charlton,  namely, 
those  of  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  acting  consul,  until  Her  Majesty's 
pleasure  be  known  upon  the  reasonableness  of  your  objections  to  him. 
The  acknowledgment  of  that  right  and  the  reparation  for  the  insult 
offered  to  Her  Majesty,  through  her  acting  representative,  to  be  made 
by  a  public  reception  of  his  commission  and  the  saluting  the  British 
Hag  with  twenty-one  guns,  which  number  will  be  returned  by  Her 
Britannic  Majesty's  ship  under  my  command. 

"'Third.  A  guaranty  that  no  British  subject  shall  in  future  be  sub- 
jected to  imprisonment  in  fetters,  unless  he  is  accused  of  a  crime  which, 
by  the  laws  of  England,  would  be  considered  felony. 

"  '  Fourth.  The  compliance  with  a  written  promise  given  by  King 
Kamehameha  to  Capt.  Jones,  of  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  ship  Gurocoa, 
that  a  new  and  fair  trial  would  be  granted  in  a  case  brought  by  Henry 
Skinner,  which  promise  has  been  evaded. 

"  i  Fifth.  The  immediate  adoption  of  firm  steps  to  arrange  the  matters 
in  dispute  between  British  subjects  and  natives  of  the  country,  or 
others  residing  here,  by  referring  these  cases  to  juries,  one-half  of  whom 
shall  be  British  subjects,  approved  by  the  consul,  and  all  of  whom 
shall  declare  on  oath  their  freedom  from  prejudgment  upon  or  interest 
in  tin1,  cases  brought  before  them. 

u  '  Sixth.  A  direct  communication  between  His  Majesty,  Kamehameha, 
and  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  acting  consul  for  the  immediate  settlement 
of  all  cases  of  grievances  and  complaint  on  the  part  of  British  subjects 
against  the  Sandwich  Island  Government. 

"'Dated  on  board  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  ship  Carysfort,  at  Oahu, 
this  17th  day  of  February,  1843. 

"'George  Paulet, 

" '  Captain.'' 

"Capt.  Long,  of  the  U.  S.  S.  Boston,  then  in  port,  was  informed,  by 
letter,  at  midnight,  of  the  anticipated  attack  of  the  British  commander. 
In  the  morning  the  Carysfort  was  cleared  for  action,  springs  put  on  her 
cables,  and  her  battery  brought  to  bear  upon  the  town.  The  English 
families  embarked  for  security  on  board  a  brig  in  the  outer  roads. 
The  Americans  and  other  foreigners,  having  but  short  notice,  placed 
their  funds  and  papers  on  board  the  Boston  and  other  vessels,  intending 
to  retreat  to  them  with  their  families  in  case  of  actual  hostilities.  The 
town  was  in  a  state  of  great  excitement.  The  dispositions  of  the  chiefs 
were  uncertain,  and  it  was  feared  that  the  rabble,  taking  advantage  of 
the  confusion,  might  pillage  the  place.  Excited  by  the  gross  injustice 
of  the  demands,  the  first  impulse  of  the  King  and  his  council,  in  which 
they  were  sustained  by  the  indignant  feeling  of  the  entire  foreign  popu- 
lation excepting  the  few  who  sided  with  Simpson,  were  for  energetic 
measures.    Arms  were  procured  and  bodies  of  men  began  to  assemble. 

"The  common  natives,  unconscious  of  the  fatal  effects  of  disciplined 
gunnery,  ardently  desired  to  fight  the  ship.  Some  supposed  they 
might  overpower  her  crew  by  numbers  in  boarding.  But  peaceful  coun- 
cils at  last  prevailed.  It  is  in  such  emergencies  that  the  real  influence 
of  the  missionaries  becomes  apparent.  The  natural  desire  of  chiefs 
and  foreigners  was  to  resist  at  all  hazards;  but  the  entire  indoctrina- 
tion of  the  mission,  animated  by  the  peaceful  principles  of  the  gospel, 
had  been  of  that  nature  that  depends  more  upon  the  sword  of  the 


110  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

spirit  than  the  arm  of  flesh.  Desirous  of  avoiding  the  unhappy 
consequences  of  strife  and  bloodshed,  and  relying,  through  providence, 
on  the  justice  of  the  nation's  cause,  and  the  magnanimity  of  the  Queen 
of  Great  Britain,  they  counseled  peace.  Shortly  before  the  hour  of 
commencing  hostilities  had  arrived,  the  King  dispatched  a  letter  to 
the  Carysport,  informing  Lord  George  Paulet  that  he  yielded  to  his 
demands,  under  protest,  and  had  appointed  Sir  George  Simpson  and 
William  Eichards  as  his  commissioners  to  the  court  of  Great  Britain 
to  settle  the  pending  difficulties. 

"His  Majesty  appointed  February  20  at  11  o'clock  a.  m.,  to  receive 
Lord  George  and  the  vice-consul.  On  the  same  day  that  the  King 
notified  Lord  of  his  acquiescence  to  his  demands,  in  conjunction  with 
the  premier  he  protested  against  his  acts  in  these  words : 

"'We,  Kamehameha  III,  King  of  all  the  Sandwich  Islands,  and 
Kekauluohi,  premier  thereof,  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  nations 
and  the  rights  of  all  aggrieved  sovereigns  and  individuals,  do  hereby 
enter  our  solemn  act  of  protest  before  God,  the  world,  and  before  the 
Government  of  Her  Most  Gracious  Majesty  Yictoria,  Queen  of  the 
United  Kingdoms  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland : 

u  'Against  the  Bight  Hon.  Lord  George  Paulet,  captain  of  Her  British 
Majesty's  ship  Carysfort,  now  lying  in  the  harbor  of  Honolulu,  for  all 
losses  and  damages  which  may  accrue  to  us  and  to  the  citizens  of  other 
countries  residing  under  our  dominion  and  sovereignty,  in  consequence 
of  the  unjust  demands  made  upon  us  this  day  by  the  said  Bight  Hon. 
Lord  George  Paulet,  enforced  by  a  threat  of  coercive  measures  and  an 
attack  upon  our  town  of  Honolulu  in  case  of  noncompliance  with  the 
same  within  a  period  of  nineteen  hours,  thereby  interfering  with  our 
laws,  endangering  the  good  order  of  society,  and  requiring  of  us  what 
no  power  has  a  right  to  exact  of  another  with  whom  they  are  on  terms 
of  peace  and  amity. 

"'And  we  do  solemnly  protest  and  declare  that  we,  the  sovereign 
authority  of  these  islands,  are  injured,  grieved,  abused,  and  damaged 
by  this  act  of  the  said  Bight  Hon.  Lord  George  Paulet,  and  wre  hereby 
enter  our  solemn  appeal  unto  the  Government  of  Her  Most  Gracious 
Majesty,  represented  by  him,  for  redress,  for  justification,  and  for  repay- 
ment of  all  said  losses,  damages,  and  payments  which  may  in  conse- 
quence accrue  unto  us,  or  unto  the  citizens  of  other  countries  living 
under  our  jurisdiction.' 

"  'On  the  20th  the  King  and  premier  visited  the  Garysfoot  and  were 
received  with  royal  honors.  This  courtesy,  however,  was  but  a  prelude 
to  a  further  series  of  demands  rendered  necessary  to  accomplish  Simp- 
son's aim,  by  the  unexpected  compliance  of  the  King  with  the  first. 
These  were  brought  forward  at  an  interview  on  the  following  day.  The 
total  amount  demanded  in  money  was  $117,330.89.  The  character  of 
these  claims,  and  the  object  of  the  parties,  may  be  gathered  from  a 
brief  notice  of  the  first  brought  forward.  This  was  in  favor  of  a  Mr. 
Skinner,  a  connection  of  Mr.  Charlton's.  Indemnification  to  the 
amount  of  $3,000  was  demanded  for  him  on  the  alleged  ground  of  hav- 
ing lost  the  interest  and  profits  on  $10,000  unemployed  for  four  months, 
which  he  had  reserved  to  purchase  the  property  of  Mr.  Charlton,  if 
sold  on  execution.  The  arrival  of  the  Carysfoot  had  stopped  the  sale, 
and  he  had  lost  the  opportunity  of  thus  employing  his  funds.'  (pp. 
161,  162,  and  163.) 

'"24th. — A  meeting  having  been  arranged  for  10  o'clock  a.  m.,  the 
King  requested  me  to  visit  Lord  George  and  say  to  him  that  he  could 
bear  this  course  no  longer ;  he  would  give  up  and  let  them  do  as  they 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  Ill 

pieced,  etc.  I  accordingly  met  Lord  George  and  Simpson  in  the 
street,  coming  to  the  meeting ;  said  I  had  a  message  from  the  King, 
that  he  was  sick.  I  went  with  them  to  the  consular  office,  where  I  was 
left  alone  with  Simpson.  I  said,  the  King  feels  himself  oppressed, 
broken  down,  ruined,  and,  to  use  his  own  expression,  a  dead  man;  that 
he  had  been  up  all  night  and  was  sick;  that  he  had  determined  to  give 
up;  that  if  he,  Simpson,  persisted  in  his  present  course  ruin  would 
follow;  that  the  King  could  not  undo  by  his  own  act  the  action  of  the 
courts  and  enforce  these  claims  without  time  to  modify  the  laws.  I 
begged  him  to  desist  and  give  time  to  modify  the  laws  and  act  with 
consistency.  He  would  allow  juries  to  be  composed  of  half  English  in 
case  their  interests  were  concerned. 

"  t  The  Dominis  case  had  been  disposed  of  according  to  the  King's 
written  promise  to  Capt.  Jones.  Moreover,  since  that  time,  the 
parties  had  settled  by  amicable  arbitration.  That  to  require  all  the 
late  decisions  of  the  legally  organized  courts  to  be  set  aside  by  the  act 
of  the  King  would  be  illegal  and  oppressive  on  the  part  of  Mr.  Simp- 
son, and  decidedly  oppressive  on  the  part  of  the  King,  and  would 
justly  involve  him  both  with  Americans  and  French,  etc.  Simp- 
son replied  that  the  English  had  been  treated  harshly,  and  conse- 
quently the  Government  must  suffer.    His  course  could  not  be  altered. 

"'Went  with  Lord  George  and  Simpson  to  the  council;  acted  as 
spokesman.  Eeiterated  the  above,  and  added  the  King  was  determined 
to  hold  out  no  longer;  do  what  you  like,  take  the  islands,  but  do  not 
force  him  to  acts  of  injustice ;  it  would  be  cruel  in  the  extreme,  better 
take  all.  Lord  George  replied  that  his  demands  were  not  unjust;  he 
acted  on  the  best  information  and  testimony.  I  said,  I  know  that  you 
think  so  but  I  assure  you  that  such  is  not  the  opinion  of  the  Govern- 
ment. The  King  remarked  that  he  did  not  think  that  his  Government 
had  done  wrong.  I  said,  we  must  be  heard;  your  information  is  incor- 
rect ;  we  appeal  to  Great  Britain ;  take  the  islands,  we  will  yet  have 
justice.  Lord  George  replied  that  he  did  not  come  to  take  the  islands. 
I  said,  you  had  better  do  it  than  pursue  these  subjects  further  in  this 
manner.  He  or  Simpson  said  that  they  could  only  act  on  a  request  of 
the  King,  and  it  must  be  in  writing.  Said  I,  let  all  proceedings  be 
stopped;  let  the  Government  have  time  to  reflect,  and  I  think  they  will 
come  to  the  conclusion  that  it  is  better  for  you  to  take  the  Government 
of  the  islands  than  to  go  any  further.  But  we  must  have  time;  you 
drive  the  King  to  distraction,  and  I  fear  that  he  will  cede  the  islands 
to  France,  as  lie  has  been  invited  to  do.  Simpson  said  he  would  not 
allow  much  delay.  Lord  George  said,  two  or  three  days  and  no  more. 
Simpson  said,  to-morrow  noon,  and  if  it  was  not  done,  he  should  expect 
the  Dominis  case  to  be  tried  on  Saturday.  I  observed  that  the  time 
was  too  short;  Monday  then  at  the  furthest.  We  went  into  certain 
explanations  as  to  manner  of  doing  the  thing,  and  I  wrote  down  in 
pencil  the  following : 

"'In  consequence  of  the  difficulties  in  which  the  Sandwich  Islands 
are  involved,  and  the  impossibility  of  complying  with  the  demands  made 
by  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  representative  in  the  form  in  which  they 
are  presented,  we  cede  [the  Government  of]  our  islands  to  Lord  George 
Paulet,  etc.,  for  the  time  being,  subject  to  any  arrangements  that 
may  have  been  entered  into  with  the  Government  of  Great  Britain,  and 
until  intelligence  shall  have  been  received,  and  in  case  no  arrangement 
shall  have  been  made  previous  to  date,  subject  to  the  decision  of  Her 
Majesty's  Government  on  conference  with  the  ministers  of  the  Sand- 
wich Islands  Government,  after  a  full  report  of  our  affairs  shall  have 


112  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

been  represented  to  Great  Britain;  and  in  case  the  ministers  are 
rejected  by  Her  Britannic  Majesty,  then  subject  to  an^  arrangements 
which  may  be  entered  into. 

" l  Simpson  took  the  paper  and  walked  in  the  veranda  with  Lord 
George,  and,  returning,  said  that  would  do;  he  would  make  a  copy  with 
very  few  verbal  alterations. 

"  <  It  was  arranged  that  the  chiefs  should  have  an  opportunity  to 
consider  these  things,  and  an  answer  to  be  given  to-morrow  noon.  Lord 
George  and  Shnpson  left.  King  and  Auhea  sat  with  astonishment  and 
misery.  Discussed  awhile  in  council,  when  I  left  them  in  order  to  take 
some  refreshment.  When  I  returned  I  found  them  anxious  to  gain 
further  information.  The  subject  of  ceding  to  France  and  the  United 
States  was  a  ray  of  hope  which  seemed  to  gleam  across  their  dark  path, 
but  they  foresaw  that  under  such  circumstances  they  would  still  have 
this  fury — Simpson — to  deal  with  until  the  French  took  possession, 
and  he  would  doubtless  involve  them  in  more  trouble,  and  their  cause 
become  too  bad  to  admit  of  justification.  France  is  still  acting  a  hos- 
tile part  towards  them.  Charlton  and  Simpson  are  their  enemies,  but 
England  is  their  friend. 

"'To  England  they  look  up  with  the  most  filial  affections.  France 
is  picking  a  quarrel  with  them  now,  and  complaints  are  now  in  existence 
which  will  make  more  trouble.  If  the  claims  of  Simpson  are  allowed 
the  laws  will  suffer  and  the  nation  be  weakened  so  much  that  France 
will  leave  them  nothing.  England  can  defend  them  from  France,  and 
to  cede  to  France  would  be  to  say  England  had  no  right  here,  which  is 
to  the  Government  more  than  doubtful,  reckoning  right  as  the  nations 
do.    This  might  be  considered  an  act  of  treachery. 

4 "May  be  that  their  independence  is  secured  already.  If  so,  a  forcible 
possession  on  the  part  of  either  would  annul  it.  A  cession  would  not 
if  made  with  provisos. 

"In  the  evening  I  went  for  Lord  George,  who,  together  with  Simpson 
and  Dr.  Kooke,  came.  Begulated  a  few  points  respecting  the  course  he 
should  pursue  in  case  he  took  possession.  Informed  them  that  we  should 
take  every  possible  step  to  justify  the  Government  and  get  back  the 
islands,  and  he  demanded  a  pledge  that  such  exertions  be  not  considered 
an  act  of  hostility  to  them. 

"'It  was  agreed  that  a  decision  should  be  made  by  12  o'clock  on  the 
25th.  Lord  George  went  away.  Every  possible  view  of  the  case  was 
taken  up  by  the  council,  and  the  result  seemed  to  be  to  give  up  the  islands 
on  the  terms  proposed. 

"'25th.  The  King  sent  for  me  before  breakfast.  Wished  to  know 
what  I  thought  of  the  old  proposition  of  ceding  to  France  and  the 
United  States.  I  said  I  feared  it  would  involve  the  Government  in 
great  trouble.  The  French  admiral  would  soon  be  here  and  take  pos- 
session, which  would  excite  hostility  between  Catholics  and  Protes- 
tants; meanwhile  Simpson  would  continue  his  course  of  conduct,  and 
the  difficulties  would  become  inextricable.  Give  yourself  into  the  arms 
of  Great  Britain,  *ust  to  the  generosity  of  that  great  and  good  nation, 
you  may  have  the  benefit  of  the  intervention  of  France  for  the  adjust- 
ment of  difficulties  and  the  security  of  your  independence.  Let  them 
take  possession,  and  then  you  can  represent  your  case  in  full.  Lord 
George  called.  I  informed  him  that  the  matter  was  nearly  decided. 
One  of  the  propositions  that  came  from  me  was  waived,  viz,  that  a 
commission  be  appointed  to  adjust  the  claims  of  British  subjects. 

"  'Dudoit  called  and  many  others.  Every  argument  used  to  induce 
the  King  to  cede  to  France  and  the  United  States.     Sat  down  to  put 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  113 

the  documents  into  form.  The  King  proposed  to  make  a  speech.  I 
•said  they  could  make  that  out  among  themselves,  which  they  did. 
Deed  of  cession  being  ready,  the  chiefs  came  in  and  it  was  read.  Sorrow 
and  distress  marked  every  countenance.  I  was  asked  to  pray.  During 
prayer  sighs  suppressed  were  often  heard.  I  committed  the  case  to 
God,  imploring  His  blessing  on  the  step  about  to  be  taken  as  the  only 
peaceful  alternative  for  the  nation,  etc.  When  I  rose  not  an  individual 
left  his  knees  for  a  full  minute,  and  then  1  saw  that  tears  had  come  to  their 
relief.  They  sat  in  silence  for  a  moment  when  the  King  arose,  and  with 
a  iirm  step  seized  a  pen  and  subscribed  his  name.  "  Let  it  go,"  said  he, 
"  if  I  get  help  I  get  it,  if  not,  let  it  go;  I  can  do  no  more."  The  premier 
then  added  her  signature.'  (Extract  from  a  journal  kept  by  Mr.  Judcl, 
who  was  minister  of  the  King  to  conduct  negotiations  with  Lord  George 
Paulet,  pp.  164,  165,  and  166.) 

u  Having  decided  upon  a  provisional  cession  of  his  dominions  to  Great 
Britain,  the  King  announced  the  event  to  his  subjects  in  a  touching 
proclamation: 

"  '  Where  are  you,  chiefs,  people,  and  commons  from  my  ancestors,  and 
people  from  foreign  lands "? 

u *  Hear  ye  !  I  make  known  to  yon  that  I  am  in  perplexity  by  reason 
of  difficulties  into  which  I  have  been  brought  without  cause;  there- 
fore, I  have  given  away  the  life  of  our  land,  hear  ye!  But  my  rule 
over  you,  my  people,  and  your  privileges,  will  continue,  for  I  have  hope 
that  the  life  of  the  land  will  be  restored  when  my  conduct  is  justified. 

"'Done  at  Honolulu,  Oahu,  this  25th  day  of  February,  1843. 

"Kamehameha  III. 
"Kekauluoki.' 


u  On  the  28th  of  November,  the  Hawaiian  commissioners  obtained 
from  the  governments  of  France  and  England  a  joint  declaration  to 
the  effect  that — 

"  <  Her  Majesty  the  Queen  of  the  United  Kingdom  of  Great  Britain 
and  Ireland,  and  His  Majesty  the  King  of  the  French,  taking  into  con- 
sideration the  existence  in  the  Sandwich  Islands  of  a  government  capa- 
ble of  providing  for  the  regularity  of  its  relations  with  foreign  nations, 
have  thought  it  right  to  engage  reciprocally  to  consider  the  Sandwich 
Islands  as  an  independent  state,  and  never  to.  take  possession,  neither 
directly  nor  under  the  title  of  protectorate,  nor  under  any  other  form, 
of  any  part  of  the  territory  of  which  they  are  composed. 

"  'The  undersigned,  Her  Majesty's  principal  secretary  of  state  for  for- 
eign affairs,  and  the  ambassador  extraordinary  of  His  Majesty  the 
King  of  the  French  at  the  court  of  London,  being  furnished  with  the 
necessary  powers,  hereby  declare  in  consequence  that  their  said  majes- 
ties take  reciprocally  that  engagement. 

"'  In  witness  whereof  the  undersigned  have  signed  the  present  decla- 
ration, and  have  affixed  thereto  the  seal  of  their  arms. 

"'Done  in  duplicate,  at  London,  the  28th  day  of  November,  in  the 
year  of  our  Lord  1843. 

"  'Aberdeen.         [l.  s. 
"'St.  Aulaire.    [l.  s.' 

"  This  solemn  engagement  on  the  part  of  these  two  powers  was  the  final 
act  by  which  the  Kingdom  of  Hawaii  was  admitted  within  the  pale  of 
civilized  nations." 

•"No  measure  tends  more  to  consolidate  and  render  a  nation  prosper- 

S.  Eep.  227 8 


114  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

ous  and  respectable  than  a  sound  and  judicious  code  of  laws.  Th< 
chiefs  were  early  aware  of  their  deficiency,  and  as  soon  as  their  ne^ 
legislative  forms  came  into  operation  proposed  to  execute  the  task: 
under  any  circumstances  a  difficult  one;  but  in  those  of  their  Kingdoi 
doubly  so  from  the  mixed  population,  foreign  and  native,  that  the: 
were  called  to  govern.  The  first  volume  of  statute  laws  was  issued  ii 
1846. 

"The  departments  are  subdivided  into  numerous  bureaus,  compris- 
ing the  duties  enumerated  under  their  several  heads.  By  this  system 
the  business  of  government  and  its  machinery  have  become  methodized 
on  a  simple  and  not  expensive  scale,  for  although  the  subdivisions  are 
numerous,  yet  one  clerk  suffices  for  many.  The  judiciary  act  and  the 
criminal  code,  on  the  new  basis,  are  not  yet  completed.  As  in  every 
other  step  forward  which  the  Hawaiian  nation  has  taken,  unwar- 
rantable abuse  and  unreasonable  cavil  have  been  showered  upon  it  for 
this,  chiefly  upon  the  specious  pretense  that  the  system  was  too  cum- 
bersome and  altogether  beyond  its  growth.  An  impartial  examination 
will  doubtless  detect  points  which  can  be  amended  with  benefit;  this 
is  to  be  expected,  and  the  intention  of  the  Legislature  is  rather  experi- 
mentative  than  final,  to  feel  their  way  as  it  were  to  a  code  simple  and 
effective.  But  to  do  this  experience  mast  be  acquired  in  legislation 
and  the  practical  operation  of  laws.  In  the  transition  of  the  nation, 
with  its  rapid  growth  from  foreign  sources,  it  has  been  found  that  there 
has  been  felt  a  want  rather  than  an  overplus  of  system.  The  machinery 
of  government,  being  of  a  liberal  and  constitutional  character,  provides 
in  itself  for  checks  on  excess  and  remedies  for  evils.  If  'let  alone7  by 
foreign  powers,  there  is  ground  for  the  belief  that  Hawaiian  legislation 
will  in  no  whit  in  character  be  behind  that  of  numerous  new  countries, 
offshoots  of  the  old,  now  budding  into  existence  on  the  shores  of  the 
Pacific. 

"The  executive  government  was  constructed  as  follows: 
.     "'His  Majesty  King  Kamehameha  III. 

"< Cabinet  council  created  October  29,  1845. — His  highness,  Keoni 
Ana,*  premier  and  minister  of  the  interior;  R.  C.  Wyllie,  minister  for- 
eign affairs;  G.  P.  Judd,  minister  of  finance;  William  Richards,  min- 
ister of  instruction ;  John  Ricord,  attorney- general. 

"  'Nobles. — M.  Kehauonohi;  A.Keliiahonui,  chamberlain;  Keoni  Ana, 
premier;  Alapai;  A.  Paki,  judge  of  supreme  court;  Konia;  I.  Kaeo, 
judge  of  supreme  court;  Iona,  judge  of  supreme  court;  Paulo  Kanoa; 
Kamauu;  M.  Kekuanaoa,  governor  of  Oahu;  W.  P.  Leleiohoku,  gov- 
ernor of  Hawaii;  Ruta;  Keohokalole;  O.  Kanaina,  judge  of  supreme 
court;  Ioane  Ii,  guardian  of  young  chiefs;  Iona  Piikoi;  Beniki  Nama- 
keha;  K.  Kapaakea;  James  Young  Kanehoa,  t  governor  of  Maui.' 

"The  governers  are  honorary  members  of  the  privy  council. 

"Besides  the  4  cabinet  officers  of  foreign  birth,  there  are  5  Americans 
and  4  Englishmen,  naturalized  subjects,  commissioned  as  judges  in 
foreign  cases,  collectors,  director  of  Government  press,  heads  of  bureaus, 
etc.  In  addition  to  these  are  a  number  of  clerks  transiently  employed, 
and  officers  connected  with  the  several  departments,  who  depend  upon 
fees  for  their  recompense. 

"In  no  one  respect  have  the  Government  shown  more  laudable  zeal 
than  in  educating  the  young  chiefs,  who,  by  birth,  are  destined  to  fill 
important  posts.     For  the  purpose  of  bestowing  upon  them  a  solid  and 


*  Son  of  Mr.  Young,  Kamehameha's  favorite. 

tSon  of  Kamehaineha's  favorite,  Mr.  Yonng,  of  the  Elenora,  who  landed  in  1790 
and  died  in  1835  at  the  advanced  age  of  93  years,  highly  respected  by  all  classes. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  115 

practical  education  in  the  English  language,  embracing  not  only  the 
usual  studies  pursued  in  the  better  class  of  seminaries  in  the  United 
States,  but  to  engraft  in  their  minds  the  habits,  thoughts,  moral  and 
domestic  education  which  children  of  their  age  and  circumstances 
receive  in  civilized  countries,  in  1839  they  were  taken  from  their  native 
parents  and  out  of  the  sphere  of  mere  Hawaiian  influences  and  incor- 
porated into  a  boarding  school,  under  the  charge  of  Mr.  and  Mrs. 
Cooke,  teachers  of  the  American  mission.  During  the  seven  years  the 
school  has  bee'u  established  their  progress  has  been  rapid,  and  they 
are  now  versed  in  the  common  branches  of  an  English  education,  besides 
being  practically  acquainted  with  the  tastes,  household  economy,  and 
habits  of  refined  domestic  life.  The  annual  expense  of  the  school  is 
now  about  $5,000.    The  number  of  scholars  15.  • 

"  'Moses  Kaikioewa,  son  of  Kekuanaoa  and  Kinau,  born  July  20, 
1829,  expectant  governor  of  Kauai. 

"'Lota  Kamehameha,  son  of  Kekuanaoa  and  Kinau,  born  December 
11,  1830;  expectant  governor  of  Maui. 

"'Alexander  Liholiho,  son  of  Kehuanaoa  and  Kinau,  born  February 
9, 1834,  heir  apparant,  by  adoption,  of  the  King. 

"'  Victoria  Kamamalu,  daughter  of  Kehuanaoa  and  Kinau,  born 
November  1,  1838,  premier  by  birth. 

"  'William  O.  Lunalilo,  son  of  Kanaina  and  Kehauluohi,  born  Janu- 
ary 1,  1835. 

" « Bernice  Pauahi,  daughter  of  Paid  and  Konia,  born  December  19, 
1831. 

"'Jane  Loeau,  daughter  of  Kalaniulumokee  andLiliha,  born  1828. 

'"Elizabeth  Kekaniau,  daughter  of  Laanui,  born  September  11, 1834. 

"'Emma  Eooke,  daughter  of  Fanny  Young,*  born  January  2,  1836. 

"  'Peter  Young  Kaeo,  son  of  Kaeo  and  Lahilahi,*  born  March  4, 1836. 

"'James  Kaliokalani,  son  of  Paakea  and  Keohokalole,  born  May  29, 
1835. 

"'David  Kalakaua,  son  of  Paakea  and  Keohokalole,  born  November 
16,  1836. 

"'Lydia  Makaeha,  daughter  of  Paakea  and  Keohokalole,  born  Sep- 
tember 2,  1838. 

"'Mary  Paaaina. 

"'Kinau  Pitt,  son  of  W.  Pitt  Kalaimokee.' 

"  The  rapid  progress  of  the  Hawaiian  group  in  commercial  impor- 
tance is  best  illustrated  by  their  commercial  statistics  both  before  the 
organization  of  their  present  Government  and  since,  when  under 
improved  auspices  their  value  has  more  rapidly  developed.  The 
facilities  which  they  afforded  the  American  vessels  engaged  in  the 
lucrative  Northwest  fur  trade,  to  which  was  soon  added  the  equally 
profitable  one  of  sandal  wood,  gave  them  such  good  repute  that  pre- 
vious to  1820  the  hardy  whale  fishers  resorted  to  them  for  recruits  and 
men.  As  early  as  1823,  from  40  to  60  whale  ships,  mostly  American, 
were  to  be  seen  in  the  harbor  of  Honolulu  at  one  time. 

"  From  January,  1836,  to  December  31,  1841,  358  vessels  belonging 
to  the  United  States,  of  which  four  fifths  were  whalers,  touched  at 
Honolulu;  an  average  of  71f  annually,  besides  17  men-of-war.  Of 
English  vessels  during  the  same  period  there  were  82  and  9  men-of- 
war.  Those  of  France  and  other  nations  numbered  not  over  20.  The 
average  annual  imports  for  those  years  were  to  the  value  of  $365,854, 
one-half  of  which  were  American  goods,  one-quarter  Chinese  and  Oali- 


*  Daughters  of  John  Young. 


116  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

fornian,  and  the  remainder  from  England,  Mexico,  Chile,  and  other 
sources. 

"Four  newspapers  in  the  Hawaiian  tongue  have  been  sustained  by 
the  missionaries.  The  first,  Lama  Hawaii,  was  commenced  in  1833. 
The  present  Ka  Elele,  besides  much  religious  matter,  gives  a  summary 
of  general  news,  publishes  Government  notices,  and  affords  scope  for 
the  literary  efforts  of  the  natives  themselves,  some  of  whom  manifest 
respectable  powers  of  thought  and  composition. 

"It  is  computed  that  70,000  of  the  population  have  learned  to  read 
and  65,444,000  printed  pages  have  been  issued  from  the  mission  press, 
embracing,  among  other  works,  two  complete  editions,  of  10,000  each, 
of  the  Holy  Scriptures,  three  of  the  New  Testament,  amounting  to 
30,000  copies,  Worcesters  Sacred  Geography,  Universal  Geography, 
Geographical  Questions,  Scripture  Chronology  and  History,  Animals 
of  the  Earth,  with  a  chart.  History  of  Beasts,  Hawaiian  History, 
Church  History,  Mathematics,  embracing  Geometry,  Trigonometry, 
Mensuration,  Surveying  and  Navigation,  Colburn's  Algebra,  Anatomy, 
Wayland's  Moral  Philosophy,  Colburn's  Intellectual  Arithmetic,  Tract 
on.Astronomy,  Maps  of  Universal  Geography,  and  Bunyan's  Pilgrim's 
Progress. 

"The  works  published  have  been  altogether  of  a  devotional  or  edu- 
cational class.  More  interest  would  have  been  awakened  could  some 
others  of  a  less  grave  and  more  historic  character  have  been  included." 

"A  moral  sentiment,  founded  more  upon  a  classification  of  certain 
actions,  either  as  evil  or  as  good,  and  their  attendant  punishments  or 
rewards  than  upon  any  definite  ideas  of  sin  and  virtue  considered  in 
their  relations  to  moral  purity  and  the  love  of  the  Father,  pervades  the 
nation.  With  the  more  enlightened  something  superior  to  this  pre- 
vails. Consequently,  as  in  older  Christianized  communities,  a  man 
enjoys  respect  in  proportion  to  his  moral  qualifications.  Vice  is  con- 
demned and  virtue  applauded.  Many,  of  course,  are  to  be  found  more 
fond  of  a  good  name  than  of  the  means  necessary  for  its  attainment.. 
Publicly  they  are  one  being,  privately  another. 

"  Thevery  fact  of  the  necessity  of  the  deception  shows  a  great  advance- 
ment in  moral  sentiment  since  the  days  of  Liholiho,  and  instead  of  being 
considered  a  reproach  to  the  missionaries  should  be  hailed  as  a  favorable 
symptom  of  their  labors,  the  dawn  of  further  improvement.  In  human- 
ity, care  for  the  sick  and  aged,  their  domestic  relations,  honesty,  tem- 
perance, and  systematic  industry  there  has  been  great  advancement. 
From  a  warlike,  treacherous,  and  cruel  people  they  have  become  mild, 
tractable,  and  desirous  of  knowledge.  The  intelligent  observer  will 
find  much  in  their  present  character  to  gratify  him  and  more  to  sur- 
prise when  he  contrasts  them  with  what  they  were  but  a  score  of  years 
since.  But  he  who  goes  among  them,  his  imagination  picturing  a 
nation  changed  from  brutal  savages,  by  the  spirit  of  God,  to  guileless 
Christians,  worshiping  Jehovah  in  all  the  innocence  and  strength  of  a 
first  love,  their  family  altars  emblems  of  purity  and  happiness,  their 
congregations  simple  and  sincere,  and  their  dispositions  and  deport- 
ment refined  to  the  high  standard  of  Christian  excellence  in  his  own 
country,  will  be  sadly  disappointed. 

"It  is  still  difficult  to  make  the  natives  understand  the  nature  of 
truth.  They  have  been  so  accustomed,  from  their  earliest  years,  to 
habits  of  deception,  that  with  very  many,  perhaps  the  majority,  it  may 
be  doubted  whether  any  other  sensation  arises  from  the  detection  of  a 
falsehood  than  mortification  at  being  discovered.    In  no  other  point 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 


117 


are  tliey  more  obtuse,  but  this  moral  bhmtness  is  gradually  wearing 
away.  Licentiousness  is  a  chief  vice  of  the  nation;  not  that  they  are 
much  worse  in  this  respect  than  nations  generally  residing  within  the 
tropics,  but  it  continues  to  be  their  most  prominent  trait.  A  few  years 
ago,  in  its  protean  forms,  it  was  common  to  all,  and  as  undisguised  as 
the  light  of  day.  Now  it  hides  its  head,  and  seeks  a  new  garment  to 
conceal  its  foul  markings.  The  following  table  of  crime  for  Oahu  will 
serve  to  show  the  proportion  of  other  often ses  to  those  of  sensuality. 
It  is  taken  from  the  Kama  Hawaii,  of  January  16, 1839,  a  native  paper, 
but  the  period  embraced  in  the  report  is  not  given.  And  it  should  be 
recollected  that  but  a  small  proportion  of  the  latter  offenses  are  ever 
detected  or  exposed.  A  number  of  foreigners  are  embraced  in  the  list, 
chiefly  for  riot,  mutiny,  and  desertion. 

Offenses. 

Manslaughter 1 4. 

Theft 4fc 

Riot " 32 

False  witness 48 

Desertion 30 

Mutiny 15 

Seduction 18 

Lewdness 81 

Adultery 246 

Total ' 522 

"Another  table  of  purely  native  cases  for  Honolulu,  taken  from  the 
records  of  the  t inferior  court7  from  January  1,  1840,  to  December  4, 
of  the  same  year,  gives  the  following  striking  result: 


Offense. 

Men. 

Women. 

Total. 

Adultery,  fornication 

126 

43 

35 

20 

12 

3 

7 

6 

6 

2 

3 

127 
3 
3 

8 
2 
1 

1 

252 

Theft 

46/ 

Gambling 

38 

Desecration  of  Sabbath . 

38 

Reviling  language 

14 

Heathenish  practices 

4 

Assault  and  battery 

8 

Drunkenness 

6 

Furious  riding 

6 

Rape 

2 

Interference  with  police 

3 

Street  walking 

4 

4 

Slander 

1 

1 

1 

Passing  false  coin 

1 

Desertion  of  husband 

3 

3 

Total 

275 

152 

427 

"The  above  table  shows  a -conviction  of  427  cases  out  of  a  population 
of  about  9,000.  To  these  should  be  added  121  others,  tried  before  the 
police  court,  making  in  all  rather  more  than  600  cases  for  1846.  Of  the 
121,  38  were  for  licentiousness  and  43  for  stealing.  But  few  occur  for 
fighting,  the  Hawaiians  being  a  very  peaceable  people.  A  great  deal 
of  petty  thieving  exists,  particularly  towards  foreigners,  to  steal  from 
whom  is  not  viewed  so  disreputable  as  from  themselves.  The  standard 
of  morality,  it  will  be  seen,  is  low,  particularly  among  the  men;   but 


118  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

crimes  are  rare.  There  have  been  but  five  executions  for  three  murders 
for  ten  years. 

"  It  is  incontrovertible  that  there  yet  exists  in  the  nation  a  large 
body  of  people  who  are  equally  disposed  to  religious  rites,  or  to  acts  of 
a  different  character,  as  may  be  most  accordant  to  the  taste  of  those 
whom  they  wish  to  gratify.  Another  generation  must  arise,  with  bet- 
ter homes  and  more  civil  and  religious  advantages,  before  the  habits 
of  the  old  are  sufficiently  eradicated.  While  evidence  for  the  more 
favorable  view  of  missionary  labor,  to  a  partial  investigator,  appears 
conclusive,  ample  grounds  for  the  opposite  opinion  exists.  The  truth 
lies  in  neither  extreme.  The  friends  of  humanity  have  just  cause  to 
be  grateful  that  so  much  has  been  accomplished,  and  should  labor 
earnestly  that  the  remaining  dark  spots  may  be  wholly  effaced." 

"The  government  of  the  Kingdom  is  essentially  Christian.  Founded 
upon  missionary  teaching,  it  derives  its  principles  and  objects  from 
gospel  ethics.  Under  its  influence,  the  despotism  of  the  chiefs  over 
life  and  property  has  been  abolished  and  the  nation  invited  to  lay 
hold  of  its  rights  in  both.  Laws  favorable  to  virtue,  industry,  and 
increase  of  population  have  been  enacted.  Families  having  3  children 
of  their  own  are  freed  from  taxation ;  those  having  more  are  rewarded 
by  gifts  of  lands.  The  natives  are  encouraged  to  secure  allodial  titles 
by  a  remission  of  all  taxes  on  such  for  twenty  years.  Taxation  is  light- 
ened and  made  stimulative  to  honest  industry.  The  present  laws  are 
equitable  and  protective.  Justice  is  fairly  administered  and  the  sound- 
est principles  of  classical  and  modern  law  have  become  the  professed 
guides  of  the  courts. 

u  Commerce  has  brought  among  the  nation  many  foreigners,  in  every 
way  an  advantage  to  the  morals  and  enterprise  of  the  natives.  Scat- 
tered throughout  the  group  they  provide  them,  almost  at  the  very  doors 
of  their  huts,  with  ample  supplies  of  foreign  goods  of  all  descriptions 
at  fair  prices,  receiving  in  return  the  avails  of  native  labor.  Tliey  have 
furnished  them  with  cattle  and  the  vegetable  products  of  other  coun- 
tries* and  introduced  the  arts,  trades,  and  professions  of  civilized  life. 
The  examples  and  encouragements  of  civilized  households  are  thus 
brought  to  their  very  thresholds.  They  have  given  a  value  to  the  time 
of  the  native  by  creating  a  demand  for  his  labor,  and  have  equally 
bestowed  a  value  to  his  hitherto  unproductive  lands  by  practically 
developing  the  hidden  wealth  of  the  soil. 

"The  most  indifferent  industry  is  sure  of  ample  reward.  Vice,  as  in 
other  lands,  has  no  apology  for  an  existence  here  on  the  plea  of  a  super- 
abundance of  labor  in  the  honest  branches  of  livelihood.  Not  a  man  need 
be  a  thief  from  necessity,  nor  a  woman  unchaste  from  want.  Lands 
everywhere  lie  groaning  in  wild  luxuriance,  crying  out  for  hands  to  till 
them.  The  handicraft  of  women,  and  even  the  services  of  children  are 
in  constant  demand.  Commerce  has  raised  the  remuneration  of  the 
former  and  the  wages  of  the  laborers  to  the  highest  rate  of  stimulative 
reward. 

"The  policy  of  the  Government  is  essentially  protective  to  the 
Hawaiian  race,  to  the  intent  to  fully  solve  the  question  of  their 
capability  of  civilization.  The  white  advisers  *of  the  King,  having 
this  end  practically  in  view,  fail  to  meet  the  more  enlarged  views  and 
desires  of  white  residents,  who  look  upon  the  final  extermination 
or  loss  of  the  native  race  and  dynasty  as  their  destiny,  and  conse- 
quently desire  to  see  the  fullest  encouragement  offered  for  the  ingress 
and  permanent  settlement  of  a  foreign  population  and  capital.    While 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  119 

these  would  urge  the  Government  on  with  a  rapidity  commensurate 
with  Anglo-Saxon  spirit  and  intelligence,  the  native  race  by  their 
slowness  of  apprehension  and  fears  for  their  security  in  case  the  full 
torrent  of  civilized  emigration  and  enterprise  is  let  in  unrestrained 
upon  them,  hold  them  back.  On  the  one  hand  the  Government  is  as 
unable  fully  to  satisfy  the  cravings  of  the  whites  to  advance,  as  it 
is  to  bring  the  native  mind  to  a  clear  appreciation  and  faithful  carry- 
ing out  of  the  measures  best  adapted  to  benefit  it  and  render  it  more 
capable  of  assimilating  with  the  superior  intelligence  of  Anglo-Saxon 
intellect.  They  steadily  endeavor  to  preserve  the  Hawaiian  race;  to 
christianize  and  civilize  themj  and  to  this  end  they  invite  a  limited 
cooperation  of  foreign  aid,  enough  to  innoculate  the  nation  with 
courage  and  enterprise,  without  deluging  it  in  a  torrent  which  in  their 
present  condition  they  would  inevitably  fail  to  bear  up  against.  In 
this  way  a  just  middle  course  is  adopted,  which  it  would  seem  from 
past  experience  tends  to  build  up  a  mixed  Hawaiian  and  foreign  race, 
civilized,  moral,  and  industrious,  and  capable  of  taking  an  elevated 
position  in  the  ranks  of  minor  nations." 

XVII.  Also  the  following  extracts  from  the  Honolulu 

DIRECTORY  AND  HISTORICAL  SKETCH  OF  THE  HAWAIIAN  OR  SAND- 
WICH ISLANDS,  BY  C.  C.  BENNETT,  INCLUDING  A  CHRONOLOGICAL 
TABLE  OF  NOTABLE  EVENTS  CONNECTED  WITH  HAWAIIAN  HISTORY. 

"1736.  Kamehanieha  I  born  at  Kokoiki,  Kohala. 

"1740.  The  King  of  Oahu,  on  the  passage  to  Molokai,  sees  a  ship. 

u  1768.  Kaahumanu  born. 

"1775.  Kaahumanu  becomes  the  wife  of  Kamehameha  I. 

"1779.  January  17  Oapt.  Cook  anchored  in  the  bay  of  Kealakekua, 
Hawaii. 

"February  14  Capt.  Cook  was  slain  at  Kaawaloa,  Hawaii. 

"1782.  April,  Kalaniopuu  died,  leaving  his  Kingdom  (western 
Hawaii),  to  Kiwalao,  who  was  his  own  son. 

"  July,  the  battle  named  Mokuahae,  i.  e.,  the  fight  of  Kamehameha 
with  Kiwalao  and  his  party  at  Keomo,  Hawaii,  Kamehameha  triumphed, 
Kiwalao  was  slain,  and  Keoua  became  King  of  Kau  and  Puna. 

"  Keawemauhili  reigns  as  King  at  Hilo,  Hawaii. 

"Keaulumoku  composed  the  mele  Haui  Ka  Lani,  or  a  prophecy  of 
the  overthrow  of  Hawaii  by  Kamehameha. 

"  1790  first  American  ship  (Eleanor ,  Capt.  Metcalf),  visited  the  islands. 

"  Keona  was  taken  prisoner  by  Kamehameha  at  Koapapaa,  Hama- 
kua,  Hawaii,  and  Kamehameha  thus  became  sole  King  of  the  whole 
island. 

"  John  Young  and  Isaac  Davis  became  attached  to  Kamehameha. 

"1791.  In  this  year  the  battle  of  Nuuanu  was  fought,  im  which 
Kalanikupule,.  son  of  Kahekili,  King  of  Maui  and  Oahu,  was  slain, 
and  thus  Maui,  Molokai,  Lanai,  and  Oahu  fell  into  the  hands  of  Kame- 
hameha. 

"  1792.  March  3,  Capt.  Vancouver  first  visited  the  islands,  and  left 
cattle,  sheep,  etc. 

"The  Boedalus,  store  ship,  visited  Waimea,  Oahu;  a  massacre. 

"1793.  March  12,  Vancouver  anchored  at  Lahaina. 

"  1794.  December,  first  discovery  of  Honolulu  Harbor.  Entered  by 
Jaclml  and  Prince  Leboo,  American. 

"  Kekuanaoa  born. 

"1795.  January  12,  last  visit  of  Vancouver. 

"  Daedalus  visits  Mihau  -,  massacre.     January  1,  murder  of  captains. 

"17&7.  Liholiho  (Kamehameha  II)  was  born. 


120  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

"1601.  The  fleet  of  canoes  called  Peleleu  arrived  at  Kawaihae. 

"1802.  The  Peleleu  arrived  at  Lahaina. 

"1803.  The  Peleleu  arrived  at  Oahu. 

"  1804.  The  great  pestilence  called  a  aliulau  olcuu. 

"1812.  The  stone  wall  of  Kiholo  was  built. 

"1814.  March,  Kauikeaouli  (Kamehameha  III)  was  born. 

"1817.  The  fort  at  Honolulu  finished. 

"1819.  May  8,  Kamehameha  I  died. 

"October,  Liholiho  breaks  kapu  on  the  night  of  kukahi. 

"1820.  January,  a  battle  on  account  of  breaking  kapu,  at  Kuamoo 
on  Hawaii. 

"March  30,  first  missionaries  arrived  at  Kailua. 

"April  18,  missionaries  first  arrived  at  Honolulu. 

"July,  Messrs.  Whitney  and  Buggies  sailed  for  Kauai." 

"First  whaler  (Mary,  Oapt.  Allen)  enters  Honolulu  Harbor. 

"  1821.  First  house  of  Christian  worship  built  in  Honolulu. 

"  1822.  January  7,  printing  first  commenced  at  the  islands.  It  is  said 
that  King  Liholiho  was  allowed  to  pull  the  first  sheet. 

"1823.  April  27,  the  second  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"November  27,  Liholiho,  his  Queen,  and  attendants  sailed  for  Eng- 
land, leaving  the  Kingdom  in  the  care  of  Kaahumanu. 

"1824,  July  8,  Kamamalu,  wife  of  Libolibo,  died  in  London. 

"July  13,  Libolibo  died  in  London. 

"August,  Kapiolani  descended  into  the  volcano  of  Kilauea. 

"1825,  May  4,  Bold  and  his  companions  return  from  England  with 
the  remains  of  the  King  and  Queen  in  the  English  frigate  Blonde. 

"1827,  October,  Kinau  and  Kekuaiiaoa  were  married. 

"1828,  March  30,  the  third  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"  July  3,  first  meetinghouse  at  Honolulu  dedicated. 

"  December  2,  Boki  and  his  company  sailed  away  from  the  islands 
and  were  lost. 

"1830,  December  11,  His  Majesty  Kamehameha  V  was  born. 

"1831,  June  7,  the  fourth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"September,  the  high  school  at  Lahaina  was  commenced.- 

"1832,  May  17,  the  fifth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"June  5,  Kaahumanu  died. 

"June,  Kinau  was  appointed  premier  (kuhina  nui). 

"The Oahu  Charity  School  was  commenced. 

"1833,  March,  Kamehameha  III  assumes  the  reins  of  government, 
and  Kinau  becomes  his  minister  (Kuhina  Nui). 

"May  1,  the  sixth  companv  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"The  Bethel  Church  built"at  Honolulu. 

"1834,  February  9,  Kamehameha  IV  (Alexander  Liholiha)  was  born. 

"February  14,  first  newspaper  printed  at  the  Hawaiian  Islands, 
called  the  Lama  Hawaii,  at  Lahainaluna. 

"The  newspaper  Kumu  Hawaii  commenced  at  Honolulu. 

"1835,  June  6,  the  seventh  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"First  Hawaiian  Almanac  printed. 

"1836,  January  2,  the  queen  dowager,  Emma,  was  born. 

"The  female  seminary  at  Wailuku,  Maui,  commenced. 

"The  first  weekly  newspaper  in  English  commenced. 

"The  high  school  of  Mr.  Lyman  commenced  at  Hilo. 

"December,  Nahienaena  died. 

"1837,  February  4,  Kamehameha  III  and  Kalama  were  married. 

"April  9,  the  eighth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  121 

"The  business  of  laying  out  public  streets  in  Honolulu  was  com- 
menced. 

" November  7,  remarkable  rise  and  overflow  of  tide  throughout  the 
islands. 

"1838,  August,  the  chiefs  commence  the  study  of  political  economy 
with  Mr.  Richards. 

"November  1,  Victoria  Kainamalu  was  born. 

"April  4,  Kinau  died. 

"1839.  April  5,  Kekauluohi  became  premier  (KuhinaNui.) 

"May  10,  the  printing  of  the  first  edition  of  the  Hawaiian  bible 
finished. 

"July  9,  the  French  man-of-war  VArtemise  (Capt.  Laplace)  arrived. 

"Kaikioewa  died. 

"1840*  The  school  for  the  young  chiefs  commenced  at  Honolulu — 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Cook  teachers. 

"January,  Hoapili,  governor  of  Naui,  died. 

"The  stone  meeting-house  at  Kawaiahao,  Honolulu,  commenced. 

"August  3,  Mr.  Bingham  and  family  returned  to  the  United  States. 

"  October  8,  Kamehameha  III  gives  the  first  written  constitution  to 
the  people  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

"October  20,  Kamanawa  and  his  servant  were  publicly  executed  for 
jcrime. 

"September.  The  United  States  exploring  expedition  arrived. 

"1841,  May.  Kapiolani  died.      • 

"May  21.  The  ninth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"The  school  for  missionaries'  children  at  Punahou  (now  Oabu  Col- 
lege) commenced. 

"  1842.  January,  Hoapili  Wahine  (Kalakaua)  died. 

"  July  8,  Haalilio  sailed  as  commissioner  to  the  courts  of  France, 
England,  and  the  United  States. 

"  July  21,  the  meetinghouse  at  Kawaihal  finished. 

"  September  21,  the  tenth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"1843.  The  United  States  consent  to  the  independence  of  the 
Hawaiian  Islands. 

"  February  25,  Lord  George  Paulet  seized  the  Hawaiian  Islands  and 
raised  the  English  flag. 

"  July  31,  the  sovereignty  of  the  islands  was  restored  by  Admiral 
Thomas,  of  the  English  navy. 

"  September,  Bartimeus  Puaaiki  died. 

"1844.  The  Government  of  Belgium  consents  to  the  independence  of 
the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

"  November  28,  the  governments  of  England  and  France  recognize 
the  independence  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands. 

"July  15,  the  eleventh  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"Silk  exported  from  the  islands — 197  pounds. 

"Haalilio  died  on  his  return  voyage  to  the  islands. 

"1845.  April  2,  representatives  first  chosen  from  the  common  people 
under  the  constitution  of  October,  1840. 

"Mr.  Eichards,  the  interpreter  of  Haalilio,  returned  with  his  remains. 

"  Kekauluohi  died. 

"  First  export  of  coffee — 248  pounds. 

"John  Young  (Keoni  Ana)  is  appointed  premier  (kuhina  nui). 

"  1846.  February  11,  commissioners  appointed  to  settle  land  claims, 

"March  20,  Mr.  Whitney  died  at  Lahaiualuna. 

"1847.  Mr.  Eichards  died. 


122  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

" Governor  Kuakini  died. 

"First  appearance  of  Mormons  at  Honolulu,  en  route  for  California. 

"1848.  Leleiohoku  (William  Pitt)  died. 

"Moses  Kaikoewa  died. 

"  Kaiminaauao  died. 

"The  twelfth  company  of  missionaries  arrived. 

"The  measles  (mai  puupuu  ula)  prevailed,  and  was  very  fatal. 

"1849.  The  fort  seized  at  Honolulu  by  Admiral  Tromelin,  of  the 
French  navy. 

"Beef  first  exported  from  the  islands — 158  barrels. 

"  Keliiahonui  died. 

"1850.  James  Young  Kanehoa  died.     Kaoanaeha  died. 

"1851.  The  Hawaiian  Missionary  Society  was  formed. 

"Kekauonohi  died. 

"June,  the  court  house  at  Honolulu  built. 

"First  whale  oil  and  bone  transshipped. 

"1852.  April  2,  Kaliokalani  died. 

"First  export  of  fungus. 

"1853.  The  smallpox  (mai  puupuu  liilii)  swept  over  the  islands. 

"1854.  The  fort  at  Lahaina  demolished  by  order  of  the  Government. 

"December  15,  Kamehameha  III  (Kauikeaouli)  died,  and  Kanieha- 
meha  IY  became  King. 

"1855.  Pakidied. 

"Mr.  Hitchcock,  of  Molokai,  died.- 

"Flour  exported — 463  barrels. 

"1856.  June  2,  Kamehameha  IV  was  united  in  marriage  with  Emma 
Eooke. 

"Isaac  Davis  was  married  to  Euta  Keelikolani. 

"1857,  the  fort  at  Honolulu  was  demolished  by  order  of  the  Govern- 
ment. 

"  Konia  (widow  of  Paki)  died. 

"John  Young  (Keoni  Ana),  the  premier,  died. 

"Victoria  Kamamalu  appointed  KuhinaNui. 

"  May  28,  William  L.  Lee,  chief  justice  of  the  supreme  court,  died, 
a  jed,  36. 

"David  Malo,  native  Hawaiian  historian,  died. 

"Honeybees  first  introduced,  by  the  E.  H.  Agricultural  Society. 

"Oahu  prison  built. 

"1858,  May  20,  birth  of  the  Prince  of  Hawaii. 

"  Eice  first  systematically  cultivated  near  Honolulu. 

"  Sailors'  Home  established. 

"  1859,  July,  Eev.  L.  Smith's  premises  burnt. 

"  April  20,  Jona  Piikoi  died,  aged  50. 

"  April  26,  laying  of  corner  stone,  Odd  Fellows'  Hall. 

"  January  7,  dedication  of  Odd  Fellows'  Hall. 

"February,  eruption  of  volcano  on  Mauna  Loa,  running  down  to  Wai- 
nanalii. 

"  The  civil  code  published. 

"  Gaslight  first  introduced  into  Honolulu. 

"September  9,  William  Pitt  Kinau,  son  of  Leleiohoku  and  E.  Keeli- 
kolani, died  at  Kohala,  Hawaii,  aged  17. 

"1860,  May  5,  arrival  of  Japanese  embassy  en  route  to  the  United 
States. 

"New  custom-house  built,  Honolulu. 

"  Queen's  hospital  built. 

"  Honolulu  flour  mill  and  foundry  burned. 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  123 

" Steamer  Kilauea  arrived. 

" Prince  L.  Kamehameha  (Kamehameha  V)  sailed  for  California. 

"  September  23,  Rev.  Dr.  R.  Armstrong,  minister  of  public  instruc- 
tion, died. 

"Passage  of  the  'law  to  mitigate,'  etc. 

"1862.  April,  Palmyra  Island,  in  latitude  5°  50'  K".,  longitude  161°  53' 
W.,  taken  possession  of  by  Oapt.  Z.  Bent,  for  Kameliameha  IV  and  his 
successors,  and  subsequently  declared  by  royal  proclamation  to  be  a 
part  of  the  Hawaiian  domain. 

"August  27,  death  of  the  Prince  of  Hawaii,  aged  4  years,  3  months 
and  7  days. 

"The  funeral  took  place  September  7. 

"Lahainaluna  Seminary  burned  and  was  rebuilt  the  same  year. 

"October  11,  Reformed  Catholic  Church  mission  arrived. 

"1863.  November  30,  His  Majesty  Kamehameha  IV  died,  aged  29 
years,  9  months,  and  21  days,  and  Prince  Kamehameha  ascended  the 
throne  as  Kamehameha  V. 

"1864.  May  5,  convention  of  delegates  to  amend  the  constitution 
called  by  the  King. 

"  July  7,  convention  opened. 

"August  13,  convention  dissolved  and  constitution  abrogated. 

"August  20,  new  constitution  granted  by  the  King. 

"L.  Haalelea  died. 

"  1865.  October  19,  R.  C.  Wyllie,  minister  of  foreign  relations,  died, 
aged  67. 

"Queen  Emma  visited  the  United  States  and  Europe. 

"January  27,  arrival  of  the  steamer  Ajax  from  California. 

"1865.  May  29,  H.  R.  H.  Princess  V.  Kamamalu  died,  aged  27  years 
6  months  and  29  days. 

"July  20,  J.  Dudoit,  formerly  French  consul,  murdered. 

"October  22,  return  of  Queen  Emma. 

"1867.  March  12,  G.  M.  Robertson,  first  associate  justice  of  the 
supreme  court,  died,  aged  47. 

"1868.  November  4,  His  Highness  Mataio  Kekuanaoa,  father  of  the 
late  King  and  his  present  Majesty,  died,  aged  75  years. 

"  1869.  July  21,  arrival  of  H.  R.  H.  Alfred  Ernest,  Duke  of  Edinburg, 
in  command  of  H.  B.  M.'s  ship  Galatea. 

"August  2,  light-house  at  the  entrance  of  Honolulu  Harbor  perma- 
nently lighted. 

XVIII.  Deed  of  cession. 

"  The  deed  of  cession  reads  as  follows: 

"'In  consequence  of  the  difficulties  of  complying  with  the  demands 
in  the  manner  in  which  they  are  made  by  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  rep- 
resentative upon  us,  in  reference  to  the  claims  of  British  subjects,  we 
do  hereby  cede  the  group  of  islands  known  as  the  Hawaiian  (or  Sand- 
wich) Islands  unto  the  Right  Honorable  Lord  George  Paulet,  captain 
of  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  ship  of  war  Carysfort,  representing  Her 
Majesty  Victoria,  Queen  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  from  this  date 
and  the  time  being;  the  said  cession  being  made  witli  the  reservation 
that  it  is  subject  to  any  arrangement  that  may  have  been  entered  into 
by  the  representatives  appointed  by  us  to  treat  with  the  Government 
of  Her  Britannic  Majesty;  and  in  the  event  that  no  agreement  has  been 


124  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

executed  previous  to  the  date  hereof,  subject  to  the  decision  of  Her 
Britannic  Majesty's  Government,  on  conference  with  the  said  representa- 
tives appointed  by  us ;  or,  in  the  event  of  our  representatives  not  being 
accessible  or  not  having  been  acknowledged,  subject  to  the  decision 
which  Her  Britannic  Majesty  may  pronounce  on  the  receipt  of  full 
information  from  us  and  from  the  Eight  Honorable  Lord  George  Paulet. 

"'  In  confirmation  of  the  above  we  hereby  affix  our  names  and  seals 
this  twenty-fifth  day  of  February,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  one  thousand 
eight  hundred  and  forty-three,  at  Honolulu,  Oahu,  Sandwich  Islands. 

'"Signed  in  the  presence  of  G.  P.  Judd,  recorder  and  translator  for 
the  Government. 

"'Kamehameha  III. 
'"Kekauluohi. 


XIX.  ARTICLE  78,  CONSTITUTION  OF  1852. 

" '  Every  male  subject  of  His  Majesty,  whether  native  or  natural- 
ized, and  every  denizen  of  the  Kingdom,  who  shall  have  paid  his  taxes, 
who  shall  have  attained  the  age  of  20  years,  and  who  shall  have  resided 
in  the  Kingdom  for  one  year  immediately  preceding  the  time  of  election, 
shall  be  entitled  to  one  vote  for  the  representative  or  representatives  of 
the  district  in  which  he  may  have  resided  three  months  next  preceding 
the  day  of  election ;  provided,  that  no  insane  person,  nor  any  person  who 
shall  at  any  time  have  been  convicted  of  any  infamous  crime  within  this 
Kingdom,  unless  he  shall  have  been  pardoned  by  the  King,  and  by  the 
terms  of  such  pardon  been  restored  to  all  the  rights  of  a  subject,  shall 
be  allowed  to  vote/ 

CONSTITUTION  OF  1864. 

" '  Constitution  granted  by  His  Majesty  Kamehameha  F,  by  the  grace  of 
God,  king  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  on  the  twentieth  day  of  August, 
A.  J).  1864. 

'"Article  1.  God  hath  endowed  all  men  with  certain  inalienable 
rights;  among  which  are  life,  liberty,  and  right  of  acquiring,  possess- 
ing, and  protecting  property,  and  of  pursuing  and  obtaining  safety  and 
happiness. 

"  'Article  2.  All  men  are  free  to  worship  God  according  to  the  dic- 
tates of  their  own  conscience;  but  this  sacred  privilege  hereby  secured 
shall  not  be  so  construed  as  to  justify  acts  of  licentiousness  or  practices 
inconsistent  with  the  peace  or  safety  of  the  Kingdom. 

"  'Article  3.  All  men  may  freely  speak,  write,  and  publish  their 
sentimeuts  on  all  subjects,  being  responsible  for  the  abuse  of  that 
right,  and  no  law  shall  be  enacted  to  restrain  the  liberty  of  speech,  or  of 
the  press,  except  such  laws  as  may  be  necessary  for  the  protection  of 
His  Majesty  the  King  and  the  royal  family. 

"  'Article  4.  All  men  shall  have  the  right,  in  an  orderly  and  peace- 
able manner,  to  assemble,  without  arms,  to  consult  upon  the  common 
good  and  to  petition  the  King  or  Legislative  Assembly  for  redress  of 
grievances. 

"  'Article  5.  The  privilege  of  the  writ  of  habeas  corpus  belongs  to 
all  men,  and  shall  not  be  suspended,  unless  by  the  King,  when  in  cases 
of  rebellion  or  invasion  the  public  safety  shall  require  its  suspension. 

"'Article  6.  No  person  shall  be  subject  to  punishment  for   any 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  125 

offense,  except  on  due  and  legal  conviction  thereof  in  a  conrt  having 
jurisdiction  of  the  case. 

"  '.Article  7.  No  person  shall  be  held  to  answer  for  any  crime  or 
offence  (except  in  cases  of  impeachment,  or  for  offences  within  the 
jurisdiction  of  a  police  or  district  justice,  or  in  summary  proceedings 
for  contempt)  unless  upon  indictment,  fully  and  plainly  describing 
such  crime  or  offence,  and  he  shall  have  the  right  to  meet  the  witnesses 
who  are  produced  against  him  face  to  face;  to  produce  witnesses  and 
proofs  in  his  own  favor;  and  by  himself  or  his  counsel,  at  his  election, 
to  examine  the  witnesses  produced  by  himself,  and  cross-examine  those 
produced  against  him,  and  to  be  fully  heard  in  his  defence.  In  all 
cases  in  which  the  right  of  trial  by  jury  lias  been  heretofore  used  it 
shall  be  held  inviolable  forever,  except  in  actions  of  debt  or  assumpsit 
in  which  the  amount  claimed  is  less  than  fifty  dollars. 

" i  Article  8.  No  person  shall  be  required  to  answer  again  for  an 
offence  of  which  he  has  been  duly  convicted  or  of  which  he  has  been 
duly  acquitted  upon  a  good  and  sufficient  indictment. 

" '  Article  9.  No  person  shall  be  compelled,  in  any  criminal  case,  to 
be  a  witness  against  himself,  nor  be  deprived  of  life,  liberty,  or  prop- 
erty without  due  process  of  law. 

"  'Article  10.  No  person  shall  sit  as  a  judge  or  juror  in  any  case 
in  which  his  relative  is  interested,  either  as  plaintiff  or  defendant,  or  in 
the  issue  of  which  the  said  judge  or  juror  may  have,  either  directly  or 
through  a  relative,  any  pecuniary  interest. 

'"  Article  11.  Involuntary  servitude,  except  for  crime,  is  forever 
prohibited  in  this  Kingdom;  whenever  a  slave  shall  enter  Hawaiian 
territory  he  shall  be  free. 

"  'Article  12.  Every  person  has  the  right  to  be  secure  from  all 
unreasonable  searches  and  seizures  of  his  person,  his  house,  his  papers, 
and  effects;  and  no  warrants  shall  issue,  but  on  probable  cause  sup- 
ported by  oath  or  affirmation  and  describing  the  place  to  be  searched 
and  the  persons  or  things  to  be  seized.  « 

"  «  Article  13.  The  King  conducts  his  Government  for  the  common 
good,  and  not  for  the  profit,  honor,  or  private  interest  of  any  one  man, 
family,  or  class  of  men  among  his  subjects. 

"  'Article  14.  Each  member  of  society  has  a  right  to  be  protected 
by  it  in  the  enjoyment  of  his  life,  liberty,  and  property,  according  to 
law;  and,  therefore,  he  shall  be  obliged  to  contribute  his  proportional 
share  to  the  expense  of  this  protection,  and  to  give  his  personal 
services  or  an  equivalent  when  necessary;  but  no  part  of  the  property 
of  any  individual  shall  be  taken  from  him,  or  applied  to  public  uses, 
without  his  own  consent  or  the  enactment  of  the  Legislative  Assembly, 
except  the  same  shall  be  necessary  for  the  military  operation  of  the 
Kingdom  in  time  of  war  or  insurrection;  and  whenever  the  public 
exigencies  may  require  that  the  property  of  any  individual  should  be 
appropriated  to  public  use  he  shall  receive  a  reasonable  compensation 
therefor. 

"'Article  15.  No  subsidy,  duty,  or  tax  of  any  description  shall  be 
established  or  levied  without  the  consent  of  the  legislative  assembly; 
nor  shall  any  money  be  drawn  from  the  public  treasury  without  such 
consent,  except  when  between  the  sessions  of  the  legislative  assem- 
bly the  emergencies  of  war,  invasion,  rebellion,  pestilence,  or  other  pub- 
lic disaster  shall  arise,  and  then  not  without  the  concurrence  of  all  the 
cabinet  and  a  majority  of  the  whole  privy  council;  and  the  minister 
of  finance  shall  render  a  detailed  account  of  such  expenditure  to  the 
legislative  assembly. 


126  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

"'Article  16.  No  retrospective  laws  shall  ever  be  enacted. 

"  'Article  17.  The  military  shall  always  be  subject  to  the  laws  of  the 
land;  and  no  soldier  shall,  in  time  of  peace,  be  quartered  in  any  house 
without  the  consent  of  the  owner;  nor  in  time  of  war  but  in  a  man- 
ner to  be  prescribed  by  the  Legislature. 

"'Article  18.  Every  elector  shall  be  privileged  from  arrest  on  elec- 
tion days,  during  his  attendance  at  election,  and  in  going  to  and 
returning  therefrom,  except  in  cases  of  treason,  felony,  or  breach  of 
the  peace. 

"'Article  19.  No  elector  shall  be  obliged  to  perform  military  duty 
on  the  day  of  election  as  to  prevent  his  voting,  except  in  time  of  war 
or  public  danger. 

"  'Article  20.  The  supreme  power  of  the  Kingdom  in  its  exercise 
is  divided  into  the  executive,  legislative,  and  judicial;  these  shall 
always  be  preserved  distinct,  and  no  judge  of  a  court  of  record  shall 
ever  be  a  member  of  the  legislative  assembly. 

i'  'Article  21.  The  Government  of  this  Kingdom  is  that  of  a  con- 
stitutional monarchy,  under  His  Majesty  Kamehameha  V,  his  heirs 
and  successors. 

"  'Article  22.  The  crown  is  hereby  permanently  confirmed  to  His 
Majesty  Kamehameha  V,  and  to  the  heirs  of  his  body  lawfully  begotten, 
and  to  their  lawful  descendants  in  a  direct  line;  failing  whom,  the 
crown  shall  descend  to  Her  Royal  Highness  the  Princess  Victoria 
Kamamalu  Kaahumanu.  and  the  heirs  of  her  body  lawfully  begotten, 
and  their  lawful  descendants  in  a  direct  line.  The  succession  shall  be 
to  the  senior  male  child,  and  to  the  heirs  of  his  body;  failing  a  male 
child,  the  succession  shall  be  to  the  senior  female  child  and  to  the  heirs 
of  her  body.  In  case  there  is  no  heir  as  above  provided,  then  the 
successor  shall  be  the  person  whom  the  sovereign  shall  appoint,  with 
the  consent  of  the  nobles,  and  publicly  proclaim  as  such  during  the 
King's  life;  but  should  there  be  no  such  appointment  and  proclama- 
tion and  the  throne  should  become  vacant,  then  the  cabinet  council, 
immediately  after  the  occurring  of  such  vacancy,  shall  cause  a  meeting 
of  the  legislative  assembly,  who  shall  elect  by  ballot  some  native  Alii  of 
the  Kingdom  as  successor  to  the  throne;  and  the  successor  so  elected 
shall  become  a  new  Stirps  for  a  royal  family,  and  the  succession  from 
the  sovereign  thus  elected  shall  be  regulated  by  the  same  law  as  the 
present  royal  family  of  HawaiL 

"  'Article  23.  It  shall  not  be  lawful  for  any  member  of  the  royal 
family  of  Hawaii,  who  may  by  law  succeed  to  the  throne,  to  contract 
marriage  without  the  consent  of  the  reigning  sovereign.  Every  mar- 
riage so  contracted  shall  be  void,  and  the  person  so  contracting  a  mar- 
riage may,  by  the  proclamation  of  the  reigning  sovereign,  be  declared 
to  have  forfeited  his  or  her  right  to  the  throne,  and,  after  such  procla- 
mation, the  right  of  succession  shall  vest  in  the  next  heir,  as  though 
such  offender  were  dead. 

"  'Article  24.  His  Majesty  Kamehameha  V  will,  and  his  succes- 
sors upon  coming  to  the  throne  shall,  take  the  following  oath :  I  sol- 
emnly swear  in  the  presence  of  Almighty  God  to  maintain  the  consti- 
tution  of  the  Kingdom  whole  and  inviolate,  and  to  govern  in  conformity  i 
therewith. 

"  'Article  25.  No  person  shall  ever  sit  upon  the  throne  who  has  been 
convicted  of  any  infamous  crime,  or  who  is  insane,  or  an  idiot. 

"'Article  26.  The  King  is  the  commander-in-chief  of  the  army  and 
navy,  and  of  all  other  military  forces  of  the  Kingdom,  by  sea  and  land ; 
and"  has  full  power  by  himself,  or  by  any  officer  or  oHicers  he  may 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  127 

appoint,  to  train  and  govern  such  forces  as  lie  may  judge  best  for  the 
defense  and  safety  of  the  Kingdom.  But  he  shall  never  proclaim 
without  the  consent  of  the  legislative  assembly. 

"  'Article  27.  The  King,  by  and  with  the  advice  of  his  privy  coun- 
cil, has  the  power  to  grant  reprieves  and  pardon,  after  conviction,  for 
all  offenses,  except  in  cases  of  impeachment. 

"  'Article  28.  The  King,  by  and  with  the  advice  of  his  privy  coun- 
cil, convenes  the  legislative  assembly  at  the  seat  of  Government,  or 
at  a  different  place  if  that  should  become  dangerous  from  an  enemy, 
or  any  dangerous  disorder;  and  in  case  of  disagreement  between  His 
Majesty  and  the  legislative  assembly  he  adjourns,  prorogues,  or  dis- 
solves it,  but  not  beyond  the  next  ordinary  session  under  any  great 
emergency  he  may  convene  the  legislative  assembly  to  extraordinary 
sessions. 

"  'Article  29.  The  King  has  the  power  to  make  treaties.  Treaties 
involving  changes  in  the  tariff  or  in  any  law  of  the  Kingdom  shall  be 
referred  for  approval  to  the  legislative  assembly.  The  King  appoints 
public  ministers,  who  shall  be  commissioned,  accredited,  and  instructed 
agreeably  to  the  usuage  and  law  of  nations. 

u  'Article  30.  It  is  the  King's  prerogative  to  receive  and  acknowl- 
edge public  ministers,  to  inform  the  legislative  assembly  by  royal  mes- 
sage, from  time  to  time,  of  the  state  of  the  Kingdom,  and  to  recommend 
to  its  consideration  such  measures  as  he  shall  judge  necessary  and 
expedient. 

"'Article  31.  The  person  of  the  King  is  inviolable  and  sacred. 
His  ministers  are  responsible.  To  the  King  belongs  the  executive 
power.  All  laws  that  have  passed  the  legislative  assembly  shall 
require  His  Majesty's  signature  in  order  to  their  validity. 

"'Article  32.  Whenever,  upon  the  decease  of  the  reigning  sover- 
eign, the  heir  shall  be  less  than  eighteen  years  of  age,  the  royal  power 
shall  be  exercised  by  a  regent  or  council  of  regency,  as  hereinafter  pro- 
vided. 

"'Article  33.  It  shall  lawrful  for  the  King  at  any  time  when  he  may 
be  about  to  absent  himself  from  the  Kingdom  to  appoint  a  regent,  or 
council  of  regency,  who  shall  administer  the  Government  in  his  name; 
and  likewise  the  King  may,  by  his  last  will  and  testament,  appoint  a 
regent,  or  council  of  regency,  to  administer  the  Government  during  the 
minority  of  any  heir  to  the  throne,  and  should  a  sovereign  decease, 
leaving  a  minor  heir,  and  having  made  no  last  will  and  testament,  the 
cabinet  council,  at  the  time  of  such  decease,  shall  be  a  council  of 
regency  until  the  legislative  assembly,  which  shall  be  called  immedi- 
ately, may  be  assembled,  and  the  legislative  assembly  immediately 
that  it  is  assembled  shall  proceed  to  choose,  by  ballot,  a  regent,  or 
council  of  regency,  who  shall  administer  the  Government  in  the  name 
of  the  King,  and  exercise  all  the  powers  which  are  constitutionally 
vested  in  the  King  until  he  shall  have  attained  the  age  of  eighteen  years, 
which  age  is  declared  to  be  the  legal  majority  of  such  sovereigns. 

"'Article  34.  The  King  is  sovereign  of  all  the  chiefs  and  of  all  the 
people;  the  Kingdom  is  his. 

"'Article  35.  All  titles  of  honor,  orders,  and  other  distinctions 
emanate  from  the  King. 

'"Article  36.  The  King  coins  money  and  regulates  the  currency 
by  law. 

"  'Article  37.  The  King,  in  case  of  invasion  or  rebellion,  ean  place 
the  whole  Kingdom,  or  any  part  of  it,  under  martial  law. 


128  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

"'  Article  38.  The  national  ensign  shall  not  be  changed  except  by 
act  of  the  Legislature. 

" '  Article  39.  The  King's  private  lands  and  other  property  are 
inviolable. 

"'  Article  40.  The  King  can  not  be  sued  or  held  to  account  in  any 
court  or  tribunal  of  the  realm. 

ui  Article  41.  There  shall  continue  to  be  a  council  of  state  for 
advising  the  King  in  all  matters  for  the  good  of  the  State  wherein  he 
may  require  its  advice,  and  for  assisting  him  in  administering  the 
executive  affairs  of  the  Government  in  such  manner  as  he  may  direct ; 
which  council  shall  be  called  the  King's  private  council  of  state,  and 
the  members  thereof  shall  be  appointed  by  the  King,  to  hold  office 
during  His  Majesty's  pleasure. 

"  ' Article  42.  The  King's  cabinet  shall  consist  of  a  minister  of  for- 
eign affairs,  the  minister  of  the  interior,  the  minister  of  finance,  and  the 
attorney- general  of  the  Kingdom,  and  these  shall  be  His  Majesty's  spe- 
cial advisers  in  the  executive  affairs  of  the  Kingdom ;  and  they  shall 
be  ex  officio  members  of  His  Majesty's  privy  council  of  state.  They 
shall  be  appointed  and  commissioned  by  the  King,  and  hold  office  dur- 
ing His  Majesty's  pleasure,  subject  to  impeachment.  No  act  of  the  King 
shall  have  any  effect  unless  it  be  countersigned  by  a  minister,  who,  by 
that  signature,  makes  himself  responsible. 

"  'Article  43.  Each  member  of  the  King's  cabinet  shall  keep  an  I 
office  at  the  seat  of  Government,  and  shall  be  accountable  for  the  con- 
duct of  his  deputies  or  clerks.    The  ministry  holds  seats  ex  officio  as 
nobles  in  the  legislative  assembly. 

"  'Article  44.  The  minister  of  finance  shall  present  to  the  legisla- 
tive assembly,  in  the  name  of  the  Government,  on  the  first  day  of  the 
meeting  of  the  Legislature,  the  financial  budget  in  the  Hawaiian  and 
English  languages. 

"  'Article  45.  The  Legislative  power  of  the  three  estates  of  this 
kingdom  is  vested  in  the  King  and  the  legislative  assembly;  which 
assembly  shall  consist  of  the  nobles,  appointed  by  the  King,  and  of 
the  lepresentatives  of  the  people,  sitting  together. 

u  'Article  46.  The  legislative  body  shall  assemble  biennially  in  the 
month  of  April,  and  at  such  other  time  as  the  King  may  judge  neces- 
sary, for  the  purpose  of  seeking  the  welfare  of  the  nation.  This  body 
shall  be  styled  the  Legislature  of  the  Hawaiian  Kingdom. 

"  'Article  47.  Every  member  of  the  legislative  assembly  shall  take 
the  following  oath :  I  most  solemnly  swear,  in  the  presence  of  Almighty 
God,  that  I  will  faithfully  support  the  constitution  of  the  Hawaiian 
Kingdom  <and  conscientiously  and  impartially  discharge  my  duties  as 
a  member  of  this  assembly. 

"'Article  48.  The  Legislature  has  full  power  and  authority  to 
amend  the  constitution  as  hereinafter  provided,  and  from  time  to  time 
to  make  all  manner  of  wholesome  laws  not  repugnant  to  the  provisions 
of  the  constitution. 

"'Article  49.  The  King  shall  signify  his  approval  of  any  bill  or 
resolution  which  shall  have  passed  the  legislative  assembly  by  sign- 
ing the  same  previous  to  the  final  rising  of  the  Legislature.  But  if  he 
shall  object  to  the  passing  of  such  bill  or  resolution  he  will  return  to 
the  legislative  assembly,  who  shall  enter  the  fact  of  such  return  on  its 
journal,  and  such  bill  or  resolution  shall  not  be  brought  forward  there- 
after during  the  same  session. 

"  'Article  50.  The  legislative  assembly  shall  be  the  judge  of  the 
qualifications  of  its  own  members,  and  a  majority  shall  constitute  a 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  129 

quorum  to  do  business;  but  a  smaller  number  may  adjourn  from  day 
to  day,  and  compel  the  attendance  of  absent  members  in  such  manner 
and  under  such  penalties  as  the  assembly  may  provide. 

M  'Article  51.  The  legislative  assembly  shall  choose  its  own  officers 
and  determine  the  rules  of  its  own  proceedings. 

"'Article  52.  The  legislative  assembly  shall  have  authority  to  pun- 
ish by  imprisonment,  not  exceeding  thirty  days,  every  person  not  a 
member  who  shall  be  guilty  of  disrespect  to  the  assembly  by  any  dis- 
orderly or  contemptuous  behavior  in  its  presence,  or  who,  during  the 
time  of  its  sitting,  shall  make  any  false  report  of  its  proceedings  or 
insulting  comments  upon  the  same,  or  who  shall  threaten  harm  to  the 
body  or  estate  of  any  of  its  members  for  anything  said  or  done  in  the 
assembly,  or  who  shall  assault  any  of  them  therefor,  or  who  shall  assault 
or  arrest  any  witness  or  other  person  ordered  to  attend  the  assembly 
in  his  way  going  or  returning  or  who  shall  rescue  any  person  arrested 
by  order  of  the  assembly. 

"  'Article  53.  The  legislative  assembly  may  punish  its  own  mem- 
bers for  disorderly  behavior. 

"  'Article  54.  The  legislative  assembly  shall  keep  a  journal  of  its 
proceedings,  and  the  yeas  and  nays  of  its  members,  or  any  question, 
shall,  at  the  desire  of  one-fifth  of  those  present*,  be  entered  on  the 
journal. 

"  'Article  55.  The  members  of  the  legislative  assembly  shall,  in 
all  cases  except  treason,  felony,  or  breach  of  the  peace,  be  privileged 
from  arrest  during  their  attendance  at  the  sessions  of  the  Legislature 
and  in  going  to  and  returning  from  the  same ;  and  they  shall  not  be  held 
to  answer  for  any  speech  or  debate  held  in  the  assembly  in  any  other 
court  or  place  whatsoever. 

'"Article  56.  The  representatives  shall  receive  for  their  services 
a  compensation  to  be  ascertained  bylaw  and  paid  out  of  the  public 
treasury,  but  no  increase  of  compensation  shall  take  effect  during  the 
year  in  which  it  shall  have  been  made;  and  no  law  shall  be  passed 
increasing  the  compensation  of  said  representatives  beyond  the  sum  of 
two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars  for  each  session. 

"'  Article  57.  The  King  appoints  the  nobles,  who  shall  hold  their 
appointments  during  life,  subject  to  the  provisions  of  article  53,  but 
their  number  shall  not  exceed  twenty. 

"  '  Article  58.  No  person  shall  be  appointed  a  noble  who  shall  not 
have  attained  the  age  of  twenty-one  years  and  resided  in  the  Kingdom 
five  years. 

" '  Article  59.  The  nobles  shall  be  a  court,  with  full  and  sole  authority 
to  hear  and  determine  all  impeachments  made  by  the  representatives, 
as  the  grand  inquest  of  the  Kingdom,  against  any  officers  of  the  King- 
dom for  misconduct  or  maladministration  in  their  offices;  but,  previous 
to  the  trial  of  every  impeachment,  the  nobles  shall  respectively  be  sworn 
truly  and  impartially  to  determine  the  charge  in  question,  according  to 
evidence  and  the  law.  Their  judgment,  however,  shall  not  extend 
further  than  to  removal  from  office  and  disqualification  to  hold  or  enjoy 
any  place  of  honor,  trust,  or  profit  under  this  Government;  but  the 
party  so  convicted  shall  be,  nevertheless,  liable  to  indictment,  trial, 
judgment,  and  punishment  according  to  the  laws  of  the  land.  No  min- 
ister shall  sit  as  a  noble  on  the  trial  of  any  impeachment. 

"  '  Article  60.   The  representation  of  the  people  shall  be  based 

upon  the  principle  of  equality,  and  shall  be  regulated  and  apportioned 

by  the  Legislature  according  to  the  population,  to  be  ascertained,  from 

time  to  time,  by  the  official  census.    The  representatives  shall  not  be 

S.  Eep.  227—9 


130  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

less  in  number  than  twenty-four  nor  more  than  forty,  who  shall  be 
elected  biennually. 

"  <  Article  61.  No  person  shall  be  eligible  for  a  representative  of  the 
people  who  is  insane  or  an  idiot;  nor  unless  he  be  a  male  subject  of 
the  Kingdom ;  who  shall  have  arrived  at  a  full  age  of  twenty-one  years, 
who  shall  know  how  to  read  and  write,  who  shall  understand  accounts, 
and  shall  have  been  domiciled  in  the  Kingdom  for  at  least  three  years, 
the  last  of  which  shall  be  the  year  immediately  preceding  his  election, 
and  who  shall  own  real  estate  within  the  Kingdom  of  a  clear  value  over 
and  above  all  incumbrances  of  at  least  five  hundred  dollars,  or  who 
shall  have  an  annual  income  of  at  least  two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars 
derived  from  any  property  or  some  lawful  employment. 

" l Article  62.  Every  male  subject  of  the  Kingdom  who  shall  have 
paid  his  taxes,  who  shall  have  attained  the  age  of  twenty  years,  and 
shall  have  been  domiciled  in  the  Kingdom  for  one  year  immediately  pre- 
ceding the  election,  and  shall  be  possessed  of  real  property  in  this 
Kingdom  to  the  value  over  and  above  all  incumbrances  of  one  hundred 
and  fifty  dollars,  or  of  a  leasehold  property  on  which  the  rent  is  twenty- 
five  dollars  per  year,  or  of  an  income  of  not  less  than  seventy- five  dol- 
lars per  year,  derived  from  any  property  or  some  lawful  employment, 
and  shall  know  how  to  read  and  write,  if  born  since  the  year  1840, 
and  shall  have  caused  his  name  to  be  entered  on  the  list  of  voters  of 
his  district  as  may  be  provided  by  law,  shall  be  entitled  to  one  vote  for 
the  representative  or  representatives  of  that  district :  Provided,  how- 
ever. That  no  insane  or  idiotic  person,  nor  any  person  who  shall  have 
been  convicted  of  any  infamous  crime  within  this  Kingdom,  unless  he 
shall  have  been  pardoned  by  the  King,  and  by  the  terms  of  such  par- 
don have  been  restored  to  all  the  rights  of  a  subject,  shall  be  allowed 
to  vote. 

M  < Article  63.  The  property  qualifications  of  the  representatives  of 
the  people  and  of  the  electors  may  be  increased  by  law. 

Ui  Article  64.  The  judicial  power  of  the  Kingdom  shall  be  vested 
in  one  supreme  court,  and  in  such  inferior  courts  as  the  Legislature 
may,  from  time  to  time,  establish. 

"'Article  65.  The  supreme  court  shall  consist  of  a  chief  justice  and 
not  less  than  two  associate  justices,  any  of  who  may  hold  the  court. 
The  justices  of  the  supreme  court  shall  hold  their  offices  during  good 
behavior,  subject  to  remoual  upon  impeachment,  and  shall,  at  stated 
times,  receive  for  their  services  a  compensation  which  shall  not  be  dimin- 
ished during  their  continuance  in  office':  Provided,  however,  That  any 
judge  of  the  supreme  court  or  any  other  court  of  record  may  be  removed 
from  office,  on  a  resolution  passed  by  two-thirds  of  the  legislative  assem- 
bly, for  good  cause  shown  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  King.  The  judge 
against  whom  the  legislative  assembly  may  be  about  to  proceed  shall 
receive  notice  thereof,  accompanied  by  a  copy  of  the  causes  alleged  for 
his  removal,  at  least  ten  days  before  the  day  on  which  the  legislative 
assembly  shall  act  thereon.  He  shall  be  heard  before  the  legislative 
assembly. 

Ui  Article  66.  The  judicial  power  shall  be  divided  among  the  su- 
preme court  and  the  several  inferior  courts  of  the  Kingdom  in  such 
manner  as  the  Legislature  may  from  time  to  time  prescribe,  and  the 
tenure  of  office  in  the  inferior  courts  of  the  Kingdom  shall  be  such  as 
may  be  defined  by  the  law  creating  them. 

iU  Article  67.  The  judicial  power  shall  extend  to  all  cases  in  law 
and  equity  arising  under  the  constitution  and  laws  of  this  Kingdom, 
and  treaties  made,  or  which  shall  be  made  under  their  authority,  to  all 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  131 

cases  affecting  public  ministers  and  councils  and  to  aU  c^ses  of  admir- 
alty and  maritime  jurisdiction. 

*  Article  68.  The  chief  justice  of  the  supreme  court  shall  be  the 
chancellor  of  the  Kingdom  5  he  shall  be  ex  officio  president  of  the  nobles 
in  all  cases  of  impeachment,  unless  when  impeached  himself,  and  exer- 
cise such  jurisdiction  in  equity  or  other  cases  as  the  law  may  confer 
upon  him,  his  decisions  being  subject,  however,  to  the  revision  of  the 
supreme  court  on  appeal.  Should  the  chief  justice  ever  be  impeached 
some  person  specially  commissioned  by  the  King  shall  be  president  of 
the  court  of  impeachment  during  such  trial. 

"'Article  69.  The  decisions  of  the  supreme  court,  when  made  by 
a  majority  of  the  justices  thereof,  shall  be  final  and  conclusive  upon  all 
parties. 

"  'Article  70.  The  King,  his  cabinet,  and  the  legislative  assembly 
shall  have  authority  to  require  the  opinions  of  the  justices  of  the 
supreme  court  upon  important  questions  of  law  and  upon  solemn 
occasions. 

"'Article.  71.  The  King  appoints  the  justices  of  the  supreme  court 
and  all  other  judges  of  courts  of  record;  their  salaries  are  fixed  by  law. 

"  'Article  72.  No  judge  or  magistrate  can  sit  alone  on  an  appeal  or 
new  trial  in  any  case  on  which  he  may  have  given  a  previous  judgment. 

u  'Article  73.  No  person  shall  ever  hold  any  office  of  honor,  trust, 
or  profit  under  the  Government  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  who  shall,  in 
due  course  of  law,  have  been  convicted  of  theft,  bribery,  perjury, 
forgery,  embezzlement,  or  other  high  crime  or  misdemeanor,  unless  he 
shall  have  been  pardoned  by  the  King  and  restored  to  his  civil  rights, 
and  by  the  express  terms  of  his  pardon  declared  to  be  appointable  to 
offices  of  trust,  honor,  and  profit. 

"'Article  74.  No  officer  of  this  Government  shall  hold  any  office 
or  receive  any  salary  from  any  other  Government  or  power  whatever. 

"'Article  75.  The  Legislature  votes  the  appropriations  biennially, 
after  due  consideration  of  the  revenue  and  expenditures  for  the  two 
preceding  years  and  the  estimates  of  the  revenue  and  expenditures  of 
the  two  succeeding  years,  which  shall  be  submitted  to  them  by  the 
minister  of  finance. 

'"Article  76.  The  enacting  style  in  making  and  passing  all  acts 
and  laws  shall  be,  "  Be  it  enacted  by  the  King  and  the  legislative 
assembly  of  the  Hawaiian  Islands  in  the  Legislature  of  the  Kingdom 
assembled." 

"  'Article  77.  To  avoid  improper  influences  which  may  result  from 
intermixing  in  one  and  the  same  act  such  things  as  have  no  proper 
relation  to  each  other  every  law  shall  embrace  but  one  object,  and 
that  shall  be  expressed  in  its  title. 

"  'Article  78.  All  laws  in  force  in  this  Kingdom  shall  continue  and 
remain  in  full  effect  until  altered  or  repealed  by  the  Legislature,  such 
parts  only  excepted  as  are  repugnant  to  this  constitution.  All  laws 
heretofore  enacted,  or  that  may  hereafter  be  enacted,  which  are  con- 
trary to  this  constitution  shall  be  null  and  void. 

"'Article  79.  This  constitution  shall  be  in  force  from  the  twentieth 
day  of  August,  in  the  year  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  sixty-four, 
but  that  there  may  be  no  failure  of  justice  or  inconvenience  to  the 
Kingdom  from  any  change,  all  officers  of  this  Kingdom,  at  the  time  this 
constitution  shall  take  effect,  shall  have,  hold,  and  exercise  all  the 
power  to  them  granted  until  other  persons  shall  be  appointed  in  their 
stead. 

" '  Article  80.  Any  amendment  or  amendments  to  this  constitution 


132  HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS. 

may  be  proposed  in  the  legislative  assembly,  and  if  tlie  same  shall  be 
agreed  to  by  a  majority  of  the  members  thereof,  such  proposed  amend- 
ment or  amendments  sliall  be  entered  on  its  journal,  with  the  yeas  and 
nays  taken  thereon,  and  referred  to  the  next  Legislature;  which  pro- 
posed amendment  or  amendments  shall  be  published  for  three  months 
previous  to  the -next  election  of  representatives;  and  if  in  the  next 
Legislature  such  proposed  amendment  or  amendments  shall  be  agreed 
to  by  two-thirds  of  all  the  members  of  the  legislative  assembly,  and 
be  approved  by  the  King,  such  amendment  or  amendments  shall 
become  part  of  the  constitution  of  this  country. 

"  <  Kamehameha  R?  " 
(Pp.  26,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  32,  and  33.) 

Joint  resolution  of  the  Hawaiian  Legislature  of  1856. 

Ui  Resolved,  That  whereas  it  is  desirable  to  codify  our  existing  laws, 
His  Royal  Highness  Prince  Kamehameha,  the  honorable  W.  L.  Lee, 
chief  justice,  and  the  honorable  George  M.  Eobertson,  associate 
judge  of  the  supreme  court,  are  appointed  a  committee  to  prepare  a 
complete  civil  code,  adding  notes  with  reference  to  important  decisions 
of  court  under  the  laws,  wherever  they  may  think  necessary,  and  to 
report  the  same  for  the  sanction  of  the  Legislature  of  1858,  with  an 
appropriate  index  for  facility  of  reference ?"  (p.  39). 

Comment  on  legislative  provision  for  publication  of  Hawaiian  late  reports. 

"'It  may  not  be  inappropriate  in  this  connection  to  state  that  so 
highly  esteemed  are  some  of  the  dicta  of  our  Hawaiian  courts  abroad 
that  their  decisions  have  in  more  than  one  instance  been  quoted  in 
some  of  the  higher  courts  of  the  United  States.  This  is  no  small  honor 
to  be  attained  by  a  nation  which,  one  generation  only  ago,  had  no  law 
but  the  "word  of  the  chief  >■'  (p.'40). 

XX.  List  showing   that   a  very  small   proportion   of    the 

OFFICERS  IN  CHARGE  OF  THE  CONDUCT  OF  THE  GOVERNMENT 
WERE  NATIVE  HAWAIIANS,  THE  LARGER  PROPORTION  BEING 
AMERICANS. 

"  The  court,  Government  officers,  etc. 

"  The  court. — His  Majesty  Kamehameha  Y,  born  December  11, 
1830.  Ascended  the  throne  November  30,  1863.  Son  of  Kinau  and 
grandson  of  Kamehameha  I. 

"  Her  Majesty  Queen  Dowager  Kalama,  relict  of  His  Majesty  Kaui- 
keaouli,  Kamehameha  III. 

"  Her  Majesty  Queen  Dowager  Emma,  relict  of  His  Majesty  Alex- 
ander Liholiho,  Kamehameha  IV. 

"  Privy  council  of  state. — His  Majesty  the  King.  Their  excellencies 
the  ministers;  the  governors  of  Oahu,  Kauai,  and  Maui.  Her  excel- 
lency the  governess  of  Hawaii.  His  honor  the  chancellor  of  the 
Kingdom. 

"H.  A.  Kahanu,  S.  N.  Castle,  E.  G.  Davis,  A.  Fornander,  C.  Kanaina, 
C.  R.  Bishop,  P.  Y.  Kaeo,  P.  S.  Kalama,  W.  Hillebrand,  W.  0.  Luna- 
lilo,T.  S.  Staley,  J.W.  Makalena,  W.  P.  Kamakau,  G.Rhodes,  J.-Mott 
Smith,  T.  0.  Heuck ;  secretary,  D.  Kalakaua. 

" The  cabinet. — His  Majesty  the  King;  minister  of  foreign  relations, 
his  excellency  0.  de  Yarigny;  minister  of  the  interior,  his  excellency 


HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS.  133 

F.  W\  Hutchison;  minister  of  Nuance,  his  excellency  0.  C.  Harris; 
attorney-general,  Hon.  S.  H.  Phillips. 

"Bureau  of  public  instruction. — President,  Hon.  W.  P.  Kamakau; 
members,  0.  0.  Harris,  O.  de  Yarigny,  F.  W.  Hutchison,  and  Bishop 
Staley;  inspector-general  of  schools,  A.  Fornander;  secretary,  W.  J. 
Smith. 

"Bureau  immigration. — President,  minister  of  the  interior;  members, 
O.  R.  Bishop,  O.  C.  Harris,  D.  Kalakaua,  W.  Hillebrand. 

"Supreme  court. — Chief  justice,  E.  H.  Allen;  first  associate  justice, 
Hon.  A.  S.  Hartwell;  second  associate  justice,  Hon.  H.  A.  Wideinann; 
clerk,  L.  McOully,  esq.;  assistant  clerk,  W.  Humphreys,  esq. 

"  Circuit  judges. — First  circuit,  Oahu,  Hon.  W.  P.  Kamakau;  second 
circuit,  Maui,  Hon.  A.  J.  Lawrence;  third  circuit,  Hawaii,  Hons.  D. 
K.  JSTaiapaakai,  0.  F.  Hart,  and  E.  A.  Lyman;  fourth  circuit,  Kauai, 
Hon.  D.  McBryde. 

"Board  of  health. — President,  minister  of  the  interior;  members,  W. 
Hillebrand,  M.  D.;  Godfrey  Rhodes,  W.  P.  Kamakau,  T.  C.  Heuck; 
port  physician,  A.  C.  Buffum. 

"Government  officers. — Jailer,  Oahu  prison,  Capt.  J.  H.  Brown;  col- 
lector-general of  customs,  W.  F.Allen,  esq.;  postmaster-general,  A. 
P.  Brickwood,  esq.;  registrar  of  conveyances,  Thomas  Brown,  esq.; 
superintendent  waterworks,  Capt.  Thomas  Long;  superintendent  pub- 
lic works,  Robert  Sterling,  esq.;  harbor  master  of  Honolulu,  Capt. 
John  Meek;  pilots  in  Honolulu,  Capts.  A.  Mclntyre  and  C.  S.  Chad- 
wick"  (p.  75). 

XXI.  And   the   following  statement    of  admiral  belknap, 

FROM  THE  BOSTON  HERALD   OF  JANUARY  31,  1893. 

To  the  Editor  of  the  Herald : 

The  revolution  in  the  Hawaiian  Islands,  resulting  in  the  deposition 
of  the  Queen  and  the  establishment  of  a  provisional  government,  is  an 
event  not  unexpected  to  diplomatic,  naval,  and  consular  officers  who 
have  had  any  acquaintance  or  familiarity  with  the  course  of  affairs  in 
that  island  Kingdom  for  the  past  twenty  years. 

To  the  people  of  the  United  States  the  present  situation  is  of  momen- 
tous interest  and  of  vital  importance.  Indeed,  it  would  seem  that  nature 
had  established  that  group  to  be  ultimately  occupied  as  an  outpost,  as 
it  were,  of  the  great  liepublic  on  its  western  border,  and  that  the  time 
had  now  come  for  the  fulfillment  of  such  design. 

A  glance  at  a  chart  of  the  Pacific  will  indicate  to  the  most  casual 
observer  the  great  importance  and  inestimable  value  of  those  islands 
as  a  strategic  point  and  commercial  center.  Situated  in  mid-north 
Pacific,  the  group  looks  out  on  every  hand  toward  grand  opportunities 
of  trade,  political  aggrandizement,  and  polyglot  intercourse. 

To  the  north  and  northwest  it  beckons  to  the  teeming  populations  of 
China,  Japan,  Korea,  and  Eussian  coast  of  Asia;  to  the  north  and 
northeast  it  calls  to  Alaska  and  British  Columbia;  to  the  east  it  bows 
to  the  imperial  domain  of  the  western  United  States,  holding  out  its 
confiding  hands  for  closer  clasp  and  more  binding  tie;  to  the  southeast 
it  nods  to  Mexico,  Central  America,  Colombia,  Bolivia,  Peru,  and  Chile; 
to  the  south  and  southwest  it  salutes  the  growing  influence  and  tropic 
opportunities  of  Australia,  New  Zealand,  and  the  numerous  island 
groups  constituting  Polynesia. 

Its  chief  commercial  point,  Honolulu,  is  already  a  port  of  call  for  our 
lines  of  steamships  to  Japan  and  Polynesia,  and  for  the  British  lines 


134  HAWAIIAN   ISLANDS. 

to  New  Zealand  and  Australia  from  Vancouver.  That  port  also  stands 
directly  in  the  track  of  the  commerce  that  will  flow  through  the  Nicara- 
gua Canal  when  that  great  commercial  need  is  completed.  Indeed,  in 
that  coining  day  the  enchanting  coral,  reef-locked  harbor  of  Honolulu 
will  hardly  suffice  to  take  in  the  ships  that  will  put  in  there. 

The  interests  in  the  group  are  mainly  American,  or  substantially 
connected  commercially  with  the  United  States.  In  the  palmy  days  of 
the  whale  fishery  the  ports  of  Honolulu  and  Lahaina  used  to  be  packed 
at  certain  seasons  of  the  year  with  the  ships  of  that  great  and  adven- 
turous industry. 

The  advent  of  our  missionaries  at  the  islands  in  1820,  and  the  excel- 
lent work  they  did  there,  won  the  hearts  of  the  natives  and  increased 
American  influence.  The  treaty  of  reciprocity  made  with  King  Kala- 
kaua  in  1875  welded  in  closest  bonds  the  ties  of  friendship  and  trade, 
and  gave  to  the  group  its  present  wealth  and  prosperity. 

The  group  now  seeks  annexation  to  the  United  States;  the  consum- 
mation of  such  wish  would  inure  to  the  benefit  of  both  peoples,  com- 
mercially and  politically.  Annex  the  islands,  constitute  them  a  terri- 
tory, and  reciprocal  trade  will  double  within  ten  years.  Let  the  island- 
ers feel  that  they  are  once  and  forever  under  the  folds  of  the 
American  flag,  as  part  and  parcel  of  the  great  Kepublic,  and  a  develop- 
ment will  take  place  in  the  group  that  will  at  once  surprise  its  people 
and  the  world. 

Not  to  take  the  fruit  within  our  grasp  and  annex  the  group  now  beg- 
ging us  to  take  it  in  would  be  folly  indeed — a  mistake  of  the  gravest 
character,  both  for  the  statesmen  of  the  day  and  for  the  men  among  us 
of  high  commercial  aims  and  great  enterprises. 

Our  statesmen  should  act  in  this  matter  in  the  spirit  and  resolve 
that  secured  to  us  the  vast  Louisiana  purchase,  the  annexation  of 
Texas,  and  the  acquisition  of  California.  The  administration  that 
secures  to  the  United  States  the  u  coign  of  vantage"  in  the  possession 
of  those  beautiful  islands  will  score  a  great  measure  of  beneficent 
achievement  to  the  credit  side  of  its  account. 

But  in  the  path  of  annexation  England  will  throw  down  the  gauntlet 
of  protest  and  obstruction.  To  that  end  she  will  bend  all  the  powers 
of  her  diplomacy;  all  the  cunning  of  her  foreign-office  procedures;  all 
the  energy,  unwearied  effort,  and  unvarying  constancy  that  has  ever 
made  her  secretly  hostile  in,her  diplomatic  methods  and  commercial 
policies  to  the  welfare,  growth,  and  advancement  of  the  United  States. 

She  wants  to  gather  the  group  under  her  own  control;  she  would 
like  to  Egyptianize  that  vital  point  in  the  Pacific;  she  burns  to  estab- 
lish a  Pacific  Bermuda  off  our  Western  coast,  to  hold  the  same  relation 
toward  the  ports  of  Esquimalt  and  Victoria  on  Vancouver  Island  that 
Bermuda  bears  toward  Halifax,  all  strongly  fortified,  connected  by 
cable  with  Downing  street,  and  stored  with  munitions  of  war. 

Let  the  British  lion  once  get  its  paw  upon  the  group  and  Honolulu 
would  soon  become  one  of  the  most  important  strongholds  of  Great 
Britain's  power.  With  her  fortified  port  of  Esquimalt  dominating  the 
entrance  to  Puget  Sound,  constituting  an  ever-standing  menace  to  our 
domain  in  that  region,  she  wants  to  supplement  such  commanding 
advantage  by  another  stronghold  at  Hawaii,  where,  within  six  days' 
easy  steaming  from  San  Francisco,  she  could  immediately  threaten  that 
port  with  one  of  her  fleets  in  the  event  of  the  sudden  outbreak  of  war. 

Great  Britain  will  undoubtedly  propose  a  joint  arrangement  for  the 
government  of  the  islands,  but  we  want  none  of  that — no  entangling 
alliances.    We  have  had  enough  of  such  business  at  Samoa. 


HAWAIIAN    ISLANDS.  135 

No;  we  want  no  joint  protectorate,  no  occupation  there  by  any  Euro- 
pean power,  no  Pacific  Egypt.  We  need  the  group  as  part  and  parcel 
of  the  United  States,  and  should  take  what  is  offered  us,  even  at  the 
hazard  of  war. 

Westward  the  star  of  empire  takes  its  way.  Let  the  Monroe  doc- 
trine stay  not  its  hand  until  it  holds  Hawaii  securely  within  its  grasp. 

In  this  matter  the  undersigned  speaks  from  personal  knowledge, 
gained  through  official  visits  to  the  islands  in  1874  and  1882,  and  could 
readily  pursue  the  subject  further  and  more  into  detail,  but  for  the 
present  forbears. 

George  E.  Belknap. 

Brookline,  January  30, 1803. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


KEC'D  LP 


MAY  24  1960 


U1BRXRY  USE 


JUL  1 1 1960 


Ji^Q: 


JW^f 


~~~ 


mo 


rary  usi 


ftEC'DLD 


MAY  2$ 


mz 


r\<&%W 


\\0\   ^ 


# 


%* 


KEC'D  LD 


NOV  2  7  1962 


t 


W^ 


JAN  1 1 1363 


LD  21A-50m-4,'60 
(A9562sl0)476B 


-»w^i       j.^      IOf| 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


Uvmu 


?2ky_J_^f&C 


*»^>u  3   /9frd 


LD  21-100i»-7,,S9(402s) 


YB  34680 


OMSK  from  WHICH  BORKOWED 

IOAN  DEPT 

THIS  BOOK  K  nTTT.  * 


co"t7asois 


Hit 


